2011 GMC Sierra Owner PDF

GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-8 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Performance and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-34
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-46
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-52 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-61 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-70
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-76
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Conversions and
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-39
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-108 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-8
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-12
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each Propriétaires Canadiens
of the features found on your A French language copy of this
vehicle. For vehicles first sold manual can be obtained from your
in Canada, substitute the name dealer or from:
“General Motors of Canada Limited”
The names, logos, emblems, for GMC Division wherever it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, appears in this manual. ce guide en français auprès du
and vehicle body designs appearing concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not If the vehicle has the Duramax® suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo, GMC, Diesel engine, see the Duramax
the GMC Truck Emblem, and diesel supplement for additional and Helm, Incorporated
SIERRA are trademarks and/or specific information on this engine. P.O. Box 07130
service marks of General Motors Detroit, MI 48207
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, hybrid supplement for more 1-800-551-4123
or licensors. information. Numéro de poste 6438
This manual describes features that de langue française
Keep this manual in the vehicle for www.helminc.com
may or may not be on your specific quick reference.
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase
or due to changes subsequent to
the printing of this owner manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25965915 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and
about the vehicle, use the Index These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
in the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number information relating to a specific
where it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual
the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it
hazard that could result in injury is a safety symbol which means
or death. “Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart . : Fuel Gauge

Here are some additional symbols + : Fuses
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
information on the symbol, refer Changer
to the Index. j : LATCH System Child
0 : Adjustable Pedals Restraints
9 : Airbag Readiness Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
# : Air Conditioning : : Oil Pressure
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar ® } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature _ : Tow/Haul Mode
O : Exterior Lamps F : Traction Control
# : Fog Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sensing System for
1-15 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
1-30
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Driver Information
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Instrument Panel Steering Wheel Rear Vision
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
(Base/Uplevel Version) . . . . . . 1-2 Throttle and Brake Pedal Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-31
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
(Premium Version) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Universal Remote System . . . 1-32
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-8 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-20
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Performance and Maintenance
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-33
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-34
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-34
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Vehicle Features Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-35
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Driving for Better Fuel
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-28 Roadside Assistance
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Head Restraint Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-28 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version)
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑11. G. Infotainment on page 7‑1. Q. Horn on page 5‑5.
B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals H. Instrument Panel Storage on R. Steering Wheel Controls on
on page 6‑6. page 4‑1. page 5‑3 (If Equipped).
Windshield Wiper/Washer on I. Integrated Trailer Brake S. Automatic Transfer Case
page 5‑5. Controller (If Equipped). Control (If Equipped).
C. Driver Information Center (DIC) See Trailer Towing on See Four-Wheel Drive on
Buttons. See Driver Information page 9‑95. page 10‑34.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑33. J. Exterior Lamp Controls on T. Ashtray (If Equipped).
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6‑1. See Ashtrays on page 5‑12 and
page 6‑5. K. Data Link Connector (DLC) Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑11.
E. Instrument Cluster on (Out of View). See Malfunction U. StabiliTrak® System on

page 5‑13. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑25. page 9‑70 (If Equipped).
F. Shift Lever. See Automatic L. Hood on page 10‑5. Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
Transmission on page 9‑46. M. Parking Brake on page 9‑69. page 9‑76 (If Equipped).
Tow/Haul Selector Button N. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8. Pedal Adjust Button
(If Equipped). See Tow/Haul (If Equipped). See Adjustable
Fog Lamps on page 6‑6 Throttle and Brake Pedal on
Mode on page 9‑51. (If Equipped). page 9‑35.
Range Selection Mode (Allison O. Cruise Control on page 9‑73.
Transmission and Hydra-Matic® Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).
6‐Speed Button (If Equipped). P. Steering Wheel Adjustment on See “Brakes” in the Duramax
See Manual Mode on page 5‑2. Diesel Supplement.
page 9‑50.
1-4 In Brief
V. Power Outlets on page 5‑10.

W. Climate Control Systems
(with Air Conditioning) on
page 8‑1 or Climate Control
Systems (with Heater Only) on
page 8‑4 (If Equipped).
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8‑5
(If Equipped).
X. Power Take Off (PTO) Control
(If Equipped). See Power Take
Off (PTO) in the Duramax diesel
supplement Index.
Y. Passenger Airbag Off Control
(If Equipped). See Airbag
On-Off Switch on page 3‑37.
In Brief 1-5
2 NOTES
1-6 In Brief
Instrument Panel (Premium Version)

In Brief 1-7
A. Air Vents on page 8‑11. K. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8. U. Power Outlets on page 5‑10.
B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals L. Automatic Transfer Case Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped).
on page 6‑6. Control. (If Equipped). See Ashtrays on page 5‑12 and
Windshield Wiper/Washer on See Four-Wheel Drive on Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑11.
page 5‑5. page 10‑34. V. StabiliTrak® System on
C. Instrument Cluster on M. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 9‑70 (If Equipped).
page 5‑13. (Out of View). See Malfunction Pedal Adjust Button
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑25. (If Equipped). See Adjustable
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑5. N. Hood on page 10‑5. Throttle and Brake Pedal on
O. Parking Brake on page 9‑69. page 9‑35.
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑46. P. Cruise Control on page 9‑73. Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑76 (If Equipped).
F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑51 Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
(If Equipped). page 5‑2. Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).
See “Brakes” in the Duramax
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) R. Horn on page 5‑5. Diesel Supplement.
Buttons. See Driver Information S. Steering Wheel Controls on
Center (DIC) on page 5‑33. W. Passenger Airbag Off Control
page 5‑3. (If Equipped). See Airbag
H. Infotainment on page 7‑1. T. Climate Control Systems On-Off Switch on page 3‑37.
I. Exterior Lamp Controls on (with Air Conditioning) on
page 6‑1. page 8‑1 or Climate Control
J. Integrated Trailer Brake Systems (with Heater Only) on
Controller (If Equipped). page 8‑4 (If Equipped).
See Trailer Towing on Dual Automatic Climate
page 9‑95. Control System on page 8‑5
(If Equipped).
1-8 In Brief
Initial Drive Remote Keyless Press Q to lock all doors.

Information Entry (RKE) System Lock and unlock feedback can be
The RKE transmitter is used to personalized.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the remotely lock and unlock the doors Press L and release to locate the
important features that may or from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from vehicle.
may not be on your specific vehicle. the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than
For more detailed information, refer two seconds to sound the panic
to each of the features which can be alarm.
found later in this owner manual.
Press L again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within three seconds
to unlock all remaining doors.
In Brief 1-9
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Door Locks

With this feature the engine can be To cancel a remote start: There are several ways to lock and
started from outside of the vehicle. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the unlock the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle vehicle and press and hold / From outside, use the Remote
until the parking lamps turn off. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the or the key in the driver door. From
. Turn on the hazard warning
vehicle. inside, use the power door locks or
flashers.
2. Press Q. the manual door locks. To lock or
. Turn the ignition on and then unlock the door with the manual
3. Immediately after completing back off. locks, push down or pull up on
Step 2, press and hold / until See Remote Vehicle Start on the manual lock knob.
the turn signal lamps flash. page 2‑5. Power Door Locks
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on If available, these switches are on
the front doors.
as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and K: Press to unlock the doors.
the climate control system may Q: Press to lock the doors.
come on.
See Door Locks on page 2‑8.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
1-10 In Brief
Windows The driver door has a switch for Power Sliding Rear Window
the passenger window and rear
Turn the hand crank on each door windows.
to manually raise or lower the
manual windows. Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
Power Windows raise it.
For more information, see:
. Windows on page 2‑18.
. Power Windows on page 2‑19.
On vehicles with a power sliding

rear window, the switch is located in
the overhead console. See Rear
Windows on page 2‑20.
Crew Cab Shown The power sliding rear window
cannot be operated manually.
If available, the power window
switches are located on each of the
. Push to open the window.
side doors in the front and rear. . Pull to close the window.
In Brief 1-11
Seat Adjustment Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Seats Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward or
To adjust the seat: rearward by sliding the control If equipped, increase or decrease
forward or rearward. manual lumbar support by turning
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. the knob forward or rearward.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
. If available, raise or lower the
front or rear part of the seat See Lumbar Adjustment on
position and release the bar. page 3‑6 for more information.
cushion by moving the front or
3. Try to move the seat back and rear of the control up or down.
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
. If available, raise or lower the
entire seat by moving the entire
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 control up or down.
for more information.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4 for more information.
1-12 In Brief
Power Lumbar
. On vehicles with four-way Reclining Seatbacks
lumbar, press and hold the
front or rear of the control to Manual Reclining Seatbacks
increase or decrease lumbar
support. To raise or lower the
height of the support, press
and hold the top or bottom
of the control.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
To recline a manual seatback:
. On vehicles with two-way
lumbar, press and hold the 1. Lift the lever.
top or bottom of the control to 2. Move the seatback to the
increase or decrease lumbar desired position, and then
support. release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
In Brief 1-13
To return the seatback to the upright Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback
will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
To adjust a power seatback,

if equipped: On vehicles with the memory
feature, the controls on the driver
. Tilt the top of the control door are used to program and recall
rearward to recline. memory settings for the driver seat,
. Tilt the top of the control forward outside mirrors, and the adjustable
to raise. throttle and brake pedals, if the
vehicle has this feature.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
1-14 In Brief
Storing Memory Positions 2. Press and hold “1” until Easy Exit Driver Seat
To save into memory: two beeps sound. This feature can move the seat
1. Adjust the driver seat and 3. Repeat for a second driver rearward to allow extra room to
seatback recliner, both outside position using “2.” exit the vehicle.
mirrors, and the throttle and To recall, press and release “1” B : Press to recall the easy exit
brake pedals, if available. or “2.” The vehicle must be in seat position. The vehicle must be
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16 P (Park). A single beep will sound. in P (Park).
and Adjustable Throttle and The seat, outside mirrors, and See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,
Brake Pedal on page 9‑35 for adjustable throttle and brake pedals, and Pedals” under Power Seat
more information. if available, will move to the position Adjustment on page 3‑4 and Vehicle
previously stored for the identified Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
Not all mirrors and adjustable driver.
throttles and brake pedals will on page 5‑52 for more information.
have the ability to save and See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,
recall their positions. and Pedals” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 and Vehicle
Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑52 for more information.
In Brief 1-15
Heated Seats Head Restraint Safety Belts

Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the
head restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
If available, the controls are on the Adjustment on page 3‑3. Refer to the following sections for
driver and passenger doors. important information on how to use
I : Press to heat the safety belts properly.
seatback only. . Safety Belts on page 3‑11.
J: Press to heat the seat and . How to Wear Safety Belts
seatback. Properly on page 3‑15.
See Heated Front Seats on . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑21.
page 3‑8. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑57.
1-16 In Brief
Sensing System for The passenger airbag status Mirror Adjustment

indicator will be visible on the
Passenger Airbag overhead console when the Exterior Mirrors
The passenger sensing system, vehicle is started.
if equipped, turns off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions. The driver
airbags, seat‐mounted side impact
airbags and roof‐rail airbags are not
affected by this.
If the vehicle has one of the United States
indicators pictured in the following
illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position unless
there is an airbag off switch located
in the glove box. Vehicles with outside power mirrors
and foldaway mirrors have controls
If there is an airbag off switch, the located on the driver door.
vehicle does not have a passenger Canada and Mexico
sensing system. See Airbag On-Off See Passenger Sensing System on 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
Switch on page 3‑37 for more page 3‑40 for important information. driver or passenger side mirror.
information. 2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move the mirror up,
down, right, or left.
3. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
In Brief 1-17
See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑15 or Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Vehicles with a manual rearview Adjustment
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, mirror can be adjusted to see
they can be adjusted for a clearer clearly behind the vehicle. Hold the
view of the objects behind you. mirror in the center to move it up or
Manually pull out the mirror head to down and side to side. To reduce
extend it for better visibility when headlamp glare during nighttime
towing a trailer. See Trailer-Tow use, push the tab forward for
Mirrors on page 2‑15. daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Power Foldaway Mirrors
Vehicles with the automatic dimming
To fold the mirrors:
feature will automatically reduce
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out the glare of lights from behind the
to the driving position. vehicle. The dimming feature comes
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to on and the indicator light illuminates
each time the vehicle is started. The tilt lever is located on the lower
the folded position. left side of the steering column.
Manual Foldaway Mirrors See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑18 for more To adjust the steering wheel:
Manually fold the mirrors inward information. 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
to prevent damage when going the lever.
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, pull the mirror toward the 2. Move the steering wheel up
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, or down.
to return to its original position. 3. Release the lever to lock the
See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16. wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
1-18 In Brief
Throttle and Brake Pedal Interior Lighting Dome Lamp Override

Adjustment Dome Lamps The dome lamp override button is
located next to the exterior lamps
On vehicles with this feature, you The dome lamps are located in the control.
can change the position of the overhead console.
throttle and brake pedals.
They come on when any door is
opened and turn off after all the
doors are closed.
Turn the instrument panel
brightness knob located below
the dome lamp override button,
clockwise to the farthest position to
The control used to adjust the manually turn on the dome lamps.
pedals is located on the instrument The dome lamps remain on until the
panel below the climate control knob is turned counterclockwise.
system.
Press the bottom of the control
to move the pedals closer to your k : Press the button in and the
body. Press the top of the control dome lamps remain off when a door
to move the pedals away. is opened. Press the button again to
return it to the extended position so
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
that the dome lamps come on when
Pedal on page 9‑35.
a door is opened.
In Brief 1-19
Reading Lamps Exterior Lighting For vehicles first sold in Canada,

For vehicles with reading lamps in the off position will only work when
the overhead console, press the the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
button located next to the lamp to AUTO: Automatically turns on
turn it on or off. the headlamps, parking lamps,
The vehicle may also have reading taillamps, instrument panel lights,
lamps in other locations. To turn the roof marker lamps (if equipped)
lamps on or off, press the button and license plate lamps.
located next to the lamp. The exterior lamps control is located ; : Turns on the parking lamps,
on the instrument panel to the left of taillamps, instrument panel lights,
For more information about interior the steering wheel.
lamps, see: roof marker lamps (if equipped)
O : Turns off the automatic and license plate lamps.
. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8. headlamps and Daytime Running
. Reading Lamps on page 6‑9. Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
. Instrument Panel Illumination
turn the automatic headlamps or
Control on page 6‑7.
DRL back on.
1-20 In Brief
5 : Turns on the headlamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer 6: Turn the band up for more
parking lamps, taillamps, instrument frequent wipes or down for less
panel lights, roof marker lamps frequent wipes.
(if equipped) and license plate 6 : Slow wipes.
lamps.
For more information, see:
? : Fast wipes.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
L : Push the paddle at the top of
the lever to spray washer fluid on
page 6‑1. the windshield.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 8: Single wipe, turn to 8, then See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
on page 6‑4. release. Several wipes, hold the page 5‑5.
. Fog Lamps on page 6‑6. band on 8 longer.
9 : Turns the windshield Climate Controls
wipers off. These systems control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation.
In Brief 1-21
Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning)
A. Fan Control E. Outside Air

B. Temperature Control F. Air Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Conditioning
1-22 In Brief
Climate Control System (With Heater Only)
A. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems

B. Temperature Control (with Air Conditioning) on page 8‑1
or Climate Control Systems
C. Air Delivery Mode Control (with Heater Only) on page 8‑4.
In Brief 1-23
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Range Selection Mode
The Range Selection Mode switch,

if equipped, is located on the
shift lever. To enable the Range
Selection feature, move the column
shift lever to the M (Manual)
A. Driver and Passenger H. Display position. The current range will
Temperature Controls I. Power Button appear next to the M. This is the
B. Fan Control highest attainable range with all
J. Rear Window Defogger
lower gears accessible. As an
C. AUTO K. Air Conditioning example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
D. Defrost L. PASS (Passenger) selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)
E. Air Recirculation gears are available.
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
F. Outside Air System on page 8‑5.
G. Air Delivery Mode Control
1-24 In Brief
Press the plus/minus buttons, Transfer Case Buttons Electronic Transfer Case
located on the steering column shift
The vehicle will have one of
lever, to select the desired range of
these three styles of transfer case
gears for current driving conditions.
controls. Use these controls to
See Manual Mode on page 9‑50.
shift into and out of the different
While using Range Selection Mode, Four-Wheel Drive modes.
cruise control and the Tow/Haul
mode can be used. Manual Transfer Case
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑51.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, This transfer case knob is located
you can send the engine's driving next to the steering column.
power to all four wheels for extra
traction.
This transfer case shift lever is on

the floor to the right of the driver.
In Brief 1-25
Automatic Transfer Case 2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This N (Neutral): Shift the transfer case
setting is used for driving in most to Neutral only when towing the
street and highway situations. vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle
Towing on page 10‑103 or Trailer
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Towing on page 9‑95.
Drive): This setting is ideal for
use when road surface traction 4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This
conditions are variable. setting sends maximum power to
all four wheels. You might choose
4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use the Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are
Four-Wheel-Drive High position driving off-road in deep sand, deep
when extra traction is needed, such mud, deep snow, and while climbing
as on snowy or icy roads or in most or descending steep hills.
off-road situations.
See Four-Wheel Drive on
This transfer case knob is located page 9‑54.
next to the steering column.
Each transfer case design offers
different drive options. The list
below described the different drive
options that may be available.
1-26 In Brief
Vehicle Features 4: Press to switch the display

between the radio station frequency
Radio(s) and the time. While the ignition is
off, press this button to display the
time. Press to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,
or WMA song. If information is
available during XM, CD, MP3,
or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line
of the display and artist information
displays on the bottom line.
When information is not available,
“NO INFO” displays.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑2.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat
Entertainment System (RSE) and
Rear Seat Audio System (RSA),
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)
see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑39 and Rear
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between Seat Audio (RSA) System on
and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped. page 7‑48 for more information.
decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
In Brief 1-27
Storing Radio Stations Setting the Clock Satellite Radio

A maximum of 36 stations can To set the time and date for the XM is a satellite radio service
be stored as favorites using the radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: that is based in the 48 contiguous
six softkeys located below the 1. Turn the ignition key to United States and 10 Canadian
radio station frequency tabs and by ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, provinces. XM satellite radio has a
using the radio FAV button. Press wide variety of programming and
FAV to go through up to six pages then press O, to turn the
commercial-free music, coast to
of favorites, each having six favorite radio on.
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
stations available per page. Each 2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
page of favorites can contain any A fee is required to receive the
MM, DD, and YYYY (hour, XM service.
combination of AM, FM, or XM
minute, month, day, and year).
stations. For more information, refer to:
3. Press the softkey located under
For more information, see “Storing . www.xmradio.com or call
any one of the labels to be
Radio Stations” in AM-FM Radio on changed. 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
page 7‑8.
4. To increase or decrease the time
. www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
or date, turn f clockwise or
counter‐clockwise. See Satellite Radio on page 7‑10.
For detailed instructions on setting
the clock for the vehicle's specific
audio system, see Clock on
page 5‑8.
1-28 In Brief
Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls

This vehicle may have an auxiliary For vehicles with a Bluetooth
input located on the radio faceplate system, it allows users with a
and a USB port located in the Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
center console or on the dashboard. make and receive hands-free calls
External devices such as an iPod®, using the vehicle’s audio system
laptop computer, MP3 player, CD and controls.
changer, or USB storage device. The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
can be connected to the auxiliary must be paired with the Bluetooth
port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input system before it can be used in the
cable or the USB port depending vehicle. Not all phones will support
on the audio system. all functions. For more information,
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
and “Using the USB Port” in For more information, see Bluetooth
Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑34. If available, some audio controls
on page 7‑50. can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
w/cx: Press to select preset
or favorite radio stations, select
tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate
an iPod or USB device.
In Brief 1-29
b g : Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control + RES : Press briefly to make
speakers only. Press again to turn the vehicle resume to a previously
the sound on. Press and hold longer set speed, or press and hold to
than two seconds to interact with accelerate.
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems, SET − : Press to set the speed and
if equipped. activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.
+ e − e : Press to increase or
decrease volume. [ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
c x : Press to reject an speed from memory.
incoming call, or to end a call.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑73.
SRCE: Press to switch between
the radio and CD, and for equipped
vehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary. The cruise control buttons are
¨: Press to seek the next radio located on the left side of the
station, the next track or chapter steering wheel.
while sourced to the CD or DVD T : Press to turn the system on
slot, or to select tracks and folders or off. The indicator light is on when
on an iPod or USB device. cruise control is on and turns off
For more information, see Steering when cruise control is off.
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3.
1-30 In Brief
Navigation System Driver Information 3 : Press to display the

Center (DIC) odometer, trip odometer, fuel
If the vehicle has a navigation
range, average economy, fuel
system, there is a separate The DIC display is located at used, timer, instantaneous economy
Navigation System Manual that the bottom of the instrument and Active Fuel Management™
includes information on the radio, panel cluster. It shows the status of indicator, and transmission
audio players, and navigation many vehicle systems and enables temperature. The compass
system. access to the personalization menu. and outside air temperature
The navigation system provides will also be shown in the display.
detailed maps of most major The temperature will be shown
freeways and roads. After a in °C or °F depending on the
destination has been set, the units selected.
system provides turn-by-turn
instructions for reaching the
T: Press to display the oil life,
units, tire pressure readings for
destination. In addition, the system
vehicles with the Tire Pressure
can help locate a variety of points
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer
of interest (POI), such as banks,
brake gain and output information
airports, restaurants, and more.
for vehicles with the Integrated
See the Navigation System Manual Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
for more information. engine hours, compass zone
setting, and compass recalibration.
The DIC buttons are located on
the instrument panel, next to the U: Press to customize the
steering wheel. feature settings on your vehicle.
See Vehicle Personalization (with
Some vehicles do not have the DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52 for more
buttons shown, however some of information.
the menus can be viewed by using
the trip odometer reset stem.
In Brief 1-31
V : Press to set or reset Rear Vision Ultrasonic Parking Assist

certain functions and to turn Camera (RVC) If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking
off or acknowledge messages
If available, the rear vision camera Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the
on the DIC.
displays a view of the area behind rear bumper to detect objects while
For more information, see Driver the vehicle when the vehicle is parking the vehicle. URPA comes
Information Center (DIC) on shifted into R (Reverse). This is on automatically when the shift
page 5‑33. displayed on the inside rearview lever is moved into R (Reverse) and
mirror or the navigation screen, operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
Vehicle Customization (5 mph). URPA uses audio beeps
if equipped.
Some vehicle features can be to provide distance and system
programmed by using the DIC To clean the camera lens, located information.
buttons next to the steering wheel. in the bezel for the tailgate handle,
rinse it with water and wipe it with Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
These features include: rear bumper clean to ensure proper
a soft cloth.
. Language operation.
For more information, see Rear
. Door Lock and Unlock Settings Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑78. The system can be disabled by
. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback pressing the rear park aid disable
button located next to the radio.
. Lighting
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
. Chime Volume page 9‑76 for more information.
. Memory Features
See Vehicle Personalization (with
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52.
1-32 In Brief
Power Outlets Universal Remote System Sunroof

Accessory power outlets can be Extended Cab
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone, MP3
player, etc.
The vehicle may have two
accessory power outlets located
below the climate control system,
or may have one accessory power This system provides a way
outlet and one cigarette lighter. to replace up to three remote
The cigarette lighter is designed control transmitters used to
to fit only in the receptacle closest activate devices such as garage
to the driver. door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
There may be another accessory
power outlet in the rear cargo area. Read the instructions completely
If the vehicle has a floor console, before attempting to program the The sunroof switch is located on the
there is an accessory power outlet transmitter. Because of the steps headliner above the rearview mirror.
inside the storage bin and one on involved, it may be helpful to
have another person assist with Vent: From the closed position,
the rear of the floor console. press and hold the rear of the switch
programming the transmitter.
The accessory power outlets are to vent the sunroof.
powered, even when the ignition is See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑61. Open: From the vent position,
in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use press and hold the rear of the switch
power outlets while the ignition is in to open the sunroof.
LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle's
battery to run down. Close: Press and hold the front of
the switch to close the sunroof.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑10.
In Brief 1-33
The sunroof also has a roller Vent: From the closed position, Performance and
sunshade that can be used to block press the rear of the passenger side
the rays of the sun. To open the switch (B) to vent the sunroof. Maintenance
sunshade, press and unlatch it, and Manual-Open/Manual-Close:
roll it back. To close, pull it forward To open the sunroof, press and StabiliTrak® System
and latch it into the closed position. hold the rear of the driver side If equipped, the vehicle has a
Crew Cab switch (A) until the sunroof reaches traction control system that limits
the desired position. Press and hold wheel spin and the StabiliTrak
the front of the driver side switch to system that assists with directional
close it. control of the vehicle in difficult
Express-Open/Express-Close: driving conditions. Both systems
To express-open the sunroof, turn on automatically every time
fully press and release the rear the vehicle is started.
of the driver side switch (B) until . To turn off traction control, press
the sunroof reaches the desired
and release 5 on the instrument
position. To express-close the
sunroof, fully press and release panel. F illuminates and the
the front of the driver side switch. appropriate DIC message
Press the switch again to stop it. displays. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑47.
The sunroof also has a sunshade
A. Open or Close that you can pull forward to block
B. Vent the rays of the sun. The sunshade
must be opened and closed
There are two sunroof switches manually.
located in the overhead console
above the rearview mirror. See Sunroof (Extended Cab) on
page 2‑21 or Sunroof (Crew Cab)
on page 2‑22.
1-34 In Brief
. To turn off both traction control
and StabiliTrak, press and
If the warning light comes on, stop Engine Oil Life System
as soon as possible and inflate the
hold 5 until F illuminates and tires to the recommended pressure The engine oil life system calculates
the appropriate DIC message shown on the Tire and Loading engine oil life based on vehicle use
displays. See Ride Control Information label. See Vehicle Load and, on most vehicles, displays a
System Messages on page 5‑47. Limits on page 9‑25. The warning DIC message when it is necessary
light will remain on until the tire to change the engine oil and filter.
. Press and release 5 again to pressure is corrected. The oil life system should be reset
turn on both systems. to 100% only following an oil
During cooler conditions, the low tire change.
For more information, see pressure warning light may appear
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑70. when the vehicle is first started and Resetting the Oil Life System
then turn off. This may be an early To reset the Engine Oil Life System
Tire Pressure Monitor indicator that the tire pressures are on most vehicles:
This vehicle may have a Tire getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure. 1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). on the DIC. If the vehicle does
The TPMS does not replace normal not have DIC buttons, the
monthly tire maintenance. It is the vehicle must be in P (Park)
driver’s responsibility to maintain to access this display.
correct tire pressures.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
See Tire Pressure Monitor System button on the DIC, or the trip
on page 10‑68. odometer reset stem if the
vehicle does not have DIC
The TPMS warning light alerts buttons, for more than
you to a significant loss in pressure five seconds. The oil life
of one of the vehicle's tires. will change to 100%.
In Brief 1-35
. Always follow posted speed
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Driving for Better Fuel limits or drive more slowly when
System can be reset as follows:
Economy conditions require.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel . Keep vehicle tires properly
mileage. Here are some driving inflated.
2. Fully press the accelerator tips to get the best fuel economy
pedal slowly three times within possible.
. Combine several trips into a
five seconds. single trip.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING smoothly.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
on the DIC. If the display shows the same TPC Spec number
100%, the system is reset.
. Brake gradually and avoid molded into the tire's sidewall
abrupt stops. near the size.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑11.
. Avoid idling the engine for long . Follow recommended scheduled
periods of time. maintenance.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . When road and weather
conditions are appropriate,
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge use cruise control.
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑87. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑84.
1-36 In Brief
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar®

(U.S. and Canada)
Program
If you have an active OnStar
U.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782
(1‐800‐462-8782) subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 be sent to an OnStar advisor who
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 will assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
Mexico: 01-800-466-0801 your exact location to get the help For vehicles with an active OnStar
As the owner of a new GMC, you you need. subscription, OnStar uses several
are automatically enrolled in the innovative technologies and live
Online Owner Center
Roadside Assistance program. Advisors to provide a wide range
(U.S. and Canada)
See Roadside Assistance Program of safety, security, navigation,
The Online Owner Center is a diagnostics, and calling services.
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8
complimentary service that includes
or Roadside Assistance Program Automatic Crash Response
online service reminders, vehicle
(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more
maintenance tips, online owner In a crash, built‐in sensors can
information.
manual, special privileges, automatically alert an OnStar
and more. Advisor who is immediately
Sign up today at: connected to the vehicle to
www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.) see if you need help.
or www.gm.ca (Canada).
In Brief 1-37
How OnStar Service Works Not all OnStar services are OnStar service can’t work unless
available on all vehicles. For more the vehicle is in a place where
Q : Push this blue button to information, see the OnStar Owner's OnStar has an agreement with
connect to a specially trained
Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) a wireless service provider for
OnStar Advisor to verify your
or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact service in that area, and the
account information and to
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR wireless service provider has
answer questions.
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY coverage, network capacity,
] : Push this red emergency 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the Q reception, and technology
button to get priority help from button to speak with an OnStar compatible with OnStar service.
specially trained OnStar Emergency Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days Service involving location
Advisors. a week. information about the vehicle
X : Push this button for hands‐free, can’t work unless GPS signals
For a full description of OnStar are available, unobstructed,
voice‐activated calling and to give services and system limitations,
voice commands for Hands‐Free and compatible with the OnStar
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in hardware. The vehicle has to have
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn the glove box.
Navigation. a working electrical system and
OnStar service is subject to the adequate battery power for the
Automatic Crash Response, OnStar Terms and Conditions OnStar equipment to operate.
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, included in the OnStar Glove OnStar service may not work if the
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Box Kit. OnStar equipment isn’t properly
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, installed or you haven’t maintained
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn OnStar service requires wireless it and the vehicle is in good working
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling communication networks and the order and in compliance with
are available on most vehicles. Global Positioning System (GPS) all government regulations.
satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
1-38 In Brief
If you try to add, connect, or modify OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility
any equipment or software in the Controls Increase the volume of the radio
vehicle, OnStar service may not
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute if the OnStar Advisor cannot be
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
button that can be used to interact heard.
control may prevent service to you,
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, with OnStar Hands-Free calling. If the light next to the OnStar
weather, electrical system design See Steering Wheel Controls on buttons is red, the system may
and architecture of the vehicle, page 5‑3 for more information. not be functioning properly.
damage to important parts of the On some vehicles, the Talk button Push the Q button and request a
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone can be used to dial numbers into vehicle diagnostic check. If the light
network congestion or jamming. voice mail systems, or to dial phone appears clear (no light appears),
See Radio Frequency Statement on extensions. See the OnStar Owner's your OnStar subscription has
page 13‑19 for information Guide for more information. expired and all services have been
regarding Part 15 of the Federal deactivated. Push the Q button to
Communications Commission confirm that the OnStar equipment
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada is active.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Rear Doors
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-18
Windows (Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Vehicle Security Windows
Keys and Locks Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-12 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13 Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Roof
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Sunroof (Extended Cab) . . . . . 2-21
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Sunroof (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks See your dealer if a replacement

key or additional key is needed.
Keys Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
{ WARNING carry a spare key.
Leaving children in a vehicle with If you are locked out of the vehicle,
the ignition key is dangerous for call the Roadside Assistance
many reasons. Children or others Center. See Roadside Assistance
could be badly injured or even Program (U.S. and Canada) on
killed. They could operate the page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
power windows or other controls Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
The key is used for the ignition and
or even make the vehicle move.
all door locks.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith
if caught in the path of a closing can use to make new keys. Store
window. Do not leave the keys in this information in a safe place, not
a vehicle with children. in the vehicle.
Remote Keyless Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start):

Entry (RKE) System (RKE) System Operation For vehicles with this feature,
press / to start the engine from
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
outside the vehicle using the RKE
page 13‑19 for information transmitter functions work up to
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
regarding Part 15 of the Federal 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Start on page 2‑5 for additional
Communications Commission There are other conditions which information.
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada can affect the performance of the
Standards RSS-210/220/310. transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the
doors.
If there is a decrease in the RKE Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
operating range: If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC),
. Check the distance.
the turn signal lamps flash once
The transmitter may be
to indicate locking has occurred.
too far from the vehicle.
If enabled through the DIC, the
. Check the location. Other horn chirps when Q is pressed
vehicles or objects may be again within three seconds.
blocking the signal. See Vehicle Personalization
. Check the transmitter's battery. (with DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52
See “Battery Replacement” later for additional information.
in this section.
Pressing Q arms the content
. If the transmitter is still not theft‐deterrent system.
working correctly, see your With Remote Start See Anti-Theft Alarm
dealer or a qualified technician (without Remote Start Similar) System on page 2‑12.
for service.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock Press and hold L for more than Programming Transmitters to
only the driver door. If K is pressed two seconds to activate the panic the Vehicle
again within three seconds, all alarm. The turn signal lamps flash Only RKE transmitters programmed
remaining doors unlock. The interior and the horn sounds repeatedly to this vehicle will work. If a
lamps may come on and stay on for for 30 seconds. The alarm turns transmitter is lost or stolen, a
20 seconds or until the ignition is off when the ignition is moved to replacement can be purchased and
turned on. ON/RUN or L is pressed again. programmed through your dealer.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF When the replacement transmitter
signal lamps flash twice to indicate for the panic alarm to work. is programmed to this vehicle, all
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle The vehicle comes with two remaining transmitters must also
Personalization (with DIC Buttons) transmitters. Each transmitter will be reprogrammed. Any lost or
on page 5‑52. If enabled through have a number on it: "1" or "2." stolen transmitters will no longer
the DIC, the exterior lights may turn These numbers correspond to the work once the new transmitter
on. See “Approach Lighting” under driver of the vehicle. For example, is programmed. Each vehicle
Vehicle Personalization (with DIC the memory seat position for can have up to eight transmitters
Buttons) on page 5‑52. driver 1 will be recalled when programmed to it. See your dealer
using the transmitter labeled "1", for transmitter programming.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter if enabled through the DIC.
disarms the content theft‐deterrent Battery Replacement
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,
system. See Anti-Theft Alarm and Pedals” under Power Seat Replace the battery if the REPLACE
System on page 2‑12. Adjustment on page 3‑4 and Vehicle BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Personalization (with DIC Buttons) message displays in the DIC.
Alarm): Press and release to on page 5‑52 for more information. Notice: When replacing the
locate the vehicle. The turn signal battery, do not touch any of the
lamps flash and the horn sounds circuitry on the transmitter. Static
three times. from your body could damage the
transmitter.
3. Insert the new battery, positive During a remote start, if the vehicle
side facing down. Replace with a has an automatic climate control
CR2032 or equivalent battery. system and heated seats, the
4. Snap the transmitter back heated seats will turn on during
together. colder outside temperatures and
will shut off when the key is turned
to ON/RUN. If the vehicle does
Remote Vehicle Start not have an automatic climate
If available, this feature allows you control system, during remote start,
to start the engine from outside of manually turn the heated seats on
the vehicle. It may also start up the and off. See Heated Front Seats on
vehicle's heating or air conditioning page 3‑8 for additional information.
systems and rear window defogger. Laws in some communities may
To replace the battery:
Normal operation of the system will restrict the use of remote starters.
1. Separate the transmitter with a return after the key is turned to the For example, some laws may
flat, thin object, such as a flat ON/RUN position. require a person using the remote
head screwdriver. start to have the vehicle in view
If the vehicle has an automatic
. Carefully insert the tool into climate control system, the climate when doing so. Check local
the notch located along control system will default to a regulations for any requirements
the parting line of the heating or cooling mode depending on remote starting of vehicles.
transmitter. Do not insert on the outside temperatures. If the
the tool too far. Stop as vehicle does not have an automatic
soon as resistance is felt. climate control system, the system
. Twist the tool until the will turn on at the setting the vehicle
transmitter is separated. was set to when the vehicle was
last turned off.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
Do not use the remote start To start the vehicle using the remote 3. If it is the first remote start since
feature if the vehicle is low on fuel. start feature: the vehicle has been driven,
The vehicle may run out of fuel. 1. Aim the transmitter at the repeat these steps, while the
If the vehicle has the remote vehicle. engine is still running, to extend
start feature, the RKE transmitter the engine running time by
functions will have an increased 2. Press and release Q. 10 minutes. Remote start can
range of operation. However, The vehicle's doors will be extended one time.
the range may be less while lock. Immediately press and After entering the vehicle during a
the vehicle is running. hold / until the turn signal remote start, insert and turn the key
There are other conditions which lamps flash. If you cannot see to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
can affect the performance of the the vehicle's lamps, press and To cancel a remote start:
transmitter. See Remote Keyless hold / for two to four seconds. . Aim the RKE transmitter at
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 Pressing / again after the the vehicle and press and
for additional information. vehicle has started will turn
hold / until the parking
/ (Remote Start): This button will the engine off.
lamps turn off.
be on the RKE transmitter if the When the vehicle starts, the
vehicle has remote start.
parking lamps will turn on and
flashers.
remain on while the vehicle is
running. . Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
If the vehicle is left running,
it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time
extension has been done.
The vehicle can be remote started Once two remote starts, or a single Remote Start Ready
two separate times between driving remote start with one time extension
If the vehicle does not have the
sequences. The engine will run for has been done, the vehicle must be
remote vehicle start feature, it may
10 minutes after each remote start. started with the key. After the key
have the remote start ready feature.
Or, you can extend the engine run is removed from the ignition, the
This feature allows your dealer to
time by another 10 minutes within vehicle can be remote started again.
add the manufacturer's remote
the first 10 minute remote start time The vehicle cannot be remote vehicle start feature.
frame, and before the engine stops. started if the key is in the ignition,
See your dealer to add the
the hood is not closed, or if there
For example, if Q and then / are is an emission control system
manufacturer's remote vehicle
pressed again after the vehicle start feature to the vehicle.
malfunction and the check engine
has been running for 5 minutes, light is on.
10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for 15 minutes. Also, the engine will turn off during a
remote vehicle start if the coolant
The additional 10 minutes are temperature gets too high or if the
considered a second remote vehicle oil pressure gets low.
start.
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

From inside, use the power door
locks or manual door locks. To lock
or unlock the door with the manual
{ WARNING . Young children who get into locks, push down or pull up on the
unlocked vehicles may be manual lock knob.
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat Power Door Locks
. Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent
children, can easily open injuries or even death from With power door locks, the switches
the doors and fall out of a heat stroke. Always lock the on the front doors can be used to
moving vehicle. When a door vehicle whenever leaving it. lock and unlock the vehicle.
is locked, the handle will not . Outsiders can easily enter K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
open it. The chance of being doors.
through an unlocked door
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
when you slow down or stop Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
the vehicle. Locking the doors
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
can help prevent this from Delayed Locking
happening.
safety belts properly and The vehicle may have the delayed
the doors should be locked locking feature. When locking the
whenever the vehicle is There are several ways to lock and doors with the power lock switch
driven. unlock the vehicle. and a door is open, the doors will
(Continued) From outside, use the Remote lock five seconds after the last door
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is closed. You will hear three chimes
or the key in the driver door. to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection

twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately If the driver side power door lock
lock all the doors. switch is pressed when the driver
door is open and the key is in the
This feature will not operate if the ignition, all of the doors will lock and
key is in the ignition. then the driver door will unlock.
This feature can be programmed If the passenger side power door
using the Driver Information lock switch is pressed when the
Center (DIC). See “Delay Door front passenger door is open and
Lock” under Vehicle Personalization the key is in the ignition, all of the
(with DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52. doors will lock and then the front
passenger door will unlock. Open the rear doors to access the
Automatic Door Locks
security locks on the inside edge of
The vehicle may have an automatic Safety Locks each door.
lock/unlock feature. This feature The vehicle has rear door security To set the locks, insert a key into
can be programmed using the locks to prevent passengers from the slot and turn it to the horizontal
Driver Information Center (DIC). opening the rear doors from the position. The door can only be
See Vehicle Personalization (with inside. opened from the outside with the
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52 for more
door unlocked. To return the door
information on DIC programming.
to normal operation, turn the slot
to the vertical position.
Doors The rear access door must be Tailgate

closed before the front door can
close.
Rear Doors { WARNING
(Extended Cab) It is extremely dangerous to
ride on the tailgate, even when
the vehicle is operated at low
speeds. People riding on the
tailgate can easily lose their
balance and fall in response
to vehicle maneuvers. Falling
from a moving vehicle may
result in serious injuries or death.
Do not allow people to ride on the
tailgate. Be sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using a
To open a rear access door from safety belt properly.
the inside, first open the front door.
To open a rear access door from Then, use the handle located on
the outside, first open the front door. the inside of the rear access door On vehicles with a lock on the
Then, use the handle located on the to open. tailgate, use the key to lock or
front edge of the rear access door to unlock the tailgate.
open it.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on To remove the tailgate: 2. With the tailgate about halfway
its handle while pulling the tailgate open, lift the right edge of the
toward you. tailgate from the lower pivot.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it On vehicles with the tailgate
upward until it latches. assist feature, raise the tailgate
After you put the tailgate back up, nearly all the way to the closed
pull it back towards you to be sure it position prior to removing the
latches securely. left edge.
3. Move the tailgate to the right to
Tailgate Removal release the left edge.
The tailgate can be removed to Reverse this procedure to reinstall
allow for different loading situations. the tailgate. Make sure the tailgate
Someone may need to assist with is secure.
removal to avoid damage to the
vehicle. 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and
release both retaining cable
On vehicles with a Rear Vision clips. To release the retaining
Camera, it must be disconnected cable clips, lift the cable so it
before removing the tailgate. points straight out. Lift the clip
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on over the bolt, and push the cable
page 9‑78 for more information. forward then rotate down.
Vehicle Security If the delayed locking feature

is active, the alarm will not be
The theft-deterrent system will not
activate if the doors are locked
This vehicle has theft-deterrent activated until all doors are with the key or the manual door
features; however, they do not make closed and the security light lock. It activates only if you use
it impossible to steal. goes off. the power door lock switch or the
3. Close all doors. The security RKE transmitter. The vehicle can
Anti-Theft Alarm System light will stop flashing and go off be started with the correct key if
after approximately 30 seconds. the alarm is set off.
This vehicle may have a content
theft-deterrent alarm system. The system is armed when the To avoid setting off the alarm by
security light goes off. accident:
If a locked driver door is opened . If you do not want to activate
without using the RKE transmitter, the theft-deterrent system, the
a 10 second pre-alarm will occur. vehicle should be locked with
The horn will chirp and the lights the door key after the doors are
will flash. If the key is not placed closed.
in the ignition and turned to START . Always unlock a door with the
This is the security light. or the door is not unlocked by RKE transmitter.
pressing the unlock button on
To arm the theft-deterrent system: If the alarm is set off, press unlock
the RKE transmitter during the
1. Open the door. 10 second pre-alarm, the alarm on the RKE transmitter or place
will go off. The vehicle's headlamps the key in the ignition and turn it
2. Lock the door with the Remote
will flash and the horn will sound to START.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The security light should flash. for about 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power.
Testing the Alarm Immobilizer You do not have to manually arm or

disarm the system.
To test the alarm: See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information The security light will come on if
1. Lower the driver window and
regarding Part 15 of the Federal there is a problem with arming or
open the driver door.
Communications Commission disarming the theft-deterrent
2. Press lock on the RKE (FCC) rules and Industry Canada system.
transmitter. Standards RSS-210/220/310. When the PASS-Key III+ system
3. Close the door and wait for the senses that someone is using the
security light to go out. Immobilizer Operation wrong key, it prevents the vehicle
from starting. Anyone using a
4. Reach in through the window, This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
unlock the door with the manual trial-and-error method to start the
(Personalized Automotive Security
door lock, and open the door. vehicle will be discouraged because
System) theft-deterrent system.
This should set off the alarm. of the high number of electrical key
PASS-Key III+ is a passive
codes.
If the alarm does not sound when theft-deterrent system.
it should but the headlamps flash, If the engine does not start and
The system is automatically armed
check to see if the horn works. The the security light on the instrument
when the key is removed from the
horn fuse may be blown. To replace panel cluster comes on when trying
ignition.
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit to start the vehicle, there may be
Breakers on page 10‑50. The system is automatically a problem with the theft-deterrent
disarmed when the key is turned system. Turn the ignition off and
If the alarm does not sound or the to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, try again.
headlamps do not flash, see your or START from the LOCK/OFF
dealer for service. position.
If the engine still does not start, and See your dealer or a locksmith who 4. Insert the new key to be
the key appears to be undamaged, can service PASS-Key III+ to get a programmed and turn it to
try another ignition key. At this new key blank cut exactly as the the ON/RUN position within
time, you may also want to check ignition key that operates the five seconds of turning the
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit system. ignition to the LOCK/OFF
Breakers on page 10‑50. If the To program the new additional key: position in Step 3.
engine still does not start with the The security light will turn
other key, the vehicle needs service. 1. Verify that the new key has
off once the key has been
If the vehicle does start, the first key a 1 stamped on it. programmed.
may be faulty. See your dealer who
can service the PASS-Key III+ to 2. Insert the original, already 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if
have a new key made. programmed key in the ignition additional keys are to be
and start the engine. If the programmed.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ engine will not start, see your
decoder to learn the transponder dealer for service. If you lose or damage your
value of a new or replacement key. PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer
Up to 10 keys may be programmed 3. After the engine has started, or a locksmith who can service
for the vehicle. The following turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and PASS-Key III+ to have a new
procedure is for programming remove the key. key made.
additional keys only. If all the Do not leave the key or device
currently programmed keys are that disarms or deactivates the
lost or do not operate, you must theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
see your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the
system.
Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors Manually pull out the mirror head to
extend it for better visibility when
Adjust the outside mirrors for a towing a trailer.
Convex Mirrors clearer view.
The lower portion of the mirror is
Using hood-mounted air deflectors convex. A convex mirror's surface
{ WARNING and add-on convex mirror is curved to see more from the
attachments could decrease driver seat. The convex mirror can
A convex mirror can make things, mirror performance.
like other vehicles, look farther be adjusted manually to the driver
preferred position for better vision.
away than they really are. If you Trailer-Tow Mirrors
cut too sharply into the right lane, The mirror may have a turn signal
you could hit a vehicle on the arrow that flashes in the direction
right. Check the inside mirror or of the turn or lane change.
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex

shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors,

they can be adjusted for a clearer
view of the objects behind you.
Power Mirrors 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that Power Foldaway

the side of the vehicle and the
1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors out
area behind are seen.
to the driving position.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in to
deselect the mirror.
the folded position.
Folding Mirrors Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
. The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding.
. They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors . The mirrors will not stay in the
have controls located on the unfolded position.
driver door.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal
To adjust each mirror: driving speeds.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the Fold and unfold the mirrors one time
driver or passenger side mirror. using the mirror controls to reset
Vehicles with outside power
2. Press the arrows on the control foldaway mirrors have controls them to their normal position.
pad to move the mirror up, on the driver door. A popping noise may be heard
down, right, or left. during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound is
normal after a manual folding
operation.
Manual Foldaway Heated Mirrors Park Tilt Mirrors

Manually fold the mirrors inward For vehicles with heated mirrors: If the vehicle has the memory
to prevent damage when going package, the passenger and/or
through an automatic car wash. < (Rear Window Defogger): driver mirror tilts to a preselected
To fold, pull the mirror toward the Press to heat the mirrors. If the
vehicle has a towing mirror, only the position when the vehicle is in
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, R (Reverse). This feature lets the
to return to its original position. upper glass of the mirror is heated.
The lower convex part of the towing driver view the curb when parallel
Automatic Dimming mirror is not heated. parking. The mirror(s) return to the
original position when the vehicle
If equipped with an automatic Depending on the vehicle's features, is shifted out of R (Reverse),
dimming mirror, the driver outside see “Rear Window Defogger” or the ignition is turned off or to
mirror adjusts for the glare of under Climate Control Systems OFF/LOCK.
the headlamps behind you. (with Air Conditioning) on page 8‑1
or Climate Control Systems (with Turn this feature on or off through
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Heater Only) on page 8‑4 or Dual the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Mirror on page 2‑18.
Automatic Climate Control System See Vehicle Personalization (with
Turn Signal Indicator on page 8‑5 for more information. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52 for more
information.
The vehicle may also have a
turn signal indicator on the mirror.
An arrow on the mirror flashes in the
direction of the turn or lane change.
Interior Mirrors The vehicle may also have a Rear

Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
Windows
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑78
Manual Rearview Mirror for more information. { WARNING
Hold the mirror in the center to
If the vehicle has RVC, the O button Leaving children, helpless adults,
move it for a clearer view of behind
for turning the dimming feature on or or pets in a vehicle with the
your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
off will not be available. windows closed is dangerous.
avoid glare from the headlamps
behind you. Push the tab at the Vehicles with OnStar have three They can be overcome by
bottom of the mirror forward additional control buttons for the the extreme heat and suffer
for daytime use and pull it for OnStar system. See your dealer permanent injuries or even death
nighttime use. for more information about OnStar from heat stroke. Never leave a
and how to subscribe to it. See the child, a helpless adult, or a pet
Automatic Dimming OnStar Owner Guide for more alone in a vehicle, especially with
information about the services the windows closed in warm or
Rearview Mirror OnStar provides. hot weather.
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror. Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic dimming reduces the Do not spray glass cleaner directly
glare from the headlamps of the on the mirror. Use a soft towel
vehicle behind you. The dimming dampened with water.
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
ignition is turned to start.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and
The vehicle aerodynamics are they could be seriously injured or Crew Cab Shown
designed to improve fuel economy killed if caught in the path of a If the vehicle has power windows,
performance. This may result in closing window. Do not leave controls are located on each door.
a pulsing sound when either rear keys in a vehicle with children.
window is down and the front The driver door has a switch for
windows are up. To reduce the When there are children in the the passenger and rear windows as
sound, open either a front window rear seat use the window lockout well. The power windows will work
or the sunroof (if equipped). button to prevent unintentional when the ignition is in ON/RUN
operation of the windows. or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Manual Windows is active. See Retained Accessory
Turn the hand crank on each door Power (RAP) on page 9‑40.
to manually raise or lower the Push the switch down to lower the
manual windows. window, and pull up the front of the
switch to raise the window.
Express-down Windows Rear Windows The power sliding rear window

cannot be operated manually.
Vehicles with the express-down Power Sliding Rear Window
feature allow the driver and . Push to open the window.
front passenger windows to . Pull to close the window.
be lowered without holding the
switch. Push the switch down to
the second detent, then release,
Sun Visors
to activate the express-down mode.
The express-down mode can be
canceled at any time by pulling up
on the front of the switch. To open
the window partway, push the switch
down to the first detent until the
window is at the desired position.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): If a crew On vehicles with a power sliding
cab or extended cab vehicle has rear window, the switch is located in
power windows, the driver door the overhead console.
power window switch has a lockout The power sliding rear window
feature. This feature prevents the works when the ignition has been Pull the sun visor down to block
rear windows from operating, except turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or glare. Detach the sun visor from the
from the driver position. Press the ON/RUN, or when Retained center mount to pivot to the side
switch to engage or disengage the Accessory Power (RAP) is active. window, or to extend along the rod,
lockout feature. An indicator light See Retained Accessory Power if available.
on the switch will come on when the (RAP) on page 9‑40 for more
lockout feature is engaged, and will information.
go off when disengaged.
Roof See Retained Accessory Power

(RAP) on page 9‑40 for more
Close: From the vent, or open
position, press and hold the front of
information. the switch (A) to close the sunroof.
Sunroof (Extended Cab)
Vent: From the closed position, The sunroof also has a roller
press and hold the rear of the sunshade that can be used
switch (B) to vent the sunroof. to block the rays of the sun.
To close the sunroof, press and The roller sunshade can be
hold the front of the switch. manually operated with the sunroof
Open: From the vent position, in an open or closed position.
the sunroof can be fully opened To open the sunshade, press and
either manually or by using the unlatch it, and roll it back. To close,
express-open feature. To open pull it forward and latch it into the
manually, press the rear of the closed position.
switch (A) to the first detent and When the sunroof is opened, an air
hold until the sunroof has reached deflector will automatically raise.
the desired position. To open using The air deflector will retract when
express-open, press the rear of the the sunroof is closed.
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switch to the second detent and
sunroof switch is located on the
release. The sunroof will move to
headliner above the rearview mirror.
the full open position. To stop the
The sunroof only operates when the sunroof partway, press the switch
ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY a second time.
or ON/RUN or the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Sunroof (Crew Cab) The sunroof only operates when the

ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN or the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
information.
To open or close the sunroof, press
the open or close switch (A) to the
first detent position.
To express open or close the
sunroof, press the open or close
Dirt and debris may collect on
switch (A) to the second detent
the sunroof seal or in the track.
position and release. To stop the
This could cause an issue A. Open or Close movement, press the switch again.
with sunroof operation, noise,
or plugging the water drainage B. Vent The sunroof has a comfort stop
system. Periodically open the On vehicles with a sunroof, there feature which stops the sunroof from
sunroof and remove any obstacles are two sunroof switches located in opening to the full-open position.
or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof the overhead console above the From the comfort stop position,
seal and roof sealing area using a rearview mirror. press the open or close switch (A) a
clean cloth, mild soap, and water. second time to open the sunroof to
Do not remove grease from the the full-open position.
sunroof.
To automatically vent or close the or plugging the water drainage

sunroof, press the vent open or system. Periodically open the
close switch (B). sunroof and remove any obstacles
When the sunroof is opened, an air or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof
deflector will automatically raise. seal and roof sealing area using a
The air deflector will retract when clean cloth, mild soap, and water.
the sunroof is closed. Do not remove grease from the
sunroof.
The sunroof also has a sunshade
which can be pulled forward to block
sun rays. The sunshade must be
opened and closed manually.
If an object is in the path of the Dirt and debris may collect on
sunroof while it is closing, the the sunroof seal or in the track.
anti-pinch feature will detect the This could cause an issue
object and stop the sunroof. with sunroof operation, noise,
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap Belt (Crew and

Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Restraints Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
3-27
3-27
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-54
Head Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-56
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
Front Seats Airbag System System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Replacing LATCH System
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-31 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 When Should an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-66
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 (Right Front Seat
How Does an Airbag Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Rear Seats Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats (Extended Cab What Will You See After an (Center Front Seat
Full Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Rear Seats (All Split Bench Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-37
and Hybrid Full Bench) . . . . . 3-11 Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-46
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-48
Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are
not installed and adjusted
properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will suffer
a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Adjust the head restraint so that the Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
Do not drive until the head top of the restraint is at the same To lower the head restraint, press
restraints for all occupants are height as the top of the occupant's the button, located on the top
installed and adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the of the seatback, and push the
chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
The rear seat has headrests that
can be adjusted up and down.
Front Seats Center Seat

If equipped, the center front
Seat Adjustment seatback doubles as an armrest
and cupholder/storage area for the
{ WARNING driver and passenger when the
center front seat is not used. Do not
You can lose control of the use it as a seating position when
vehicle if you try to adjust a the seatback is folded down.
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
To adjust the seat:
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
the vehicle is not moving. of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Power Seat Adjustment To adjust the seatback, see Storing Memory Positions
“Power Reclining Seatbacks” under To save into memory:
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6.
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and recliner, both outside mirrors,
Pedals and the throttle and brake
pedals, if available.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑35
Not all mirrors and adjustable
throttles and brake pedals will
have the ability to save and
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: recall their positions.
. Move the seat forward or 2. Press and hold “1” until
rearward by sliding the control two beeps sound.
forward or rearward. 3. Repeat for a second driver
. If available, raise or lower the On vehicles with the memory position using “2.”
front or rear part of the seat feature, the controls on the driver
door are used to program and To recall, press and release “1”
cushion by moving the front or or “2.” The vehicle must be in
rear of the control up or down. recall memory settings for the
driver seat, outside mirrors, and P (Park). A single beep will sound.
. If available, raise or lower the the adjustable throttle and brake The seat, outside mirrors, and
entire seat by moving the entire pedals, if equipped. adjustable throttle and brake pedals
control up or down. will move to the position previously
stored for the identified driver.
Memory Remote Recall If something has blocked the driver A single beep sounds. The driver
The memory feature can recall seat and/or the adjustable pedals seat moves back approximately
the driver seat, outside mirrors, while recalling a memory position, 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
and pedals, if available, to stored the recall may stop. Remove the farther, press the easy exit seat
positions when entering the vehicle. obstruction; then press and hold the button again until the seat is all
appropriate manual control for the the way back.
To activate, unlock the driver memory item that is not recalling
door with the Remote Keyless If something has blocked the driver
for two seconds. Try recalling the seat while recalling the exit position,
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver memory position again by pressing
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable the recall may stop. Remove the
the appropriate memory button. obstruction; then press and hold
pedals, if available, will move to the If the memory position is still not
memory position associated with the power seat control rearward for
recalling, see the dealer for service. two seconds. Try recalling the exit
the transmitter used to unlock the
vehicle. Easy Exit Driver Seat position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see the dealer for
This feature can be turned on or off This feature can move the seat service.
using the vehicle personalization rearward to allow extra room to
menu. See “Memory Seat Recall” exit the vehicle. See “Easy Exit Recall” and
“Easy Exit Setup” under Vehicle
under Vehicle Personalization (with B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52 for more to recall the easy exit seat position.
information. on page 5‑52 for more information.
The vehicle must be in P (Park).
To stop recall movement, press one If the easy exit seat feature is
of the power seat controls, memory programmed on in the vehicle
buttons, or power mirror buttons, personalization menu, automatic
or the adjustable pedal switch. seat movement occurs when the
ignition key is removed.
Lumbar Adjustment Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Lumbar
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
To adjust the power lumbar support, go into it, receiving neck or other
if equipped: injuries.
If equipped, increase or decrease . On vehicles with two-way The lap belt cannot do its job
manual lumbar support by turning lumbar, press and hold the either. In a crash, the belt could
the knob forward or rearward. top or bottom of the control to go up over your abdomen.
increase or decrease lumbar The belt forces would be
support. there, not at your pelvic bones.
. On vehicles with four-way This could cause serious
lumbar, press and hold the front internal injuries.
or rear of the control to increase (Continued)
or decrease lumbar support.
To raise or lower the height of
the support, press and hold the
top or bottom of the control.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks

WARNING (Continued)
For proper protection when the { WARNING
vehicle is in motion, have the
You can lose control of the
seatback upright. Then sit well
vehicle if you try to adjust a
back in the seat and wear the
manual driver seat while the
safety belt properly.
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To adjust a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
The seatback will automatically
{ WARNING fold forward.
If either seatback is not locked, it 2. To recline, move the seatback
could move forward in a sudden rearward to the desired position,
stop or crash. That could cause then release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
injury to the person sitting there.
Do not have a seatback reclined if Always push and pull on the 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
the vehicle is moving. seatbacks to be sure they are make sure it is locked.
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright Power Reclining Seatbacks Heated Front Seats
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
{ WARNING
seatback, and the seatback will If you cannot feel temperature
return to the upright position. change or pain to the skin, the
2. Push and pull on the seatback to seat heater may cause burns
make sure it is locked. even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition
should use care when using
the seat heater, especially for
long periods of time. Do not
place anything on the seat that
To recline a power seatback, insulates against heat, such
if equipped: as a blanket, cushion, cover,
. Tilt the top of the control or similar item. This may cause
rearward to recline. the seat heater to overheat.
An overheated seat heater may
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise. cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
Press the button once for the Remote Start Heated Seats
highest setting. With each press When it is cold outside, the heated
of the button, the heated seat seats may turn on automatically
will change to the next lower during a remote vehicle start.
setting, and then to the off setting. The heated seats will be canceled
The lights indicate three for the when the ignition is turned on. Press
highest setting and one for the the desired button to use the heated
lowest. seats after the vehicle is started.
The passenger seat may take The lights on the heated seat
longer to heat up. buttons do not turn on during a
The heated seats will be canceled remote start.
10 seconds after the ignition is The temperature performance of an
If available, the buttons are on the turned off.
front doors. unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to
heat the seatback only. See Remote Vehicle Start on
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
Rear Seats To unfold the seat:

1. Push the seat cushion rearward
Rear Seats (Extended while pulling the release strap
under the seat cushion. Pull
Cab Full Bench) the seat cushion down until it
Folding the Rear Seat latches.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with 2. Pull up on the seat cushion to
the safety belts still fastened may make sure it is locked in place.
cause damage to the seat or the Make sure the safety belts are
safety belts. Always unbuckle not twisted or caught in the seat
the safety belts and return them cushion.
to their normal stowed position
To fold the seat:
before folding a rear seat.
1. Pull up on the front of the seat { WARNING
cushion while pulling down on A safety belt that is improperly
the release strap under the seat routed, not properly attached,
cushion.
or twisted will not provide the
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it protection needed in a crash.
latches with the seatback. The person wearing the belt could
3. Pull forward on the seat cushion be seriously injured. After raising
to make sure it is locked in the rear seatback, always check
place. to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Rear Seats (All Split To return the seat to the normal Safety Belts
seating position, slowly pull the
Bench and Hybrid Full seat cushion down. This section of the manual
Bench) Make sure the safety belts are
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
Folding Rear Seat not twisted or caught in the seat
things not to do with safety belts.
cushion.
Either side of the rear seat can be
folded for added cargo space.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may Do not let anyone ride where
A safety belt that is improperly
cause damage to the seat or the a safety belt cannot be worn
routed, not properly attached,
safety belts. Always unbuckle the properly. In a crash, if you or
or twisted will not provide the
safety belts and return them to your passenger(s) are not
protection needed in a crash.
their normal stowed position wearing safety belts, the injuries
The person wearing the belt could
before folding a rear seat. can be much worse. You can hit
be seriously injured. After raising
things inside the vehicle harder
Make sure that nothing is on the rear seatback, always check
or be ejected from the vehicle.
the seat. to be sure that the safety belts
You and your passenger(s) can
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat are properly routed and attached,
be seriously injured or killed.
cushion up. and are not twisted.
In the same crash, you might
not be, if you are buckled up.
Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a Why Safety Belts Work

{ WARNING reminder to buckle the safety belts.
When you ride in or on anything,
See Safety Belt Reminders on
People riding on the tailgate you go as fast as it goes.
page 5‑19 for additional information.
(if equipped) can easily lose their
balance and fall even when the In most states and in all Canadian
vehicle is operated at low speeds. provinces, the law requires wearing
Falling from a moving vehicle may safety belts. Here is why:
result in serious injuries or death. You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING A few crashes are mild, and some
It is extremely dangerous to ride crashes can be so serious that
in a cargo area, inside or outside even buckled up, a person would
of a vehicle. In a collision, people not survive. But most crashes
riding in these areas are more are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
likely to be seriously injured or
and sometimes walk away. Without it is just a seat on wheels.
killed. Do not allow people to ride
safety belts they could have been
in any area of your vehicle that
badly hurt or killed.
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in After more than 40 years of safety
the vehicle is in a seat and using belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
a safety belt properly. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until
vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you
are wearing a safety belt or
not. But your chance of being
conscious during and after an
accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if
you are belted. And you can
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
unbuckle a safety belt, even if
With safety belts, you slow down you are upside down.
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts
should I have to wear safety never drive far from home,
belts? why should I wear safety
Properly
A: Airbags are supplemental belts? This section is only for people of
systems only; so they work A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size.
with safety belts — not instead but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special
of them. Whether or not an one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts
airbag is provided, all occupants and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different
still have to buckle up to get the hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and
most protection. That is true not not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in
only in frontal collisions, but beyond your control, such the vehicle, see Older Children on
especially in side and other as bad drivers. page 3‑49 or Infants and Young
collisions. Most accidents occur within Children on page 3‑51. Follow those
40 km (25 miles) of home. rules for everyone's protection.
And the greatest number of It is very important for all occupants
serious injuries and deaths to buckle up. Statistics show that
occur at speeds of less than unbelted people are hurt more
65 km/h (40 mph). often in crashes than those who
Safety belts are for everyone. are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
First, before you or your worn low and snug on the hips, Q: What is wrong with this?
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
there is important information you this applies force to the strong
should know. pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash. A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap
too much, which could increase belt and apply force on your
injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause
snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips,
just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose.

It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured
if the belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle the belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest.

buckle.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the You can be seriously injured
belt goes over an armrest like if you wear the shoulder belt
this. The belt would be much too under your arm. In a crash, your
high. In a crash, you can slide body would move too far forward,
under the belt. The belt force which would increase the chance
would then be applied on the of head and neck injury. Also,
abdomen, not on the pelvic the belt would apply too much
bones, and that could cause force to the ribs, which are not
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure as strong as shoulder bones.
the belt goes under the armrests. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
A: The shoulder belt is worn under spleen. The shoulder belt should
the arm. It should be worn over go over the shoulder and across
the shoulder at all times. the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the
shoulder belt. Your body could
move too far forward increasing
the chance of head and neck
injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right
on the abdomen. That could
A: The belt is behind the body. cause serious or fatal injuries. A: The belt is twisted across
The shoulder belt should go the body.
over the shoulder and across
the chest. { WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
If the vehicle is a regular cab, get twisted.
then all seating positions in the
vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
If the vehicle is a crew or extended you pull the belt across you very
cab, then all seating positions in quickly. If this happens, let the
the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt go back slightly to unlock it.
belt except for the center front Then pull the belt across you
passenger position (if equipped), more slowly.
which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt If the shoulder portion of a
(Crew and Extended Cab) on passenger belt is pulled out
page 3‑26 for more information. all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. If the belt stops before it reaches
The following instructions explain the buckle, when using the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again. lap-shoulder belt in a rear center
properly. seating position of a crew-cab,
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Engaging the child restraint tilt the latch plate and keep
adjustable, so you can sit up locking feature may affect the pulling the safety belt until it
straight. To see how, see “Seats” passenger sensing system, can be buckled.
in the Index. if equipped. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑40
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section.
3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should
Pull up on the latch plate to return to its stowed position.
make sure it is secure. If the belt Before a door is closed, be sure the
is not long enough, see Safety safety belt is out of the way. If a
Belt Extender on page 3‑27. door is slammed against a safety
5. To make the lap part tight, pull belt, damage can occur to both the
If the latch plate will not go fully up on the shoulder belt.
into the buckle, check if the safety belt and the vehicle.
correct buckle is being used. It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
Position the release button on through the latch plate to fully
the buckle so that the safety belt tighten the lap belt on smaller
could be quickly unbuckled if occupants.
necessary.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the
shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How Regular and Crew Cab Extended Cab
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑15. To move the adjuster down for the On the extended cab, push down
regular and crew cabs, squeeze on the release button (A) and move
the buttons (A) on the sides of the the height adjuster to the desired
height adjuster and move the height position.
adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just
by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide.
After you move the adjuster to
where you want it, try to move it
down, without squeezing the buttons
for the regular and crew cabs,
or without pushing the release
button for extended cabs, to make
sure it has locked into position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort

This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder
occupants. Although the safety belt comfort guides. If not, they
belt pretensioners cannot be seen, are available through your dealer.
they are part of the safety belt The guides may provide added
assembly. They can help tighten the safety belt comfort for older children
safety belts during the early stages who have outgrown booster seats
of a moderate to severe frontal, and for some adults. When installed
near frontal, or rear crash if the and properly adjusted, the comfort
threshold conditions for pretensioner guide positions the belt away from
activation are met. And, if your the neck and head.
vehicle has side impact airbags, 2. Place the guide over the belt
Here is how to install a comfort
safety belt pretensioners can help and insert the two edges of the
guide to the shoulder belt:
tighten the safety belts in a side belt into the slots of the guide.
crash or a rollover event. 1. Remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
Pretensioners work only once.
If the pretensioners activate in a
crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for
the vehicle's safety belt system.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash on page 3‑28.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is 4. Buckle, position, and release
not twisted and it lies flat. the safety belt as described
The elastic cord must be under previously in this section. Make
the belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide onto the storage clip.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt (Crew and

Extended Cab)
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on plate and pull it along the belt.
page 3‑21. Buckle, position, and release it
Your vehicle may have a center the same way as the lap part of a
seating position. When you sit in lap-shoulder belt.
the center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which
has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
Safety Belt Extender Safety System Check

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten Now and then, check that the safety
around you, you should use it. belt reminder light, safety belts,
But if a safety belt is not long buckles, latch plates, retractors,
enough, your dealer will order you and anchorages are working
an extender. When you go in to properly. Look for any other loose
order it, take the heaviest coat you or damaged safety belt system parts
will wear, so the extender will be that might keep a safety belt system
long enough for you. To help avoid from doing its job. See your dealer
personal injury, do not let someone to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
else use it, and use it only for the safety belts may not protect you in
seat it is made to fit. The extender a crash. They can rip apart under
To make the belt shorter, pull its free impact forces. If a belt is torn or
end as shown until the belt is snug. has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. frayed, get a new one right away.
If the belt is not long enough, see To wear it, attach it to the regular Make sure the safety belt reminder
Safety Belt Extender on page 3‑27. safety belt. For more information, light is working. See Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the see the instruction sheet that comes Reminders on page 5‑19 for more
buckle is positioned so you would with the extender. information.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt Keep safety belts clean and dry.
quickly if necessary. See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑28.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. A crash can damage the safety replaced.
In a crash, they might not be able belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
to provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in
Have the safety belt pretensioners
a crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑20.
possible.
Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will

have the word AIRBAG embossed
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label
airbags: near the deployment opening. { WARNING
. A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or
. A frontal airbag for the right front killed in a crash if you are not
passenger. part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel wearing your safety belt — even
The vehicle may have the following for the right front passenger. if you have airbags. Airbags are
airbags: designed to work with safety
With seat‐mounted side impact
. A seat‐mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them.
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
airbag for the driver. Also, airbags are not designed
appear on the side of the seatback
. closest to the door. to deploy in every crash. In some
A seat‐mounted side impact crashes safety belts are your only
airbag for the right front With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an
passenger. AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑32.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver headliner or trim.
and the passenger seated Wearing your safety belt during a
Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance
directly behind the driver. the protection provided by safety
of hitting things inside the vehicle
. A roof-rail airbag for the right belts. Even though today's airbags
or being ejected from it. Airbags
front passenger and the person are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an are “supplemental restraints” to
seated directly behind the right the safety belts. Everyone in your
front passenger. inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
Anyone who is up against, or when it inflates can be seriously
very close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children,
which shows the airbag symbol.
close to any airbag, as you would but not for young children and
be if you were sitting on the edge infants. Neither the vehicle The system checks the airbag
of the seat or leaning forward. safety belt system nor its airbag electrical system for malfunctions.
Safety belts help keep you in system is designed for them. The light tells you if there is an
position before and during a Young children and infants electrical problem. See Airbag
crash. Always wear a safety belt, need the protection that a child Readiness Light on page 5‑20
even with airbags. The driver restraint system can provide. for more information.
should sit as far back as possible Always secure children properly
while still maintaining control of in the vehicle. To read how, see
the vehicle. Older Children on page 3‑49 or
Occupants should not lean on Infants and Young Children on
or sleep against the door or side page 3‑51.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger airbag Driver Side Shown, Passenger

is in the instrument panel on the Side Similar
The driver airbag is in the middle of passenger side. If the vehicle has seat‐mounted side
the steering wheel. impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger, they are in
the side of the seatbacks closest
to the door.
When Should an Airbag

{ WARNING Inflate?
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed
occupant and an airbag, the to inflate in moderate to severe
airbag might not inflate properly frontal or near-frontal crashes
or it might force the object into to help reduce the potential for
that person causing severe severe injuries mainly to the driver's
injury or even death. The path or right front passenger's head
of an inflating airbag must be and chest. However, they are
kept clear. Do not put anything only designed to inflate if the
between an occupant and an impact exceeds a predetermined
Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put deployment threshold. Deployment
Side Similar anything on the steering wheel thresholds are used to predict how
hub or on or near any other severe a crash is likely to be in time
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags airbag covering. for the airbags to inflate and help
for the driver, right front passenger, restrain the occupants.
and second row outboard Do not use seat accessories
passengers, they are in the ceiling that block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will
above the side windows. seat-mounted side impact airbag. or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
Never secure anything to the It depends largely on what you hit,
roof of a vehicle with roof-rail the direction of the impact, and how
airbags by routing a rope or tie quickly your vehicle slows down.
down through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Frontal airbags may inflate Thresholds can also vary with The vehicle may have dual‐stage
at different crash speeds. specific vehicle design. frontal airbags. Dual-stage airbags
For example: Frontal airbags are not intended to adjust the restraint according to
. If the vehicle hits a stationary inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear crash severity. The vehicle has
object, the airbags could inflate impacts, or in many side impacts. electronic frontal sensors, which
at a different crash speed than if help the sensing system distinguish
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight between a moderate frontal impact
the vehicle hits a moving object. Rating) of your vehicle is 3 855 kg and a more severe frontal impact.
. If the vehicle hits an object that (8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle has For moderate frontal impacts,
deforms, the airbags could single stage airbags. If the GVWR dual-stage airbags inflate at a
inflate at a different crash speed is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then level less than full deployment.
than if the vehicle hits an object the vehicle has dual stage airbags. For more severe frontal impacts,
that does not deform. Vehicles with a full bench seat are full deployment occurs.
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object equipped with single state airbags.
You can find the GVWR on the Vehicles with dual stage airbags
(like a pole), the airbags could also have seat position sensors
inflate at a different crash speed certification label on the rear edge
of the driver door. See Vehicle which enable the sensing system
than if the vehicle hits a wide to monitor the position of the driver
object (like a wall). Load Limits on page 9‑25 for
more information. seat (all models), and on crew cab
. If the vehicle goes into an object and extended cab models the right
at an angle, the airbags could front passenger seat on light duty
inflate at a different crash speed models only. The seat position
than if the vehicle goes straight sensor provides information that is
into the object. used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level
or at full deployment.
The vehicle may or may not have In any particular crash, no one What Makes an Airbag
seat‐mounted side impact and can say whether an airbag should
roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System have inflated simply because of
Inflate?
on page 3‑29. Seat‐mounted side the damage to a vehicle or because In a deployment event, the sensing
impact and roof-rail airbags are of what the repair costs were. system sends an electrical signal
intended to inflate in moderate to For frontal airbags, inflation is triggering a release of gas from the
severe side crashes. In addition, determined by what the vehicle hits, inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
these roof-rail airbags are intended the angle of the impact, and how airbag causing the bag to break out
to inflate during a rollover or in a quickly the vehicle slows down. of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
severe frontal impact. Seat‐mounted For seat‐mounted side impact and the airbag, and related hardware are
side impact and roof-rail airbags will roof-rail airbags, deployment is all part of the airbag module.
inflate if the crash severity is above determined by the location and
Frontal airbag modules are located
the system's designed threshold severity of the side impact. In a
inside the steering wheel and
level. The threshold level can vary rollover event, roof-rail airbag
instrument panel. For vehicles with
with specific vehicle design. deployment is determined by
seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
Roof-rail airbags are not the direction of the roll.
there are airbags modules in the
intended to inflate in rear impacts. side of the front seatbacks closest
A seat‐mounted side impact airbag to the door. For vehicles with
is intended to deploy on the side roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
of the vehicle that is struck. Both modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
roof-rail airbags will deploy when near the side windows that have
either side of the vehicle is struck, occupant seating positions.
or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over,
or in a severe frontal impact.
How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See After
are designed to help contain
Restrain? the head and chest of occupants
an Airbag Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal in the outboard seating positions After the frontal airbags and
or near frontal collisions, even in the first and second rows. seat-mounted side impact airbags
belted occupants can contact the The rollover capable roof-rail inflate, they quickly deflate, so
steering wheel or the instrument airbags are designed to help quickly that some people may not
panel. In moderate to severe side reduce the risk of full or partial even realize an airbag inflated.
collisions, even belted occupants ejection in rollover events, although Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
can contact the inside of the no system can prevent all such partially inflated for some time after
vehicle. ejections. they deploy. Some components of
Airbags supplement the protection But airbags would not help in the airbag module may be hot for
provided by safety belts. many types of collisions, primarily several minutes. For location of the
Frontal airbags distribute the because the occupant's motion airbag modules, see What Makes
force of the impact more evenly is not toward those airbags. an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑34.
over the occupant's upper body, See When Should an Airbag The parts of the airbag that
stopping the occupant more Inflate? on page 3‑32 for more come into contact with you
gradually. Seat‐mounted side information. may be warm, but not too hot
impact and roof-rail airbags Airbags should never be regarded to touch. There may be some
distribute the force of the as anything more than a supplement smoke and dust coming from
impact more evenly over the to safety belts. the vents in the deflated airbags.
occupant's upper body.
Airbag inflation does not prevent The vehicle may have a feature In many crashes severe enough to
the driver from seeing out of the that may automatically unlock the inflate the airbag, windshields are
windshield or being able to steer the doors, turn on the interior lamps and broken by vehicle deformation.
vehicle, nor does it prevent people hazard warning flashers, and shut Additional windshield breakage
from leaving the vehicle. off the fuel system after the airbags may also occur from the right
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn front passenger airbag.
{ WARNING off the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers by using the
. Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
When an airbag inflates, there controls for those features. inflates, you will need some
may be dust in the air. This dust new parts for the airbag system.
could cause breathing problems { WARNING If you do not get them, the
for people with a history of airbag system will not be there
asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate to help protect you in another
To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also crash. A new system will include
vehicle should get out as soon damaged important functions airbag modules and possibly
as it is safe to do so. If you have in the vehicle, such as the fuel other parts. The service manual
breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering for your vehicle covers the need
get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to replace other parts.
airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a
by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be
If you experience breathing concealed damage that could
problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate
deployment, you should seek the vehicle.
medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.

. The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
Airbag On-Off Switch
records information after a If one of the switches pictured in the
crash. See Vehicle Data following illustrations is located in
Recording and Privacy on the glove box, the vehicle has an
page 13‑17 and Event Data airbag on-off switch that you can
Recorders on page 13‑17. use to manually turn on or off the
right front passenger airbag.
. Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service. Canada and Mexico
If the vehicle does not have an
airbag off switch, it may have
a passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑40.
United States
This switch should only be turned Child age 1 to 12. A child Medical Condition. A passenger
to the off position if the person in age 1 to 12 must ride in the has a medical condition which,
the right front passenger position front seat because: according to his or her physician:
is a member of a passenger risk . My vehicle has no rear seat; . Causes the passenger airbag
group identified by the national to pose a special risk for the
. Although children ages 1 to 12
government as follows: passenger; and
ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
Infant. An infant (less than possible, children ages 1 to 12 . Makes the potential harm from
1 year old) must ride in the sometimes must ride in the front the passenger airbag in a crash
front seat because: because no space is available in greater than the potential harm
. My vehicle has no rear seat; the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or from turning off the airbag and
. The child has a medical allowing the passenger, even if
. My vehicle has a rear seat belted, to hit the dashboard or
too small to accommodate a condition which, according to
the child's physician, makes it windshield in a crash.
rear-facing infant seat; or
necessary for the child to ride in
. The infant has a medical
condition which, according to
the front seat so that the driver { WARNING
can constantly monitor the
the infant's physician, makes it child's condition. If the right front passenger
necessary for the infant to ride in airbag is turned off for a
the front seat so that the driver person who is not in a risk
can constantly monitor the group identified by the national
child's condition. government, that person
will not have the extra protection
(Continued)
is completed. The airbag off light

WARNING (Continued) will come on and stay on to let you
know that the right front passenger's
of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag is off. See Airbag On-Off
airbag will not be able to inflate Light on page 5‑21.
and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger airbag unless the
{ WARNING
person sitting there is in a risk If the airbag readiness light
group. ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be
wrong with the airbag system.
Canada and Mexico For example, the right front
passenger airbag could inflate
To turn off the right front passenger
airbag, insert the ignition key into even though the airbag on-off
the switch, push in, and move the switch is turned off.
switch to the off position. To help avoid injury to yourself or
The word OFF or the off symbol others, have the vehicle serviced
will come on in the passenger right away. See Airbag Readiness
airbag status indicator located in Light on page 5‑20 for more
the overhead console to let you information, including important
know that the right front passenger safety information.
airbag is off, after the system check
United States
Passenger Sensing
System
If the vehicle has one of the
indicators pictured in the following
illustrations, then the vehicle has
a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger position,
unless there is an airbag off switch
located in the glove box. If there
is an airbag off switch, the vehicle
does not have a passenger sensing
United States Canada and Mexico system. See Airbag On-Off Switch
To turn the right front passenger
airbag on again, insert the ignition The passenger airbag status
key into the switch, push in, and indicator will be visible on the
move the switch to the on position. overhead console when the
vehicle is started.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is now enabled (may inflate). In addition, if the vehicle has a
See Airbag On-Off Light on passenger sensing system for the
page 5‑21 for more information. right front passenger position, the
label on the vehicle's sun visors
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.
When the system check is designed to detect the presence

complete, either the word ON or of a properly-seated occupant
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will and determine if the right front
be visible. See Passenger Airbag passenger frontal airbag should
Status Indicator on page 5‑23. be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The passenger sensing system will According to accident statistics,
United States turn off the right front passenger children are safer when properly
frontal airbag under certain secured in a rear seat in the correct
conditions. The driver airbag, child restraint for their weight
seat‐mounted side impact airbags and size.
(if equipped), and the roof-rail We recommend that children be
airbags (if equipped) are not secured in a rear seat, including:
affected by the passenger an infant or a child riding in a
sensing system. rear-facing child restraint; a child
Canada and Mexico
The passenger sensing system riding in a forward-facing child seat;
The words ON and OFF, or the works with sensors that are part an older child riding in a booster
symbol for on and off, will be visible of the right front passenger seat seat; and children, who are large
during the system check. If you and safety belt. The sensors are enough, using safety belts.
are using remote start to start the
vehicle from a distance, if equipped,
you may not see the system check.
A label on the sun visor says, The passenger sensing system is

“Never put a rear-facing child seat WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front
in the front.” This is because the risk passenger frontal airbag if:
to the rear-facing child is so great, system is fail-safe. No one can . The right front passenger seat is
if the airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will
unoccupied.
not deploy under some unusual
{ WARNING circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
. The system determines an infant
is present in a child restraint.
A child in a rear-facing child . A right front passenger takes
Secure rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously his/her weight off of the seat for
restraints in a rear seat, even if
injured or killed if the right a period of time.
the airbag is off. If you secure a
front passenger airbag inflates.
forward-facing child restraint in . Or, if there is a critical problem
This is because the back of the with the airbag system or the
the right front seat, always move
rear-facing child restraint would passenger sensing system.
the front passenger seat as far
be very close to the inflating
back as it will go. It is better to When the passenger sensing
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
secure the child restraint in a system has turned off the right front
child restraint can be seriously
rear seat. passenger frontal airbag, the off
injured or killed if the right front
indicator will light and stay lit to
passenger airbag inflates and the
If the vehicle does not have a remind you that the airbag is off.
passenger seat is in a forward
rear seat that will accommodate See Passenger Airbag Status
position. Indicator on page 5‑23.
a rear-facing child restraint, a
Even if the passenger sensing rear-facing child restraint should
system has turned off the right not be installed in the vehicle,
front passenger frontal airbag, no even if the airbag is off.
(Continued)
The passenger sensing system is build. Everyone in your vehicle If the On Indicator is Lit for a
designed to turn on (may inflate) who has outgrown child restraints Child Restraint
the right front passenger frontal should wear a safety belt
airbag anytime the system senses properly — whether or not there If a child restraint has been installed
that a person of adult size is is an airbag for that person. and the on indicator is lit:
sitting properly in the right front 1. Turn the vehicle off.
passenger seat. { WARNING 2. Remove the child restraint from
When the passenger sensing the vehicle.
system has allowed the airbag to be If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means 3. Remove any additional items
enabled, the on indicator will light
that something may be wrong from the seat such as blankets,
and stay lit to remind you that the
with the airbag system. To help cushions, seat covers, seat
airbag is active.
avoid injury to yourself or others, heaters, or seat massagers.
For some children, including
have the vehicle serviced right 4. Reinstall the child restraint
children in child restraints, and for
away. See Airbag Readiness following the directions
very small adults, the passenger
Light on page 5‑20 for more provided by the child restraint
sensing system may or may not
information, including important manufacturer and refer to
turn off the right front passenger
safety information. Securing Child Restraints
frontal airbag, depending upon the
(Rear Seat Position) on
person's seating posture and body
page 3‑66 or Securing Child
Restraints (Right Front Seat
Position) on page 3‑69 or
Securing Child Restraints
(Center Front Seat Position) on
page 3‑78.
5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an use the following steps to allow the
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and
vehicle, the on indicator is enable the right front passenger
still lit, turn the vehicle off. frontal airbag:
Then slightly recline the vehicle 1. Turn the vehicle off.
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make 2. Remove any additional material
sure that the vehicle seatback is from the seat, such as blankets,
not pushing the child restraint cushions, seat covers, seat
into the seat cushion. heaters, or seat massagers.
Also make sure the child 3. Place the seatback in the fully
restraint is not trapped under upright position.
the vehicle head restraint. 4. Have the person sit upright in
If this happens, adjust the the seat, centered on the seat
head restraint. See Head cushion, with legs comfortably
Restraints on page 3‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting extended.
6. Restart the vehicle. in the right front passenger seat, 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
but the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for
The passenger sensing system
because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on
may or may not turn off the
properly in the seat. If this happens, indicator is lit.
airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child’s seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Additional Factors Affecting system to turn the airbag off for The on indicator may be lit if
System Operation some adult size occupants. If this an object, such as a briefcase,
happens, let the belt go back all the handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
Safety belts help keep the way and start again. other electronic device, is put on
passenger in position on the an unoccupied seat. If this is not
seat during vehicle maneuvers A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion, desired, remove the object from
and braking, which helps the the seat.
passenger sensing system or aftermarket equipment such
maintain the passenger airbag as seat covers, seat heaters, and
status. See “Safety Belts” and seat massagers can affect how { WARNING
“Child Restraints” in the Index for well the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that Stowing of articles under the
additional information about the
you not use seat covers or other passenger seat or between the
importance of proper restraint use.
aftermarket equipment except when passenger seat cushion and
If the shoulder portion of the belt approved by GM for your specific seatback may interfere with the
is pulled out all the way, the child vehicle. See Adding Equipment to proper operation of the passenger
restraint locking feature will be the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on sensing system.
engaged. This may unintentionally page 3‑46 for more information
cause the passenger sensing about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Servicing the Adding Equipment to the

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
{ WARNING Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the Q: Is there anything I might add
should be serviced. There are ignition is turned off and the to or change about the vehicle
parts of the airbag system in battery is disconnected, an airbag that could keep the airbags
several places around the vehicle. can still inflate during improper from working properly?
Your dealer and the service manual service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it A: Yes. If you add things that
have information about servicing change your vehicle's frame,
the vehicle and the airbag system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
bumper system, height, front end
To purchase a service manual, see They are probably part of the
or side sheet metal, they may
Service Publications Ordering airbag system. Be sure to follow
keep the airbag system from
Information on page 13‑15. proper service procedures, and working properly. Changing or
make sure the person performing moving any parts of the front
work for you is qualified to do so. seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle may have If you have any questions Q: What if I added a snow plow?
a passenger sensing system about this, you should contact Will it keep the airbags from
for the right front passenger's Customer Assistance before you working properly?
position, which includes sensors modify your vehicle. The phone A: We have designed our airbag
that are part of the passenger's numbers and addresses for systems to work properly under
seat. The passenger sensing Customer Assistance are in a wide range of conditions,
system may not operate Step Two of the Customer including snow plowing with
properly if the original seat Satisfaction Procedure in vehicles that have the optional
trim is replaced with non-GM this manual. See Customer Snow Plow Prep Package
covers, upholstery or trim, Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. (RPO VYU). But do not change
or with GM covers, upholstery and Canada) on page 13‑1 or defeat the snow plow's
or trim designed for a different or Customer Satisfaction “tripping mechanism.” If you do,
vehicle. Any object, such as Procedure (Mexico) on it can damage your snow plow
an aftermarket seat heater page 13‑3. and your vehicle, and it may
or a comfort enhancing pad If the vehicle has rollover cause an airbag inflation.
or device, installed under or roof-rail airbags, see Different
on top of the seat fabric, could Size Tires and Wheels on
also interfere with the operation page 10‑79 for additional
of the passenger sensing important information.
system. This could either
prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or
prevent the passenger sensing
system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑40.
Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System

I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash
whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance
airbag system? or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
{ WARNING
A: If you have questions, See Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the
call Customer Assistance. page 5‑20 for more information. airbag systems in the vehicle.
The phone numbers and A damaged airbag system
addresses for Customer Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, may not work properly and
Assistance are in Step Two
the airbag may not work properly. may not protect you and your
of the Customer Satisfaction
Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death.
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on opened or broken airbag To help make sure the airbag
page 13‑1 or Customer covers, have the airbag covering systems are working properly
Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico) and/or airbag module replaced. after a crash, have them
on page 13‑3. For the location of the airbag inspected and any necessary
modules, see What Makes an replacements made as soon
In addition, your dealer and the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑34. as possible.
service manual have information See your dealer for service.
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
If an airbag inflates, you will need Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
to replace airbag system parts. come with the booster seat state the
See your dealer for service. weight and height limitations for that
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes a lap-shoulder belt until the child
on when you are driving, the airbag passes the fit test below:
system may not work properly. . Sit all the way back on the seat.
Have the vehicle serviced right Do the knees bend at the seat
away. See Airbag Readiness Light edge? If yes, continue. If no,
on page 5‑20 for more information. return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low and Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
snug on the hips, touching the Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on { WARNING
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, page 3‑21.
return to the booster seat. Never do this.
According to accident statistics,
. Can proper safety belt fit be children and infants are safer Never allow two children to wear
maintained for the length of the when properly restrained in a child the same safety belt. The safety
trip? If yes, continue. If no, restraint system or infant restraint belt can not properly spread the
return to the booster seat. system secured in a rear seating impact forces. In a crash, the two
Q: What is the proper way to position. children can be crushed together
wear safety belts? and seriously injured. A safety
In a crash, children who are not
belt must be used by only one
A: An older child should wear a buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be person at a time.
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older
belt can provide. The shoulder children need to use safety belts
belt should not cross the face properly.
or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this. Children can be seriously injured
Never allow a child to wear the or strangled if a shoulder belt
safety belt with the shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
behind their back. A child can be and the safety belt continues to
seriously injured by not wearing tighten. Never leave children
the lap-shoulder belt properly. unattended in a vehicle and never
In a crash, the child would not be allow children to play with the
restrained by the shoulder belt. safety belts.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
head and neck injury. The child
Infants and Young offer protection for adults and older
might also slide under the lap Children children, but not for young children
belt. The belt force would then Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's
be applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag
That could cause serious or fatal and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained

properly can strike other people, WARNING (Continued)
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
better to secure a forward-facing
{ WARNING child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
Never do this. child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
Never hold an infant or a
passenger seat as far back
child while riding in a vehicle.
as it will go.
Due to crash forces, an infant
or a child will become so heavy
it is not possible to hold it during
a crash. For example, in a crash
at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a
{ WARNING
5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly Never do this.
become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on
Children who are up against,
a person's arms. An infant should
or very close to, any airbag when
be secured in an appropriate
it inflates can be seriously injured
restraint.
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular

add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there { WARNING
A: Add-on child restraints, which are many kinds of restraints
available for children with A young child's hip bones are still
are purchased by the vehicle so small that the vehicle's regular
owner, are available in four basic special needs.
safety belt may not remain low
types. Selection of a particular on the hip bones, as it should.
restraint should take into { WARNING Instead, it may settle up around
consideration not only the child's the child's abdomen. In a crash,
weight, height, and age but also To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants the belt would apply force on a
whether or not the restraint will
need complete support. This is body area that is unprotected by
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. because an infant's neck is not any bony structure. This alone
fully developed and its head could cause serious or fatal
For most basic types of child injuries. To reduce the risk of
restraints, there are many weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, serious or fatal injuries during a
different models available.
an infant in a rear-facing child crash, young children should
When purchasing a child
restraint settles into the restraint, always be secured in appropriate
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle. so the crash forces can be child restraints.
If it is, the restraint will have a distributed across the strongest
label saying that it meets federal part of an infant's body, the back
motor vehicle safety standards. and shoulders. Infants should
The restraint manufacturer's always be secured in rear-facing
instructions that come with the child restraints.
restraint state the weight and
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of
A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. the vehicle's safety belt system.
provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a
surface against the back of the child to see out the window.
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child the LATCH system. See Lower In some areas of the United States
Restraint in the Vehicle Anchors and Tethers for Children and Canada, Certified Child
(LATCH System) on page 3‑57 for Passenger Safety Technicians
more information. Children can be (CPSTs) are available to inspect
{ WARNING endangered in a crash if the child and demonstrate how to correctly
A child can be seriously injured restraint is not properly secured in use and install child restraints.
or killed in a crash if the child the vehicle. In the U.S., refer to the National
restraint is not properly secured When securing an add-on child Highway Traffic Safety
restraint, refer to the instructions Administration (NHTSA) website
in the vehicle. Secure the child
that come with the restraint which to locate the nearest child safety
restraint properly in the vehicle
may be on the restraint itself or in a seat inspection station. For CPST
using the vehicle safety belt or
booklet, or both, and to this manual. availability in Canada, check with
LATCH system, following the Transport Canada or the Provincial
instructions that came with that The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not Ministry of Transportation office.
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual. available, obtain a replacement Securing the Child Within the
copy from the manufacturer. Child Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, Keep in mind that an unsecured
the child restraint must be secured child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
{ WARNING
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle people in the vehicle. Be sure to A child can be seriously injured
seats by lap belts or the lap belt properly secure any child restraint or killed in a crash if the child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by in the vehicle — even when no is not properly secured in the
child is in it. child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Front Seat Position) on page 3‑78

WARNING (Continued)
for more information, including
Restraint important safety information.
According to accident statistics, Even if the passenger sensing
A label on the sun visor says, system or airbag switch
children and infants are safer “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
when properly restrained in a child has turned off the right front
the front.” This is because the risk passenger frontal airbag, no
restraint system or infant restraint to the rear-facing child is so great,
system secured in a rear seating system is fail-safe. No one can
if the airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will
position.
not deploy under some unusual
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
{ WARNING circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
seat, including: an infant or a child A child in a rear-facing child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; restraint can be seriously Secure rear-facing child
a child riding in a forward-facing injured or killed if the right restraints in a rear seat, even if
child seat; an older child riding in a front passenger airbag inflates. the airbag is off. If you secure a
booster seat; and children, who are This is because the back of the forward-facing child restraint in
large enough, using safety belts. rear-facing child restraint would the right front seat, always move
If a child restraint is secured in the be very close to the inflating the front passenger seat as far
right front passenger seat, and the airbag. A child in a forward-facing back as it will go. It is better to
vehicle has a switch in the glove child restraint can be seriously secure the child restraint in a
box to manually turn off the right injured or killed if the right front rear seat.
front passenger airbag, see Airbag passenger airbag inflates and the
On-Off Switch on page 3‑37 and passenger seat is in a forward
Securing Child Restraints (Rear position.
Seat Position) on page 3‑66 or
(Continued)
Securing Child Restraints (Right
Front Seat Position) on page 3‑69
or Securing Child Restraints (Center
Depending on where you place Lower Anchors and

{ WARNING the child restraint and the size of
Tethers for Children
the child restraint, you may not
A child in a child restraint in the be able to access adjacent safety (LATCH System)
center front seat can be badly belt assemblies or LATCH anchors
injured or killed by the frontal The LATCH system holds a child
for additional passengers or restraint during driving or in a crash.
airbags if they inflate. Never child restraints. Adjacent seating
secure a child restraint in the This system is designed to make
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier.
center front seat. It is always child restraint prevents access to The LATCH system uses anchors in
better to secure a child restraint or interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the
in a rear seat. safety belt. child restraint that are made for use
If the vehicle does not have with the LATCH system.
Do not use child restraints in the a rear seat that will accommodate Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
center front seat position. a rear-facing child restraint, a child restraint is properly installed
rear-facing child restraint should using the anchors, or use the
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the not be installed in the vehicle, vehicle's safety belts to secure the
even if the airbag is off. restraint, following the instructions
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is Wherever a child restraint is that came with that restraint, and
compatible with this vehicle. installed, be sure to secure the also the instructions in this manual.
child restraint properly.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some Keep in mind that an unsecured
may fit in certain seating positions child restraint can move around in a
better than others. Always make collision or sudden stop and injure
sure the child restraint is properly people in the vehicle. Be sure to
secured. properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
When installing a child restraint Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor

with a top tether, you must also
use either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a
child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you Lower anchors (A) are metal A top tether (A, C) anchors the
with instructions on how to use the bars built into the vehicle. top of the child restraint to the
child restraint and its attachments. There are two lower anchors for vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
The following explains how to each LATCH seating position that into the vehicle. The top tether
attach a child restraint with these will accommodate a child restraint attachment (B) on the child restraint
attachments in your vehicle. with lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
Not all vehicle seating positions or
forward movement and rotation of
child restraints have lower anchors the child restraint during driving or
and attachments or top tether
in a crash.
anchors and attachments.
Your child restraint may have Lower Anchor and Top Tether
a single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have
a top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether Regular Cab — Three-Passenger
be attached. Be sure to read and Front Seat
follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
Regular Cab — Two-Passenger i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
Front Seat positions with top tether anchors.
Do not install a child restraint
in the center front seat position.
See Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat Position) on page 3‑66
or Securing Child Restraints (Right
or Securing Child Restraints (Center
For crew and extended cab models,

the rear outboard seating positions
have exposed metal lower anchors
located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat For regular cab models, there is an Regular Cab
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating anchor symbol on the covers to Do not install a child restraint in the
positions with top tether anchors. assist you in locating the top tether center seat position. See Securing
anchors. Child Restraints (Rear Seat
j (Lower Anchor): Seating Position) on page 3‑66 or Securing
positions with two lower anchors.
Child Restraints (Right Front Seat
Position) on page 3‑69 or Securing
Child Restraints (Center Front Seat
Position) on page 3‑78 for more
information.
For regular cab models, the top For crew and extended cab models, Do not secure a child restraint in a
tether anchors are located under the top tether anchors are the loops position without a top tether anchor
covers on the back panel behind located near the top of the seatback if a national or local law requires
the passenger seat. Remove the for each rear seating position. that the top tether be attached, or if
trim plug to access the anchor. These loops will be used to route the instructions that come with the
Be sure to use an anchor located the top tether through, as well as, to child restraint say that the top tether
on the same side of the vehicle as secure the top tether in the vehicle. must be attached.
the seating position where the child Be sure to use an anchor (loop) According to accident statistics,
restraint will be placed. located on the same side of the children and infants are safer
vehicle as the seating position when properly restrained in a child
where the child restraint will be restraint system or infant restraint
placed. system secured in a rear seating
Be sure to read the instructions position. See Where to Put the
following to properly install a child Restraint on page 3‑56 for
restraint using these loops. additional information.
Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab

Similar
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH { WARNING { WARNING
System Do not attach more than one Children can be seriously injured
child restraint to a single anchor, or strangled if a shoulder belt
{ WARNING except for the center top tether is wrapped around their neck
anchors in the crew and extended and the safety belt continues to
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cabs. Attaching more than one tighten. Buckle any unused safety
not attached to anchors, the child child restraint to a single anchor belts behind the child restraint
restraint will not be able to protect could cause the anchor or so children cannot reach them.
the child correctly. In a crash, the attachment to come loose or even Pull the shoulder belt all the way
child could be seriously injured break during a crash. A child or out of the retractor to set the lock,
or killed. Install a LATCH-type others could be injured. To reduce if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint properly using the the risk of serious or fatal injuries child restraint has been installed.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety during a crash, attach only one
belts to secure the restraint, child restraint per anchor.
following the instructions that Notice: Do not let the LATCH
came with the child restraint and attachments rub against the
the instructions in this manual. vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear 1.3. Remove the cover to

seat with a safety belt buckled. expose the anchor.
This could damage the safety 1.4. Route, attach, and tighten
belt or the seat. Unbuckle and the top tether according
return the safety belt to its to your child restraint
stowed position, before folding instructions and the
the seat. following instructions:
Regular Cab Models
1. If the child restraint manufacturer If the position you are using
recommends that the top tether has an adjustable headrest
be attached, attach and tighten or head restraint and you
the top tether to the top tether are using a single tether,
anchor, if your vehicle has raise the headrest or head
one. Refer to the child restraint restraint and route the
instructions and the following tether under the headrest
steps: or head restraint and in
1.1. Pull the passenger If the position you are using between the headrest or
seatback forward by pulling head restraint posts.
has an adjustable headrest
the recliner handle upward or head restraint and you
to access the top tether are using a dual tether,
anchor. See Reclining route the tether around the
Seatbacks on page 3‑6 headrest or head restraint.
for additional information.
1.2. Find the top tether anchor.
2. See Securing Child Restraints Crew and Extended Cab Models 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
(Rear Seat Position) on 1. Attach and tighten the recommends that the top tether
page 3‑66 or Securing Child lower attachments to the be attached, attach and tighten
Restraints (Right Front Seat lower anchors. If the child the top tether to the top tether
Position) on page 3‑69 or restraint does not have lower anchor (loop), if your vehicle has
Securing Child Restraints attachments or the desired one. Refer to the child restraint
(Center Front Seat Position) on seating position does not have instructions and the following
page 3‑78 for instructions on lower anchors, secure the child steps:
installing the child restraint restraint with the top tether and
using the safety belts. the safety belts. Refer to your
3. Before placing a child in the child restraint manufacturer
child restraint, make sure instructions and the instructions
it is securely held in place. in this manual.
To check, grasp the child 1.1. Find the lower anchors
restraint at the LATCH path for the desired seating
and attempt to move it position.
side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth.
There should be no more than 1.2. Put the child restraint on
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for the seat.
proper installation. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child Example — Rear Driver Side
restraint to the lower Position
anchors.
restraint post, and 2.3. When using a child restraint

under the center with a top tether in the rear
shoulder belt (C). passenger position:
C. Attach the top A. Raise the headrest
tether (B) to or head restraint.
the top tether B. Route the top
anchor (loop) (D) tether (B) between
at the center rear the headrest or
seating position. head restraint posts,
2.2. When using a child restraint through the loop
with a top tether in the rear on the passenger
center position: side and behind the
Example — Rear Driver Side
A. Route the top inboard headrest or
Position head restraint post.
tether (B) through
2.1. When using a child restraint the center loop (D), C. Attach the top
with a top tether in the rear and behind the tether (B) to
driver side position: inboard passenger the top tether
A. Raise the headrest side headrest or anchor (loop) (D)
or head restraint. head restraint post. at the center rear
B. Attach the top seating position.
B. Route the top
tether (B) between tether (B) to the
the headrest or top tether anchor
head restraint posts, (loop) at the rear
through the loop (A), passenger side
behind the inboard seating position.
headrest or head
2.4. Tighten the top tether Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
when and as the child
restraint manufacturer's
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat Position)
instructions say. When securing a child restraint in
When the top tether is
{ WARNING a rear seating position, study the
tightened, the anchor (loop) instructions that came with the
A crash can damage the child restraint to make sure it is
may bend. This is normal LATCH system in the vehicle.
and will not damage the compatible with this vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
vehicle. If the child restraint has the
not properly secure the child
3. Before placing a child in the restraint, resulting in serious LATCH system, see Lower Anchors
child restraint, make sure and Tethers for Children (LATCH
injury or even death in a crash.
it is securely held in place. System) on page 3‑57 for how and
To help make sure the LATCH
To check, grasp the child where to install the child restraint
system is working properly after using LATCH. If a child restraint
restraint at the LATCH path a crash, see your dealer to have
and attempt to move it is secured in the vehicle using a
the system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. necessary replacements made
There should be no more than see Lower Anchors and Tethers
as soon as possible. for Children (LATCH System) on
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for
proper installation. page 3‑57 for top tether anchor
If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations.
and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a
crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
may be needed. if a national or local law requires
New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
system was not being used at child restraint say that the top strap
the time of the crash. must be anchored.

forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint For crew cab second row 3. Push the latch plate into the
needs to be installed in the rear seatings positions, tilt the latch buckle until it clicks.
seat, be sure to read Where to plate to adjust the belt if needed. Position the release button on
Put the Restraint on page 3‑56. the buckle so that the safety belt
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
the seat. necessary.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑57 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure
it is securely held in place.
To check, grasp the child
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down restraint at the safety belt
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the path and attempt to move it
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth.
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, When the child restraint is
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back properly installed, there should
into the retractor. When installing be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)
a forward-facing child restraint, of movement.
it may be helpful to use your To remove the child restraint,
knee to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of If the top tether is attached to a top
the retractor to make sure tether anchor, disconnect it.
the retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front Seat
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Position) A child in a rear-facing child fail-safe. No one can guarantee

restraint can be seriously that an airbag will not deploy
With Passenger Sensing injured or killed if the right under some unusual
System front passenger airbag inflates. circumstance, even though
This vehicle has airbags. A rear This is because the back of the it is turned off.
seat is a safer place to secure rear-facing child restraint would Secure rear-facing child
a forward-facing child restraint. be very close to the inflating restraints in a rear seat, even if
See Where to Put the Restraint on airbag. A child in a forward-facing the airbag is off. If you secure a
page 3‑56. child restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in
injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move
In addition, the vehicle may have a
passenger airbag inflates and the the front passenger seat as far
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front passenger seat is in a forward back as it will go. It is better to
passenger frontal airbag under position. secure the child restraint in a
certain conditions. See Passenger The vehicle may have a rear seat.
Sensing System on page 3‑40 and passenger sensing system which
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator See Passenger Sensing System
is designed to turn off the right on page 3‑40 for additional
on page 5‑23 for more information front passenger frontal airbag
on this, including important safety information.
under certain conditions.
information.
Even if the passenger sensing If the vehicle does not have
A label on the sun visor says, system, if equipped, has turned
“Never put a rear-facing child seat a rear seat that will accommodate
off the right front passenger a rear-facing child restraint, a
in the front.” This is because the risk
frontal airbag, no system is rear-facing child restraint should not
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys. (Continued) be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
If the child restraint has the You will be using the lap-shoulder
LATCH system, see Lower Anchors belt to secure the child restraint in
and Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions
System) on page 3‑57 for how and that came with the child restraint.
where to install the child restraint 1. Move the seat as far back as
using LATCH. If you secure a child it will go before securing the
restraint using a safety belt and forward-facing child restraint.
it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing
(LATCH System) on page 3‑57 system, if equipped, has turned
for top tether anchor locations. off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, the off indicator
Do not secure a child seat in a in the passenger airbag status
position without a top tether anchor indicator should light and stay 4. Push the latch plate into the
if a national or local law requires lit when you start the vehicle. buckle until it clicks.
that the top tether be anchored, or if See Passenger Airbag Status
the instructions that come with the Position the release button so
Indicator on page 5‑23. that the safety belt could be
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. 2. Put the child restraint on quickly unbuckled if necessary.
the seat.
forward-facing child restraints have 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
a top tether, and that the tether be the lap and shoulder portions of
attached. the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
7. If the vehicle does not have a

rear seat and the child restraint
has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions regarding the use
of the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 5 and 6.
If the vehicle is equipped with With Airbag Off Switch

a passenger sensing system,
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
{ WARNING
and when the passenger sensing
seat is a safer place to secure A child in a rear-facing child
system has turned off the right front
a forward-facing child restraint. restraint can be seriously
passenger frontal airbag, the off
See Where to Put the Restraint on injured or killed if the right
indicator in the passenger airbag
page 3‑56. front passenger airbag inflates.
status indicator should light and
stay lit when you start the vehicle. There may be a switch in the glove This is because the back of the
box that you can use to turn off the rear-facing child restraint would
If a child restraint has been installed
right front passenger frontal airbag. be very close to the inflating
and the on indicator is lit, see
See Airbag On-Off Switch on airbag. A child in a forward-facing
“If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
page 3‑37 for more information, child restraint can be seriously
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
including important safety injured or killed if the right front
System on page 3‑40 for more
information. passenger airbag inflates and the
information.
A label on the sun visor says, passenger seat is in a forward
To remove the child restraint, position.
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
in the front unless airbag is off.” This (Continued)
let it return to the stowed position.
is because the risk to the rear-facing
If the top tether is attached to a
child is so great, if the airbag
top tether anchor, disconnect it.
deploys.
If the child restraint has the LATCH

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING system, see Lower Anchors and
Even if the airbag switch If the airbag readiness light System) on page 3‑57 for how and
has turned off the right front ever comes on and stays on, it where to install the child restraint
passenger frontal airbag, no means that something may be using LATCH. If a child restraint is
system is fail-safe. No one can wrong with the airbag system. secured using a safety belt and
guarantee that an airbag will not For example, the right front it uses a top tether, see Lower
deploy under some unusual passenger airbag could inflate Anchors and Tethers for Children
circumstance, even though it is even though the airbag on-off (LATCH System) on page 3‑57
turned off. switch is turned off. for top tether anchor locations.
Secure rear-facing child To help avoid injury to yourself or Do not secure a child restraint in a
restraints in a rear seat, even if others, have the vehicle serviced position without a top tether anchor
the airbag is off. If you secure a right away. See Airbag Readiness if a national or local law requires
forward-facing child restraint in Light on page 5‑20 for more that the top tether be anchored, or if
the right front seat, always move information, including important the instructions that come with the
the front passenger seat as far safety information. child restraint say that the top strap
back as it will go. It is better to must be anchored.
secure the child restraint in a If the vehicle does not have In Canada, the law requires that
rear seat. a rear seat that will accommodate forward-facing child restraints have
a rear-facing child restraint, a a top tether, and that the tether be
rear-facing child restraint should not attached.
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
belt to secure the child restraint in the lap and shoulder portions of
this position. Follow the instructions the vehicle's safety belt through
that came with the child restraint. or around the restraint. The child
1. Move the seat as far back as restraint instructions will show
it will go before securing the you how.
forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice
but to install a rear-facing child
restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child
restraint has been installed.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
When the airbag off switch out of the retractor to set the
has turned off the right front lock. When the retractor lock is
passenger frontal airbag, the off set, the belt can be tightened but
indicator in the airbag off light not pulled out of the retractor.
should light and stay lit when
you start the vehicle. See Airbag
On-Off Light on page 5‑21. 4. Push the latch plate into the
2. Put the child restraint on buckle until it clicks.
the seat. Position the release button so
that the safety belt could be
quickly unbuckled if necessary.
7. If your vehicle does not have If you turned the airbag off with
a rear seat and your child the switch, turn on the right front
restraint has a top tether, follow passenger airbag when you remove
the child restraint manufacturer's the child restraint from the vehicle
instructions regarding the use unless the person who will be sitting
of the top tether. See Lower there is a member of a passenger
Anchors and Tethers for airbag risk group. See Airbag
Children (LATCH System) on On-Off Switch on page 3‑37
page 3‑57. for more information, including
8. Before placing a child in the important safety information.
child restraint, make sure it is Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the This vehicle has airbags. A rear
6. To tighten the belt, push down
safety belt path and attempt seat is a safer place to secure
on the child restraint, pull the
to move it side to side and a forward-facing child restraint.
shoulder portion of the belt to
back and forth. When the child See Where to Put the Restraint on
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
restraint is properly installed, page 3‑56.
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than A label on the sun visor says,
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. “Never put a rear-facing child seat
may be helpful to use your knee To remove the child restraint, in the front.” This is because the risk
to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and to the rear-facing child is so great,
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position. if the airbag deploys.
Try to pull the belt out of If the top tether is attached to a top
the retractor to make sure tether anchor, disconnect it.
Steps 5 and 6.
Never put a rear-facing child If the child restraint has the In Canada, the law requires that
restraint in the right front passenger LATCH system, see Lower Anchors forward-facing child restraints have
seat. Here is why: and Tethers for Children (LATCH a top tether, and that the tether be
System) on page 3‑57 for how and attached.
{ WARNING where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
A child in a rear-facing child restraint using a safety belt and this position. Follow the instructions
restraint can be seriously it uses a top tether, see Lower that came with the child restraint.
injured or killed if the right front Anchors and Tethers for Children
passenger's airbag inflates. (LATCH System) on page 3‑57 1. Move the seat as far back as
This is because the back of for top tether anchor locations. it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
the rear-facing child restraint Do not secure a child seat in a
would be very close to the position without a top tether anchor 2. Put the child restraint on
inflating airbag. Always secure if a national or local law requires the seat.
a rear-facing child restraint in a that the top tether be anchored, or if 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
rear seat. the instructions that come with the the lap and shoulder portions of
child restraint say that the top strap the vehicle's safety belt through
must be anchored. or around the restraint. The child
If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat that will accommodate restraint instructions will show
a rear-facing child restraint, a you how.
rear-facing child restraint should not
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Make sure the release button is lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
positioned so you would be able set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
to unbuckle the safety belt not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
quickly if necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of
the retractor to make sure
Steps 5 and 6.
7. If your child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Center Front Seat
regarding the use of the top Position)
tether. See Lower Anchors and
System) on page 3‑57 for more
{ WARNING
information. A child in a child restraint in the
8. Before placing a child in the center front seat can be badly
child restraint, make sure it is injured or killed by the frontal
securely held in place. To check, airbags if they inflate. Never
grasp the child restraint at the secure a child restraint in the
safety belt path and attempt to center front seat. It is always
move it side to side and back better to secure a child restraint
and forth. When the child in a rear seat.
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
Do not use child restraints in the
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
center front seat position.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Glove Box

Compartments Lift up on the glove box lever to
open it.
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Cupholders
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 For vehicles equipped with an
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 instrument panel storage area, it is Vehicles with cupholders have
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 located above the glove box. them located on and behind the
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 center console and in the rear seat
armrest. Pull the loop down on the
rear seat armrest to access the
cupholders.
Pull downward on the cover to
access the cupholders behind the
center console.
Armrest Storage
Vehicles with a rear seat
armrest have two cupholders.
Pull the armrest down from the rear
seatback to access the cupholders.
Access the storage area by
pressing and holding in the driver
side of the handle and pull out on
the exposed portion of the handle.
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage

Vehicles with an upper and lower
center console storage area have
cupholders included.
Pull the lever (A) up to access the

upper storage area. Raise the upper
storage bin, then pull the lever (B)
up to access the lower storage area.
Use the key to lock and unlock the
lower storage area.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Oil Pressure

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Messages

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-19 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Controls Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-20
Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-42
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5 Engine Cooling System
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-24
Malfunction Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-45
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Brake System Warning Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-45
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-46
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-46
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Indicators Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-29 Object Detection System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-29 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-30 Ride Control System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-31 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-48
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-31 Anti-Theft Alarm System
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Starting the Vehicle
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-32 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Controls To adjust the steering wheel:

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-50 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Steering Wheel the lever.
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-51 Adjustment 2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization 3. Release the lever to lock the
(with DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
Universal Remote System while driving.
Universal Remote System . . . 5-61
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
The tilt lever is located on the lower

left side of the steering column.
Steering Wheel Controls Radio Selecting Tracks on an iPod or

To select preset or favorite radio USB Device (Vehicles without a
stations: Navigation System)
1. Press and hold w or c x
Press and release w or c x to
go to the next or previous radio while listening to a song until
station stored as a preset or the contents of the current folder
favorite. display on the radio display.
CD/DVD 2. Press and release w or c x

to scroll up or down the list, then
To select tracks on a CD/DVD:
press and hold w, or press ¨ to
Press and release w or c x to play the highlighted track.
go to the next or previous track. Navigating Folders on an iPod or
USB Device (Vehicles without a
If equipped, some audio controls Navigation System):
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. 1. Press and hold w or c x
w / c x (Next/Previous): while listening to a song until
Press to select preset or favorite the contents of the current folder
radio stations, select tracks on a display on the radio display.
CD/DVD, or navigate an iPod or 2. Press and hold c x to go
USB device. back to the previous folder list.
3. Press and release w or c x Navigating an iPod or USB Device c x (End): Press to reject an
to scroll up or down the list. on the Music Navigator Screen incoming call, or end a current call.
(Vehicles with a Navigation
. To select a folder, press System) SRCE (Source/Voice
and hold w, or press Recognition): Press to switch
¨ when the folder is 1. Press and release w or c x between the radio and CD, and
highlighted. to select the next or previous for equipped vehicles, the DVD,
track within the selected front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
. To go back further in category.
the folder list, press and For vehicles with the navigation
2. Press and hold w or c x to system, press and hold this
hold c x. button for longer than one second
move quickly through the tracks
Navigating an iPod or USB Device within the selected category. to initiate voice recognition.
on the Main Audio Screen See “Voice Recognition” in the
(Vehicles with a Navigation 3. Press and release ¨ to move up Navigation System manual for
System) one track within the selected more information.
category. ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the
1. Press and release w or c x
to select the next or previous b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to next radio station while in AM,
silence the vehicle speakers only. FM, or XM™.
track within the selected
category. Press again to turn the sound on. For vehicles with or without a
For vehicles with Bluetooth or navigation system:
2. Press and hold w or c x to OnStar systems, press and hold
move quickly through the tracks. for longer than two seconds to Press ¨ to go to the next track or
interact with those systems. chapter while sourced to the CD
3. Press and release ¨ to move up or DVD slot.
See Bluetooth on page 7‑50 and
one track within the selected
the OnStar Owner's Guide for
category.
more information.
Press ¨ to select a track or a folder Horn 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):

when navigating folders on an iPod Turn the band up for more frequent
To sound the horn, press the center
or USB device. wipes or down for less frequent
pad on the steering wheel.
wipes.
For vehicles with a navigation
system: Windshield Wiper/Washer 6 (Low Speed): Slow
wipes.
1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep
is heard, to place the radio into ? (High Speed): Fast wipes.
SCAN mode. A station will play Clear ice and snow from the wiper
for five seconds before moving blades before using them. If frozen
to the next station. to the windshield, carefully loosen or
2. To stop the SCAN function, thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
press ¨ again. Blade Replacement on page 10‑41.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol
While listening to a CD/DVD, press to control the windshield wipers. Heavy snow or ice can overload the
and hold ¨ to quickly move forward 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8, wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
through the tracks. Release to stop then release. Several wipes, hold stop the motor until it cools down.
on the desired track. the band on 8 longer.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to 9 (Off): Turns the windshield
increase or to decrease the volume. wipers off.
Windshield Washer Compass To adjust for compass variance, use

the following procedure:
The vehicle may have a compass in
{ WARNING the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
In freezing weather, do not use Compass Zone
the washer until the windshield 1. Do not set the compass zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon when the vehicle is moving.
is warmed. Otherwise the leaving the factory. Your dealer
washer fluid can form ice on the Only set it when the vehicle
will set the correct zone for your is in P (Park).
windshield, blocking your vision. location.
Press the vehicle information
Under certain circumstances,
L (Washer Fluid): Push the button until PRESS V TO
such as during a long-distance,
paddle marked with the windshield cross-country trip or moving to CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
washer symbol at the top of the a new state or province, it will displays. Or, if the vehicle does
multifunction lever, to spray washer be necessary to compensate for not have DIC buttons, press the
fluid on the windshield. The wipers compass variance by resetting the trip odometer reset stem until
clear the window and then either zone through the DIC if the zone CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
stop or return to the preset speed. is not set correctly. displays.
Compass variance is the difference

between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone
where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
4. Press the trip/fuel button It is suggested to calibrate away

until the vehicle heading, from tall buildings, utility wires,
for example, N for North, manhole covers, or other industrial
is displayed in the DIC. structures, if possible.
Or, if the vehicle does not If CAL should ever appear in the
have DIC buttons, press and DIC display, the compass should be
hold the trip odometer reset calibrated.
stem for two seconds to select
the next available variance If the DIC display does not show a
zone. Repeat this step until heading, for example, N for North,
the appropriate variance or the heading does not change
zone is displayed. after making turns, there may be
a strong magnetic field interfering
2. Find the vehicle's current 5. If calibration is necessary, with the compass. Such interference
location and variance zone calibrate the compass. may be caused by a magnetic CB
number on the map. See “Compass Calibration or cell phone antenna mount, a
Procedure” following. magnetic emergency light, magnetic
Zones 1 through 15 are
available. Compass Calibration note pad holder, or any other
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
3. Press the set/reset button to The compass can be manually move the magnetic item, then turn
scroll through and select the calibrated. Only calibrate the on the vehicle and calibrate the
appropriate variance zone. compass in a magnetically clean compass.
and safe location, such as an
open parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
To calibrate the compass, use the 3. Press the set/reset button to Clock
following procedure: start the compass calibration.
Or, if the vehicle does not have AM-FM Radio and AM‐FM
Compass Calibration Procedure DIC buttons, press and hold Radio with CD Player
1. Before calibrating the compass, the trip odometer reset stem
To set the clock:
make sure the compass zone for two seconds to start the
is set to the variance zone in compass calibration. 1. Turn the ignition key to
which the vehicle is located. ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
4. The DIC will display
See “Compass Variance (Zone) CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN then press the O button to turn
Procedure” earlier in this CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle the radio on.
section. in tight circles at less than
2. Press the H button until the hour
Do not operate any switches 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the
numbers begin to flash, then
such as window, sunroof, calibration. The DIC will display
climate controls, or seats during CALIBRATION COMPLETE turn the f knob to increase or
the calibration procedure. for a few seconds when the decrease the hour.
calibration is complete. The DIC
2. Press the vehicle information 3. Press the H button until the
display will then return to the
button until PRESS V TO previous menu. minute numbers begin to flash,
CALIBRATE COMPASS then turn the f knob to increase
displays. Or, if the vehicle or decrease the minutes.
does not have DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer
reset stem until CALIBRATE
COMPASS displays.
4. Press the H button until the 3. Press the softkey located under To change the time default setting
12HR or 24HR time format any one of the tabs to change from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change
that setting. the date default setting from month/
begins to flash, then turn the f
4. To increase the time or date, do day/year to day/month/year:
knob to change the time format.
one of the following: 1. Press the H button and then
5. Press the H button again until . Press the softkey below the the softkey located below the
the clock display stops flashing forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the
selected tab.
to set the currently displayed date MM/DD (month and day),
time, or wait until the flashing . Press the ¨ SEEK button. and DD/MM (day and month)
stops after five seconds and displays.
the current time displayed . Press the \ FWD button.
automatically sets. 2. Press the softkey located below
. Turn the f knob clockwise. the desired option.
MP3 Radios with a Single CD 5. To decrease the time or date, do
or a Single CD and DVD Player 3. Press the H button again to
one of the following: apply the desired option, or let
To adjust the time and date: the screen time out.
. Press the © SEEK button.
1. Turn the ignition key to
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, . Press the s REV button.
then press the O button to turn . Turn the f knob
the radio on. counterclockwise.
2. Press the H button to display
HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year).
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD 5. To decrease the time or date, do Power Outlets
Player one of the following:
Accessory power outlets can
To set the time and date: . Press the © SEEK button. be used to plug in electrical
1. Turn the ignition key to equipment, such as a cell phone,
. Press the s REV button. MP3 player, etc.
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
then press the O button to turn . Turn the f knob The vehicle may have two
the radio on. counterclockwise. accessory power outlets located
below the climate control system,
2. Press the MENU button and To change the time default setting
or may have one accessory power
then the softkey under the H tab from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change
outlet and one cigarette lighter.
the date default setting from month/
to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, The cigarette lighter is designed
day to day/month:
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, to fit only in the receptacle closest
and year). 1. Press the MENU button to the driver.
and then the softkey under
3. Press the softkey located under There may be another accessory
any one of the tabs to change the H tab. power outlet in the rear cargo area.
that setting. 2. Press the softkey located below If the vehicle has a floor console,
4. To increase the time or date, do the forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, there is an accessory power outlet
one of the following: the date MM/DD (month and inside the storage bin and one on
day), and DD/MM (day and the rear of the floor console.
. Press the softkey below the month) displays. Remove the cover to access and
selected tab.
3. Press the softkey located below replace when not in use.
. Press the ¨ SEEK button. the desired option.
. Press the \ FWD button. 4. Press the MENU button again to
apply the desired option, or let
. Turn the f knob clockwise. the screen time out.
The accessory power outlets are Certain power accessory plugs Cigarette Lighter
powered, even when the ignition may not be compatible to the
is in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use accessory power outlet and could To use the cigarette lighter, push it
power outlets while the ignition is in overload vehicle or adapter fuses. in all the way, and let go. When it
LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle's If a problem is experienced, see is ready for use, the lighter pops
battery to run down. your dealer. back out.
When adding electrical equipment, Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
{ WARNING be sure to follow the proper in while it is heating does not let
installation instructions included the lighter back away from the
Power is always supplied to the with the equipment. See Add-On heating element when it is hot.
outlets. Do not leave electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9‑125. Damage from overheating can
equipment plugged in when the occur to the lighter or heating
vehicle is not in use because the Notice: Hanging heavy element, or a fuse could be
equipment from the power blown. Do not hold a cigarette
vehicle could catch fire and cause
outlet can cause damage not lighter in while it is heating.
injury or death.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
The power outlets are designed
Notice: Leaving electrical for accessory power plugs only,
equipment plugged in for an such as cell phone charge cords.
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
The vehicle may have a front Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
ashtray located near the center of lights work together to indicate a
the instrument panel. Pull on the Indicators problem with the vehicle.
door to open it. The ashtray may Warning lights and gauges can
have a cigarette lighter. When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
Notice: If papers, pins, or other before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
flammable items are put in the to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other replacement. Paying attention to check the section that explains what
smoking materials could ignite the warning lights and gauges to do. Follow this manual's advice.
them and possibly damage the could prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
vehicle. Never put flammable Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
items in the ashtray. could be a problem with a vehicle
To remove the ashtray, open the function. Some warning lights come
door and pull the ashtray bin toward on briefly when the engine is started
you. To replace the ashtray, insert to indicate they are working.
the ashtray bin inside the ashtray
door and press down until it
engages.
Instrument Cluster
English Light Duty Premium Shown. Metric, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Similar.
For vehicles with a DURAMAX® Odometer Trip Odometer

Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®
Diesel Supplement for more The odometer shows how far the The trip odometer shows how far
information. vehicle has been driven, in either the vehicle has been driven since
kilometers or miles. the trip odometer was last set
For vehicles with a Hybrid, see to zero.
the Hybrid Supplement for more Engine Hour Meter Display
information. Press the reset button, located on
The Driver Information Center (DIC) the instrument panel cluster next
can also display the number of to the voltmeter, to toggle between
Speedometer hours the engine has run. To display the trip odometer and the regular
The speedometer shows the the engine hours, turn the ignition odometer. Holding the reset button
vehicle speed in both kilometers off, then press and hold the reset for approximately one second while
per hour (km/h) and miles per button for at least four seconds. the trip odometer is displayed will
hour (mph). The hour meter displays for up to reset it.
30 seconds, or until the ignition is
turned on. See Driver Information To display the odometer reading
Center (DIC) on page 5‑33 for more with the ignition off, press the reset
information. button.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
Tachometer Fuel Gauge

The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm). For a description of
how Grade Braking affects vehicle
speed while the Tow/Haul Mode is
activated, see Tow/Haul Mode on
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see
the hybrid supplement for more
information.
English
Metric When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge shows about how much
fuel is left in the fuel tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
The gauge will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but
the vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
When the fuel tank is low the If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
FUEL LEVEL LOW message see the Duramax diesel supplement
appears. See Fuel System for more information.
Messages on page 5‑46 for If the vehicle is a hybrid, see
more information. the hybrid supplement for more
Here are some situations owners information.
can experience with the fuel gauge.
None of these indicate a problem Engine Oil Pressure
with the fuel gauge.
Gauge
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
English
. It takes a little more or less fuel
The engine oil pressure gauge
to fill up than the fuel gauge
shows the engine oil pressure
indicated. For example, the
in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds
gauge may have indicated the
per square inch) when the engine is
tank was half full, but it actually
running.
took a little more or less than
half the fuel tank's capacity to
fill it.
. The gauge goes back to empty
when the ignition is turned off. Metric
Oil pressure can vary with engine Engine Coolant

speed, outside temperature and { WARNING Temperature Gauge
oil viscosity, but if readings are
outside the normal operating range, Do not keep driving if the oil
the oil pressure light comes on. pressure is low. The engine can
See Engine Oil Pressure Light on become so hot that it catches fire.
page 5‑31 for more information. Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
A reading outside the normal have the vehicle serviced.
operating range can be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or
some other problem causing low Notice: Lack of proper engine
oil pressure. Check the vehicle's oil maintenance can damage the
oil as soon as possible. See “OIL engine. The repairs would not be
PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE” covered by the vehicle warranty.
under Engine Oil Messages on Always follow the maintenance
page 5‑45 and Engine Oil on schedule for changing engine oil. Metric
page 10‑7. If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the Duramax diesel supplement
hybrid supplement for more
information.
the gauge reads 100°C (210°F) or Voltmeter Gauge

less. If pulling a load or going up
hills, it is normal for the temperature
to fluctuate and go over the 113°C
(235°F) mark. If the gauge reaches
the 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working
beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑25.
English
information.
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. This gauge indicates the battery
It also provides an indicator of voltage when the ignition is
how hard the vehicle is working. turned on.
During a majority of the operation, When the ignition is on, this gauge
indicates the battery voltage.
When the engine is running, this This condition is normal since the Safety Belt Reminders
gauge shows the condition of the charging system is not able to
charging system. The gauge can provide full power at engine idle. Driver Safety Belt Reminder
transition from a higher to lower or As engine speeds are increased, Light
a lower to higher reading. This is this condition should correct itself
When the engine is started, a chime
normal. If the vehicle is operating as higher engine speeds allow the
sounds for several seconds to
outside the normal operating range, charging system to create maximum
remind a driver to fasten the safety
the charging system light comes power.
belt, unless the driver safety belt is
on. See Charging System Light on The vehicle can only be driven for a already buckled.
page 5‑24 for more information. short time with the readings outside
The voltmeter gauge may also read the normal operating range. If the
lower when in fuel economy mode. vehicle must be driven, turn off all
This is normal. accessories, such as the radio and
Readings outside the normal air conditioner.
operating range can also occur Readings outside the normal
when a large number of electrical operating range indicate a possible
accessories are operating in problem in the electrical system. The safety belt light flashes for
the vehicle and the engine is Have the vehicle serviced as soon several seconds, then comes on
left idling for an extended period. as possible. solid for several more.
This chime and light sequence
are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in
motion. If the driver safety belt is
already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt Airbag Readiness Light

Reminder Light
The system checks the airbag's
For vehicles equipped with the electrical system for possible
passenger safety belt reminder malfunctions. If the light stays
light, several seconds after the on it indicates there is an electrical
engine is started, a chime sounds problem. The system check
for several seconds to remind the This chime and light sequence is includes the airbag sensor, the
front passenger to buckle their repeated if the passenger remains pretensioners, the airbag modules,
safety belt. The passenger safety unbuckled and the vehicle is in the wiring, and the crash sensing
belt light, located on the overhead motion. and diagnostic module. For more
console, comes on and stays on for If the passenger safety belt is information on the airbag system,
several seconds, flashes for several buckled, neither the chime nor the see Airbag System on page 3‑29.
more seconds and then comes on light comes on.
solid for several more.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the
warning light and or chime, remove The airbag readiness light comes
the object from the seat or buckle on solid for a few seconds when the
the safety belt. engine is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.
Airbag On-Off Light Then, after several more seconds,

{ WARNING the status indicator ON or OFF,
If the vehicle has an airbag on-off or either the on or off symbol, will
If the airbag readiness light stays switch, it also has a passenger light to let you know the status of
on after the vehicle is started or airbag status indicator located in the the right front passenger frontal
comes on while driving, it means overhead console. airbag.
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in When the right front passenger
the vehicle might not inflate in a airbag is manually turned off using
the airbag on-off switch in the glove
crash, or they could even inflate
box, the indicator light OFF or the
without a crash. To help avoid
off symbol will come on and stay on
injury, have the vehicle serviced as a reminder that the airbag has
right away. United States been turned off. This light will go off
when the airbag has been turned
If there is a problem with the airbag on. See Airbag On-Off Switch on
system, a Driver Information Center page 3‑37 for more information,
(DIC) message can also come on. including important safety
See Airbag System Messages on information.
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, will light for several
seconds as a system check.
WARNING (Continued)
Do not turn off the passenger
airbag unless the person sitting
there is in a risk group identified
by the national government.
See Airbag On-Off Switch on
page 3‑37 for more on this,
including important safety
information.
United States Canada and Mexico

{ WARNING
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light
If the right front passenger airbag ever comes on and stays on, it
is turned off for a person who is means that something may be
not in a risk group identified by wrong with the airbag system.
the national government, that For example, the right front
person will not have the extra passenger airbag could inflate
protection of an airbag. In a even though the airbag on-off
crash, the airbag will not be able switch is turned off.
to inflate and help protect the (Continued)
person sitting there.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
To help avoid injury to yourself or If the vehicle has one of the
others, have the vehicle serviced indicators pictured in the following
right away. See Airbag Readiness illustrations, then the vehicle has
Light on page 5‑20 for more a passenger sensing system for
information, including important United States
the right front passenger position
safety information. unless there is an airbag off switch
located in the glove box. If there
If the word ON or the on symbol is an airbag off switch, the vehicle
is lit, it means that the right front does not have a passenger system
passenger frontal airbag is enabled system. See Airbag On-Off Switch
(may inflate). See Airbag On-Off on page 3‑37.
Switch on page 3‑37 for more The passenger airbag status Canada and Mexico
information, including important indicator is on the overhead When the vehicle is started, the
safety information. console. See Passenger Sensing passenger airbag status indicator
If, after several seconds, both status System on page 3‑40 for important will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
indicator lights remain on, or if there safety information. for on and off, for several seconds
are no lights at all, there may be a In addition, if the vehicle has a as a system check. Then, after
problem with the lights or the airbag passenger sensing system for the several more seconds, the status
on-off switch. See your dealer for right front passenger position, the indicator will light either ON or OFF,
service. label on the vehicle's sun visor or either the on or off symbol to let
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”. you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is If it does not, have the vehicle

lit on the passenger airbag status { WARNING serviced by your dealer.
indicator, it means that the right The light should go out once
front passenger frontal airbag is If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means the engine starts. If it stays on,
enabled (may inflate). or comes on while driving, there
that something may be wrong
If the word OFF or the off symbol is with the airbag system. To help could be a problem with the
lit on the airbag status indicator, it avoid injury to yourself or others, charging system. A charging system
means that the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right message in the Driver Information
system has turned off the right front Center (DIC) can also appear.
away. See Airbag Readiness
passenger frontal airbag. See Battery Voltage and Charging
Light on page 5‑20 for more
If, after several seconds, both status Messages on page 5‑41 for more
information, including important information. This light could indicate
indicator lights remain on, or if there safety information.
are no lights at all, there may be that there are problems with a
a problem with the lights or the generator drive belt, or that there
passenger sensing system. Charging System Light is an electrical problem. Have it
See your dealer for service. checked right away. If the vehicle
must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner.
For vehicles with a Hybrid, see
the Hybrid Supplement for more
This light comes on briefly when information.
the ignition key is turned to START,
but the engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
Malfunction If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Notice: Modifications made

comes on and stays on while the to the engine, transmission,
Indicator Lamp engine is running, this indicates exhaust, intake, or fuel system
A computer system called OBD II that there is an OBD II problem of the vehicle or the replacement
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second and service is required. of the original tires with
Generation) monitors operation of Malfunctions often are indicated by other than those of the same
the fuel, ignition, and emission the system before any problem is Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
control systems. It ensures that apparent. Being aware of the light can affect the vehicle's emission
emissions are at acceptable levels can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this light
for the life of the vehicle, helping to to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to
produce a cleaner environment. the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to
diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This could
Notice: If the vehicle is also result in a failure to
continually driven with this light pass a required Emission
on, after a while, the emission Inspection/Maintenance
controls might not work as well, test. See Accessories and
the vehicle fuel economy might Modifications on page 10‑3.
not be as good, and the engine
This light should come on when the might not run as smoothly. This light comes on during a
ignition is on, but the engine is not This could lead to costly repairs malfunction in one of two ways:
running, as a check to show it is that might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition
working. If it does not, have the vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire
vehicle serviced by your dealer. increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to The following may correct an

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle
the vehicle: emissions system malfunction: with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
. Reduce vehicle speed. . Make sure the fuel cap is efficiently as designed and can
. Avoid hard accelerations. fully installed. See Filling cause: stalling after start-up,
the Tank on page 9‑88. stalling when the vehicle is
. Avoid steep uphill grades. The diagnostic system can changed into gear, misfiring,
. If towing a trailer, reduce the determine if the fuel cap has hesitation on acceleration,
amount of cargo being hauled been left off or improperly or stumbling on acceleration.
as soon as it is possible. installed. A loose or missing fuel These conditions might go away
cap allows fuel to evaporate into once the engine is warmed up.
If the light continues to flash, when the atmosphere. A few driving
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. trips with the cap properly If one or more of these
Find a safe place to park the installed should turn the light off. conditions occurs, change the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at fuel brand used. It will require at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
. Make sure the electrical system least one full tank of the proper
engine. If the light is still flashing, is not wet. The system could fuel to turn the light off.
follow the previous steps and see be wet if the vehicle was driven
through a deep puddle of water. See Recommended Fuel on
your dealer for service as soon as
The condition is usually page 9‑84.
possible.
corrected when the electrical If none of the above have made
Light On Steady: An emission system dries out. A few driving the light turn off, your dealer can
control system malfunction has trips should turn the light off. check the vehicle. The dealer
been detected on the vehicle.
has the proper test equipment
Diagnosis and service might be
and diagnostic tools to fix any
required.
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs inspection if:
Light
Some state/provincial and . The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if With the ignition on, the brake
local governments may have system warning light comes on
programs to inspect the on-vehicle the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN when the parking brake is set. If the
emission control equipment. vehicle is driven with the parking
For the inspection, the emission while the engine is off.
brake engaged, a chime sounds
system test equipment is connected . The critical emission control when the vehicle speed is greater
to the vehicle’s Data Link systems have not been than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed by
the system. This can happen The vehicle brake system
if the battery has recently consists of two hydraulic circuits.
been replaced or if the battery If one circuit is not working, the
has run down. The diagnostic remaining circuit can still work to
system evaluates critical stop the vehicle. For normal braking
emission control systems during performance, both circuits need to
normal driving. This can take be working
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving. If the warning light comes on and
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the a chime sounds there could be a
wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the brake problem. Have the brake
is needed. inspection, your dealer can system inspected right away.
prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
This light can also come on due to

WARNING (Continued)
Antilock Brake System
low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on
(ABS) Warning Light
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
Metric English
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
This light comes on briefly when the If the light comes on while driving, System (ABS), this light comes on
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. pull off the road and stop carefully. briefly when the engine is started.
If it does not come on then, have it The pedal might be harder to push
or might go closer to the floor. It can If it does not, have the vehicle
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is
take longer to stop. If the light is serviced by your dealer. If the
a problem.
still on, have the vehicle towed for system is working normally the
service. See Towing the Vehicle on indicator light then goes off.
{ WARNING page 10‑103. If the ABS light stays on, turn the
The brake system might not be If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the ignition off. If the light comes on
working properly if the brake hybrid supplement for more while driving, stop as soon as it is
system warning light is on. information. safely possible and turn the ignition
Driving with the brake system off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light
(Continued) stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning Four-Wheel-Drive Light Tow/Haul Mode Light
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is
a problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑27.
The four-wheel-drive light For vehicles with the Tow/Haul
For vehicles with a Driver comes on when a vehicle with Mode feature, this light comes on
Information Center (DIC), see Brake a manual transfer case is shifted when the Tow/Haul Mode has been
System Messages on page 5‑42 for into four-wheel drive and the front activated.
all brake related DIC messages. axle engages. For more information, see Tow/Haul
For vehicles with a Hybrid, see Some delay between the shifting Mode on page 9‑51.
the Hybrid Supplement for more and the light coming on is normal.
information.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 9‑54
StabiliTrak® Indicator The light flashes if the system is When the Light is On Steady
active and is working to assist the
Light driver with directional control of the
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. underinflated.
See StabiliTrak® System on A tire pressure message can
page 9‑70 for more information. accompany the light. See Tire
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see Messages on page 5‑49 for more
the hybrid supplement for more information. Stop as soon as
information. possible, and inflate the tires to
For vehicles with the StabiliTrak the pressure value shown on the
system, this light comes on briefly Tire Pressure Light Tire and Loading Information label.
while starting the engine. See Tire Pressure on page 10‑66
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the When the Light Flashes First and
system is working normally the Then is On Steady
indicator light then goes off. This indicates that there may be
If the light comes on and stays a problem with the Tire Pressure
on while driving, there could be a Monitor System. The light flashes
problem with the StabiliTrak system For vehicles with the Tire Pressure for about a minute and stays on
and the vehicle might need service. Monitor System (TPMS), this light steady for the remainder of the
When this warning light is on, the comes on briefly when the engine ignition cycle. This sequence
StabiliTrak system is off and does is started. It provides information repeats with every ignition cycle.
not limit wheel spin. about tire pressures and the TPMS. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑69 for
more information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Low Fuel Warning Light
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your This light, under the fuel gauge,
{ WARNING dealer. If the system is working comes on briefly while the engine is
normally the indicator light then being started.
Do not keep driving if the oil goes off.
pressure is low. The engine can This light and a chime comes on
become so hot that it catches fire. If the light comes on and stays on, it when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
Someone could be burned. Check means that oil is not flowing through The Driver Information Center also
the oil as soon as possible and the engine properly. The vehicle displays a “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
have the vehicle serviced. could be low on oil and it might message. See Fuel System
have some other system problem. Messages on page 5‑46 for more
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the information. When fuel is added this
hybrid supplement for more light and message should go off. If it
information. does not, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
Security Light Front Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light
For information regarding this light The fog lamp lights come on when The cruise control light comes on
and the vehicle's security system, the fog lamps are in use. whenever the cruise control is set.
see Anti-Theft Alarm System on The lights go out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise
page 2‑12. lamps are turned off. See Fog control is turned off. See Cruise
Lamps on page 6‑6 for more Control on page 9‑73 for more
High-Beam On Light information. information.
This light comes on when the

high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑3 for more
information.
Information Displays The DIC has different displays DIC Buttons

which can be accessed by
pressing the DIC buttons located
Driver Information on the instrument panel, next to
Center (DIC) the steering wheel. If the vehicle
does not have DIC buttons, the trip
The vehicle has a Driver Information
odometer reset stem can be used
Center (DIC).
to access some of the menu items.
The DIC displays information about
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
this vehicle. It also displays warning
vehicle system information, and
messages if a system problem is
warning messages if a system
detected.
problem is detected.
All messages will appear in the
The DIC also allows some features
DIC display located below the
to be customized. See Vehicle
tachometer in the instrument panel The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
cluster. information, customization, and
The DIC comes on when the ignition set/reset buttons. The button
is on. After a short delay, the DIC functions are detailed in the
will display the information that was following pages.
last displayed before the engine 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this
was turned off. button to display the odometer,
trip odometer, fuel range, average
economy, fuel used, timer,
transmission temperature, and
instantaneous economy and Active
Fuel Management™ indicator.
The compass and outside Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer can be reset to
temperature will also be shown (with DIC Buttons) zero by pressing the set/reset
in the display. The temperature button while the trip odometer is
will be shown in °C or °F depending 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button displayed. You can also reset the
on the units selected. to scroll through the following menu trip odometer while it is displayed
items: by pressing and holding the trip
T (Vehicle Information): Press odometer reset stem.
this button to display the oil life, Odometer
units, tire pressure readings for Press the trip/fuel button until The trip odometer has a feature
vehicles with the Tire Pressure ODOMETER displays. This display called the retro-active reset. This
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer shows the distance the vehicle has can be used to set the trip odometer
brake gain and output information been driven in either kilometers (km) to the number of miles (kilometers)
for vehicles with the Integrated or miles. Pressing the trip odometer driven since the ignition was last
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, reset stem will also display the turned on. This can be used if the
engine hours, compass zone odometer. trip odometer is not reset at the
setting, and compass recalibration. beginning of the trip.
To switch between metric and
U (Customization): Press this English measurements, see “Units” To use the retro-active reset feature,
button to customize the feature later in this section. press and hold the set/reset button
settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle for at least four seconds. The trip
Personalization (with DIC Buttons) Trip Odometer odometer will display the number of
on page 5‑52 for more information. Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP kilometers (km) or miles driven since
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to displays. This display shows the the ignition was last turned on and
set or reset certain functions and to current distance traveled in either the vehicle was moving. Once the
turn off or acknowledge messages kilometers (km) or miles since the vehicle begins moving, the trip
on the DIC. last reset for the trip odometer. odometer will accumulate mileage.
Pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will also display the trip
odometer.
For example, if the vehicle was For example, if driving in traffic and Fuel Used
driven 8 km (5 miles) before it making frequent stops, this display Press the trip/fuel button until
is started again, and then the may read one number, but if the FUEL USED displays. This display
retro-active reset feature is vehicle is driven on a freeway, shows the number of liters (L) or
activated, the display will show the number may change even gallons (gal) of fuel used since the
8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle though the same amount of fuel last reset of this menu item. To reset
begins moving, the display will is in the fuel tank. This is because the fuel used information, press
then increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles), different driving conditions produce and hold the set/reset button while
8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc. different fuel economies. Generally, FUEL USED is displayed.
freeway driving produces better
Fuel Range fuel economy than city driving. Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until Fuel range cannot be reset. Press the trip/fuel button until
FUEL RANGE displays. This display TIMER displays. This display can
shows the approximate number of Average Economy
be used as a timer.
remaining kilometers (km) or miles Press the trip/fuel button
the vehicle can be driven without until AVG ECONOMY displays. To start the timer, press the
refueling. The display will show This display shows the set/reset button while TIMER is
LOW if the fuel level is low. approximate average liters per displayed. The display will show
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles the amount of time that has passed
The fuel range estimate is based since the timer was last reset, not
on an average of the vehicle's fuel per gallon (mpg). This number is
calculated based on the number of including time the ignition is off.
economy over recent driving history Time will continue to be counted as
and the amount of fuel remaining L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset. long as the ignition is on, even if
in the fuel tank. This estimate will another display is being shown
change if driving conditions change. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press
and hold the set/reset button. on the DIC. The timer will record
up to 99 hours, 59 minutes, and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset This display shows the Vehicle Information Menu
button briefly while TIMER is instantaneous fuel economy in Items (with DIC Buttons)
displayed. liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
or miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike T (Vehicle Information): Press
To reset the timer to zero, press this button to scroll through the
and hold the set/reset button while average economy, this screen
cannot be reset. following menu items:
TIMER is displayed.
An Active Fuel Management Oil Life
Transmission Temperature indicator displays on the right Press the vehicle information
Press the trip/fuel button until side of the DIC, while INST ECON button until OIL LIFE REMAINING
TRANS TEMP displays. This displays on the left side. Active displays. This display shows an
display shows the temperature of Fuel Management allows the engine estimate of the oil's remaining
the automatic transmission fluid to operate on either four or eight useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
in either degrees Celsius (°C) or cylinders, depending on driving REMAINING on the display, that
degrees Fahrenheit (°F). demands. When Active Fuel means 99% of the current oil life
Management is active, V4 will remains. The engine oil life system
Instantaneous Economy and
display on the DIC. When Active will alert you to change the oil on
Active Fuel Management™
Fuel Management is inactive, a schedule consistent with your
Indicator
V8 will display. See Active Fuel driving conditions.
If the vehicle has this display, press Management® on page 9‑44 for
the trip/fuel button until INST ECON more information. When the remaining oil life is low,
V8 displays. This display shows the the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
current fuel economy at a particular Blank Display message will appear on the display.
moment and will change frequently This display shows no information. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
as driving conditions change. under Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑45. You should change the
oil as soon as you can. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Tire Pressure Trailer Gain and Output

Schedule in this manual. If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure On vehicles with the Integrated
See Scheduled Maintenance on Monitor System (TPMS), the Trailer Brake Control (ITBC)
page 11‑2 for more information. pressure for each tire can be viewed system, the trailer brake display
Remember, you must reset the in the DIC. The tire pressure will be appears in the DIC. Press the
OIL LIFE display after each oil shown in either kilopascals (kPa) vehicle information button until
change. It will not reset itself. Also, or pounds per square inch (psi). TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE Press the vehicle information display.
display accidentally at any time button until the DIC displays TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer
other than when the oil has just FRONT TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## gain setting. This setting can be
been changed. It cannot be reset RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
accurately until the next oil change. information button again until the a trailer connected or disconnected.
To reset the engine oil life system, DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa
see Engine Oil Life System on (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. OUTPUT shows the power output
page 10‑11. to the trailer any time a trailer with
If a low tire pressure condition electric brakes is connected. Output
Units is detected by the system while is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
driving, a message advising you to may appear in the OUTPUT display.
Press the vehicle information button add pressure in a specific tire will
until UNITS displays. This display appear in the display. See Tire To adjust trailer gain see “Integrated
allows you to select between metric Pressure on page 10‑66 and Tire Trailer Brake Control System” under
or English units of measurement. Messages on page 5‑49 for more Towing Equipment on page 9‑112
Once in this display, press the information. for more information.
set/reset button to select between
METRIC or ENGLISH units. If the tire pressure display shows Engine Hours
All of the vehicle information will dashes instead of a value, there Press the vehicle information button
then be displayed in the unit of may be a problem with the vehicle. until ENGINE HOURS displays.
measurement selected. If this consistently occurs, see your This display shows the total number
dealer for service. of hours the engine has run.
Compass Zone Setting Odometer driven since the ignition was last
This display allows for setting the Press the trip odometer reset turned on. This can be used if the
compass zone. See Compass on stem until ODOMETER displays. trip odometer is not reset at the
page 5‑6 for more information. This display shows the distance the beginning of the trip.
vehicle has been driven in either To use the retro-active reset feature,
Compass Recalibration kilometers (km) or miles (mi). press and hold the trip odometer
This display allows for calibrating reset stem for at least four seconds.
the compass. See Compass on Trip Odometer The trip odometer will display
page 5‑6 for more information. Press the trip odometer reset stem the number of kilometers (km) or
until TRIP displays. This display miles (mi) driven since the ignition
Blank Display shows the current distance traveled was last turned on and the vehicle
This display shows no information. in either kilometers (km) or was moving. Once the vehicle
miles (mi) since the last reset begins moving, the trip odometer
Trip Odometer Reset Stem for the trip odometer. will accumulate mileage.
Menu Items (with DIC Buttons) For example, if the vehicle was
The trip odometer can be reset to
Use the trip odometer reset stem zero by pressing and holding the trip driven 8 km (5 miles) before it
to view the odometer and trip odometer reset stem while the trip is started again, and then the
odometer. The Language selection odometer is displayed. retro-active reset feature is
and Engine Hours display can also activated, the display will show
be accessed with the trip odometer The trip odometer has a feature 8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle
reset stem. called the retro-active reset. This begins moving, the display will
can be used to set the trip odometer then increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),
to the number of miles (kilometers) 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
Language Engine Hours 3. Continue to press and hold the

This display allows you to select To display the ENGINE HOURS, trip odometer reset stem to scroll
the language in which the DIC place the ignition in LOCK/OFF or through all of the available
messages will appear. To select a ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and languages.
language: hold the trip odometer reset stem The available languages
1. Press the trip odometer reset for four seconds while viewing the are ENGLISH (default),
stem until ODOMETER displays. ODOMETER. This display shows FRANCAIS (French),
the total number of hours the engine ESPANOL (Spanish),
2. While in the ODOMETER has run. and NO CHANGE.
display, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for Trip Odometer Reset 4. Once the desired language
three seconds until the currently Stem Menu Items is displayed, release the trip
set language displays. (without DIC Buttons) odometer reset stem to set the
choice.
3. Continue to press and hold the Language
trip odometer reset stem to scroll Trip Odometer
through all of the available This display allows you to select
the language in which the DIC Press the trip odometer reset stem
languages. until TRIP displays. This display
messages will appear. To select a
The available selections language: shows the current distance
are ENGLISH (default), traveled in either kilometers (km)
FRANCAIS (French), 1. Press the trip odometer reset or miles (mi) since the last reset
ESPANOL (Spanish), stem until ODOMETER displays. for the trip odometer.
and NO CHANGE. 2. While in the ODOMETER The trip odometer can be reset to
4. Once the desired language display, press and hold the zero by pressing and holding the trip
is displayed, release the trip trip odometer reset stem for odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer reset stem to set the three seconds until the currently odometer is displayed.
choice. set language displays.
The trip odometer has a feature Transmission Temperature To adjust trailer gain see “Integrated
called the retro-active reset. This Press the trip odometer reset Trailer Brake Control System” under
can be used to set the trip odometer stem until TRANS TEMP displays. Towing Equipment on page 9‑112
to the number of miles (kilometers) This display shows the temperature for more information.
driven since the ignition was last of the automatic transmission fluid
turned on. This can be used if the Compass Zone Setting
in either degrees Celsius (°C) or
trip odometer is not reset at the degrees Fahrenheit (°F). This display allows for setting the
beginning of the trip. compass zone. See Compass on
To use the retro-active reset feature, Trailer Gain and Output page 5‑6 for more information.
press and hold the trip odometer On vehicles with the Integrated Compass Recalibration
reset stem for at least four seconds. Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
the trailer brake display appears in This display allows for calibrating
The trip odometer will display
the DIC. Press the trip odometer the compass. See Compass on
the number of kilometers (km)
reset stem until TRAILER GAIN page 5‑6 for more information.
or miles (mi) driven since the
ignition was last turned on and and OUTPUT display. Oil Life
the vehicle was moving. Once the TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer To access this display, the vehicle
vehicle begins moving, the trip gain setting. This setting can be must be in P (Park). Press the trip
odometer will accumulate mileage. adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
For example, if the vehicle was a trailer connected or disconnected. REMAINING displays. This display
driven 8 km (5 miles) before it
OUTPUT shows the power output shows an estimate of the oil's
is started again, and then the
to the trailer any time a trailer with remaining useful life. If you see
retro-active reset feature is
electric brakes is connected. Output 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
activated, the display will show
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes display, that means 99% of the
8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle
may appear in the OUTPUT display. current oil life remains. The engine
begins moving, the display will
oil life system will alert you to
then increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),
change the oil on a schedule
8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
consistent with your driving
conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display. Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” indicate the status of the vehicle BATTERY LOW START
under Engine Oil Messages on or some action may be needed VEHICLE
page 5‑45. You should change to correct a condition. Multiple
the oil as soon as you can. messages may appear one after When the vehicle’s battery is
See Engine Oil on page 10‑7. another. severely discharged, this message
In addition to the engine oil life will display and four chimes
The messages that do not
system monitoring the oil life, will sound. Start the vehicle
require immediate action can be
additional maintenance is immediately. If the vehicle is not
acknowledged and cleared by
recommended in the Maintenance started and the battery continues
Schedule in this manual. pressing V (Set/Reset) or the to discharge, the climate controls,
See Scheduled Maintenance on trip odometer reset stem. heated seats, and audio systems
page 11‑2 for more information. The messages that require will shut off and the vehicle may
immediate action cannot be cleared require a jump start. These systems
Remember, you must reset the will function again after the vehicle
OIL LIFE display after each oil until that action is performed.
is started.
change. It will not reset itself. Also, All messages should be taken
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE seriously and clearing the message
display accidentally at any time does not correct the problem.
other than when the oil has just
The following are the possible
been changed. It cannot be reset
messages and some information
accurately until the next oil change.
about them.
To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑11.
SERVICE BATTERY Brake System Messages SERVICE BRAKES SOON

CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles, this message
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a problem with
displays if there is a problem This message displays along with the brake system. If this message
with the battery charging system. the brake system warning light if appears, stop as soon as possible
Under certain conditions, the there is a problem with the brake and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
charging system light may also turn system. See Brake System Warning vehicle and check for the message
on in the instrument panel cluster. Light on page 5‑27. If this message on the DIC display. If the message
See Charging System Light on appears, stop as soon as possible is still displayed or appears again
page 5‑24. Driving with this problem and turn off the vehicle. Restart the when you begin driving, the brake
could drain the battery. Turn off all vehicle and check for the message system needs service. See your
unnecessary accessories. Have the on the DIC display. If the message dealer.
electrical system checked as soon is still displayed or appears again
as possible. See your dealer. when you begin driving, the brake SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
system needs service as soon as SYSTEM
possible. See your dealer. On vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
this message displays and a chime
may sound when there is a problem
with the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power
is no longer available to the trailer
brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, HOOD OPEN PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

carefully pull your vehicle over
This message displays and a This message displays and a chime
to the side of the road and turn
chime may sound if the hood may sound if the front passenger
the ignition off. Check the wiring
is not fully closed. Stop and turn door is not fully closed and the
connection to the trailer and turn
off the vehicle, check the hood for vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
the ignition back on. If this message
obstructions, and close the hood Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
still displays, either your vehicle or
again. Check to see if the message the door for obstructions, and close
the trailer needs service. See your
still appears on the DIC. the door again. Check to see if the
dealer.
message still appears on the DIC.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
Control System” under Towing (Crew Cab) RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
Equipment on page 9‑112 for more This message displays and a chime
(Crew Cab)
information. may sound if the driver side rear This message displays and a chime
door is not fully closed and the may sound if the passenger side
Door Ajar Messages vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). rear door is not fully closed and the
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
DRIVER DOOR OPEN the door for obstructions, and close Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
This message displays and a chime the door again. Check to see if the the door for obstructions, and close
may sound if the driver door is message still appears on the DIC. the door again. Check to see if the
not fully closed and the vehicle is message still appears on the DIC.
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP

Messages ENGINE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle Notice: If you drive the vehicle
ENGINE HOT A/C while the engine is overheating, while the engine is overheating,
(Air Conditioning) severe engine damage may severe engine damage may
TURNED OFF occur. If an overheat warning occur. If an overheat warning
This message displays when the appears on the instrument panel appears on the instrument panel
engine coolant becomes hotter than cluster and/or DIC, stop the cluster and/or DIC, stop the
the normal operating temperature. vehicle as soon as possible. vehicle as soon as possible.
See Engine Coolant Temperature See Engine Overheating on See Engine Overheating on
Gauge on page 5‑17. To avoid page 10‑25 for more information. page 10‑25 for more information.
added strain on a hot engine, This message displays when the This message displays and a
the air conditioning compressor engine coolant temperature is too chime may sound if the engine
automatically turns off. When hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to cooling system reaches unsafe
the coolant temperature returns idle until it cools down. See Engine temperatures for operation. Stop
to normal, the air conditioning Coolant Temperature Gauge on and turn off the vehicle as soon as
compressor turns back on. page 5‑17. it is safe to do so to avoid severe
You can continue to drive damage. This message clears when
your vehicle. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 10‑28 for the engine has cooled to a safe
If this message continues to appear, information on driving to a safe operating temperature.
have the system repaired by your place in an emergency.
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
Engine Oil Messages OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP Engine Power Messages
ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
This message displays when the while the engine oil pressure This message displays and a
engine oil needs to be changed. is low, severe engine damage chime may sound when the cooling
When you change the engine oil, may occur. If a low oil pressure system temperature gets too hot
be sure to reset the CHANGE warning appears on the Driver and the engine further enters the
ENGINE OIL SOON message. Information Center (DIC), stop engine coolant protection mode.
See Engine Oil Life System on the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑11 for information on how Do not drive the vehicle until the page 10‑25 for more information.
to reset the message. See Engine cause of the low oil pressure is This message also displays when
Oil on page 10‑7 and Scheduled corrected. See Engine Oil on the vehicle's engine power is
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for page 10‑7 for more information. reduced. Reduced engine power
more information. can affect the vehicle's ability
This message displays if low oil
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE pressure levels occur. Stop the to accelerate. If this message
ENGINE vehicle as soon as safely possible is on, but there is no reduction
and do not operate it until the cause in performance, proceed to your
This message displays when the destination. The performance may
of the low oil pressure has been
engine oil becomes hotter than the be reduced the next time the vehicle
corrected. Check the oil as soon
normal operating temperature. Stop is driven. The vehicle may be driven
as possible and have the vehicle
and allow the vehicle to idle until it at a reduced speed while this
serviced by your dealer. See Engine
cools down. See Engine Coolant message is on, but acceleration and
Oil on page 10‑7.
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑17. speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages Object Detection System
FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN Messages
This message displays and a REMOTE KEY PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
chime may sound if the fuel level This message displays if a Remote OWNERS MANUAL
is low. Refuel as soon as possible. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
See Fuel Gauge on page 5‑15 battery is low. The battery needs Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
and Fuel on page 9‑84 for more to be replaced in the transmitter. this message displays if there is
information. See “Battery Replacement” under something interfering with the park
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) assist system. See Ultrasonic
TIGHTEN GAS CAP System Operation on page 2‑3. Parking Assist on page 9‑76 for
This message may display along more information.
with the check engine light on Lamp Messages
the instrument panel cluster if the PARK ASSIST OFF
vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened TURN SIGNAL ON
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
properly. See Malfunction Indicator This message displays and a chime Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
Lamp on page 5‑25. Reinstall sounds if a turn signal is left on for after the vehicle has been started,
the fuel cap fully. See Filling the 1.2 km (0.75 mile). Move the turn this message displays to remind the
Tank on page 9‑88. The diagnostic signal/multifunction lever to the off driver that the URPA system has
system can determine if the fuel position. been turned off. Press the set/reset
cap has been left off or improperly button or the trip odometer reset
installed. A loose or missing fuel stem to acknowledge this message
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the and clear it from the DIC display.
atmosphere. A few driving trips with To turn the URPA system back on,
the cap properly installed should see Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
turn this light and message off. page 9‑76.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST Stop; turn off the engine for at least STABILITRAK OFF
15 seconds; then start the engine
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
again. If this message still comes
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, message displays when you turn
on, it means there is a problem.
this message displays if there is off StabiliTrak, or when the stability
You should see your dealer for
a problem with the URPA system. control has been automatically
service. The vehicle is safe to
Do not use this system to help you disabled. To limit wheel spin
drive; however, you do not have
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist and realize the full benefits of
the benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
on page 9‑76 for more information. the stability enhancement system,
your speed and drive accordingly.
See your dealer for service. you should normally leave
SERVICE TRACTION StabiliTrak on. However, you
Ride Control System CONTROL should turn StabiliTrak off if your
vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice,
Messages If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this or snow and you want to rock your
message displays when there is a vehicle to attempt to free it, or if
SERVICE STABILITRAK problem with the Traction Control you are driving in extreme off-road
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and System (TCS). When this message conditions and require more wheel
this message displays, it means displays, the system will not limit spin. See If the Vehicle is Stuck on
there may be a problem with the wheel spin. Adjust your driving page 9‑23. To turn the StabiliTrak
StabiliTrak system. If you see this accordingly. See your dealer for system on or off, see StabiliTrak®
message, try to reset the system. service. See StabiliTrak® System on System on page 9‑70.
There are several conditions that TRACTION CONTROL OFF Anti-Theft Alarm System
can cause this message to appear.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this Messages
. If the vehicle is overheating, message displays when the Traction
which could occur if StabiliTrak Control System (TCS) is turned off. SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
activates continuously for an Adjust your driving accordingly. See SYSTEM
extended period of time. StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑70 This message displays when there
. If the brake system warning for more information. is a problem with the theft-deterrent
light is on. See Brake System system. The vehicle may or may not
Warning Light on page 5‑27. Airbag System Messages restart so you may want to take the
vehicle to your dealer before turning
. If the stability system takes SERVICE AIR BAG off the engine. See Immobilizer
longer than usual to complete its
This message displays if there is Operation on page 2‑13 for more
diagnostic checks due to driving
a problem with the airbag system. information.
conditions.
Have your dealer inspect the
. If an engine or vehicle related system for problems. See Airbag Starting the Vehicle
problem has been detected Readiness Light on page 5‑20 and
and the vehicle needs service. Airbag System on page 3‑29 for
Messages
See your dealer. more information. FAST IDLE ON
. If the vehicle is shifted into 4LO. If your vehicle has this feature, this
The message turns off as soon message displays when the fast idle
as the conditions that caused the feature is on. See Fast Idle System
message to be displayed are no on page 9‑39 for more information.
longer present.
Tire Messages TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)
to indicate the location of the low
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
tire. The low tire pressure warning
Monitor System (TPMS), this
SYSTEM message displays when the system
light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑30.
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure is re-learning the tire positions on
You can receive more than one
Monitor System (TPMS), this your vehicle. The tire positions must
tire pressure message at a time.
message displays if a part on the be re-learned after rotating the tires
To read the other messages that
system is not working properly. or after replacing a tire or sensor.
may have been sent at the same
The tire pressure light also flashes See Tire Inspection on page 10‑73,
time, press the set/reset button or
and then remains on during the Tire Rotation on page 10‑73,
the trip odometer reset stem. If a
same ignition cycle. See Tire Tire Pressure Monitor System on
tire pressure message appears on
Pressure Light on page 5‑30. page 10‑68, and Tire Pressure on
the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Several conditions may cause page 10‑66 for more information.
Have the tire pressures checked
this message to appear. See Tire
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE and set to those shown on the Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
Loading Information label. See Tires
page 10‑69 for more information. If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure on page 10‑57, Vehicle Load Limits
If the warning comes on and stays Monitor System (TPMS), this on page 9‑25, and Tire Pressure on
on, there may be a problem with message displays when the page 10‑66. The DIC also shows
the TPMS. See your dealer. pressure in one or more of the the tire pressure values. See Driver
vehicle's tires is low. This message Information Center (DIC) on
also displays LEFT FRT (left front), page 5‑33.
RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR
Transmission Messages TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder

ENGINE Messages
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
If the vehicle has four-wheel while the transmission fluid is CHECK TRAILER WIRING
drive, this message may display overheating and the transmission On vehicles with the Integrated
if a problem occurs with the temperature warning is displayed Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
four-wheel-drive system. If this on the instrument panel cluster this message may display and a
message appears, stop as soon and/or DIC, you can damage the chime may sound when one of the
as possible and turn off the vehicle. transmission. This could lead to following conditions exists:
Make sure the key is in the costly repairs that would not be
LOCK/OFF position for at least
. A trailer with electric brakes
covered by the warranty. Do not
one minute and then restart the becomes disconnected from the
drive the vehicle with overheated
vehicle and check for the message vehicle.
transmission fluid or while the
on the DIC display. If the message transmission temperature ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
is still displayed or appears again warning is displayed. the vehicle is stopped, this
when you begin driving, the message clears itself after a
four-wheel-drive system needs This message displays and a chime
short time.
service. See your dealer. may sound if the transmission fluid
in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
the transmission fluid temperature the vehicle is moving, this
high can cause damage to the message stays on until the
vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it ignition is turned off.
idle to allow the transmission to . There is a short in the wiring to
cool. This message clears and the electric trailer brakes.
the chime stops when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
When this message displays, power TRAILER CONNECTED Washer Fluid Messages
is no longer available to the trailer
On vehicles with the Integrated WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
brakes.
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
As soon as it is safe to do so, this message displays briefly when
FLUID
carefully pull the vehicle over to the a trailer with electric brakes is first This message displays when the
side of the road and turn the ignition connected to the vehicle. windshield washer fluid is low.
off. Check the wiring connection to Fill the windshield washer fluid
This message clears itself after
the trailer and turn the ignition back reservoir as soon as possible.
several seconds. This message also
on. This message clears if the trailer See Engine Compartment Overview
clears if you acknowledge it. After
is reconnected. This message also on page 10‑6 for the location
this message clears, the TRAILER
clears if you acknowledge it. If this of the windshield washer fluid
GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in
message still displays, either the reservoir. Also, see Washer Fluid on
the DIC.
vehicle or the trailer needs service. page 10‑29 for more information.
See your dealer. See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”
under Driver Information Center
See “Integrated Trailer Brake
(DIC) on page 5‑33 and “Integrated
Control System” under Towing
Trailer Brake Control System” under
Equipment on page 9‑112 for more
Towing Equipment on page 9‑112
information.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
This message displays when ice
conditions are possible.
Vehicle The default settings for the

customization features were set
Feature Settings Menu Items
Personalization The following customization features
when the vehicle left the factory,
allow you to program settings to the
but may have been changed from
vehicle:
Vehicle Personalization their default state since then.
(with DIC Buttons) The customization preferences are DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
automatically recalled. This feature will only display if a
The vehicle may have customization
To change customization language other than English has
capabilities that allow you to
preferences, use the following been set. This feature allows you to
program certain features to one
procedure. change the language in which the
preferred setting. Customization
DIC messages appear to English.
features can only be programmed
Entering the Feature Press the customization button until
to one setting on the vehicle
Settings Menu
and cannot be programmed to a the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
preferred setting for two different 1. Turn the ignition on and place ENGLISH screen appears on the
drivers. the vehicle in P (Park). DIC display. Press the set/reset
All of the customization options To avoid excessive drain on the button once to display all DIC
may not be available on the vehicle. battery, turn the headlamps off. messages in English.
Only the options available will be
2. Press the customization button
displayed on the DIC.
to scroll through the available
customizable options.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until
This feature allows you to select made to this feature. The current AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on
the language in which the DIC setting will remain. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
messages will appear. To select a setting, press the button once to access the settings
set/reset button while the desired for this feature. Then press the
Press the customization button until customization button to scroll
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings:
appears on the DIC display. Press You can also change the language
the set/reset button once to access by pressing the trip odometer SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
the settings for this feature. Then reset stem. See “Language” under The doors will automatically lock
press the customization button to Driver Information Center (DIC) on when the vehicle is shifted out of
scroll through the following settings: page 5‑33 for more information. P (Park).
ENGLISH (default): All messages AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors

AUTO DOOR LOCK will automatically lock when the
will appear in English.
This feature allows you to select vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
FRANCAIS: All messages will when the vehicle's doors will (8 mph) for three seconds.
appear in French. automatically lock. See Automatic NO CHANGE: No change will be
ESPANOL: All messages will Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more made to this feature. The current
appear in Spanish. information. setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors Press the customization button until
This feature allows you to turn will unlock when the key is taken REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
off the automatic door unlocking out of the ignition. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
feature. It also allows you to select ALL IN PARK (default): All of the button once to access the settings
which doors and when the doors will doors will unlock when the vehicle is for this feature. Then press the
automatically unlock. See Automatic shifted into P (Park). customization button to scroll
Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be
information. made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback
Press the customization button until setting will remain. when you press the lock button on
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the RKE transmitter.
the DIC display. Press the set/reset set/reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
button once to access the settings setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock
for this feature. Then press the button on the RKE transmitter.
customization button to scroll REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
through the following settings: This feature allows you to select the on the second press of the lock
OFF: None of the doors will type of feedback received when button on the RKE transmitter.
automatically unlock. locking the vehicle with the Remote HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. exterior lamps will flash when you
driver door will unlock when the key You will not receive feedback when press the lock button on the RKE
is taken out of the ignition. locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound
transmitter if the doors are open. when the lock button is pressed
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
door will unlock when the vehicle is again within five seconds of the
System Operation on page 2‑3 for previous command.
shifted into P (Park) . more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button DELAY DOOR LOCK
made to this feature. The current until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK On vehicles with a crew cab, this
setting will remain. appears on the DIC display. Press feature turns the delayed door locks
To select a setting, press the the set/reset button once to access on or off. When locking the doors
set/reset button while the desired the settings for this feature. Then with the power door lock switch
setting is displayed on the DIC. press the customization button to and a door is open, this feature
scroll through the following settings: will delay locking the doors until
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps five seconds after the last door is
This feature allows you to select will not flash when you press closed. You will hear three chimes
the type of feedback received the unlock button on the RKE to signal that the delayed locking
when unlocking the vehicle with transmitter. feature is in use. The key must be
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior out of the ignition for this feature to
transmitter. You will not receive lamps will flash when you press work. You can temporarily override
feedback when unlocking the the unlock button on the RKE delayed locking by pressing the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if transmitter. power door lock switch twice.
the doors are open. See Remote See Delayed Locking on page 2‑8
Keyless Entry (RKE) System NO CHANGE: No change will be for more information.
Operation on page 2‑3 for more made to this feature. The current
information. setting will remain.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING NO CHANGE: No change will be
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on This feature allows you to select made to this feature. The current
the DIC display. Press the set/reset the amount of time you want setting will remain.
button once to access the settings the exterior lamps to remain on To select a setting, press the
for this feature. Then press the when it is dark enough outside. set/reset button while the desired
customization button to scroll This happens after the key is turned setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings: from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
OFF: There will be no delayed APPROACH LIGHTING
Press the customization button
locking of the vehicle's doors. until EXIT LIGHTING appears on This feature allows you to select if
ON (default): The doors will not the DIC display. Press the set/reset the exterior lights turn on briefly
lock until five seconds after the last button once to access the settings during low light periods after
door is closed. for this feature. Then press the unlocking the vehicle using the
customization button to scroll Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
NO CHANGE: No change will be transmitter.
made to this feature. The current through the following settings:
setting will remain. OFF: The exterior lamps will not Press the customization button until
turn on. APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
To select a setting, press the the DIC display. Press the set/reset
set/reset button while the desired 30 SECONDS (default): The button once to access the settings
setting is displayed on the DIC. exterior lamps will stay on for for this feature. Then press the
30 seconds. customization button to scroll
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will through the following settings:
stay on for one minute. OFF: The exterior lights will not
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will turn on when you unlock the vehicle
stay on for two minutes. with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS

outside, the exterior lights will turn If available, this feature allows you If the vehicle has this feature, it
on briefly when you unlock the to select the volume level of the allows you to select if the outside
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. chime. mirror(s) will automatically tilt down
The lights will remain on for Press the customization button until when the vehicle is shifted into
20 seconds, until the lock button CHIME VOLUME appears on the R (Reverse). See Park Tilt Mirrors
on the RKE transmitter is pressed, DIC display. Press the set/reset on page 2‑17 for more information.
or until the vehicle is no longer off. button once to access the settings Press the customization button until
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) for this feature. Then press the PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
System Operation on page 2‑3 for customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset
more information. through the following settings: button once to access the settings
NO CHANGE: No change will be NORMAL: The chime volume will for this feature. Then press the
made to this feature. The current be set to a normal level. customization button to scroll
setting will remain. through the following settings:
LOUD: The chime volume will be
To select a setting, press the set to a loud level. OFF (default): Neither outside
set/reset button while the desired mirror will be tilted down when the
setting is displayed on the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain. DRIVER MIRROR: The driver
outside mirror will be tilted down
There is no default for chime when the vehicle is shifted into
volume. The volume will stay at R (Reverse).
the last known setting.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The EASY EXIT RECALL BUTTON & KEY OUT (default):
passenger outside mirror will be If the vehicle has this feature, If the features are enabled through
tilted down when the vehicle is it allows you to select your the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
shifted into R (Reverse). preference for the automatic easy driver seat will move back when the
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and exit seat feature. See “Memory key is removed from the ignition or
passenger outside mirrors will be Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals” in Power the easy exit seat button is pressed.
tilted down when the vehicle is Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for The automatic easy exit seat
shifted into R (Reverse). more information. movement will only occur one time
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until after the key is removed from the
made to this feature. The current EASY EXIT RECALL appears on ignition. If the automatic movement
setting will remain. the DIC display. Press the set/reset has already occurred, and you put
button once to access the settings the key back in the ignition and
To select a setting, press the remove it again, the seat will stay
set/reset button while the desired for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll in the original exit position, unless
setting is displayed on the DIC. a memory recall took place prior to
through the following settings:
removing the key again.
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No
automatic seat exit recall will occur. NO CHANGE: No change will be
The recall will only occur after made to this feature. The current
pressing the easy exit seat button. setting will remain.
EASY EXIT SETUP NO CHANGE: No change will be ON: The driver seat and, on
If the vehicle has this feature, it made to this feature. The current some vehicles, the outside mirrors
allows you to select which areas setting will remain. will automatically move to the
will recall with the automatic easy To select a setting, press the stored driving position when the
exit seat feature. It also allows set/reset button while the desired unlock button on the Remote
you to turn off the automatic easy setting is displayed on the DIC. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
exit feature. See “Memory Seat, is pressed. On some vehicles with
Mirrors, and Pedals” in Power MEMORY SEAT RECALL the adjustable throttle and brake
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 and If the vehicle has this feature, it pedal feature, the pedals will also
“EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier for allows you to select your preference automatically move.
more information. for the remote memory seat recall NO CHANGE: No change will be
Press the customization button until feature. See “Memory Seat, made to this feature. The current
EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the Mirrors, and Pedals” in Power Seat setting will remain.
DIC display. Press the set/reset Adjustment on page 3‑4 for more To select a setting, press the
button once to access the settings information. set/reset button while the desired
for this feature. Then press the Press the customization button setting is displayed on the DIC.
menu up/down button to scroll until MEMORY SEAT RECALL
through the following settings: appears on the DIC display. Press REMOTE START
OFF: No automatic seat exit will the set/reset button once to access If your vehicle has this feature, it
recall. the settings for this feature. Then allows you to turn the remote start
press the customization button to off or on. The remote start feature
SEAT ONLY (default): The driver scroll through the following settings: allows you to start the engine from
seat will recall. outside of the vehicle using the
OFF (default): No remote memory
seat recall will occur. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2‑5 for more
information.
Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
REMOTE START appears on the This feature allows you to set all of This feature allows you to exit the
DIC display. Press the set/reset the customization features back to feature settings menu.
button once to access the settings their factory default settings.
for this feature. Then press the Press the customization button until
customization button to scroll Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE
through the following settings: FACTORY SETTINGS appears on SETTINGS appears in the DIC
the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button
OFF: The remote start feature will button once to access the settings
be disabled. once to exit the menu.
for this feature. Then press the
ON (default): The remote start customization button to scroll If you do not exit, pressing the
feature will be enabled. through the following settings: customization button again will
return you to the beginning of
NO CHANGE: No change will be RESTORE ALL (default): The the feature settings menu.
made to this feature. The current customization features will be set
setting will remain. to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the DO NOT RESTORE: The
set/reset button while the desired customization features will not be
setting is displayed on the DIC. set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Universal Remote This system provides a way to

Settings Menu replace up to three remote control
System transmitters used to activate
The feature settings menu will be devices such as garage door
exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on
openers, security systems, and
occurs: page 13‑19 for information
home automation devices.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
. The vehicle is no longer in Communications Commission Do not use this system with any
ON/RUN. (FCC) rules and Industry Canada garage door opener that does not
. The trip/fuel or vehicle Standards RSS-210/220/310. have the stop and reverse feature.
information DIC buttons are This includes any garage door
pressed. Universal Remote System opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.
. The end of the feature settings Programming
menu is reached and exited. Read the instructions completely
. before attempting to program the
A 40-second time period has
transmitter. Because of the steps
elapsed with no selection made.
involved, it may be helpful to
have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Vehicles with the Universal Remote

System will have these buttons
located in the headliner.
Be sure to keep the original Programming Universal Home

remote control transmitter for Remote — Rolling Code
use in other vehicles, as well as
for future programming. Only the For questions or help programming
original remote control transmitter the Universal Home Remote
is needed for Fixed Code System, call 1-866-572-2728
programming. The programmed or go to www.learcar2u.com.
buttons should be erased when the Most garage door openers sold To program up to three devices:
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. after 1996 are Rolling Code units. 1. From inside the vehicle,
See “Erasing Universal Home press the two outside buttons
Programming a garage door opener
Remote Buttons” in this section. at the same time for one to
involves time-sensitive actions, so
Park the vehicle outside of the read the entire procedure before two seconds, and immediately
garage when programming a garage starting. Otherwise, the device will release them.
door. Be sure that people and time out and the procedure will have
objects are clear of the garage door to be repeated.
or gate that is being programmed.
3. Immediately return to the To program another Rolling Code

vehicle. Press and hold the device such as an additional garage
Universal Home Remote button door opener, a security device,
that will be used to control the or home automation device, repeat
garage door until the garage Steps 1 through 5, choosing a
door moves. The indicator light, different function button in Step 3
above the selected button, than what was used for the garage
should slowly blink. This button door opener.
may need to be held for up to If these instructions do not work,
2. In the garage, locate the 20 seconds. the garage door opener is probably
garage door opener receiver 4. Immediately, within one second, a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
(motor-head unit). Find the release the button when programming instructions that follow
“Learn” or “Smart” button. the garage door moves. for a Fixed Code garage door
It can usually be found where The indicator light will blink opener.
the hanging antenna wire is rapidly until programming is
attached to the motor-head unit complete.
and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing 5. Press and release the same
this button, complete the button again. The garage door
following steps in less than should move, confirming that
30 seconds. programming is successful and
complete.
Programming Universal Home return to the previous section

Remote — Fixed Code for Programming Universal
Home Remote — Rolling Code.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote Your hand-held transmitter
System, call 1-866-572-2728 can have between 8 to 12 dip
or go to www.learcar2u.com. switches depending on the
brand of transmitter.
Most garage door openers sold
before 1996 are Fixed Code units. The garage door opener receiver
(motor head unit) could also
Programming a garage door opener have a row of dip switches that
involves time-sensitive actions, so can be used when programming
read the entire procedure before the Universal Home Remote.
starting. Otherwise, the device will To program up to three devices: If the total number of switches
time out and the procedure will have on the motor head and
1. To verify that the garage door
to be repeated. hand-held transmitter are
opener is a Fixed Code unit,
remove the battery cover on the different, or if the dip switch
hand-held transmitter supplied settings are different, use
by the manufacturer of the the dip switch settings on the
garage door opener motor. motor head unit to program
If there is a row of dip switches the Universal Home Remote.
similar to the graphic above, The motor head dip switch
the garage door opener is a settings can also be used
Fixed Code unit. If you do when the original hand-held
not see a row of dip switches, transmitter is not available.
The switch positions on the

. If a switch is set between
hand-held transmitter could be the up and down position,
labeled as follows: write “Middle.”
. A switch in the up position The switch settings written
could be labeled as Up, down in Step 2 now
+, or On. become the button strokes
Example of Eight Dip Switches to be entered into the
. A switch in the down Universal Home Remote in
with Two Positions position could be labeled Step 4. Be sure to enter the
as Down, −, or Off. switch settings written down
. A switch in the middle in Step 2, in order from left
position could be labeled to right, into the Universal
as Middle, 0, or Neutral. Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch
settings from left to right as 3. From inside your vehicle, first
Example of Eight Dip Switches firmly press all three buttons
follows:
with Three Positions at the same time for about
. When a switch is in the up
The panel of switches might not three seconds. Release the
position, write “Left.”
appear exactly as they do in buttons to put the Universal
the examples above, but they . When a switch is in the Home Remote into
should be similar. down position, write “Right.” programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink 6. Press and hold the button
slowly. Enter each switch setting that will be used to control the
from Step 2 into your vehicle's garage door until the garage
Universal Home Remote. door moves. The indicator
You will have two and one-half light above the selected button
minutes to complete Step 4. should slowly blink. This button
Now press one button on the may need to be held for up to
Universal Home Remote for 55 seconds.
each switch setting as follows: 7. Immediately release the button
. If you wrote “Left,” press when the garage door moves.
the left button (A) in the The indicator light will blink
vehicle. rapidly until programming is
A. Left Button (Up, +, or On) complete.
. If you wrote “Right,” press
B. Middle Button the right button (C) in the 8. Press and release the same
(Middle, 0, or Neutral) vehicle. button again. The garage door
C. Right Button . If you wrote “Middle,” press should move, confirming that
(Down, −, or Off) the middle button (B) in the programming is successful and
vehicle. complete.
5. After entering all of the switch To program another Fixed Code

positions, once again firmly device such as an additional garage
press and release all three door opener, a security device,
buttons at the same time. or home automation device, repeat
The indicator lights will turn on. Steps 1-8, choosing a different
button in Step 6 than what was
used for the garage door opener.
Universal Remote System To erase either Rolling Code

or Fixed Code settings on the
Operation Universal Home Remote device:
Press and hold the appropriate 1. Press and hold the two outside
button for at least half of a second. buttons at the same time for
The indicator light will come on approximately 20 seconds,
while the signal is being transmitted. until the indicator lights, located
Reprogramming Universal directly above the buttons, begin
Home Remote Buttons to blink rapidly.
Any of the three buttons can be 2. Once the indicator lights begin
reprogrammed by repeating the to blink, release both buttons.
instructions. The codes from all buttons will
be erased.
Erasing Universal Home For help or information on the
Remote Buttons Universal Home Remote System,
The programmed buttons should be call the customer assistance phone
erased when the vehicle is sold or number under Customer Assistance
the lease ends. Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Lighting Features
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-9
Daytime Running Battery Power Protection . . . . 6-10
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 The exterior lamps control is located
Automatic Headlamp on the instrument panel to the left of
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 the steering wheel.
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5 It controls the following systems:
Turn and Lane-Change . Headlamps
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 . Taillamps
Auxiliary . Parking Lamps
Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-7
. License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Roof Marker Lamps
(If Equipped)
6-2 Lighting
The exterior lamps control has four When the vehicle is turned off 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
positions: and the headlamps are in AUTO, headlamps together with the
O (Off): Turns off the automatic the headlamps may automatically following:
headlamps and daytime running remain on for a set time. The time of
the delay can be changed using the
. Parking Lamps
lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to DIC. See Driver Information Center . Instrument Panel Lights
turn the automatic headlamps or (DIC) on page 5‑33. . Taillamps
DRL back on. ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on . License Plate Lamps
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the parking lamps together with
the following: . Roof Marker Lamps
the off position will only work when
(If Equipped)
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). . Instrument Panel Lights
When the headlamps are turned
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically . Taillamps
on while the vehicle is on, the
turns on the headlamps at normal . License Plate Lamps headlamps turn off automatically
brightness, together with the
. Roof Marker Lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is
following:
(If Equipped) turned off. When the headlamps
. Parking Lamps are turned on while the vehicle
. Instrument Panel Lights is off, the headlamps will stay
on for 10 minutes before
. Taillamps automatically turning off to prevent
. License Plate Lamps the battery from being drained.
. Roof Marker Lamps
(If Equipped)
Lighting 6-3
Turn the headlamp control to off Headlamp Flash-to-Pass

and then back to the headlamp on
position to make the headlamps
High/Low-Beam This feature lets you use the
stay on for an additional 10 minutes. Changer high-beam headlamps to signal
a driver in front of you that you
Push the turn signal/multifunction 5 3 (Headlamp High/Low want to pass. It works even if the
lever toward the instrument panel to Beam Changer): To change the headlamps are in the automatic
change the headlamps from low headlamps from low to high beam, position.
beam to high beam. push the lever toward the instrument
panel. To return to low-beam To use it, pull the turn signal lever
Exterior Lamps Off headlamps, pull the multifunction toward you, then release it.
lever toward you. Then release it. If the headlamps are in the
Reminder
automatic position or on low
For vehicles with a radio, a reminder beam, the high-beam headlamps
chime sounds when the headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as
or parking lamps are manually long as you hold the lever toward
turned on, the ignition is off, and a you. The high-beam indicator on
door is open. To disable the chime, the instrument panel cluster will
turn the lamp off. come on. Release the lever to
When the high beams are on, this return to normal operation.
indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster will also be on.
6-4 Lighting
Daytime Running To turn off the DRL lamps, turn

the exterior lamps control to the
Lamps (DRL) OFF position and then release.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can For vehicles first sold in Canada,
make it easier for others to see the the transmission must be in the
front of your vehicle during the day. P (Park) position before the DRL
Fully functional daytime running lamps can be turned off.
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada. Automatic Headlamp
The DRL system comes on when System The vehicle has a light sensor
the following conditions are met: located on the top of the instrument
When it is dark enough outside, the panel which regulates when the
. The ignition is on. automatic headlamp system turns automatic headlamps turn on.
. The exterior lamps control is on the headlamps at the normal Do not cover the sensor, otherwise
in AUTO. brightness, along with the taillamps, the headlamps will come on
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the whenever the ignition is on.
. The transmission is not in Park. instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim. The system may also turn on the
. The light sensor determines it is headlamps when driving through a
daytime. To turn off the automatic headlamp parking garage or heavy overcast
When the DRL system is on, system, turn the exterior lamps weather. This is normal.
only the DRL lamps are on. switch to the off position and then
release it. For vehicles first sold in There is a delay in the transition
The taillamps, sidemarker, between the daytime and
instrument panel lights, and Canada, the transmission must be
in the P (Park) position before the nighttime operation of the Daytime
other lamps will not be on. Running Lamps (DRL) and the
automatic headlamp system can
When it begins to get dark, the be turned off. automatic headlamp systems
automatic headlamp system so that driving under bridges
switches from DRL to the or bright overhead street lights
headlamps. does not affect the system.
Lighting 6-5
The DRL and automatic headlamp The headlamps will also stay Hazard Warning Flashers
system are only affected when the on after you exit the vehicle.
light sensor detects a change in This feature can be programmed
lighting lasting longer than the using the Driver Information Center
delay. (DIC). See Vehicle Personalization
If the vehicle is started in a dark (with DIC Buttons) on page 5‑52.
garage, the automatic headlamp If the vehicle is not equipped
system comes on immediately. with DIC buttons, exit lighting
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, is automatic. When it is dark
it takes approximately one minute enough outside, the exterior lamps
for the automatic headlamp system remain on for 30 seconds after the
to change to DRL if it is bright ignition is moved from ON/RUN to
enough outside. During that delay, LOCK/OFF.
the instrument panel cluster may For vehicles without a radio, the
not be as bright as usual. Make instrument panel light remains on
sure the instrument panel brightness for 30 seconds with the driver door | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
control is in the full bright position. closed. For vehicles with a radio, Press this button located on top of
See Instrument Panel Illumination the instrument panel light remains the steering column, to make the
Control on page 6‑7. on for 10 minutes with the driver front and rear turn signal lamps
To idle the vehicle with the door closed. See Retained flash on and off. This warns others
automatic headlamp system off, Accessory Power (RAP) on that you are having trouble. Press
turn the control to the off position. page 9‑40. again to turn the flashers off.
The regular headlamp system can When the hazard warning flashers
be turned on when needed. are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
not work.
6-6 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting Fog Lamps
position whenever it is released.
Signals For vehicles with fog lamps, the
If after signaling a turn or a lane control is located next to the exterior
change the arrows flash rapidly or lamps control on the instrument
do not come on, a signal bulb could panel, to the left of the steering
be burned out. column.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
is not burned out, check the fuse. position for the fog lamps to
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on come on.
page 10‑50.
An arrow on the instrument panel # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
Turn Signal On Chime fog lamps on or off. A light will come
cluster flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change. If the turn signal is left on for more on in the instrument panel cluster.
than 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile), a chime When the fog lamps are turned on,
Move the lever all the way up or will sound at each flash of the turn
down to signal a turn. the parking lamps automatically
signal and the message TURN turn on.
Raise or lower the lever for less SIGNAL ON will also appear in the
than one second until the arrow Driver Information Control (DIC). When the headlamps are changed
starts to flash to signal a lane To turn the chime and message off, to high beam, the fog lamps also go
change. This causes the turn move the turn signal lever to the off off. When the high-beam headlamps
signals to automatically flash position. are turned off, the fog lamps will
three times. It will flash six times come on again.
if tow-haul mode is active. Holding Some localities have laws that
the turn signal lever for more than require the headlamps to be on
one second will cause the turn with the fog lamps.
signals to flash until you release
the lever.
Lighting 6-7
Auxiliary will activate the lamp and illuminate Interior Lighting

an indicator light at the bottom of
Roof-Mounted Lamp this button. Pressing the top of the
If the vehicle has this feature, this button will turn off the roof‐mounted Instrument Panel
button includes wiring provisions for lamp and indicator. Illumination Control
a dealer or a qualified service center The emergency roof lamp circuit
to install an auxiliary roof lamp. is fused at 30 amps, so the total
current draw of the attached lamps
should be less than this value.
The attachment points for the roof
lamp circuits are two blunt cut
wires located above the overhead
console, a dark green switched
power wire and a black ground wire.
For more information on roof mount
emergency lamp installation, please
visit the GM Upfitter website at
www.gmupfitter.com or contact your
dealer.
D (Instrument Panel
This button is located on the If the vehicle has this button, Brightness): This feature controls
overhead console. the vehicle may have the snow the brightness of the instrument
plow prep package. For further panel lights and is located next
When the wiring is connected to information, see Adding a Snow to the exterior lamps control.
an auxiliary roof‐mounted lamp, Plow or Similar Equipment on
pressing the bottom of the button Push the knob to extend out and
page 9‑125.
then it can be turned.
6-8 Lighting
Turn the knob clockwise or Dome Lamps

counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the instrument panel lights. The dome lamps are located in the
Turning the knob to the farthest overhead console.
clockwise position turns on the They come on when any door is
dome lamps. opened and turn off after all the
doors are closed.
Cargo Lamp Turn the instrument panel
The cargo lamps come on by brightness knob located below
turning the instrument panel the dome lamp override button,
brightness control knob to the clockwise to the farthest position to
farthest clockwise position. manually turn on the dome lamps.
This knob is located on the The dome lamps remain on until the
instrument panel and also knob is turned counterclockwise. k (Dome Off): Press the button
turns on the dome lamps. in and the dome lamps remain
Dome Lamp Override off when a door is opened. Press
The cargo lamps can be used if the button again to return it to the
The dome lamp override button is
more light is needed in the cargo extended position so that the dome
located next to the exterior lamps
area of the vehicle or in the top-box lamps come on when a door is
control.
storage units. opened.
Lighting 6-9
Reading Lamps Lighting Features Battery Load

For vehicles with reading lamps, Management
they are located on the overhead Entry Lighting The vehicle has Electric Power
console. The vehicle has an illuminated entry Management (EPM) that estimates
To turn on the reading lamps, press feature. the battery's temperature and state
the button located next to each of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
When the doors are opened, the
lamp. To turn them off, press the for best performance and extended
dome lamps will come on if the
button again. life of the battery.
dome override button is in the
The vehicle may also have reading extended position. If the dome When the battery's state of charge
lamps in other locations. To turn the override button is pressed in, is low, the voltage is raised slightly
lamps on or off, press the button the lamps will not come on. to quickly bring the charge back up.
located next to the lamp. When the state of charge is high,
Exit Lighting the voltage is lowered slightly to
If the vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
Entertainment (RSE) system, press The interior lamps come on when has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
the lamp lenses to turn the lamps on the key is removed from the ignition. display on the Driver Information
or off. They turn off automatically in Center (DIC), you may see the
The lamps are fixed and cannot be 20 seconds. The lights do not come voltage move up or down. This is
adjusted. on if the dome override button is normal. If there is a problem, an
pressed in. alert will be displayed.
6-10 Lighting
The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur

idle if the electrical loads are very in steps or levels, without being
high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the
This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action,
(alternator) may not be spinning this action may be noticeable to the
fast enough at idle to produce all driver. If so, a Driver Information
the power that is needed for very Center (DIC) message might be
high electrical loads. displayed, such as BATTERY
A high electrical load occurs when SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
several of the following are on, VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
such as: headlamps, high beams, If one of these messages displays,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, it is recommended that the driver
climate control fan at high speed, reduce the electrical loads as much
heated seats, engine cooling fans, as possible. See Driver Information
trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) on page 5‑33.
accessory power outlets.
Battery Power Protection
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this This feature shuts off the dome and
by balancing the generator's output reading lamps, if they are left on
and the vehicle's electrical needs. for more than 10 minutes after the
It can increase engine idle speed ignition is turned off. The cargo
to generate more power, whenever lamp shuts off after 20 minutes.
needed. It can temporarily reduce This prevents the battery from
the power demands of some running down.
accessories.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Introduction To minimize taking your eyes off the

road while driving, do the following
System Infotainment
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
Determine which radio the vehicle operation and controls of
Introduction has and read the following pages to the audio system.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 become familiar with its features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 { WARNING radio stations.
Radio Taking your eyes off the road For more information, see Defensive
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 for extended periods could Driving on page 9‑2.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 cause a crash resulting in
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Notice: Contact your dealer
injury or death to you or others. before adding any equipment.
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-15 Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving. Adding audio or communication
Audio Players equipment could interfere with
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 the operation of the engine, radio,
This system provides access to or other systems, and could
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
many audio and non‐audio listings. damage them. Follow federal
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
rules covering mobile radio
Rear Seat Infotainment and telephone equipment.
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7-2 Infotainment System
The vehicle has Retained Operation

Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it
is stolen or moved to a different AM-FM Radio
vehicle.
Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3), Radio with
USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3), and Radio with CD Similar
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and

DVD radio may have a Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑39 for more
information on the vehicle's RSE
system.
The DVD player is the top
slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading
the DTS‐programmed DVD Audio
or DVD Video media. (DTS and
DTS Digital Surround are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.)
Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3) Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories.
The vehicle has one of these radios Radios with CD and DVD
as its audio system.
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and
DVD radio have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its
features are explained later
in this section, “Adjusting the
Speakers (Balance/Fade).”
Using the Radio Speed Compensated Volume Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
(SCV): Radios with Speed (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
Compensated Volume (SCV)
the system on and off. Radio with CD)
automatically adjust the radio
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise volume to compensate for road To adjust the bass or treble:
to increase or decrease the volume. and wind noise as the vehicle's 1. Press the f knob until Bass or
4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and speed changes while driving, so that
Treble displays.
AM-FM Radio with CD): Press to the volume level stays consistent.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
switch the display between the radio To activate SCV:
the following:
station frequency and the time.
1. Set the radio volume to the
While the ignition is off, press this
desired level.
. Turn the f knob.
button to display the time. Press to
display additional text information 2. Press the MENU button to . Press either ¨ SEEK,
related to the current FM-RDS or display the radio setup menu. or © SEEK.
XM station; or CD, MP3, or WMA 3. Press the softkey under the
song. If information is available AUTO VOLUM (automatic
. Press either \ FWD,
during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA volume) tab on the radio display. or s REV.
playback, the song title information
displays on the top line of the 4. Press the softkey under the EQ (Equalization): Press this
display and artist information desired Speed Compensated button to choose bass and treble
displays on the bottom line. Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, equalization settings designed for
When information is not available, or High) to select the level of different types of music. Selecting
“NO INFO” displays. radio volume compensation. MANUAL, or changing bass or
The display times out after treble, returns the EQ to the manual
approximately 10 seconds. Each bass and treble settings.
higher setting allows for more Unique EQ settings can be saved
radio volume compensation at for each source.
faster vehicle speeds.
Setting the Tone 3. Adjust the setting by doing one To quickly adjust all tone and
(Bass/Midrange/Treble) of the following: speaker controls to the middle
(All Except AM-FM Radio . Turn the f knob clockwise position, press the f knob for
and Radio with CD) or counterclockwise. more than two seconds until a
beep sounds.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust the bass,
. Press the ¨ SEEK, EQ (Equalization): Press this
midrange, or treble: or © SEEK. button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
1. Press the f knob until the tone . Press the \ FWD, different types of music. Selecting
control tabs display. or s REV. MANUAL, or changing bass or
2. Highlight the desired tone treble, returns the EQ to the manual
If a station's frequency is weak or if
control tab by doing one of bass and treble settings.
there is static, decrease the treble.
the following: Unique EQ settings can be saved
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
for each source.
. Press the f knob. or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey positioned under If the radio has a Bose® audio
. Press the softkey under the system, the EQ settings are either
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
desired tab. MANUAL or TALK.
more than two seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to
the middle position.
Adjusting the Speakers Adjusting the Speakers 3. Adjust the setting by doing one
(Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio (Balance/Fade) (All Except of the following:
and AM-FM Radio with CD) AM-FM Radio and Radio . Turn the f knob clockwise
To adjust the balance or fade: with CD) or counterclockwise.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
1. Press ` or press the f knob adjust the balance or fade:
. Press the ¨ SEEK,
until the speaker control label or © SEEK.
displays. 1. Press the f knob until the
speaker control tabs display. . Press the \ FWD,
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
the following: 2. Highlight the desired speaker or s REV.
control tab by doing one of the To quickly adjust all speaker and
. Turn the f knob. following: tone controls to the middle position,
. Press either ¨ SEEK, . Press the f knob. press the f knob for more than
or © SEEK. two seconds.
. Press the softkey under the
. Press either \ FWD, desired tab. If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
turned on, the radio disables FADE
or s REV. and mutes the rear speakers.
Radio Messages Radio display and artist information

displays on the bottom line.
Calibration Error: The audio
When information is not available,
system has been calibrated AM-FM Radio “NO INFO” displays.
for the vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, it Radio Data System (RDS) Finding a Station
means that the radio has not been For radios with the Radio Data
configured properly for the vehicle BAND: Press to switch between
System (RDS) feature, it only works AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
and it must be returned to your with FM stations that broadcast
dealer for service. RDS information. This system relies f (Tune): Turn to manually select
Locked or Loc: One of these upon receiving specific information radio stations.
messages will display when the from these stations and only works © SEEK: Press to seek the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked when the information is available. previous radio station. Press
up the radio. Take the vehicle to While the radio is tuned to an and hold for a few seconds until
your dealer for service. FM-RDS station, the station a beep sounds to scan for radio
name or call letters will display. stations in descending order; press
If any error occurs repeatedly or In rare cases, a radio station could
if an error cannot be corrected, the © SEEK button again to stop
broadcast incorrect information scanning radio stations. The radio
contact your dealer. that causes the radio features to only seeks and scans stations
work improperly. If this happens, with a strong signal that are in
contact the radio station. the selected band.
4 (Information) (RDS Features): For the AM-FM Radio, press and
For vehicles with RDS features,
hold the © SEEK for four seconds
press 4 to display additional text
until a double beep sounds to scan
information related to the current the preset stations. The station
FM-RDS station. If information is frequency flashes while the radio
available, the song title information is in the scan mode.
displays on the top line of the
¨ SEEK: Press to seek the next Storing Radio Stations Setting Preset Stations
radio station. Press and hold for a Drivers are encouraged to store To store presets:
few seconds until a beep sounds to the radio station while the vehicle
scan for radio stations in ascending 1. Tune to a radio station.
is parked; see Defensive Driving on
order; press the © SEEK button page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio 2. Press and hold one of the
again to stop scanning radio stations using the presets, favorites six numbered pushbuttons for
stations. The radio only seeks and button, and steering wheel controls, three seconds until a beep
scans stations with a strong signal if the vehicle has this feature. sounds.
that are in the selected band. Radios that have a FAV button 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store
For the AM-FM Radio, press and store radio stations as favorites. Up additional radio stations.
hold the ¨ SEEK for four seconds to 36 stations can be programmed Storing a Radio Station as a
until a double beep sounds to scan as favorites using the six softkeys Favorite
the preset stations. The station below the radio station frequency
tabs and by using the FAV button. To store a station as a favorite:
frequency flashes while the radio
is in the scan mode. Press the FAV button to go through 1. Tune to a radio station.
up to six pages of favorites, each
s REV: Press to manually tune to having six favorite stations available 2. Press the FAV button to display
a radio station in descending order. per page. Each page of favorites the page where the station will
be stored.
\ FWD: Press to manually tune to can contain any combination of AM,
a radio station in ascending order. FM, or XM, if equipped, stations. 3. Press and hold one of the six
Radios that do not have a softkeys until a beep sounds.
FAV (Favorites): Press to select
different favorites pages for stored FAV button store radio stations 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
radio stations. as presets. Up to 18 stations store additional radio stations.
(6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can
be programmed on the six
numbered pushbuttons.
The number of favorites pages can Satellite Radio 4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio
be set up using the MENU button. Service): For vehicles with XM,
To set up the number of favorites XM™ Satellite Radio Service
press 4 to display additional text
pages: XM is a satellite radio service based information related to the current
1. Press the MENU button. in the 48 contiguous United States XM channel. If information is
2. Press the softkey located below and 10 Canadian provinces. available, the song title information
XM Satellite Radio has a wide displays on the top line of the
the FAV 1-6 tab.
variety of programming and display and artist information
3. Select the number of favorites commercial-free music, coast to displays on the bottom line.
pages by pressing the softkey coast, and in digital-quality sound. When information is not available,
located below the displayed A service fee is required to receive “NO INFO” displays.
page numbers. the XM service. If the service
needs to be reactivated, the Finding a Channel
4. Press the FAV button, or let
the menu time out, to return radio will display “No Subscription BAND: Press to switch between
to the original main radio Please Renew on channel XM1.” AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
screen showing the radio station For more information, contact
XM at www.xmradio.com or f (Tune): Turn to manually select
frequency tabs and to begin an XM channel.
the process of programming 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
favorites. and www.xmradio.ca or © SEEK: Press to go to the
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. previous XM channel.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
XM channel.
s REV: Press to go to the 2. Press either of the two softkeys Adding and Removing Categories
previous XM category. below the desired category tab Categories cannot be added or
to immediately tune to the first removed while the vehicle is moving
\ FWD: Press to go to the next XM station in that category.
XM category. faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
To go to the previous or next XM To add or remove a category:
FAV (Favorites): Press to select station in the selected category,
different favorites pages for stored do one of the following: 1. Press the MENU button.
radio stations.
. Turn the f knob. 2. Press the softkey located below
CAT (Category): The CAT button is the XM CAT tab.
used to find XM channels when the . Press the softkey below the
radio is in the XM mode. right or left arrows in the 3. Turn the f knob to display the
category tab. category to add or remove.
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station . Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK. 4. Press the softkey located under
the Add or Remove tab.
To find XM channels in a category: 3. To exit the category search
mode, press the FAV button To restore all removed
1. Press the CAT button to display categories, press the softkey
the category tabs. Continue or BAND button to display the
favorites again. under the Restore All tab.
pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays. 5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
. Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the
category list by pressing
the \ FWD or the s REV
buttons.
Storing XM Channels 3. Press and hold one of the six XM Radio Messages
softkeys until a beep sounds.
Drivers are encouraged to store XL (Explicit Language
XM channels while the vehicle is 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to Channels): These channels,
parked; see Defensive Driving on store additional radio stations. or any others, can be blocked at
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio The number of favorites pages can a customer's request, by calling
stations using the presets, favorites be set up using the MENU button. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
button, and steering wheel controls, To set up the number of favorites 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
if the vehicle has this feature. pages: XM Updating: The encryption
Up to 36 stations can be 1. Press the MENU button. code in the receiver is being
programmed as favorites using updated, and no action is required.
the six softkeys below the radio 2. Press the softkey located below This process should take no longer
station frequency tabs and by the FAV 1-6 tab. than 30 seconds.
using the FAV button. Press the 3. Select the number of favorites No XM Signal: The system is
FAV button to go through up to six pages by pressing the softkey functioning correctly, but the vehicle
pages of favorites, each having six located below the displayed is in a location that is blocking the
favorite stations available per page. page numbers. XM signal. When the vehicle is
Each page of favorites can contain moved into an open area, the
any combination of AM, FM, or XM, 4. Press the FAV button, or let
the menu time out, to return to signal should return.
if equipped, stations.
the original main radio screen Loading XM: The audio system is
Storing an XM Channel as a showing the radio station acquiring and processing audio and
Favorite frequency tabs and to begin text data. No action is needed. This
To store a station as a favorite: the process of programming message should disappear shortly.
favorites.
1. Tune to an XM channel. Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
2. Press the FAV button to display
another channel.
the page where the station will
be stored.
Channel Unauth: This channel is No Information: No text or XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
blocked or cannot be received with informational messages are this message alternates with the
your XM subscription package. available at this time on this XM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label.
Channel Unavail: This previously channel. The system is working This label is needed to activate the
assigned channel is no longer properly. service.
assigned. Tune to another station. No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is
If this station was one of the The XM subscription needs to received when tuned to channel 0,
presets, choose another station be reactivated. Contact XM there could be a receiver fault.
for that preset button. at www.xmradio.com or call Consult with your dealer.
No Artist Info: No artist 1-800-929-2100. Check Antenna: If this message
information is available at this CAT Not Found: There are no does not clear within a short period
time on this channel. The system channels available for the selected of time, the receiver or antenna
is working properly. category. The system is working could have a fault. Consult with
No Title Info: No song title properly. your dealer.
information is available at this XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver Check XM Receivr: If this
time on this channel. The system in the vehicle could have previously message does not clear within a
is working properly. been in another vehicle. For security short period of time, the receiver
No CAT Info: No category purposes, XM receivers cannot be could have a fault. Consult with
information is available at this time swapped between vehicles. If this your dealer.
on this channel. The system is message is received after having XM Not Available: If this message
working properly. the vehicle serviced, check with does not clear within a short period
your dealer. of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Radio Reception FM Stereo Cellular Phone Usage

Frequency interference and FM signals only reach about Cellular phone usage may cause
static can occur during normal 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles). interference with the vehicle's
radio reception if items such Although the radio has a built-in radio. This interference may occur
as cell phone chargers, vehicle electronic circuit that automatically when making or receiving phone
convenience accessories, and works to reduce interference, some calls, charging the phone's battery,
external electronic devices are static can occur, especially around or simply having the phone on.
plugged into the accessory power tall buildings or hills, causing the This interference causes an
outlet. If there is interference or sound to fade in and out. increased level of static while
static, unplug the item from the listening to the radio. If static is
XM™ Satellite Radio Service received while listening to the
accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives radio, unplug the cellular phone
AM digital radio reception from coast and turn it off.
The range for most AM stations is to coast in the 48 contiguous
greater than for FM, especially at United States, and in Canada.
night. The longer range can cause Just as with FM, tall buildings or
station frequencies to interfere hills can interfere with satellite radio
with each other. For better radio signals, causing the sound to fade
reception, most AM radio stations in and out. In addition, traveling
boost the power levels during the or standing under heavy foliage,
day, and then reduce these levels bridges, garages, or tunnels may
during the night. Static can also cause loss of the XM signal for a
occur when things like storms and period of time.
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
Fixed Mast Antenna Audio Players Notice: If a label is added to

a CD, or more than one CD is
The fixed mast antenna can inserted into the slot at a time,
withstand most car washes without CD Player or an attempt is made to play
being damaged as long as it is scratched or damaged CDs, the
securely attached to the base. Care of the CD Player
CD player could be damaged.
If the mast becomes slightly bent, Do not add any label to a CD. While using the CD player, use
straighten it out by hand. If the It could get caught in the CD. only CDs in good condition
mast is badly bent, replace it. If a CD is recorded on a personal without any label, load one CD at
Occasionally check to make sure computer and a description label is a time, and keep the CD player
the antenna is tightened to its base. needed, try labeling the top of the and the loading slot free of
If tightening is required, tighten recorded CD with a marking pen. foreign materials, liquids, and
by hand until fully seated plus The use of CD lens cleaners debris.
one quarter turn. is not advised, due to the risk of If an error displays, see “ CD Player
contaminating the lens of the CD Messages” later in this section.
Satellite Radio Antenna optics with lubricants internal to
the CD player mechanism.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna
is located on the roof of the
vehicle. Keep the antenna clear
of obstructions for clear radio
reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
performance of the XM system
(if equipped) may be affected
if the sunroof is open.
Care of CDs Inserting a CD To insert multiple CDs:

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (Single CD Player) 1. Press and hold the LOAD button
can be reduced due to CD-R or Insert a CD partway into the slot, for two seconds. A beep sounds
CD-RW quality, the method of label side up. The player pulls it in and Load All Discs displays.
recording, the quality of the music and the CD should begin playing. 2. Wait for the message on when to
that has been recorded, and the insert the discs. The CD player
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been Inserting a CD(s)
takes up to six CDs.
handled. Handle them carefully. (Six-Disc CD Player)
Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their 3. Press the LOAD button again to
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into cancel loading more CDs.
original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight the CD player. This CD player holds
up to six CDs. Ejecting a CD
and dust. The CD player scans the
(Single CD Player)
bottom surface of the disc. If the To insert one CD:
surface of a CD is damaged, such 1. Press and release the LOAD
Z EJECT: Press and release to
as cracked, broken, or scratched, eject the disc. Remove the CD
button.
the CD does not play properly or not when Remove Disc displays. If the
at all. Do not touch the bottom side 2. Wait for the message to insert disc is not removed, after several
of a CD while handling it; this could the disc. seconds the disc is automatically
damage the surface. Pick up CDs 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD pulled back into the player.
by grasping the outer edges or the partway into the slot, label side
edge of the hole and the outer edge. up. The player pulls the CD in.
If the surface of a CD is soiled,
clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
neutral detergent solution mixed
with water. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Ejecting a CD When a CD is inserted, the CD 4 (Information): Press to display

(Six-Disc CD Player) symbol displays on the left side additional text information related
of the radio display. As each new to the current song. If information is
Z EJECT : Press and release track starts to play, the track number available, the song title information
to eject the disc that is currently displays.
playing. Remove the CD when displays on the top line of the
Remove Disc displays. If the disc is The CD player can play the smaller display and artist information
not removed, after several seconds 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an displays on the bottom line.
the disc is automatically pulled back adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the When information is not available,
into the player. smaller CDs are loaded in the same “NO INFO” displays.
manner. f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
To eject all CDs, press and hold the
Z EJECT button for two seconds. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to the CD that is currently playing.
cycle between CD or Auxiliary when © SEEK: Press to go to the start
Playing a CD listening to the radio. The CD icon of the current track if more than
If the ignition or radio is turned off and a message showing the disc 10 seconds on the CD have played.
with a CD in the player, it stays in and/or track number will display
when a CD is in the player. Press Press to go to the previous track if
the player. When the ignition or less than 10 seconds on the CD
radio is turned on, the CD starts again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input have played.
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source. device; see Auxiliary Devices on Press and hold, or press multiple
The CD is controlled by the buttons page 7‑34 for more information. times, to continue moving backward
on the radio faceplate or by the RSA If a portable audio player is not through the tracks on the CD.
connected, “No Input Device Found”
unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
displays.
System on page 7‑48 for more track.
information.
Press and hold, or press multiple
times, to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press For the Radio with CD (MP3) and MP3‐Supported Files
and hold to reverse playback quickly Radio with USB and CD (MP3):
The Radio with CD (MP3), Radio
within a track. 1. Press the softkey positioned with USB and CD (MP3), and Radio
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press under the RDM tab until Random with USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3)
and hold to advance playback Current Disc displays. have the capability of playing an
quickly within a track. 2. Press the softkey again to turn MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
RPT (Repeat): For the AM-FM off random play. Format
Radio with CD, press and release For the Radio with USB and Radios that have the capability of
the RPT button to repeat the current Six-Disc CD (MP3): playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma
track. Press RPT again to turn off files that were recorded onto a
repeat play. 1. Press the softkey positioned
under the RDM tab until CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
RDM (Random): Press to listen Randomize All Discs displays be recorded with the following fixed
to tracks in random, rather than to play tracks from all CDs bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
sequential order. To use random, loaded in random order. 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
do one of the following: 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
2. Press the softkey positioned 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
For the AM-FM Radio with CD: under the RDM tab until Random or a variable bit rate.
1. Press the RDM button until the Current Disc displays to play
random icon displays. tracks from a single CD in Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
random order. Discs
2. Press the RDM button again
until the random icon disappears 3. Press the same softkey again to The radio can play discs that
from the display. turn off random play. contain both uncompressed CD
audio and MP3 files. If both formats
are on the disc, the radio reads
all MP3 files first, then the
uncompressed CD audio files.
CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported File Order of Play File System and Naming

and Folder Structure Compressed audio files are The song name that displays is the
The radio supports: accessed in the following order: song name that is contained in the
. Up to 50 folders. . Playlists (Px). ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
. Up to 8 folders in depth. . Files stored in the root directory. radio displays the file name without
. Up to 50 playlists. . Files stored in folders in the root the extension (such as .mp3) as
directory. the track name.
. Up to 255 files.
Tracks are played in the following Track names longer than
. Playlists with an .m3u
order: 32 characters or 4 pages are
or .wpl extension. shortened. The display does not
. Files with an .mp3, .wma,
. Play begins from the first track show parts of words on the last
or .cda file extension. in the first playlist and continues page of text and the extension of
sequentially through all tracks the file name is not displayed.
Root Directory in each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has Preprogrammed Playlists
The root directory is treated as a
folder. Files are stored in the root played, play continues from the CDs that have preprogrammed
directory when the disc or storage first track of the first playlist. playlists reated using WinAmp™,
device does not contain folders. . Play begins from the first track MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
Files accessed from the root in the first folder and continues software can be accessed; however,
directory of a CD display as sequentially through all tracks in there is no playlist‐editing capability
F1 ROOT. each folder. When the last track using the radio. These playlists are
of the last folder has played, treated as special folders containing
Empty Folder compressed audio song files.
play continues from the first
Folders that do not contain files are track of the first folder.
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls Playing an MP3 s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
file extension and are stored on a to reverse playback quickly. Sound
USB device may be supported by
4 (Information): Press to
display additional text information is heard at a reduced volume and
the radio with a USB port. the elapsed time of the file displays.
related to the current song.
Playlists can be changed by using If information is available, the Release s REV to resume playing.
the softkeys below the S c song title information displays \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and c T tabs, the f knob, on the top line of the display and and hold to advance playback
artist information displays on the quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
the © SEEK button, or the ¨ SEEK bottom line. When information is
button. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW volume and the elapsed time of the
not available, “NO INFO” displays.
that has been recorded without file displays. Release \ FWD to
using file folders can be played. f (Tune): Turn to select MP3s on resume playing. The elapsed time
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more the CD currently playing. of the file displays.
than the maximum of 50 folders, © SEEK: Press to go to the start of S c (Previous Folder): Press
15 playlists, and 512 folders and the track, if more than 10 seconds
files, the player allows access and the softkey below the S c tab to
have played. Press and hold or
navigates up to the maximum, but press multiple times to continue go to the first track in the previous
all items over the maximum are not moving backward through tracks. folder.
accessible.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next c T (Next Folder): Press the
track. Press and hold or press softkey below the c T tab to go
multiple times to continue moving to the first track in the next folder.
forward through tracks.
RDM (Random): Press to listen h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to
to tracks in random, rather than softkey below the h tab to play
playback by album:
sequential order. To use random, 1. Press the softkey located below
the files in order by artist or album.
do one of the following: the Sort By tab.
The player scans the disc to sort
For the Radio with CD (MP3) and 2. Press one of the softkeys below
the files by artist and album ID3 tag
Radio with USB and CD (MP3): the Album tab from the sort
information. It can take several
1. Press the softkey positioned minutes to scan the disc depending screen.
under the RDM tab until Random on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the
Current Disc displays. The radio may begin playing while Back tab to return to the main
2. Press the softkey again to turn it is scanning in the background. music navigator screen.
off random play. When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the
For the Radio with USB and begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows,
Six-Disc CD (MP3): artist. The current artist playing is and songs from the current album
shown on the second line of the begin to play. Once all songs from
1. Press the softkey positioned display. Once all songs by that artist
under the RDM tab until that album have played, the player
are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in
Randomize All Discs displays to next artist in alphabetical order and
play tracks from all CDs loaded alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3s from that
in random order.
To listen to files by another artist, album.
2. Press the softkey positioned press the softkey located below
under the RDM tab until Random To exit music navigator mode, press
either arrow tab. The disc goes the softkey below the Back tab to
Current Disc displays to play to the next or previous artist in
tracks from a single CD in return to normal MP3 playback.
alphabetical order. Continue
random order. pressing either softkey below
3. Press the same softkey again to the arrow tab until the desired
turn off random play. artist displays.

. The air is very humid. If so, wait
CD Player Messages
about an hour and try again.
CD/DVD Player
CHECK DISC: If this message . Care of the CD and DVD Player
displays and/or the CD ejects, it There was a problem while
could be for one of the following burning the CD. Do not add any label to a disc.
reasons: . The label is caught in the CD It could get caught in the CD or
player. DVD player. If a disc is recorded
. It is very hot. When the on a personal computer and a
temperature returns to normal, If the CD is not playing correctly, description label is needed, try
the CD should play. for any other reason, try a known labeling the top of the recorded
. The road is very rough. When good CD. disc with a marking pen.
the road becomes smoother, If any error occurs repeatedly The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners
the CD should play. or if an error cannot be corrected, is not advised, due to the risk of
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, contact your dealer. If the radio contaminating the lens of the optics
or upside down. displays an error message, write it with lubricants internal to the CD
down and provide it to your dealer and DVD player mechanism.
when reporting the problem.
Notice: If a label is added to Care of CDs and DVDs If the surface of a disc is soiled,
a CD, or more than one CD is clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or
If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the
inserted into the slot at a time, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
sound quality can be reduced due to
or an attempt is made to play neutral detergent solution mixed
CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method
scratched or damaged CDs, the with water. Make sure the wiping
of recording, the quality of the music
CD player could be damaged. process starts from the center to
that has been recorded, and the
While using the CD player, use the edge.
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
only CDs in good condition
handled. Handle them carefully. Audio Output
without any label, load one CD at
Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their
a time, and keep the CD player Only one audio source can be heard
original cases or other protective
and the loading slot free of through the speakers at one time.
cases and away from direct sunlight
foreign materials, liquids, and An audio source is defined as DVD
and dust. The CD or DVD player
debris. slot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM, front
scans the bottom surface of the
If an error displays, see “CD disc. If the surface of a disc is auxiliary jack, USB port, or rear
Messages” later in this section. damaged, such as cracked, broken, auxiliary jack.
or scratched, the disc does not play Press the O button to turn the radio
properly or not at all. Do not touch on. The radio can be heard through
the bottom side of a disc while all of the vehicle speakers.
handling it; this could damage the
surface. Pick up discs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
Front seat passengers can listen Inserting a Disc If loading and reading of a disc
to the radio (AM, FM, or XM if cannot be completed, due to
Insert a disc partway into either slot,
equipped) by pressing the BAND unknown format, etc., and the disc
label side up. The player pulls it in
button or the DVD/CD AUX button fails to eject, press and hold for
and the disc should begin playing.
to select CD slot, DVD slot, front more than five seconds to force
(Loading a disc into the system,
auxiliary input, USB port, or rear the disc to eject.
depending on media type and
auxiliary input (if available).
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Playing a CD (in Either the
If a playback device is plugged for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for DVD or CD Slot)
into the radio’s front auxiliary input a DVD to begin playing.)
jack, USB port, or the rear auxiliary If the ignition or radio is turned off
jack, the front seat passengers Ejecting a Disc with a CD in the player, it stays in
are able to listen to playback Z CD (Eject): Press and the player. When the ignition or
from this source through the release to eject the disc that is radio is turned on, the CD starts
vehicle speakers. See “Using the currently playing. The CD ejects playing where it stopped, if it was
Auxiliary Input Jack” in Auxiliary from the bottom slot. A beep the last selected audio source.
Devices on page 7‑34, or “Audio/ sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. The CD is controlled by the buttons
Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Once the disc is ejected, Remove on the radio faceplate or by the RSA
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System Disc displays. The disc can be unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
on page 7‑39 for more information. removed. If the disc is not removed, System on page 7‑48 for more
after several seconds the disc information. The DVD/CD decks
In some vehicles, depending on (the upper slot is the DVD deck
audio options, the rear speakers automatically pulls back into
the player. and the lower slot is the CD deck)
can be muted when the RSA power of the radio are compatible with
is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio Z DVD (Eject): Press and most audio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs,
(RSA) System on page 7‑48 for release to eject the disc that is and MP3s.
more information. currently playing in the top slot.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays.
When a CD is inserted, the text If a front auxiliary device is f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
tab DVD or CD symbol displays connected, the DVD/CD AUX the disc that is currently playing.
on the left side of the radio display. button cycles through all available
As each new track starts to play, options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, © SEEK: Press to go to the start
the track number displays. Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary of the current track, if more than
(if available). See “Using the five seconds on the CD have
The CD player can play the smaller played.
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an Auxiliary Input Jack” in Auxiliary
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the Devices on page 7‑34 or “Audio/ Press to go to the previous track if
smaller CDs are loaded in the same Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat less than five seconds on the CD
manner. Entertainment (RSE) System on have played.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press Press and hold, or press multiple
to cycle through DVD, CD, If a disc is inserted into the top DVD times, to continue moving backward
or Auxiliary when listening to the slot, the rear seat operator can turn through the tracks on the CD.
on the video screen and use the
radio. The DVD/CD text tab and
remote control to navigate the CD
a message showing the track or track.
chapter number will display when (tracks only) through the remote
control. Press and hold, or press multiple
a disc is in either slot. Press the
times, to continue moving forward
DVD/CD AUX button again and 4 (Information): Press to display
through the tracks on the CD.
the system automatically searches additional text information related
for an auxiliary input device; see to the current song. If information is
Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑34 for available, the song title information
more information. If a portable audio displays on the top line of the
player is not connected, “No Aux display and artist information
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in displays on the bottom line.
both the DVD slot and the CD slot, When information is not available,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles “NO INFO” displays.
between the two sources and does
not indicate “No Aux Input Device.”
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press MP3 and WMA Supported Files CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
and hold to reverse playback quickly and Folder Structure
Format
within a track. The DVD player supports:
The radio can play .mp3 or .wma
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press files that were recorded onto a
. Up to 255 folders.
and hold to advance playback CD-R or CD-RW disc.
quickly within a track.
. Up to 8 folders in depth.
RDM (Random): Press to listen Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode . Up to 15 playlists.

to tracks in random, rather than Discs . Up to 40 sessions.
sequential order. To use random: The radio plays discs that contain . Playlists with an .m3u or
1. Press the softkey under the both uncompressed CD audio and
.wpl extension.
RDM tab until Random Current MP3/WMA files depending on which
slot the disc is loaded into. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or
Disc displays.
.cda file extension.
2. Press the softkey again to turn The DVD player only reads
uncompressed audio and ignores The CD player supports:
off random play.
MP3/WMA files on a mixed . Up to 512 files and folders.
mode disc.
. Up to 8 folders in depth.
The CD player reads both
uncompressed audio and
. Playlists with an .m3u or
MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode .wpl extension.
disc. Uncompressd audio is played . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or
before MP3/WMA files. Press the .cda file extension.
CAT (category) button to toggle
between uncompressed audio
and MP3/WMA files.
Root Directory function does not function on a Tracks are played in the following
The root directory of the disc is disc that was recorded without order:
treated as a folder. If the root folders or playlists. When displaying . Play begins from the first track
directory has compressed audio the name of the folder, the radio in the first playlist and continues
files, the directory displays as displays ROOT. sequentially through all tracks
F1 ROOT on the radio. When the disc contains only in each playlist. When the last
If a disc contains both playlists and compressed audio track of the last playlist has
uncompressed CD audio and files, but no folders, all files are played, play continues from the
MP3/WMA files, a folder under the located under the root folder. first track of the first playlist.
root directory called CD accesses The folder down and the folder up . Play begins from the first track
all of the CD audio tracks on buttons search playlists first and in the first folder and continues
the disc. then go to the root folder. When sequentially through all tracks in
the radio displays the name of the each folder. When the last track
Empty Folder folder, the radio displays ROOT. of the last folder has played,
Folders that do not contain files are Order of Play play continues from the first
skipped, and the player advances to track of the first folder.
the next folder that contains files. Compressed audio files are
accessed in the following order: When play enters a new folder, the
No Folder display does not automatically show
. Playlists (Px). the new folder name unless the
When the disc contains only . Files stored in the root directory. folder mode has been chosen as
compressed files, the files are
. Files stored in folders in the root the default display. The new track
located under the root folder.
directory. name displays.
The next and previous folder
File System and Naming Playing an MP3 or WMA \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
The song name that displays is the (in Either the DVD or CD Slot) and hold to advance playback
song name that is contained in the If a disc is inserted into the top DVD quickly.
ID3 tag. If the song name is not slot, the rear seat operator can turn S c (Previous Folder): Press
present in the ID3 tag, then the on the video screen and use the the softkey below the S c tab to
radio displays the file name without remote control to navigate the CD go to the first track in the previous
the extension (such as .mp3) as the (tracks only). folder.
track name.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA c T (Next Folder): Press the
Track names longer than files.
32 characters or 4 pages are softkey below the c T tab to go
shortened. Parts of words on the © SEEK: Press to go to the start of to the first track in the next folder.
last page of text and the extension the track, if more than five seconds
have played. Press and hold or RDM (Random): Press to listen
of the file name do not display. to tracks in random, rather than
press multiple times, if less than
Preprogrammed Playlists five seconds have played, to sequential order.
Preprogrammed playlists that continue moving backward To use random:
were created using WinAmp™, through tracks.
1. Press the softkey under the
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next RDM tab until Random Current
software can be accessed; however, track. Disc displays
they cannot be edited using the
Press and hold, or press multiple 2. Press the same softkey again to
radio. These playlists are treated
times, to continue moving forward turn off random play.
as special folders containing
through tracks.
compressed audio song files. h (Music Navigator): Press the
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold softkey below the h tab to play
to reverse playback quickly. files in order by artist or album.
file extension and are stored on a
USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
The player scans the disc to sort To change from playback by artist to Using the DVD Player
the files by artist and album ID3 tag playback by album:
The DVD player can be controlled
information. It can take several 1. Press the softkey below the Sort by the buttons on the remote
minutes to scan the disc depending By tab. control, the RSA system, or by
on the number of files on the disc.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the buttons on the radio faceplate.
The radio may begin playing while
the Album tab from the sort See “Remote Control” under Rear
it is scanning in the background.
screen. Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
When the scan is finished, the disc on page 7‑39 and Rear Seat Audio
begins playing files in order by 3. Press the softkey below the (RSA) System on page 7‑48 for
artist. The current artist playing is Back tab to return to the main more information.
shown on the second line of the music navigator screen.
The DVD player is only compatible
display. Once all songs by that artist The album name displays on the with DVDs of the appropriate region
are played, the player moves to the second line between the arrows, code printed on the jacket of
next artist in alphabetical order and and songs from the current album most DVDs.
begins playing files by that artist. begin to play. Once all songs from
that album have played, the player The DVD slot of the radio is
To listen to files by another artist,
moves to the next album in compatible with most audio
press the softkey located below
alphabetical order on the CD and CDs and CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,
either arrow tab. The disc goes
begins playing MP3 files from that DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and
to the next or previous artist in
album. DVD+R/RW media, along with
alphabetical order. Continue
MP3 and WMA formats.
pressing either softkey below the To exit music navigator mode, press
arrow tab until the artist displays. the softkey below the Back tab to If an error message displays on the
return to normal MP3 playback. video screen or the radio, see “DVD
Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑39, and “CD/DVD
Player Messages” later in this
section for more information.
Inserting a Disc Ejecting a Disc more information. If a portable audio

player is not connected, “No Aux
Insert a disc partway into the Z DVD (Eject): Press and
Input Device” displays. If a disc is
top slot, label side up. The player release to eject the disc currently
in both the DVD slot and the CD
pulls it in and the disc should begin playing in the top slot. A beep
slot, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
playing. “Loading Disc” shows on sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
between the two sources and does
the radio display. At the same time, If loading and reading of a disc not indicate “No Aux Input Device.”
the radio displays a softkey menu of cannot be completed, due to If a front auxiliary device is
option(s). Some discs automatically unknown format, etc., and the connected, the DVD/CD AUX
play the movie while others default disc fails to eject, press and hold button cycles through all available
to the softkey menu display, for more than five seconds to options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
which requires the Play, Enter, force the disc to eject. front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary
or Navigation softkeys to be
(if available). See “Using the
pressed, either by softkey or by Playing a DVD Auxiliary Input Jack” in Auxiliary
the rear seat passenger using
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press Devices on page 7‑34 or “Audio/
the remote control.
to cycle through DVD, CD, Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat
Loading a disc into the system, or Auxiliary when listening to the Entertainment (RSE) System on
depending on media type and radio. The DVD/CD text tab and page 7‑39 for more information.
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds a message showing the track or If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for chapter number will display when slot, the rear seat operator can turn
a DVD. a disc is in either slot. Press the on the video screen and use the
DVD/CD AUX button again and remote control to navigate the CD
the system automatically searches (tracks only) through the remote
for an auxiliary input device; see control.
Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑34 for
O (Power): Press to turn the © SEEK: Press to return to the Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V
radio on or off. Turn clockwise or start of the current track or chapter. (Video)
counterclockwise to increase or Press again to go to the previous Once a DVD-V is inserted, the
decrease the volume. Press and track or chapter. This button might radio display menu shows several
hold for more than two seconds to not work when the DVD is playing tab options for playback. Press the
turn off the entire radio and Rear the copyright information or the softkey located under any tab option
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system previews. during DVD-V playback.
and to start the Parental Control ¨ SEEK:
feature. Parental Control prevents
Press to go to the next r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
track or chapter. This button might the Play or Pause tab displayed on
the rear seat occupant from not work when the DVD is playing
operating the Rear Seat Audio the radio, to toggle between pausing
the copyright information or the or restarting playback of a DVD.
(RSA) system or remote control. previews. If the forward arrow is showing on
A lock symbol displays next to the s REV (Fast Reverse): Press the display, the system is in pause
clock display. The Parental Control to quickly reverse the CD or DVD mode. If the Pause tab is showing
feature remains on until the knob at five times the normal speed. on the display, the system is in
is pressed and held for more than To stop fast reversing, press again. playback mode. If the DVD screen
two seconds again, or until the This button might not work when is off, press the play button to turn
driver turns the ignition off and the DVD is playing the copyright the screen on.
exits the vehicle. information or the previews. Some DVDs begin playing after the
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press previews have finished, although
a CD or DVD. to fast forward the CD or DVD at there could be a delay of up to
five times the normal speed. To stop 30 seconds. If the DVD does
fast forwarding, press again. This not begin playing the movie
button might not work when the automatically, press the softkey
DVD is playing the copyright located under the play/pause
information or the previews. symbol tag displayed on the radio.
If the DVD still does not play, q (Return): Press to exit the Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A
refer to the on-screen instructions, current active menu and return to (Audio)
if available. the previous menu. This button Once a DVD-A is inserted, the
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, operates only when a DVD is radio display menu shows several
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. playing and a menu is active. tab options for playback. Press the
r (Enter): Press to select the The rear seat passenger can softkey located under any tab option
choices that are highlighted in navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A during DVD-A playback.
any menu. menus and controls through the r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
remote control. See “Remote the play or pause icon displayed on
y (Menu): Press to access Control” under Rear Seat the radio, to toggle between pausing
the DVD menu. The DVD menu Entertainment (RSE) System on
is different on every DVD. Use or restarting playback of a DVD.
page 7‑39 for more information. If the forward arrow is showing on
the softkeys located under the The video screen automatically
navigation arrows to navigate the the display, the system is in pause
turns on when the DVD-V is mode. If the pause tab is showing
cursor through the DVD menu. inserted into the DVD slot, and
After making a selection press this on the display, the system is in
does not automatically power on playback mode.
button. This button only operates when the DVD-A is inserted into
when using a DVD. the DVD slot. It must be manually q Group r : Press to cycle
Nav (Navigate): Press to display turned on by the rear seat occupant through musical groupings on
directional arrows for navigating through the remote control power the DVD-A disc.
through the menus. button. Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle Stopping and Resuming CD/DVD Player Messages
through audio stream formats Playback Disc Format Error: This message
located on the DVD-A disc. To stop playing a DVD without displays if the disc is inserted with
The video screen shows the turning off the system, press the disc label wrong side up, or if
audio stream changing. the disc is damaged.
the c button on the remote control,
The rear seat passenger can or press the softkey located under Disc Region Error: This message
navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
the c or the r / j tabs displayed displays if the disc is not from a
menus and controls through the correct region.
remote control. See “Remote on the radio. If the radio is sourced
Control” under Rear Seat to something other than DVD-V, No Disc Inserted: This message
Entertainment (RSE) System on press the DVD/CD AUX button to displays if no disc is present when
page 7‑39 for more information. make DVD-V the active source. the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
The video screen automatically To resume DVD playback, press the pressed on the radio.
turns on when the DVD-V is r / j button on the remote control, Optical Error: This message
inserted into the DVD slot, and or press the softkey located under displays if the disc was inserted
does not automatically power on the r / j tab on the radio. The DVD upside down.
when the DVD-A is inserted into should resume play from where it
the DVD slot. It must be manually last stopped if the disc has not been Disk Read Error: This message
turned on by the rear seat occupant ejected and the stop button has not displays if a disc was inserted with
through the remote control power been pressed twice on the remote an invalid or unknown format.
button. control. If the disc has been ejected
or the stop button has been pressed
twice on the remote control, the disc
resumes playing at the beginning of
the disc.
Player Error: This message If any error occurs repeatedly To use a portable audio player,
displays if there are disc load or or if an error cannot be corrected, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
disc eject problems. contact your dealer. If the radio the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
. It is very hot. When the displays an error message, write it When a device is connected, press
temperature returns to normal, down and provide it to your dealer the radio CD/AUX button to begin
the disc should play. when reporting the problem. playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
. The road is very rough. When Auxiliary Devices
the road becomes smoother, the For optimal sound quality, increase
disc should play. Using the Auxiliary Input Jack the portable audio device's volume
to the loudest level.
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, Radios with an auxiliary input jack
or upside down. It is always best to power the
located on the lower right side of the
portable audio device through its
. The air is very humid. If so, wait faceplate can connect to an external
own battery while playing.
about an hour and try again. audio device such as an iPod®,
MP3 player, or CD player, for use as O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise
. There was a problem while another source for audio listening. or counterclockwise to increase
burning the disc. This input jack is not an audio or decrease the volume of the
. The label is caught in the output; do not plug headphones portable player. Additional volume
CD/DVD player. into the front auxiliary input jack. adjustments might have to be made
from the portable device if the
If the disc is not playing correctly, Drivers are encouraged to
volume is not loud or soft enough.
for any other reason, try a known set up any auxiliary device
good disc. while the vehicle is in P (Park). BAND: Press to listen to the radio
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 when a portable audio device is
for more information on driver playing. The portable audio device
distraction. continues playing.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to auxiliary device is connected, the USB‐Supported Devices

play a CD when a portable audio DVD/CD AUX button cycles through . USB flash drive
device is playing. Press again and all available options, such as: DVD
the system begins playing audio slot, CD slot, front auxiliary, and rear . Portable USB hard drive
from the connected portable audio auxiliary (if available). See “Using . Fifth generation or later iPod
player. If a portable audio player is the Auxiliary Input Jack” in this
not connected, “No Input Device section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
. iPod nano
Found” displays. Jacks” under Rear Seat . iPod touch
DVD/CD AUX (DVD/CD/ Entertainment (RSE) System on .
page 7‑39 for more information. iPod classic
Auxiliary): Press to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary Not all iPods and USB drives are
Using the USB Port compatible with the USB port.
when listening to the radio.
The DVD/CD text tab and a Radios with a USB port can control Make sure the iPod has the latest
message showing track or chapter a USB storage device or an iPod® firmware from Apple® for proper
number will display when a disc is using the radio buttons and knobs. operation. iPod firmware can be
in either slot. Press again and the See “Playing an MP3” in CD Player updated using the latest iTunes®
system automatically searches for on page 7‑15 or CD/DVD Player on application. See www.apple.com/
an auxiliary input device, such as a page 7‑22 for information about itunes.
portable audio player. If a portable how to connect and control a USB
storage device or an iPod. For help with identifying the iPod, go
audio player is not connected, to www.apple.com/support.
“No Aux Input Device” displays. USB Support
If a disc is in both the DVD slot Radios that have a USB port can
and the CD slot, the DVD/CD AUX The USB connector is located on play .mp3 and .wma files that are
button cycles between the two the dashboard or in the center stored on a USB storage device as
sources and does not indicate console, and uses the USB 2.0 well as AAC files that are stored on
“No Aux Input Device.” If a front standard. an iPod.
USB‐Supported File and Folder To connect an iPod, connect one Using the Radio to Control a
Structure end of the USB cable that came USB Storage Device or iPod
The radio supports: with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
connector and connect the other The radio can control a USB
. Up to 700 folders end to the USB port located in the storage device or an iPod using
center console or on the instrument the radio buttons and knobs, and
. Up to 8 folders in depth display song information on the
panel. If the vehicle is on and the
. Up to 65,535 files. USB connection works, “OK to radio’s display.
. Folder and file names up to disconnect” and a GM logo may f (Tune): Turn to select files.
64 bytes appear on the iPod, and iPod
appears on the radio display.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file the track, if more than 10 seconds
The iPod music appears on the
extension have played. Press and hold or
radio’s display and begins playing.
press multiple times to continue
. AAC files stored on an iPod The iPod charges while it is moving backward through tracks.
. FAT16 connected to the vehicle if the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
. FAT32 track. Press and hold or press
or ON/RUN position. When the
multiple times to continue moving
Connecting a USB Storage vehicle is turned off, the iPod
forward through tracks.
Device or iPod® automatically powers off and
will not charge or draw power s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
The USB port can be used to from the vehicle's battery. to reverse playback quickly. Sound
control an iPod or a USB storage is heard at a reduced volume.
device. If you have an older iPod model
that is not supported, it can still Release s REV to resume playing.
To connect a USB storage device, be used by connecting it to the The elapsed time of the file
connect the device to the USB port auxiliary input jack using a standard displays.
located in the center console or on 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. See
the instrument panel. “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”
earlier for more information.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey 4. Turn f to scroll through the files
and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. in the selected folder.
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced The tab appears raised when pause 5. Press f to select the desired file
volume. Release \ FWD to is being used. Press the softkey
to be played.
resume playing. The elapsed below j again to resume playback.
time of the file displays. To skip through large lists, the five
Back: Press the softkey below the softkeys can be used to navigate in
4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main the following order:
additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the
selected track. root directory on a USB storage
. First softkey, first item in the list.
Using Softkeys to Control a device. . Second softkey, 1% through
USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the the list each time the softkey is
pressed.
The five softkeys below the radio softkey below c to view the
display are used to control the contents of the current folder on
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
functions listed below. the USB drive. To browse and each time the softkey is pressed.
select files: . Fourth softkey, 10% through
To use the softkeys:
the list each time the softkey
1. Press the first or fifth softkey 1. Press the softkey below c. is pressed.
below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
display the functions listed
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
of folders.
below, or press the softkey
below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the desired
currently displayed. folder. If there is more then one
2. Press the softkey below the tab folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
with the function on it to use that the desired folder is reached.
function.
h (Music Navigator): Press 4. Turn f to scroll through Repeat Functionality

the softkey below h to view and the folders or files in the To use Repeat:
select a file on an iPod, using the selected menu.
iPod's menu system. Files are Press the softkey below " or '
5. Press f to select the desired file to select between Repeat All and
sorted by:
to be played. Repeat Track.
. Playlists
To skip through large lists, the five " (Repeat All): Press the softkey
. Artists softkeys can be used to navigate in below " to repeat all tracks. The
. Albums the following order: tab appears lowered when Repeat
. Genres
. First softkey, first item in the list. All is being used. This is the default
. Second softkey, 1% through mode when a USB storage device
. Songs or iPod is first connected.
the list each time the softkey
. Composers is pressed. ' (Repeat Track): Press the
To select files: . Third softkey, 5% through the list softkey below ' to repeat one
each time the softkey is pressed. track. The tab appears raised when
1. Press the softkey below h. Repeat Track is being used.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through
2. Turn f to scroll through the list the list each time the softkey is
of menus. pressed.
3. Press f to select the . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
desired menu.
Shuffle Functionality Rear Seat Before Driving

To use Shuffle: The RSE is designed for rear seat
Infotainment passengers only. The driver cannot
Press the softkey below >, 2, safely view the video screen while
<, or = to select between Rear Seat Entertainment driving and should not try to do so.
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ (RSE) System
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, In severe or extreme weather
or Shuffle Folder. The vehicle may have a DVD Rear conditions, the RSE system might
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. not work until the temperature
> (Shuffle Off): Press the The RSE system works with the is within the operating range.
softkey below 2 to turn shuffle vehicle's audio system. The DVD The operating range for the RSE
off. This is the default mode when a player is part of the front radio. system is above −20°C (−4°F)
USB storage device or iPod is first The RSE system includes a radio or below 60°C (140°F). If the
connected. with a DVD player, a video display temperature of the vehicle is outside
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle screen, audio/video jacks, two this range, heat or cool the vehicle
Songs): Press the softkey below wireless headphones, and a remote until the temperature is within the
= or < to shuffle all songs on control. See CD/DVD Player on operating range of the RSE system.
the USB storage device or iPod. page 7‑22 for more information on
the vehicle's CD/DVD player.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the
softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current album on
an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the
softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current folder on a
USB storage device.
Parental Control Headphones listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs,

MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliary
The RSE system may have a
source connected to A/V jacks or
Parental Control feature, depending
the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle
on which radio the vehicle has.
has this feature. The wireless
To start Parental Control, press
headphones have an On/Off button,
and hold the radio power button for
channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume
more than two seconds to stop all
control.
system features such as: radio,
video screen, Rear Seat Audio Push the power button to turn on
(RSA), DVD, and/or CD. While the headphones. An indicator light
Parental Control is on, a padlock located on the headphones comes
icon displays. on. If the light comes on, but there
is intermittent sound and/or static on
The radio can be turned back on
the headphones, or if the indicator
with a single press of the power
A. Battery cover light does not come on, the batteries
button, but the RSE system will
B. Channel 1 or 2 switch might need to be replaced.
remain under Parental Control.
See “Battery Replacement” later in
To turn Parental Control off, press C. Power button this section for more information.
and hold the radio power button for D. Volume control Switch the headphones to Off when
more than two seconds. The RSE not in use.
returns from where it was previously E. Power indicator light
Infrared transmitters are located at
left and the padlock icon disappears The RSE includes two 2-channel the rear of the overhead console.
from the radio display. wireless headphones that are The headphones shut off
Parental Control can also be turned dedicated to this system. Channel 1 automatically to save the battery
off by inserting or ejecting any disc, is dedicated to the video screen, power if the RSE system and RSA
pressing the play icon on the radio while Channel 2 is dedicated to are shut off, or if the headphones
DVD display menu, or changing an Rear Seat Audio (RSA) selections. are out of range of the transmitters
ignition position. These headphones can be used to for more than three minutes.
If you move too far forward or step If the foam ear pads attached to Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
out of the vehicle, the headphones the headphones become worn or
lose the audio signal. damaged, the pads can be replaced
To adjust the volume on the separately from the headphone set.
headphones, use the volume To purchase replacement ear pads,
control located on the right side. call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
zero (0), or contact your dealer.
For optimal audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly. Battery Replacement
Headphones should be worn with To change the batteries on the
the headband over the top of the headphones:
head for best audio reception.
The symbol L (Left) appears on the 1. Turn the screw to loosen the
outside bottom edge of the ear cup battery door located on the
and should be positioned on the left left side of the headphones.
ear. The symbol R (Right) appears Slide the battery door open. A. Yellow: Video Input
on the outside bottom edge of the 2. Replace the two batteries in the B. White: Left Audio Input
ear cup and should be positioned compartment. Make sure that
C. Red: Right Audio Input
on the right ear. they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the The A/V jacks are color coded to
Notice: Do not store the match typical home entertainment
headphones in heat or direct battery compartment.
system equipment.
sunlight. This could damage 3. Replace the battery door and
the headphones and repairs will tighten the door screw. The A/V jacks, located on the
not be covered by the warranty. rear of the floor console, allow
If the headphones are to be stored
Storage in extreme cold can audio or video signals to be
for a long period of time, remove the
weaken the batteries. Keep the connected from an auxiliary device
batteries and keep them in a cool,
headphones stored in a cool, such as a camcorder or a video
dry place.
dry place. game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables the wired headphones. See “Using Audio Output
(not included) may be required the Auxiliary Input Jack” under
Audio from the DVD player or
to connect the auxiliary device Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑34 for
auxiliary inputs can be heard
to the A/V jacks. Refer to the more information about changing
through the following possible
manufacturer’s instructions for the source.
sources:
proper usage.
Changing the RSE Video Screen . Wireless headphones
Power for auxiliary devices is not Settings
supplied by the radio system. . Vehicle speakers
The screen display mode (normal,
To use the auxiliary inputs of the full, and zoom), screen brightness, . Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks
RSE system, connect an external and setup menu language can be on the RSA system, if the
auxiliary device to the color-coded changed from the on screen setup vehicle has this feature.
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary menu. To change any feature: The RSE system always transmits
device and the video screen power the audio signal to the wireless
on. If the video screen is in the DVD 1. Press the z (display menu)
headphones, if there is audio
player mode, pressing the AUX button on the remote control.
available. See “Headphones” earlier
(auxiliary) button on the remote
2. Use the remote control n, q, in this section for more information.
control switches the video screen
from the DVD player mode to the p, o (navigation) arrows and The DVD player is capable of
auxiliary device. The audio of the the r (enter) button to use the outputting audio to the wired
connected source can be listened setup menu. headphone jacks on the RSA
to over the speakers by sourcing system, if the vehicle has this
3. Press the z button again to feature. The DVD player can be
the radio to the auxiliary device or
by sourcing the RSA to the Rear remove the setup menu from the selected as an audio source on the
Aux and listening with the wireless screen. RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio
headphones on Channel 2 or with (RSA) System on page 7‑48 for
more information.
When a device is connected to the When the video screen is not in Remote Control
A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary use, push it up into its locked
input jack if the vehicle has this position.
feature, the rear seat passengers If a DVD is playing and the screen
are able to hear audio from the is raised to its locked position,
auxiliary device through the wireless the screen remains on. This is
or wired headphones. The front seat normal, and the DVD continues to
passengers are able to listen to play through the previous audio
playback from this device through source. Use the remote control
the vehicle speakers by selecting power button or eject the disc to
AUX as the source on the radio. turn off the screen.
Video Screen The overhead console contains
The video screen is located in the the infrared transmitters for the
overhead console. wireless headphones and the
infrared receivers for the remote To use the remote control, aim it at
To use the video screen: control. They are located at the the transmitter window at the rear
1. Push the release button located rear of the console. of the RSE overhead console and
on the overhead console. press the desired button. Direct
Notice: Avoid directly touching sunlight or very bright light could
2. Move the screen to the desired the video screen, as damage may affect the ability of the RSE
position. occur. See “Cleaning the Video transmitter to receive signals
Screen” later in this section for from the remote control. If the
more information. remote control does not seem
to be working, the batteries might
need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight Remote Control Buttons r (Enter): Press this button to
could also affect the function of the O (Power): Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted
remote control. turn the video screen on and off. in any menu.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD P (Illumination): Press this button z (Display Menu): Press this
slot, the remote control O (power) to turn the remote control backlight button to adjust the brightness,
button can be used to turn on the on. The backlight automatically screen display mode (normal,
video screen display and start the times out after 7 to 10 seconds full, or zoom), and display the
disc. The radio can also turn on the if no other button is pressed while language menu.
video screen display. See Operation the backlight is on. q (Return): Press this button
v (Title): Press this button to to exit the current active menu
Notice: Storing the remote return the DVD to the main menu of and return to the previous menu.
control in a hot area or in direct the DVD. This function could vary This button operates only when
sunlight can damage it, and the for each disc. the display menu or a DVD menu
repairs will not be covered by the is active.
warranty. Storage in extreme cold y (Main Menu): Press this button
to access the DVD menu. The DVD c (Stop): Press this button to
can weaken the batteries. Keep stop playing, fast reversing, or fast
the remote control stored in a menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move forwarding a DVD. Press this button
cool, dry place. twice to return to the beginning of
the cursor around the DVD menu.
If the remote control becomes After making a selection press the DVD.
lost or damaged, a new universal the enter button. This button only s (Play/Pause): Press this
remote control can be purchased. operates when using a DVD. button to start playing a DVD. Press
If this happens, make sure the
universal remote control uses a n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation this button while a DVD is playing to
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to pause it. Press it again to continue
code set of Toshiba®. playing the DVD.
navigate through a menu.
While the DVD is playing, the DVD r (Fast Reverse): Press this { (Subtitles): Press this button to
can be played slowly by pressing button to quickly reverse the DVD turn on or off subtitles and to move
the play/pause button then pressing or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD through subtitle options when a
the fast forward button. The DVD video, press the play/pause button. DVD is playing. The format and
continues playing in a slow play To stop fast reversing a DVD audio content of this function vary for
mode. Also, reverse can be played or CD, release the fast reverse each disc.
slowly by pressing the play/pause button. This button might not work
button and then pressing the fast AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button
when the DVD is playing the to switch the system between the
reverse button. To cancel slow play copyright information or the
mode, press the play/pause button. DVD player and an auxiliary source.
previews.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): [ (Fast Forward): Press this
2 (Camera): Press this button to
Press this button to return to the change camera angles on DVDs
button to fast forward the DVD or that have this feature while a DVD is
start of the current track or chapter. CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
Press this button again to go to playing. The format and content of
video, press the play/pause button. this function vary for each disc.
the previous track or chapter. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
This button might not work when or CD, release the fast forward 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
the DVD is playing the copyright button. This button might not work The numeric keypad provides the
information or the previews. while the DVD is playing the capability of direct chapter or track
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press copyright information or the number selection.
this button to go to the beginning previews. \ (Clear): Press this button within
of the next chapter or track. e (Audio): Press this button to three seconds after entering a
This button might not work while change audio tracks on DVDs that numeric selection, to clear all
the DVD is playing the copyright have this feature when the DVD is numerical inputs.
information or the previews. playing. The format and content of
this function vary for each disc.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

this button to select chapter or
Problem Recommended Action
track numbers greater than nine.
Press this button before entering There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to
the number. ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Battery Replacement The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings
There are black borders on the top in the setup menu by pressing the
To change the remote control
and bottom or on both sides, or the display menu button on the remote
batteries, do the following:
picture looks stretched out. control.
1. Slide the rear cover back on the
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
remote control.
or scrolls. connections at both devices.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure they The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no
are installed correctly using the obstruction between the remote
diagram on the inside of the control and the transmitter window.
remote control. Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
3. Replace the battery cover. incorrectly.
If the remote control is to be stored After stopping the player, and If the stop button was pressed one
for a long period of time, remove the pushing Play, sometimes the time, the DVD player resumes
batteries and keep them in a cool, DVD starts where it left off and playing where the DVD was
dry place. sometimes at the beginning. stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning
of the DVD.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages

Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message
depends on the radio that is in the
The auxiliary source is running, but Check that the RSE video screen vehicle. The video screen can
there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode. display one of the following:
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices. Disc Load/Eject Error: This
message displays when there are
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low disc load or eject problems.
audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and
interference from cellular telephone Disc Format Error: This message
towers, or use a cellular telephone displays if the disc is inserted with
in the vehicle. the disc label wrong side up, or if
Check that the headphones are the disc is damaged.
on correctly using the L (left) and Disc Region Error: This message
R (right) on the headphones. displays if the disc is not from a
The remote and/or the headphones See your dealer for assistance. correct region.
are lost. No Disc Inserted: This message
The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is displays if no disc is present when
picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player. EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on
the radio.
DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) The RSA functions can be used
even while the main radio is off.
Video distortion can occur when System The front audio system will display
operating cellular phones, scanners,
Vehicles with this feature allow the headphone icon when the RSA
CB radios, Global Position Systems
the rear seat passengers to listen is on, and it will disappear from the
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax
to and control any of the music display when the RSA is off.
machines, or walkie talkies.
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other Audio can be heard through wired
It might be necessary to turn off the auxiliary sources. However, the rear headphones (not included) plugged
DVD player when operating one of seat passengers can only control into the jacks on the RSA. If the
these devices in or near the vehicle. the music sources the front seat vehicle has this feature, audio can
*Excludes the OnStar® System. passengers are not listening to also be heard on Channel 2 of the
(except on some radios where dual wireless headphones.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead control is allowed). For example,
Console rear seat passengers can control Depending on the audio system,
and listen to a CD through the the rear speakers may continue to
When cleaning the RSE overhead play when the RSA audio is active
headphones, while the driver
console surface, use only a clean through the headphones.
listens to the radio through the
cloth dampened with clean water.
front speakers. The rear seat To listen to an iPod or portable
Cleaning the Video Screen passengers have control of the audio device through the RSA,
volume for each set of headphones. attach the iPod or portable audio
When cleaning the video screen,
use only a clean cloth dampened The radio functionality is controlled device to the front auxiliary input
with clean water. Use care when by both the RSA and the front radio. (if available), located on the front
directly touching or cleaning the Only one band can be tuned to at audio system. Turn the iPod on,
screen, as damage could result. one time. Changing the band on the then choose the front auxiliary input
RSA or the front radio will change with the RSA SRCE button.
the band on the other system,
if they are both sourced to the radio.
This function is inactive, with some PROG (Program): Press this

radios, if the front seat passengers button to go to the next preset
are listening to the radio. radio station or channel set on the
Press and hold either seek arrow main radio. This function is inactive,
until the display flashes, to tune to with some radios, if the front seat
an individual station. The display passengers are listening to the
stops flashing after the buttons radio.
P (Power): Press this button to have not been pushed for more While a CD or DVD‐A disc is
turn the RSA on or off. than two seconds. This function is playing, press this button to go to
Volume: Turn the volume knob to inactive, with some radios, if the the beginning of the CD or DVD‐A.
increase or decrease the volume front seat passengers are listening This function is inactive, with some
of the wired headphones. The left to the radio. radios, if the front seat passengers
knob controls the left headphones While listening to a disc, press the are listening to the CD or DVD‐A.
and the right knob controls the right left seek arrow to go back to the While a disc is playing in the CD or
headphones. start of the current track or chapter DVD changer, press this button to
SRCE (Source): Press this (if more than 10 seconds have select the next disc, if multiple discs
button to switch between the radio played). Press the right seek arrow are loaded. This function is inactive,
(AM‐FM), XM™ (if equipped), to go the next track or chapter on with some radios, if the front seat
CD, and if the vehicle has these the disc. This function is inactive, passengers are listening to the disc.
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and with some radios, if the front seat While a DVD video menu is being
rear auxiliary. passengers are listening to the disc. displayed, press the PROG button
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, While a DVD video menu is being to perform the menu function, Enter.
AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press displayed, press either seek arrow
the seek arrows to go to the to perform a cursor up or down on
previous or to the next station the menu. Hold either seek arrow
or channels and stay there. to perform a cursor left or right on
the menu.
Phone Noise: Keep interior noise levels Bluetooth Controls

to a minimum. The system may not
Use the buttons located on the
recognize voice commands if there
Bluetooth is too much background noise.
steering wheel to operate the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
If equipped, a Bluetooth system When to Speak: A short tone See Steering Wheel Controls on
can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell sounds after the system responds page 5‑3 for more information.
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile indicating when it is waiting for a
to make and receive phone calls. voice command. Wait until the tone
b g (Push To Talk): Press to
The system can be used while answer incoming calls, confirm
and then speak.
the key is in the ON/RUN or system information, and start
ACC/ACCESSORY position. How to Speak: Speak clearly in a speech recognition.
calm and natural voice.
The range of the Bluetooth system c x (Phone On Hook): Press to
can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all Audio System end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
phones support all functions, and operation.
not all phones are guaranteed to When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound comes through Pairing
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth the vehicle's front audio system
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
for more information on compatible speakers and overrides the
paired to the Bluetooth system and
phones. audio system. Use the audio
then connected to the vehicle before
system volume knob, during a
Voice Recognition it can be used. See the cell phone
call, to change the volume level.
manufacturer's user guide for
The Bluetooth system uses voice The adjusted volume level remains
Bluetooth functions before pairing
recognition to interpret voice in memory for later calls. To prevent
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
commands to dial phone numbers missed calls, a minimum volume
is not connected, calls will be made
and name tags. level is used if the volume is turned
using OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,
down too low.
For additional information, say if equipped. Refer to the OnStar
“Help” while you are in a voice Owner's Guide for more information.
recognition menu.
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone This name will be used to

indicate which phones are
. Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press and hold b g for paired and connected to the
paired to the Bluetooth system. two seconds. vehicle. See “Listing All Paired
. The pairing process is disabled 2. Say “Bluetooth.” and Connected Phones” later in
when the vehicle is moving. this section for more information.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
. Pairing only needs to be with instructions and a four‐digit 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
completed once, unless the Personal Identification Number additional phones.
pairing information on the cell (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
phone changes or the cell phone Listing All Paired and Connected
is deleted from the system. 4. Start the pairing process on the Phones
cell phone that you want to pair. The system can list all cell phones
. Only one paired cell phone can For help with this process, see
be connected to the Bluetooth paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
the cell phone manufacturer's also connected to the vehicle, the
system at a time. user guide. system responds with “is connected”
. If multiple paired cell phones 5. Locate the device named after that phone name.
are within range of the system, “Your Vehicle” in the list
the system connects to the first on the cell phone. Follow the 1. Press and hold b g for
available paired cell phone in the instructions on the cell phone two seconds.
order that they were first paired to enter the PIN that was 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
to the system. To connect to a provided in Step 3. After the
different paired phone, see PIN is successfully entered, the 3. Say “List.”
“Connecting to a Different system prompts you to provide a
Phone” later in this section. name for the paired cell phone.
Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.” Digit Store: This command allows
If the phone name you want to . If another cell phone is a phone number to be stored as a
delete is unknown, see “Listing All found, the response will be name tag by entering the digits one
Paired and Connected Phones.” “<Phone name> is now at a time.
connected.” Delete: This command is used to
1. Press and hold b g for delete individual name tags.
two seconds.
. If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags: This
2. Say “Bluetooth.” remains connected. command deletes all stored
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks name tags in the Hands‐Free
Storing and Deleting Phone Calling Directory and the OnStar
which phone to delete.
Numbers Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
4. Say the name of the phone you if equipped.
want to delete. The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags Using the “Store” Command
Connecting to a Different Phone in the Hands‐Free Directory that is
To connect to a different cell phone, shared between the Bluetooth and 1. Press and hold b g for
the Bluetooth system looks for the OnStar systems, if equipped. two seconds.
next available cell phone in the The following commands are used 2. Say “Store.”
order in which all the available cell to delete and store phone numbers.
phones were paired. Depending 3. Say the phone number or group
Store: This command will store of numbers you want to store all
on which cell phone you want to
a phone number, or a group of at once with no pauses, then
connect to, you may have to use
numbers as a name tag. follow the directions given by the
this command several times.
system to save a name tag for
1. Press and hold b g for this number.
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Using the “Digit Store” Command Using the “Delete” Command Using the “List” Command
If an unwanted number is 1. Press and hold b g for 1. Press and hold b g for
recognized by the system, say two seconds. two seconds.
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number. 2. Say “Delete.” 2. Say “Directory.”
To hear all of the numbers 3. Say the name tag you want to 3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
recognized by the system, delete. 4. Say “List.”
say “Verify” at any time. Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
Making a Call
1. Press and hold b g for Calls can be made using the
two seconds. This command deletes all stored
following commands.
name tags in the Hands‐Free
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Calling Directory and the OnStar Dial or Call: The dial or
3. Say each digit, one at a time, Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, call command can be used
that you want to store. After if equipped. interchangeably to dial a phone
each digit is entered, the system number or a stored name tag.
To delete all name tags:
repeats back the digit it heard
Digit Dial: This command allows
followed by a tone. After the 1. Press and hold b g for a phone number to be dialed by
last digit has been entered, two seconds. entering the digits one at a time.
say “Store,” and then follow the
directions given by the system to 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” Re‐dial: This command is used to
save a name tag for this number. Listing Stored Numbers dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
The list command will list all stored
numbers and name tags.
Using the “Dial” or “Call” To hear all of the numbers Receiving a Call
Command recognized by the system, say
When an incoming call is received,
“Verify” at any time.
1. Press and hold b g for the audio system mutes and a ring
two seconds. 1. Press and hold b g for tone is heard in the vehicle.
two seconds.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” . Press b g to answer the call.
3. Say the entire number without 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
. Press c x to ignore a call.
pausing, or say the name tag. 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Once connected, the person called that you want to dial. After each Call Waiting
will be heard through the audio digit is entered, the system
Call waiting must be supported on
speakers. repeats back the digit it heard
the cell phone and enabled by the
followed by a tone. After the
wireless service carrier.
Using the “Digit Dial” Command last digit has been entered,
The digit dial command allows a say “Dial.” . Press b g to answer an
phone number to be dialed by Once connected, the person called incoming call when another call
entering the digits one at a time. will be heard through the audio is active. The original call is
After each digit is entered, the speakers. placed on hold.
system repeats back the digit it
Using the “Re‐dial” Command . Press b g again to return to the
heard followed by a tone.
original call.
If an unwanted number is 1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the action is required.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
last number. . Press c x to disconnect the
Once connected, the person called
current call and switch to the call
will be heard through the audio
on hold.
speakers.
Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call Transferring Audio from the

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside
supported on the cell phone and the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the
enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call vehicle:
carrier. cannot hear them.
1. Press b g.
1. While on a call, press b g. . To mute a call, press b g, and 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
2. Say “Three‐way call.” then say “Mute call.”
Transferring Audio to the
3. Use the dial or call command to . To cancel mute, press b g, and Bluetooth System from a Cell
dial the number of the third party then say “Un‐mute call.” Phone
to be called. During a call with the audio on the
Transferring a Call
4. Once the call is connected, cell phone, press b g. The audio
Audio can be transferred between
press b g to link all callers the Bluetooth system and the cell transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
together. phone. does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the
Ending a Call The cell phone must be paired cell phone. See your cell phone
and connected with the Bluetooth manufacturer's user guide for more
Press c x to end a call. system before a call can be information.
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

Voice pass‐thru allows access to the (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as it will be retained indefinitely.
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can This includes all saved name tags in
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a the phone book and phone pairing
To access contacts stored in the cell menu‐driven phone system. information. For information on how
phone: Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the
stored for use. previous section “Deleting a Paired
1. Press and hold b g for Sending a Number or Name Tag
Phone” and the previous sections
two seconds. on deleting name tags.
During a Call
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system Other Information
responds “Bluetooth ready,” 1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by The Bluetooth® word mark and
followed by a tone.
a tone. logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
3. Say “Voice.” The system SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
responds “OK, accessing 2. Say “Dial.” by General Motors is under license.
<phone name>.” 3. Say the number or name tag Other trademarks and trade names
The cell phone's normal prompt to send. are those of their respective owners.
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning)
Climate Control Systems With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
Climate Control Systems
(with Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems
(with Heater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
A. Fan Control E. Outside Air

B. Temperature Control F. Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Conditioning
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the The recirculation mode cannot be
clockwise or counterclockwise floor outlets, with some air directed selected in the defog or defrost
to increase or decrease the to the windshield and side window mode. When either mode is
temperature inside the vehicle. outlets. In this mode, the system selected, the system runs the air
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise automatically selects outside air. conditioning compressor, unless
or counterclockwise to increase or Recirculation cannot be selected the outside temperature is close
decrease the fan speed. Turn the in floor mode. to freezing.
knob all the way counterclockwise - (Defog): This mode clears the Do not drive the vehicle until all the
to turn the front system off. windows of fog or moisture. Air is windows are clear.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn directed to the windshield, floor : (Outside Air): Press to
clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets, and side window vents. turn the outside air mode on.
change the direction of the airflow 0 (Defrost): This mode removes An indicator light comes on to
inside the vehicle. The knob can fog or frost from the windshield show that outside air is on.
be positioned between two modes more quickly. Air is directed to In this mode outside air circulates
to select a combination of those the windshield and the side throughout the vehicle. The outside
modes. window vents, with some air air mode can be used with all
Select from the following: directed to the floor vents. modes, but it cannot be used
The system automatically forces with the recirculation mode.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the outside air into the vehicle.
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
and floor outlets.
? (Recirculation): Press to # (Air Conditioning): Press to The rear window defogger only
turn the recirculation mode on. turn the air conditioning system on works when the ignition is in
An indicator light comes on to or off. An indicator light comes on to ON/RUN. The rear window
show that recirculation is on. show that the air conditioning is on. defogger stays on for approximately
The air conditioning can be selected 10 minutes after the button is
This mode recirculates and helps pressed, unless the ignition is
to quickly cool the air inside the in any mode as long as the fan
switch is on. turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or
vehicle. It can be used to help LOCK/OFF. The defogger can
prevent outside air and odors from The air conditioning system also be turned off by turning off
entering the vehicle. removes moisture from the air, the engine.
The recirculation mode cannot so a small amount of water might
drip under the vehicle while idling or Notice: Do not use anything
be used with floor, defog or sharp on the inside of the rear
defrost modes. If recirculation after turning off the engine. This is
normal. window. If you do, you could cut
is selected with one of these or damage the warming grid, and
modes, the indicator light flashes Rear Window Defogger the repairs would not be covered
three times and then turns off. by the vehicle warranty. Do not
While in recirculation mode the For vehicles with a rear window
defogger, a warming grid is used to attach a temporary vehicle
windows may fog when the weather license, tape, a decal, or anything
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, remove fog from the rear window.
similar to the defogger grid.
select either the defog or defrost < (Rear): Press to turn the
mode and increase the fan speed. rear window defogger on or off.
The recirculation mode can be An indicator light on the button
turned off by pressing the outside comes on to show that the rear
air button, or by turning off the window defogger is on.
ignition.
Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only) 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled. decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob all the way counterclockwise
to turn the front system off.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
The knob can be positioned
between two modes to select a
combination of those modes.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
A. Fan Control Temperature Control: Turn ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
B. Temperature Control clockwise or counterclockwise between the instrument panel and
to increase or decrease the floor outlets.
C. Air Delivery Mode Control temperature inside the vehicle.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the Dual Automatic Climate Control System

floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield, side window, and The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
second row floor outlets. In this this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system
mode, the system automatically described later in this section.
selects outside air.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor
outlets, and side window vents.
0 (Defrost): This mode
removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is
directed to the windshield and
the side window vents, with some
air directed to the floor vents.
The system automatically forces
outside air into the vehicle.
A. Driver and Passenger G. Air Delivery Mode Control
Do not drive the vehicle until all the Temperature Controls
windows are clear. H. Display
B. Fan Control I. On/Off
C. AUTO J. Rear Window Defogger
D. Defrost K. Air Conditioning
E. Recirculation L. PASS (Passenger)
F. Outside Air
O (On/Off): Press to turn the Driver and Passenger Side temperature display shows the
climate control system on or Temperature Controls temperature setting increasing or
off. Outside air still enters the decreasing.
The driver and passenger side
vehicle, and is directed to the temperature buttons are used to The passenger temperature
floor. This direction can be changed adjust the temperature of the air setting can be set to match the
by pressing the mode button. coming through the system on driver temperature setting by
Recirculation can be selected once the driver or passenger side of pressing the PASS button and
you have selected vent or bi-level the vehicle. The temperature can turning off the PASS indicator.
mode. The temperature can also be be adjusted even if the system is When the passenger temperature
adjusted using either temperature turned off. This is possible since setting is set different than the driver
button. If the air delivery mode or outside air always flows through setting, the indicator on the PASS
temperature settings are adjusted the system as the vehicle is button illuminates and both the
with the system off, the display moving forward unless it is driver side and passenger side
illuminates briefly to show the set to recirculation mode. temperature displays are shown.
settings and then returns to off. See “Recirculation” later in
The system can be turned back When in defrost mode the
this section. passenger temperature setting
on by pressing either O, D, C, #, cannot be changed.
Press the + or − buttons to increase
the defrost or the AUTO button.
or decrease the cabin temperature.
The driver side or passenger side
Automatic Operation The air inlet will normally be set system remains at the maximum
to outside air. If it is hot outside, heat setting. Choosing either
AUTO (Automatic): When
the air inlet may automatically maximum setting will not cause
automatic operation is active,
switch to the recirculate mode to the vehicle to heat or cool any
the system controls the inside
help quickly cool down the air faster.
temperature, the air delivery,
inside the vehicle. The light Do not cover the solar sensor
and the fan speed.
on the button comes on in located on the top of the instrument
Use the steps below to place the recirculation. panel near the windshield.
entire system in automatic mode:
2. Set the driver and passenger This sensor regulates air
1. Press the AUTO button. temperature. temperature based on sun load.
When AUTO is selected, the To find your comfort setting, start For more information on the solar
display changes to show the with a 23°C (74°F) temperature sensor, see “Sensors” later in this
current temperature(s) and setting and allow about section.
AUTO is lit on the display. 20 minutes for the system to To avoid blowing cold air in cold
The current air delivery mode regulate. Use the driver or weather, the system delays
and fan speed are also passenger temperature buttons turning the fan on until warm air
displayed for about five seconds. to adjust the temperature setting is available. The length of delay
When AUTO is selected, the air as necessary. If a temperature depends on the engine coolant
conditioning operation and air setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen, temperature. Pressing the fan
inlet are automatically controlled. the system remains at the switch overrides this delay and
The air conditioning compressor maximum cooling setting. changes the fan to a selected
may run when the outside If a temperature setting of speed.
temperature is above freezing. 32°C (90°F) is chosen, the
Manual Operation Pressing either mode button while in - (Defog): This mode clears
automatic control places the mode the windows of fog or moisture.
D C (Fan Control): Press these
under manual control. The air
buttons to increase or decrease the Air is directed to the windshield,
delivery mode setting displays and floor outlets, and side window vents.
fan speed.
the AUTO light turns off. The fan In this mode, the system turns
Pressing either fan button while in remains under automatic control. off recirculation and runs the air
automatic control places the fan
under manual control. The fan
H (Vent): Air is directed to the conditioning compressor unless
instrument panel outlets. the outside temperature is close to
setting remains displayed and freezing. The recirculation mode
the AUTO light turns off. The air ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided cannot be selected while in the
delivery mode remains under between the instrument panel and defrost mode.
automatic control. floor outlets. Some air is directed
toward the windshield and side 0 (Defrost): This mode removes
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): window outlets. fog or frost from the windshield
Press these buttons to change the more quickly. Air is directed to the
direction of the airflow in the vehicle. 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents,
Repeatedly press either button until floor outlets, with some to the with some directed to the floor
the desired mode appears on the windshield, side window outlets, vents. In this mode, the system
display. and second row floor outlets. In this automatically forces outside air
mode, the system automatically into the vehicle and runs the air
Pressing either mode button while
selects outside air. conditioning compressor unless
the system is off changes the air
delivery mode without turning the the outside temperature is close to
system on. freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
The passenger temperature If this button is pressed when @ (Recirculation): Press

control cannot be activated while in the air conditioning compressor to turn the recirculation mode on.
defrost mode. If the PASS button is is unavailable due to outside An indicator light comes on to show
pressed, the button indicator flashes conditions, the indicator flashes that recirculation is on.
three times and will not work. If the three times and then turns off.
passenger temperature buttons are If the air conditioning is on and the This mode recirculates and helps
adjusted, the driver temperature outside temperature drops below a to quickly cool the air inside the
indicator changes. The passenger temperature which is too cool for air vehicle. It can be used to help
temperature will not be displayed. conditioning to be effective, the air prevent outside air and odors
conditioning light turns off to show from entering the vehicle.
If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is
selected again, the climate control that the air conditioning mode has The recirculation mode cannot
system displays the previous been canceled. be used with floor, defog, or
temperature settings. On hot days, open the windows long defrost modes. If recirculation is
enough to let hot inside air escape. selected with one of those modes,
Do not drive the vehicle until all the indicator light flashes three
windows are clear. This helps to reduce the time it
takes for the vehicle to cool down. times and then turns off. The air
# (Air Conditioning): Press It also helps the system to operate conditioning compressor also comes
to turn the air conditioning (A/C) more efficiently. on when this mode is activated.
compressor on and off. An indicator While in recirculation mode, the
light comes on to show that the air The air conditioning system windows may fog when the weather
conditioning is on. removes moisture from the air, so is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
a small amount of water might select either the defog or defrost
drip under the vehicle while idling mode and increase the fan speed.
or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
The recirculation mode can be The defogger can also be turned off Sensors
turned off by pressing the outside by turning the engine off. Do not
air button, or by turning off the drive the vehicle until all windows
ignition. are clear.
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the Notice: Do not use a razor blade
outside air mode on. An indicator or sharp object to clear the inside
light on the button comes on to rear window. Do not adhere
show that outside is on. When anything to the defogger grid
selected, air from outside the lines in the rear glass. These
vehicle circulates throughout the actions may damage the rear
vehicle. The recirculation mode defogger. Repairs would not be
cannot be used with the outside covered by your warranty.
air mode. Heated Mirror: For vehicles with
Rear Window Defogger heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost The solar sensor, located in the
The rear window defogger uses a from the surface of the mirror when defrost grille in the middle of the
warming grid to remove fog from the the rear window defog button is instrument panel, monitors the solar
rear window. pressed. See Power Mirrors on heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
< (Rear Window Defogger): page 2‑16. or the system will not work properly.
For vehicles with this feature,
press to turn the defogger on or off.
It automatically turns off several
minutes after it has been activated.
There is also an exterior Air Vents

temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor Use the air outlets located in the
reads the outside air temperature center and on the side of the
and helps maintain the temperature instrument panel to direct the
inside the vehicle. Any cover on airflow. Use the thumbwheels
the front of the vehicle could cause near the air outlets to open or
a false reading in the displayed close off the airflow.
temperature.
Operation Tips
The climate control system uses . Clear away any ice, snow,
the information from these sensors
or leaves from air inlets at the
to maintain comfort settings by
The interior temperature sensor, base of the windshield that could
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan
located in the headliner, measures block the flow of air into the
speed, and the air delivery mode.
the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
The system may also supply cooler
vehicle. air to the side of the vehicle facing . Keep the path under the front
the sun. The recirculation mode will seats clear of objects to help
also be used as needed to maintain circulate the air inside of the
cool outlet temperatures. vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Retained Accessory
9-39 Ride Control Systems
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Operating Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . .
9-40
9-40
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Cruise Control

Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Driving Information
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking Over Things Object Detection Systems
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-76
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-44
Rear Vision
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Fuel
Running the Vehicle While
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-19 Automatic Transmission Gasoline Specifications
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-46 (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-85
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-20 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 California Fuel
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-23 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-86
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Drive Systems Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Truck-Camper Loading Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-87
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88
Brakes Filling a Portable Fuel
Starting and Operating Antilock Brake Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-34 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Brake Assist (Except With
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 4.3L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-70
9-2 Driving and Operating
Towing Driving Information

General Towing WARNING (Continued)
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Driving Characteristics and Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 collisions resulting in injury or
Defensive driving means “always
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95 expect the unexpected.” The first possible death. These simple
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-112 step in driving defensively is to wear defensive driving techniques
Trailer Sway the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-124 page 3‑11.
Conversions and Add-Ons Drunk Driving
Add-On Electrical { WARNING
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Adding a Snow Plow or Assume that other road users { WARNING
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . 9-125 (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is
Pickup Conversion to drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes,
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129 and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and
what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by
In addition: even a small amount of alcohol.
. Allow enough following You can have a serious — or
distance between you and even fatal — collision if you drive
the driver in front of you. after drinking. Do not drink and
. Focus on the task of driving. drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. Ride home in a
(Continued)
cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not
drink.
Death and injury associated with Medical research shows that Braking
drinking and driving is a global alcohol in a person's system
tragedy. can make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on
especially injuries to the brain, page 5‑27.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle: spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception
judgment, muscular coordination, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding
vision, and attentiveness. drinking — driver or passenger — is to push the brake pedal is
in a crash, that person's chance of perception time. Actually doing
Police records show that being killed or permanently disabled it is reaction time.
almost 40 percent of all motor is higher than if the person had not
vehicle-related deaths involve been drinking. Average reaction time is about
alcohol. In most cases, these three‐fourths of a second. But that
deaths are the result of someone is only an average. It might be less
Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than The following three systems or three seconds or more with
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition,
deaths have been associated with driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and
the use of alcohol, with about accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do
250,000 people injured. driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
ask more of those control systems even in three‐fourths of a second,
For persons under 21, it is against than the tires and road can provide. a vehicle moving at 100 km/h
the law in every U.S. state to drink Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft).
alcohol. There are good medical, vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on That could be a lot of distance in
psychological, and developmental page 9‑70. an emergency, so keeping enough
reasons for these laws. space between the vehicle and
Adding non‐dealer accessories
The obvious way to eliminate the others is important.
can affect vehicle performance.
leading highway safety problem is See Accessories and Modifications
for people never to drink alcohol on page 10‑3.
and then drive.
And, of course, actual stopping brakes. If the brakes are pumped, Steering Tips
distances vary greatly with the the pedal could get harder to push
It is important to take curves at a
surface of the road, whether it is down. If the engine stops, there will
reasonable speed.
pavement or gravel; the condition still be some power brake assist but
of the road, whether it is wet, dry, it will be used when the brake is Traction in a curve depends on the
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the applied. Once the power assist is condition of the tires and the road
brakes; the weight of the vehicle; used up, it can take longer to stop surface, the angle at which the
and the amount of brake force and the brake pedal will be harder curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
applied. to push. While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
Avoid needless heavy Adding non‐dealer accessories
braking. Some people drive in can affect vehicle performance. If there is a need to reduce speed,
spurts — heavy acceleration See Accessories and Modifications do it before entering the curve, while
followed by heavy braking — rather on page 10‑3. the front wheels are straight.
than keeping pace with traffic. Try to adjust the speed so you can
This is a mistake. The brakes Steering drive through the curve. Maintain a
might not have time to cool between reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
hard stops. The brakes will wear Power Steering
accelerate until out of the curve,
out much faster with a lot of heavy If the vehicle is a hybrid, see and then accelerate gently into
braking. Keeping pace with the the hybrid supplement for more the straightaway.
traffic and allowing realistic following information.
distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means If power steering assist is lost
better braking and longer brake life. because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
If the engine ever stops while the functioning, the vehicle can be
vehicle is being driven, brake steered but it will take more effort.
normally but do not pump the
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery

There are times when steering The vehicle's right wheels can drop
can be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
For example, you come over a hill shoulder while driving.
and find a truck stopped in your
lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out
from between parked cars and stops
right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
the problem. If holding the steering wheel at
The vehicle can perform very the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
well in emergencies like these. positions, it can be turned a full If the level of the shoulder is
180 degrees very quickly without only slightly below the pavement,
First, apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 9‑3. It is better to remove removing either hand. But you have recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
as much speed as possible from to act fast, steer quickly, and just as off the accelerator and then, if there
a collision. Then steer around quickly straighten the wheel once is nothing in the way, steer so that
you have avoided the object. the vehicle straddles the edge of
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available. the pavement. Turn the steering
The fact that such emergency
wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about
situations are always possible is a
one-eighth turn, until the right front
good reason to practice defensive
tire contacts the pavement edge.
driving at all times and wear safety
Then turn the steering wheel to
belts properly.
go straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control The three types of skids correspond these conditions. It is important to
to the vehicle's three control slow down on slippery surfaces
Let us review what driving experts systems. In the braking skid, because stopping distance is longer
say about what happens when the the wheels are not rolling. In the and vehicle control more limited.
three control systems — brakes, steering or cornering skid, too much
steering, and acceleration — do not While driving on a surface with
speed or steering in a curve causes reduced traction, try to avoid
have enough friction where the tires tires to slip and lose cornering force.
meet the road to do what the driver sudden steering, acceleration,
And in the acceleration skid, too or braking, including reducing
has asked. much throttle causes the driving vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
In any emergency, do not give up. wheels to spin. gear. Any sudden changes could
Keep trying to steer and constantly If the vehicle starts to slide, ease cause the tires to slide. You might
seek an escape route or area of your foot off the accelerator pedal not realize the surface is slippery
less danger. and quickly steer the way you until the vehicle is skidding. Learn
Skidding want the vehicle to go. If you start to recognize warning clues — such
steering quickly enough, the vehicle as enough water, ice, or packed
In a skid, a driver can lose control of may straighten out. Always be ready snow on the road to make a
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid for a second skid if it occurs. mirrored surface — and slow
most skids by taking reasonable down when you have any doubt.
care suited to existing conditions, Of course, traction is reduced when
and by not overdriving those water, snow, ice, gravel, or other Remember: Antilock brakes help
conditions. But skids are always material is on the road. For safety, avoid only the braking skid.
possible. slow down and adjust your driving to
Off-Road Driving serious — or even fatal — accident Before You Go Off-Roading

if you drink and drive or ride with a
Vehicles with four-wheel drive . Have all necessary maintenance
driver who has been drinking.
can be used for off-road driving. and service work done.
Vehicles without four-wheel drive Off-roading can be great fun but has . Make sure there is enough fuel,
and vehicles with 20‐inch tire/wheel some definite hazards. The greatest
that fluid levels are where they
assemblies should not be driven of these is the terrain itself. When
should be, and that the spare
off-road except on a level, solid off-road driving, traffic lanes are not
tire is fully inflated.
surface. marked, curves are not banked, and
there are no road signs. Surfaces . Be sure to read all
The airbag system is designed to can be slippery, rough, uphill, the information about
work properly under a wide range or downhill. four-wheel-drive vehicles
of conditions, including off‐road in this manual.
usage. Always wear your safety belt Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
and observe safe driving speeds, maneuvers. Failure to operate the . Make sure all underbody
especially on rough terrain. vehicle correctly off‐road could shields, if the vehicle has them,
result in loss of vehicle control are properly attached.
Drinking and driving can be very or vehicle rollover.
dangerous on any road and this is
. Know the local laws that apply
certainly true for off-road driving. Off-roading involves some new to off-roading where you will
At the very time you need special skills. That is why it is very be driving or check with law
alertness and driving skills, your important that you read these enforcement people in the area.
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment driving tips and suggestions to . Be sure to get the necessary
can be affected by even a small help make off-road driving safer permission if you will be on
amount of alcohol. You could have a and more enjoyable. private land.
If you think you will need some Notice: Operating your vehicle Loading Your Vehicle for
more ground clearance at the front for extended periods without Off-Road Driving
of your vehicle, you can remove the the front fascia lower air dam
front fascia lower air dam. The air installed can cause improper air
dam is held in place by 2 bolts flow to the engine. Always be
{ WARNING
and 10 snaps accessible from sure to replace the front fascia . Cargo on the load floor piled
underneath the front fascia. air dam when you are finished higher than the seatbacks
To remove the air dam: off-road driving. can be thrown forward during
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall a sudden stop. You or your
1. Remove the 2 outboard air dam passengers could be injured.
bolts. the air dam:
Keep cargo below the top of
2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengage 1. Line up the snaps and push the the seatbacks.
the snaps. air dam rearward to engage the
snaps. . Unsecured cargo on the
3. After the bolts are removed and load floor can be tossed
the snaps are disengaged, push 2. Install the 2 outboard bolts. about when driving over
forward on the air dam until it rough terrain. You or your
is free. passengers can be struck
by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
(Continued)

. Be sure the load is properly . Avoid any driving practice
WARNING (Continued) secured, so things are not that could damage shrubs,
tossed around. flowers, trees, or grasses or
. Heavy loads on the roof raise disturb wildlife. This includes
You will find other important
the vehicle's center of gravity, wheel-spinning, breaking down
information under Vehicle Load
making it more likely to roll trees, or unnecessary driving
Limits on page 9‑25 and Tires on
over. You can be seriously or page 10‑57. through streams or over soft
fatally injured if the vehicle ground.
rolls over. Put heavy loads Environmental Concerns . Always carry a litter bag and
inside the cargo area, not on Off-road driving can provide make sure all refuse is removed
the roof. Keep cargo in the wholesome and satisfying from any campsite before
cargo area as far forward recreation. However, it also leaving.
and low as possible. raises environmental concerns. . Take extreme care with open
We recognize these concerns fires (where permitted), camp
There are some important things to and urge every off-roader to follow stoves, and lanterns.
remember about how to load your these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
. Never park your vehicle over
vehicle.
dry grass or other combustible
. The heaviest things should be
. Always use established trails, materials that could catch fire
on the floor, forward of the rear roads, and areas that have been from the heat of the vehicle's
axle. Put heavier items as far specially set aside for public exhaust system.
forward as you can. off-road recreational driving and
obey all posted regulations.
Traveling to Remote Areas Getting Familiar with Off-Road

. The vehicle has more bounce
Driving when driving over obstacles.
It makes sense to plan your trip, .
especially when going to a remote It is a good idea to practice in an More braking distance is
area. Know the terrain and plan area that is safe and close to home needed, especially on an
your route. Get accurate maps of before you go into the wilderness. unpaved surface.
trails and terrain. Check to see if Off-roading requires some new and
there are any blocked or closed different skills. { WARNING
roads.
Tune your senses to different kinds When you are driving off-road,
It is also a good idea to travel with of signals. Your eyes need to bouncing and quick changes in
at least one other vehicle in case constantly sweep the terrain for direction can easily throw you
something happens to one of them. unexpected obstacles. Your ears out of position. This could cause
For vehicles with a winch, be sure need to listen for unusual tire or you to lose control and crash.
to read the winch instructions. In a engine sounds. Use your arms,
So, whether you are driving on
remote area, a winch can be handy hands, feet, and body to respond
or off the road, you and your
if you get stuck but you will want to to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
passengers should wear safety
know how to use it properly. Controlling the vehicle is the key to belts.
successful off-road driving. One of
the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher
speeds:
. You approach things faster and
have less time to react.
. There is less time to scan the
terrain for obstacles.
Scanning the Terrain Surface Obstacles: Unseen or When driving over bumps, rocks,
hidden obstacles can be hazardous. or other obstacles, the wheels can
Off-road driving can take you over
A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can leave the ground. If this happens,
many different kinds of terrain.
startle you if you are not prepared even with one or two wheels, you
Be familiar with the terrain and
for them. Often these obstacles are cannot control the vehicle as well or
its many different features.
hidden by grass, bushes, snow, at all.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading or even the rise and fall of the Because you will be on an unpaved
surfaces can be hard-packed dirt, terrain itself. surface, it is especially important to
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
Some things to consider: avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces
. Is the path ahead clear? turns, or sudden braking.
affects the vehicle's steering,
acceleration, and braking in different . Will the surface texture change Off-roading requires a different kind
ways. Depending on the surface, abruptly up ahead? of alertness from driving on paved
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, roads and highways. There are no
delayed acceleration, poor traction,
. Does the travel take you uphill or road signs, posted speed limits,
and longer braking distances can downhill? or signal lights. Use good judgment
occur. . Will you have to stop suddenly about what is safe and what is not.
or change direction quickly?
When driving over obstacles or
rough terrain, keep a firm grip on
the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,
or other surface features can jerk
the wheel out of your hands.
Driving on Hills Approaching a Hill

. Is there a straight path up
or down the hill so you will
Off-road driving often takes you up, When you approach a hill, decide not have to make turning
down, or across a hill. Driving safely if it is too steep to climb, descend, maneuvers?
on hills requires good judgment or cross. Steepness can be hard
and an understanding of what the to judge. On a very small hill, for
. Are there obstructions on the hill
vehicle can and cannot do. There example, there may be a smooth, that can block your path, such
are some hills that simply cannot be constant incline with only a small as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
driven, no matter how well built the change in elevation where you can . What is beyond the hill? Is
vehicle. easily see all the way to the top. there a cliff, an embankment, a
On a large hill, the incline may get drop-off, a fence? Get out and
{ WARNING steeper as you near the top, but
you might not see this because the
walk the hill if you do not know.
It is the smart way to find out.
Many hills are simply too steep crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, . Is the hill simply too rough?
for any vehicle. If you drive up grass, or shrubs.
Steep hills often have ruts,
them, you will stall. If you drive Consider this as you approach a hill: gullies, troughs, and exposed
down them, you cannot control rocks because they are more
your speed. If you drive across
. Is there a constant incline,
or does the hill get sharply susceptible to the effects of
them, you will roll over. You could erosion.
steeper in places?
be seriously injured or killed.
If you have any doubt about the . Is there good traction on the
steepness, do not drive the hill. hillside, or will the surface cause
tire slipping?
Driving Uphill
. Ease up on the speed as you If the vehicle stalls, or is about to
approach the top of the hill. stall, and you cannot make it up
Once you decide it is safe to drive . Attach a flag to the vehicle to the hill:
up the hill:
be more visible to approaching . Push the brake pedal to stop
. Use a low gear and get a firm traffic on trails or hills. the vehicle and keep it from
grip on the steering wheel. . Sound the horn as you approach rolling backwards and apply
. Get a smooth start up the hill the top of the hill to let opposing the parking brake.
and try to maintain speed. traffic know you are there. . If the engine is still running, shift
Not using more power than . Use headlamps even during the the transmission to R (Reverse),
needed can avoid spinning
day to make the vehicle more release the parking brake, and
the wheels or sliding.
visible to oncoming traffic. slowly back down the hill in
R (Reverse).
{ WARNING { WARNING . If the engine has stopped
Turning or driving across steep running, you need to restart it.
hills can be dangerous. You could Driving to the top (crest) of a With the brake pedal pressed
lose traction, slide sideways, and hill at full speed can cause an and the parking brake still
possibly roll over. You could be accident. There could be a applied, shift the transmission to
seriously injured or killed. When drop-off, embankment, cliff, P (Park) and restart the engine.
driving up hills, always try to go or even another vehicle. You Then, shift to R (Reverse),
could be seriously injured or release the parking brake,
straight up.
killed. As you near the top of a and slowly back down the
hill, slow down and stay alert. hill as straight as possible
. Try to drive straight up the hill if in R (Reverse).
at all possible. If the path twists
and turns, you might want to find
another route.

. While backing down the hill, put . Never try to turn around if about
your left hand on the steering to stall when going up a hill. { WARNING
wheel at the 12 o'clock position If the hill is steep enough to
so you can tell if the wheels are stall the vehicle, it is steep Shifting the transfer case to
straight and can maneuver as enough to cause it to roll over. Neutral can cause your vehicle to
you back down. It is best to back If you cannot make it up the hill, roll even if the transmission is in
down the hill with the wheels back straight down the hill. P (Park). This is because the
straight rather than in the left If, after stalling, you try to back Neutral position on the transfer
or right direction. Turning the down the hill and decide you just case overrides the transmission.
wheel too far to the left or right cannot do it, set the parking brake, You or someone else could be
will increase the possibility of a put your transmission in P (Park), injured. If you are going to leave
rollover. and turn off the engine. Leave your vehicle, set the parking
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, the vehicle and go get some help. brake and shift the transmission
or is about to stall, when going up Exit on the uphill side and stay clear to P (Park). But do not shift the
a hill: of the path the vehicle would take transfer case to Neutral.
. Never attempt to prevent a stall if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the
by shifting into N (Neutral) to transfer case to Neutral when you
rev-up the engine and regain leave the vehicle. Leave it in
forward momentum. This will some gear.
not work. The vehicle can roll
backward very quickly and
could go out of control.
Driving Downhill
. Never go downhill with the
When off-roading takes you
{ WARNING transmission in N (Neutral),
called free-wheeling. The brakes
downhill, consider: Heavy braking when going will have to do all the work and
. How steep is the downhill? Will I down a hill can cause your could overheat and fade.
be able to maintain vehicle brakes to overheat and fade.
Vehicles are much more likely to
control? This could cause loss of control stall when going uphill, but if it
.
and a serious accident. Apply the happens when going downhill:
What is the surface like?
brakes lightly when descending a
Smooth? Rough? Slippery? 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the
hill and use a low gear to keep
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? regular brakes and apply the
vehicle speed under control.
. Are there hidden surface parking brake.
obstacles? Ruts? Logs? 2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still
Boulders? Things not to do when driving down
a hill: braking, restart the engine.
. What is at the bottom of the hill? 3. Shift back to a low gear, release
Is there a hidden creek bank or
. When driving downhill, avoid
turns that take you across the the parking brake, and drive
even a river bottom with large straight down.
rocks? incline of the hill. A hill that is
not too steep to drive down 4. If the engine will not start, get
If you decide you can go down might be too steep to drive out and get help.
a hill safely, try to keep the vehicle across. The vehicle could
headed straight down. Use a low roll over.
gear so engine drag can help the
brakes so they do not have to do all
the work. Descend slowly, keeping
the vehicle under control at all
times.
Driving Across an Incline end over end. But when driving For these reasons, carefully
across an incline, the narrower consider whether to try to drive
An off-road trail will probably go
track width — the distance across an incline. Just because
across the incline of a hill. To decide
between the left and right the trail goes across the incline
whether to try to drive across the
wheels — might not prevent the does not mean you have to drive it.
incline, consider the following:
vehicle from tilting and rolling The last vehicle to try it might have
over. Driving across an incline rolled over.
{ WARNING puts more weight on the downhill If you feel the vehicle starting
wheels which could cause a to slide sideways, turn downhill.
Driving across an incline that is downhill slide or a rollover.
too steep will make your vehicle This should help straighten out
roll over. You could be seriously
. Surface conditions can be a the vehicle and prevent the side
injured or killed. If you have any problem. Loose gravel, muddy slipping. The best way to prevent
doubt about the steepness of the spots, or even wet grass can this is to “walk the course” first, so
incline, do not drive across it. cause the tires to slip sideways, you know what the surface is like
downhill. If the vehicle slips before driving it.
Find another route instead.
sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
. A hill that can be driven straight etc. — and roll over.
up or down might be too steep . Hidden obstacles can make the
to drive across. When going steepness of the incline even
straight up or down a hill, the worse. If you drive across a rock
length of the wheel base — the with the uphill wheels, or if the
distance from the front wheels to downhill wheels drop into a rut
the rear wheels — reduces the or depression, the vehicle can tilt
likelihood the vehicle will tumble even more.
Stalling on an Incline Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Hard packed snow and ice offer
or Ice the worst tire traction. On these
{ WARNING When you drive in mud, snow,
surfaces, it is very easy to lose
control. On wet ice, for example,
or sand, the wheels do not get the traction is so poor that you
Getting out on the downhill (low) good traction. Acceleration is not
side of a vehicle stopped across will have difficulty accelerating.
as quick, turning is more difficult, And, if the vehicle does get moving,
an incline is dangerous. If the and braking distances are longer.
vehicle rolls over, you could be poor steering and difficult braking
crushed or killed. Always get out It is best to use a low gear when can cause it to slide out of control.
on the uphill (high) side of the in mud — the deeper the mud, the
vehicle and stay well clear of the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does
{ WARNING
rollover path.
not get stuck. Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
When driving on sand, wheel or rivers can be dangerous.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing traction changes. On loosely packed Underwater springs, currents
an incline, be sure you, and sand, such as on beaches or sand under the ice, or sudden thaws
any passengers, get out on the dunes, the tires will tend to sink into can weaken the ice. Your vehicle
uphill side, even if the door there the sand. This affects steering, could fall through the ice and
is harder to open. If you get out on accelerating, and braking. Drive at you and your passengers could
the downhill side and the vehicle a reduced speed and avoid sharp drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
starts to roll over, you will be right turns or abrupt maneuvers. surfaces only.
in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope,
stay out of the path the vehicle will
take if it does roll over.
Driving in Water Find out how deep the water is After Off-Road Driving
before driving through it. Do not
Remove any brush or debris that
{ WARNING try it if it is deep enough to cover
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
has collected on the underbody,
chassis, or under the hood. These
Driving through rushing water can pipe — you probably will not get
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
be dangerous. Deep water can through. Deep water can damage
sweep your vehicle downstream the axle and other vehicle parts. After operation in mud or sand,
and you and your passengers have the brake linings cleaned and
If the water is not too deep, drive
could drown. If it is only shallow checked. These substances can
slowly through it. At faster speeds,
cause glazing and uneven braking.
water, it can still wash away the water splashes on the ignition
Check the body structure, steering,
ground from under your tires, and system and the vehicle can stall.
suspension, wheels, tires, and
you could lose traction and roll Stalling can also occur if you get the
exhaust system for damage and
the vehicle over. Do not drive tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is
check the fuel lines and cooling
through rushing water. under water, you will never be able
system for any leakage.
to start the engine. When going
through water, remember that when The vehicle requires more frequent
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, the brakes get wet, it might take service due to off-road use. Refer
and flood waters demand extreme longer to stop. See Driving on Wet to the Maintenance Schedule for
caution. Roads on page 9‑19. additional information.
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
vehicle traction and affect your After driving through a large can build up under the vehicle's
ability to stop and accelerate. puddle of water or a car/vehicle tires so they actually ride on the
Always drive slower in these types wash, lightly apply the brake water. This can happen if the road
of driving conditions and avoid pedal until the brakes work is wet enough and you are going
driving through large puddles and normally. fast enough. When the vehicle is
deep‐standing or flowing water. hydroplaning, it has little or no
Flowing or rushing water creates contact with the road.
strong forces. Driving through
{ WARNING flowing water could cause the
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
Wet brakes can cause crashes. vehicle to be carried away. If this
slow down when the road is wet.
They might not work as well in happens, you and other vehicle
a quick stop and could cause occupants could drown. Do not
pulling to one side. You could ignore police warnings and be
lose control of the vehicle. very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
(Continued)
Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention Driving on steep hills or through
weather driving tips include: to your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving
. Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
a safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include:
. Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape.
equipment in good shape.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
. Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and
reservoir filled.
. Keep interior temperature cool.
transmission.
. Have good tires with proper
. Keep your eyes moving — scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Shift to a lower gear when going
tread depth. See Tires on down steep or long hills.
page 10‑57. . Check the rearview mirror and
. Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Winter Driving Try not to break the fragile traction.

{ WARNING If you accelerate too fast, the drive
Driving on Snow or Ice wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is Drive carefully when there is snow
dangerous. The brakes will or ice between the tires and the The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
have to do all the work of slowing road, creating less traction or grip. on page 9‑68 improves vehicle
down and they could get so hot Wet ice can occur at about 0°C stability during hard stops on
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery roads, but apply the brakes
that they would not work well.
fall, resulting in even less traction. sooner than when on dry pavement.
You would then have poor braking
Avoid driving on wet ice or in Allow greater following distance on
or even none going down a hill. freezing rain until roads can be
You could crash. Always have the any slippery road and watch for
treated with salt or sand.
engine running and the vehicle in slippery spots. Icy patches can
gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the occur on otherwise clear roads in
condition. Accelerate gently so shaded areas. The surface of a
. Stay in your own lane. Do not traction is not lost. Accelerating too curve or an overpass can remain
swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin icy when the surrounding roads
center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the are clear. Avoid sudden steering
speeds that let you stay in tires slick, so there is even less maneuvers and braking while
your own lane. traction. on ice.
. Top of hills: Be alert — Turn off cruise control on slippery
something could be in your surfaces.
lane (stalled car, accident).
. Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑44.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑10. To get help and keep . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
everyone in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does Monoxide) gas to get inside.
not collect there. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You cannot see it or smell it,
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the so you might not know it is in your
. Tie a red cloth to an outside vehicle. Clear away snow from
vehicle that is away from
mirror. around the base of your vehicle,
the wind to bring in fresh air.
especially any that is blocking the
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
under the vehicle. This may Run the engine for short periods
. Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm, but
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that
inside. Engine exhaust contains be careful.
circulates the air inside
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which the vehicle and set the fan
cannot be seen or smelled. speed to the highest setting.
It can cause unconsciousness See Climate Control System
and even death. in the Index.
(Continued) (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck
short periods as needed to warm { WARNING
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when If the vehicle's tires spin at high
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. speed, they can explode, and
until help arrives but only when you See “Rocking Your Vehicle to Get you or others could be injured.
feel really uncomfortable from the It Out” later in this section. The vehicle can overheat,
cold. Moving about to keep warm If the vehicle has a traction system, causing an engine compartment
also helps. it can often help to free a stuck fire or other damage. Spin the
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's wheels as little as possible and
If it takes some time for help to
traction system in the Index. If stuck avoid going above 55 km/h
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator too severely for the traction system (35 mph).
pedal slightly so the engine runs to free the vehicle, turn the traction
faster than the idle speed. This system off and use the rocking For information about using tire
keeps the battery charged to restart method. chains on the vehicle, see Tire
the vehicle and to signal for help Chains on page 10‑83.
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get vehicle. If that does not get the
It Out vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. Recovery
Turn the steering wheel left and hooks can be used, if the vehicle
right to clear the area around the has them. If the vehicle does need
front wheels. For four-wheel-drive to be towed out, see Towing the
vehicles, shift into Four‐Wheel Vehicle on page 10‑103.
High. For vehicles with StabiliTrak ®,
turn the traction control part of the Recovery Hooks
system off. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
{ WARNING
possible. To prevent transmission These hooks, when used, are
wear, wait until the wheels stop Notice: Never use recovery
under a lot of force. Always pull
spinning before shifting gears. hooks to tow the vehicle.
the vehicle straight out. Never pull Your vehicle could be damaged
Release the accelerator pedal on the hooks at a sideways angle.
while shifting, and press lightly and it would not be covered by
The hooks could break off and warranty.
on the accelerator pedal when you or others could be injured
the transmission is in gear. Slowly from the chain or cable For vehicles with recovery hooks at
spinning the wheels in the forward the front of the vehicle, you can use
snapping back.
and reverse directions causes a them if you are stuck off-road and
rocking motion that could free the need to be pulled to some place
where you can continue driving.
Vehicle Load Limits Tire and Loading Information

{ WARNING Label
It is very important to know
how much weight your vehicle Do not load the vehicle
can carry. This weight is called any heavier than the
the vehicle capacity weight Gross Vehicle Weight
and includes the weight of Rating (GVWR), or either the
all occupants, cargo, and all maximum front or rear Gross
nonfactory-installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Two labels on your vehicle This can cause systems to
show how much weight it was break and change the way the
designed to carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
Loading Information label and cause loss of control and a
the Certification/Tire label. crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the
label attached below the
door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined
label shows the number of information on the vehicle weight of the driver and
occupant seating positions (A), Certification/Tire label. It tells passengers from XXX kg
and the maximum vehicle you the Gross Vehicle Weight or XXX lbs.
capacity weight (B) in kilograms Rating (GVWR) and the Gross 4. The resulting figure equals
and pounds. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) the available amount of cargo
The Tire and Loading for the front and rear axles. and luggage load capacity.
Information label also shows the See “Certification/Tire Label” For example, if the “XXX”
size of the original equipment later in this section. amount equals 1400 lbs
tires (C) and the recommended Steps for Determining Correct and there will be five 150 lb
cold tire inflation pressures (D). Load Limit passengers in your vehicle,
For more information on tires 1. Locate the statement the amount of available cargo
and inflation see Tires on “The combined weight of and luggage load capacity
page 10‑57 and Tire Pressure occupants and cargo should is 650 lbs (1400−750
on page 10‑66. never exceed XXX kg or (5x150) = 650 lbs).
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined

weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this Example 1 Example 2
reduces the available cargo A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
and luggage load capacity Example 1 = (453 kg) (1,000 lbs) Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
of your vehicle. SeeTrailer B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
Towing on page 9‑95 for 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
important information on (300 lbs) (750 lbs)
towing a trailer, towing safety C. Available Occupant and Cargo C. Available Cargo
rules and trailering tips. Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs) Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the size of
loading information label for your vehicle's original tires and
specific information about your the inflation pressures needed
vehicle's capacity weight and to obtain the gross weight
seating positions. The combined capacity of your vehicle. This is
weight of the driver, passengers, called Gross Vehicle Weight
and cargo should never exceed Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
your vehicle's capacity weight. includes the weight of the
Certification/Tire Label
vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also
Example 3 tells you the maximum weights
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for for the front and rear axles,
Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) called Gross Axle Weight
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ Rating (GAWR). To find out the
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg actual loads on your front and
(1,000 lbs) rear axles, you need to go to a
C. Available Cargo
weigh station and weigh your
Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs) vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread
out your load equally on both
A vehicle specific Certification/ sides of the centerline.
Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver door.
Never exceed the GVWR for Notice : Overloading the

your vehicle, or the GAWR for { WARNING vehicle may cause damage.
either the front or rear axle. Do not load the vehicle any Repairs would not be covered
The Certification/Tire label also heavier than the Gross by the vehicle warranty.
contains important information Vehicle Weight Rating Do not overload the vehicle.
about your Front Axle Reserve (GVWR), or either the Using heavier suspension
Capacity. See “What is front axle maximum front or rear Gross components to get added
reserve capacity, and how do I Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). durability might not change
calculate it?” under Adding a This can cause systems to your weight ratings. Ask your
Snow Plow or Similar Equipment break and change the way the dealer to help you load your
on page 9‑125. vehicle handles. This could vehicle the right way.
cause loss of control and a
{ WARNING crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
In the case of a sudden stop
or collision, things carried in
the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into
the passenger area, injuring
you and others. If you put
things in the bed of your truck,
you should make sure they
are properly secured.
If you put things inside your Two-Tiered Loading

vehicle — like suitcases, WARNING (Continued)
Depending on the model of your
tools, packages, or anything . Do not leave an pick‐up, an upper load platform
else — they go as fast as the unsecured child restraint can be created by positioning
vehicle goes. If you have to in the vehicle. three or four 5 cm (2 inches) by
stop or turn quickly, or if there 15 cm (6 inches) wooden planks
is a crash, they will keep going.
. When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure across the width of the pickup
box. The planks must be
{ WARNING it whenever you can.
inserted in the pickup box
. Do not leave a seat folded depressions.
Things you put inside the down unless you need to.
vehicle can strike and injure When using this upper load
people in a sudden stop or platform, be sure the load is
turn, or in a crash. There is also important loading securely tied down to prevent it
information for off-road driving in from shifting. The load's center
. Put things in the cargo this manual. See “Loading Your
area of the vehicle. Try to of gravity should be positioned
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“ in a zone over the rear axle.
spread the weight evenly. under Off-Road Driving on The zone is located in the area
. Never stack heavier page 9‑7. between the front of each wheel
things, like suitcases, well and the rear of each wheel
inside the vehicle so that well. The center of gravity height
some of them are above must not extend above the top
the tops of the seats. of the pickup box flareboard.
(Continued)
Any load that extends beyond Remember not to exceed Loading Points
the vehicle's taillamp area must the Gross Axle Weight
be properly marked according to Rating (GAWR) of the front
local laws and regulations. or rear axle.
Remember not to exceed Maximum
the Gross Axle Weight * Equipment Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front
or rear axle. Ladder Rack 340 kg
and Cargo (750 lbs)
Add-On Equipment
Cross Toolbox 181 kg
When you carry removable and Cargo (400 lbs)
items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people Side Boxes 113 kg per
you carry inside your vehicle. and Cargo side (250 lbs A. Primary Load Points
Be sure to weigh your vehicle per side) B. Secondary Load Areas
before you buy and install the * The combined weight for all C. Cargo Management Option
new equipment. rail‐mounted equipment should Holes
Notice : Overloading the not exceed 454 kg (1,000 lbs). Structural members (A) and (B) are
vehicle may cause damage. included in the pick-up box design.
Repairs would not be covered Additional accessories should use
by the vehicle warranty. these load points. Depending on
Do not overload the vehicle. the accessory design, use a
spacer under the accessory at
the load points to remove gap.
The holes for the Cargo When installing and loading a Refer to the Truck-Camper
Management System (C) are slide-in camper, check the Loading Information label in the
not intended for attachment manufacturer's instructions. glove box for dimensions A and
of aftermarket equipment. B as shown in the following
See www.gmupfitter.com for When carrying a slide-in
camper, the total cargo load of illustration.
additional pick-up box load
bearing structural information. the vehicle is the weight of the
camper, plus the following:
Truck-Camper Loading . Everything added to the
Information camper after it left the factory
A vehicle-specific Truck‐Camper . Everything in the camper
Loading Information label is
attached to the inside of the
. All the people inside
vehicle's glove box. This label The CWR is the maximum
indicates if a slide-in camper weight of the load the vehicle
can be carried, how much of a can carry. It does not include
load the vehicle can carry, and the weight of the people inside.
how to correctly spread out the But, use about 68 kg (150 lbs) Use the rear edge of the load
load. It will help to match the for each seat. floor for measurement purposes.
right slide in camper to the The total cargo load must not be The recommended location
vehicle. more than the vehicle's CWR. for the cargo center of gravity
Your dealer can help make a is at point C for the CWR. It is
good vehicle-camper match the point where the mass of
and help determine the Cargo a body is concentrated and,
Weight Rating (CWR). if suspended at that point, would
balance the front and rear.
Here is an example of proper When the truck is used to carry Any accessories or other
truck and camper match: a slide‐in camper, the total cargo equipment that are added to
load of the truck consists of the the vehicle must be weighed.
manufacturer's camper weight Then, subtract this extra weight
figure, the weight of installed from the CWR. This extra weight
additional camper equipment not may shorten the center of
included in the manufacturer's gravity zone of the vehicle.
camper weight figure, the weight If the slide-in camper and its
of camper cargo, and the weight load weighs less than the CWR,
of passengers in the camper. the center of gravity zone for
The total cargo load should your vehicle may be larger.
not exceed the truck's cargo
weight rating, and the camper's Secure loose items to prevent
center of gravity (A) should fall weight shifts that could affect
A. Camper Center of Gravity within the truck's recommended the balance of the vehicle.
center of gravity zone (B) when
B. Recommended Center of
installed.
Gravity Location Zone
When the truck‐camper is

. Avoid making hard stops for
Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles)
loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh on the front and on the Operating or so. During this time the
new brake linings are not
rear wheels separately to yet broken in. Hard stops
determine axle loads. Individual New Vehicle Break-In with new linings can mean
axle loads should not exceed Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier
either of the gross axle weight need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this
ratings (GAWR). The total axle will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every
loads should not exceed your if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake
vehicle's gross vehicle weight . Keep the vehicle speed at linings.
rating (GVWR). These ratings 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for . Do not tow a trailer during
are given on the vehicle the first 805 km (500 miles). break-in. See Trailer
certification label attached to . Do not drive at any one Towing on page 9‑95 for the
the rear edge of the driver door. constant speed, fast or trailer towing capabilities
See “Certification/Tire Label” slow, for the first 805 km of the vehicle and more
under Vehicle Load Limits on (500 miles). Do not make information.
page 9‑25. If weight ratings full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break‐in, engine speed
are exceeded, move or remove downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually
items to bring all weights below slow the vehicle. increased.
the ratings.
See your dealer for more
information on curb weights,
cargo weights, Cargo Weight
Rating and the correct center
of gravity zone.
Adjustable Throttle and Press the bottom of the control to Ignition Positions
move the pedals closer. Press the
Brake Pedal top of the control to move the
On vehicles with this feature, you pedals away.
can change the position of the Before you start driving, fully
throttle and brake pedals. press the brake pedal to confirm
No adjustment to the pedals can the adjustment is right for you.
be made when the vehicle is in While driving, make only small
R (Reverse) or while using cruise adjustments.
control. The vehicle may have a memory
function which lets pedal settings
be saved and recalled. See Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for
more information.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
To shift out of P (Park), the
The control used to adjust the
ignition must be in ON/RUN or
pedals is located on the instrument
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular
panel below the climate control
brake pedal must be applied.
system.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ In an emergency: The steering can bind with the
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is 1. Brake using a firm and steady wheels turned off center. If this
stopped, turn the ignition switch to pressure. Do not pump the happens, move the steering wheel
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. brakes repeatedly. This may from right to left while turning the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) deplete power assist, requiring key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
will remain active. See Retained increased brake pedal force. doesn't work, then the vehicle
Accessory Power (RAP) on needs service.
page 9‑40. 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is Notice: Using a tool to force the
This position locks the ignition. moving. After shifting to neutral, key to turn in the ignition could
It also locks the transmission on firmly apply the brakes and steer cause damage to the switch or
automatic transmission vehicles. the vehicle to a safe location. break the key. Use the correct
The key can be removed in key, make sure it is all the way in,
LOCK/OFF. 3. Come to a complete stop, shift and turn it only with your hand.
to P (Park), and turn the ignition If the key cannot be turned by
Do not turn the engine off when the to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
vehicle is moving. This will cause a hand, see your dealer.
an automatic transmission, the
loss of power assist in the brake shift lever must be in P (Park) B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
and steering systems and disable to turn the ignition switch to the position lets things like the radio
the airbags. LOCK/OFF position. and the windshield wipers operate
while the engine is off. Use this
4. Set the parking brake. See position if the vehicle must be
Parking Brake on page 9‑69. pushed or towed.
C (ON/RUN): This position can Starting the Engine Before adding electrical
be used to operate the electrical equipment, check with your
accessories and to display some If the vehicle has a Duramax diesel dealer. If you do not, the engine
instrument panel cluster warning engine, see the Duramax diesel might not perform properly.
and indicator lights. The switch supplement for more information. Any resulting damage would
stays in this position when the If the vehicle is a hybrid, see not be covered by the vehicle
engine is running. The transmission the hybrid supplement for more warranty.
is also unlocked in this position on information.
automatic transmission vehicles. Starting Procedure
Notice: Do not try to shift to
If you leave the key in the 1. With your foot off the accelerator
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN pedal, turn the ignition key to
If you do, you could damage the
position with the engine off, the START. When the engine starts,
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
battery could be drained. You may let go of the key. The idle speed
only when the vehicle is stopped.
not be able to start the vehicle if the will go down as your engine gets
battery is allowed to drain for an Move the shift lever to P (Park) or warm. Do not race the engine
extended period of time. N (Neutral). The engine will not start immediately after starting it.
in any other position. To restart the Operate the engine and
D (START): This is the position that engine when the vehicle is already transmission gently to allow
starts the engine. When the engine moving, use N (Neutral) only. the oil to warm up and lubricate
starts, release the key. The ignition all moving parts.
switch returns to ON/RUN for Notice: The engine is designed to
driving. work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
A warning tone will sound when or accessories, you could change
the driver door is opened and the the way the engine operates.
ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the
ignition.
The vehicle has a When the Low Fuel warning 2. If the engine does not start
Computer-Controlled lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL after 5‐10 seconds, especially
Cranking System. This feature LOW message is displayed in in very cold weather (below
assists in starting the engine the Driver Information Center −18°C or 0°F), it could be
and protects components. (DIC), the Computer‐Controlled flooded with too much gasoline.
If the ignition key is turned Cranking System is disabled Try pushing the accelerator
to the START position, and to prevent possible vehicle pedal all the way to the floor
then released when the engine component damage. When and holding it there as you
begins cranking, the engine this happens, hold the ignition hold the key in START for up
will continue cranking for a switch in the START position to 15 seconds. Wait at least
few seconds or until the vehicle to continue engine cranking. 15 seconds between each try, to
starts. If the engine does not Notice: Cranking the engine for allow the cranking motor to cool
start and the key is held in long periods of time, by returning down. When the engine starts,
START for many seconds, the key to the START position let go of the key and accelerator.
cranking will be stopped after immediately after cranking has If the vehicle starts briefly but
15 seconds to prevent cranking ended, can overheat and damage then stops again, do the same
motor damage. To prevent the cranking motor, and drain the thing. This clears the extra
gear damage, this system also battery. Wait at least 15 seconds gasoline from the engine. Do not
prevents cranking if the engine between each try, to let the race the engine immediately
is already running. Engine cranking motor cool down. after starting it. Operate the
cranking can be stopped by engine and transmission gently
turning the ignition switch to until the oil warms up and
the ACC/ACCESSORY or lubricates all moving parts.
LOCK/OFF position.

. Releasing the Parking Brake.
Fast Idle System To control the fast idle:
. To enable the Fast Idle System,
. The transmission shifter is
If the vehicle has this feature it is
press and release the Cruise moved out of P (Park) or
available only with cruise control.
Control On/Off button and N (Neutral).
The manual fast idle switch is
operated using the cruise control ensure that the switch LED is lit. . Selecting the Cruise Control
buttons located on the left hand . Press and release the Cruise On/Off button when it was
side of the steering wheel. Control Set switch. Engine previously on.
This system can be used to speed will be held at . Pressing the Cruise Control Set
increase engine idle speed approximately 1200 RPM. switch a second time.
whenever the following conditions When the fast idle is active the . Pressing the accelerator greater
are met: Driver Information Center (DIC) will than a quarter of the down.
. The park brake is set. display “FAST IDLE ON.” . Turning the ignition switch to the
. The brake pedal is not pressed. One of the following actions will turn LOCK/OFF position.
off the fast idle:
. The vehicle must not be moving
and the accelerator must not be
. Pressing the brake.
pressed. . Selecting the Cruise Control
Cancel button.
Retained Accessory Engine Coolant Heater To Use the Engine Coolant

Power (RAP) Heater
The engine heater can provide
The following vehicle accessories easier starting and better fuel 1. Turn off the engine.
can be used for up to 10 minutes economy during engine warm-up 2. Open the hood and unwrap
after the engine is turned off: in cold weather conditions at the electrical cord. The cord
or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles is secured to the Engine
. Audio System with an engine heater should be Compartment Fuse Block
. Power Windows plugged in at least four hours before with a clip. Carefully remove
.
starting. An internal thermostat in the wire tie which bundles the
OnStar System (if equipped) the plug-end of the cord may exist electrical plug. Do not cut the
. Sunroof (if equipped) which will prevent engine coolant electrical cord.
heater operation at temperatures
These features work when 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
above −18°C (0°F).
the key is in ON/RUN or grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
the key is turned from ON/RUN see the Duramax Diesel supplement
to LOCK/OFF, the windows and for more information. { WARNING
sunroof continue to work up to Plugging the cord into an
10 minutes until any door is opened. ungrounded outlet could cause
The radio continues to work for
an electrical shock. Also, the
up to 10 minutes or until the driver
wrong kind of extension cord
door is opened.
could overheat and cause a fire.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Shifting Into Park 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then
set the parking brake.
You could be seriously injured. { WARNING See Parking Brake on page 9‑69
Plug the cord into a properly It can be dangerous to get out of
grounded three-prong 110-volt AC 2. Move the shift lever into the
the vehicle if the shift lever is not P (Park) position by pulling
outlet. If the cord will not reach, fully in P (Park) with the parking
use a heavy-duty three-prong the shift lever toward you and
brake firmly set. The vehicle can moving it up as far as it will go.
extension cord rated for at least roll. If you have left the engine
15 amps. running, the vehicle can move 3. Be sure the transfer case is in a
suddenly. You or others could drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
4. Before starting the engine, be be injured. To be sure the vehicle 4. Turn the ignition key to
sure to unplug and store the will not move, even when you are LOCK/OFF.
cord as it was before to keep on fairly level ground, use the 5. Remove the key and take it with
it away from moving engine steps that follow. With four-wheel you. If you can leave the vehicle
parts. If you do not, it could drive, if the transfer case is in with the ignition key in your
be damaged. N (Neutral), the vehicle will be hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
The length of time the heater should free to roll, even if the shift lever
remain plugged in depends on is in P (Park). So, be sure the
several factors. Ask a dealer in the transfer case is in a drive
area where you will be parking the gear — not in N (Neutral). If you
vehicle for the best advice on this. are pulling a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips
on page 9‑91.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Torque Lock

Engine Running WARNING (Continued)
If you are parking on a hill and
And, if you leave the vehicle you do not shift your transmission
{ WARNING with the engine running, it could into P (Park) properly, the weight
overheat and even catch fire. of the vehicle may put too much
It can be dangerous to leave the force on the parking pawl in the
You or others could be injured.
vehicle with the engine running. transmission. You may find it difficult
Do not leave the vehicle with
The vehicle could move suddenly to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
the engine running unless you
if the shift lever is not fully in This is called torque lock. To
have to.
P (Park) with the parking brake prevent torque lock, set the parking
firmly set. brake and then shift into P (Park)
If you have to leave the vehicle properly before you leave the driver
If you have four-wheel drive and with the engine running, be sure seat. To find out how, Shifting Into
the transfer case is in N (Neutral), your vehicle is in P (Park) and the Park on page 9‑41.
the vehicle will be free to roll, parking brake is firmly set before
even if the shift lever is in When you are ready to drive, move
you leave it. After you move the shift
P (Park). So be sure the transfer the shift lever out of P (Park) before
lever into P (Park), hold the regular
case is in a drive gear — not in you release the parking brake.
brake pedal down. Then, see if you
N (Neutral). can move the shift lever away from If torque lock does occur, you may
(Continued) P (Park) without first pulling it toward need to have another vehicle push
you. If you can, it means that the yours a little uphill to take some of
shift lever was not fully locked into the pressure from the parking pawl
P (Park). in the transmission, then you will be
able to pull the shift lever out of
P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park To shift out of P (Park) use the Parking Over Things
following:
This vehicle is equipped with That Burn
an electronic shift lock release 1. Apply the brake pedal.
system. The shift lock release is
designed to:
2. Move the shift lever to the { WARNING
desired position.
. Prevent ignition key removal Things that can burn could touch
If you still are unable to shift out of
unless the shift lever is in hot exhaust parts under the
P (Park):
P (Park) with the shift lever vehicle and ignite. Do not park
button fully released. 1. Ease the pressure on the shift over papers, leaves, dry grass,
lever. or other things that can burn.
. Prevent movement of the shift
2. While holding down the brake
lever out of P (Park), unless
the ignition is in ON/RUN or pedal, press the shift lever all
ACC/ACCESSORY and the the way into P (Park).
regular brake pedal is applied. 3. Move the shift lever to the
The shift lock release is always desired position.
functional except in the case of an If you are still having a problem
uncharged or low voltage (less than shifting, then have the vehicle
9 volt) battery. serviced soon.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
Active Fuel Management® Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Vehicles with V8 engines may
have Active Fuel Management™. { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its Engine exhaust contains Carbon damage or after-market
cylinders, depending on the driving Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
conditions. seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
When less power is required, such can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
as cruising at a constant vehicle even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
speed, the system will operate in Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
the half cylinder mode, allowing . Drive it only with the windows
the vehicle to achieve better fuel
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
economy. When greater power
demands are required, such as garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
accelerating from a stop, passing, that may block underbody immediately.
or merging onto a freeway, the airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
system will maintain full-cylinder . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
operation. sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
If the vehicle has an Active . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
Fuel Management™ indicator, see due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
Driver Information Center (DIC) on . The vehicle exhaust system
page 5‑33 for more information on has been modified, damaged
using this display. or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle

While Parked
{ WARNING { WARNING
It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out Four-wheel drive vehicles with the
engine running. But if you ever have of the vehicle if the automatic transfer case in N (Neutral) will
to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully allow the vehicle to roll, even if
in P (Park) with the parking brake the automatic transmission shift
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. lever is in P (Park). So, be sure
{ WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when the transfer case is in a drive
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed the engine is running unless gear — not in N (Neutral). Always
area with poor ventilation is you have to. If you have left the set the parking brake.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others Follow the proper steps to be
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the sure the vehicle will not move.
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when See Shifting Into Park on
It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground, page 9‑41.
and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). If pulling a trailer, see Driving
engine in an enclosed area Characteristics and Towing Tips on
that has no fresh air ventilation. page 9‑91.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑44.
Automatic There are several different positions P (Park): This position locks the
for the shift lever. rear wheels. It is the best position
Transmission to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily. When parked on a hill,
the hybrid supplement for more
especially when the vehicle has a
information.
heavy load, you might notice an
Vehicles with an automatic increase in the effort to shift out of
transmission have an electronic P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under
shift position indicator within Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed Automatic Shifting Into Park on page 9‑41 for
the instrument panel cluster. Transmission more information.
This display comes on when
the ignition key is turned to
the ON/RUN position.
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
Heavy Duty 6-Speed firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Automatic Transmission Shown Do not leave the vehicle when
(Light Duty 6‐Speed Similar) the engine is running unless
See “Range Selection Mode” under you have to. If you have left the
Manual Mode on page 9‑50. engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
(Continued)
R (Reverse): Use this gear to

WARNING (Continued) back up. { WARNING
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) Shifting into a drive gear while the
could be injured. To be sure the
while the vehicle is moving engine is running at high speed is
vehicle will not move, even when
forward could damage the dangerous. Unless your foot is
you are on fairly level ground, transmission. The repairs would
always set the parking brake and firmly on the brake pedal, the
not be covered by the vehicle vehicle could move very rapidly.
move the shift lever to P (Park). warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
See Shifting Into Park on You could lose control and hit
only after the vehicle is stopped.
page 9‑41. If you are pulling a people or objects. Do not shift
trailer, see Driving Characteristics To rock the vehicle back and forth to into a drive gear while the engine
get out of snow, ice, or sand without is running at high speed.
and Towing Tips on page 9‑91.
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑23.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
N (Neutral): In this position, the or N (Neutral) with the engine
{ WARNING engine does not connect with the running at high speed may
wheels. To restart when you are damage the transmission.
If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the already moving, use N (Neutral) The repairs would not be covered
vehicle will be free to roll — even only. Also, use N (Neutral) when by the vehicle warranty. Be sure
if the shift lever is in P (Park) — if the vehicle is being towed. the engine is not running at high
the transfer case is in Neutral. speed when shifting the vehicle.
So, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive
High or Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in
Neutral. See Shifting Into Park
on page 9‑41.
D (Drive): This position is for Downshifting the transmission in The transmission uses
normal driving. It provides the best slippery road conditions could result adaptive shift controls.
fuel economy. If you need more in skidding. See “Skidding” under Adaptive shift controls continually
power for passing, and you are: Loss of Control on page 9‑6. compares key shift parameters to
. Going less than about 55 km/h The vehicle has a shift stabilization pre-programmed ideal shifts stored
(35 mph), push the accelerator feature that adjusts the transmission in the transmissions computer.
pedal about halfway down. shifting to the current driving The transmission constantly makes
conditions in order to reduce rapid adjustments to improve vehicle
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or performance according to how the
more, push the accelerator all upshifts and downshifts. This shift
stabilization feature is designed vehicle is being used, such as with
the way down. a heavy load or when temperature
to determine, before making an
By doing this, the vehicle shifts upshift, if the engine is able to changes. During this adaptive shift
down to the next gear and has maintain vehicle speed by analyzing control process, shifting might feel
more power. things such as vehicle speed, different as the transmission
throttle position, and vehicle load. determines the best settings.
D (Drive) can be used when towing
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, If the shift stabilization feature When temperatures are very cold,
driving on steep hills, or for off-road determines that a current vehicle the Allison Transmission and
driving. You might want to shift speed cannot be maintained, the Hydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission's
the transmission to a lower gear transmission does not upshift and gear shifting could be delayed
selection if the transmission shifts instead holds the current gear. providing more stable shifts until
too often. In some cases, this could appear the engine warms up. Shifts could
to be a delayed shift, however the be more noticeable with a cold
transmission is operating normally. transmission. This difference in
shifting is normal.
M (Manual Mode): This position It can help control vehicle speed as For an Allison Transmission or
is available on vehicles with the you go down steep mountain roads, Hydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission,
Allison Transmission or Hydra-Matic but then you would also want to use this position reduces vehicle speed
6-Speed transmission. It lets the brakes off and on. without using the brakes. You can
drivers select the range of gears If you manually select 2 (Second) use it for major/severe downgrades
appropriate for current driving in an automatic transmission, the and off-road driving where the
conditions. If the vehicle has this transmission will start in second vehicle would otherwise accelerate
feature, see “Range Selection gear. You can use this feature for due to steepness of grade. When
Mode” under Manual Mode on reducing the speed of the rear you shift to 1 (First) it provides the
page 9‑50. wheels when you are trying to lowest gear appropriate to current
3 (Third): This position is also used start the vehicle from a stop on road speed and continues to
for normal driving. It reduces vehicle slippery road surfaces. downshift as the vehicle slows,
speed more than D (Drive) without eventually downshifting to
1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic 1 (First) gear.
using the brakes. You might choose 4-Speed transmission this position
3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when reduces vehicle speed even more Notice: Spinning the tires or
driving on hilly, winding roads, when than 2 (Second) without using the holding the vehicle in one
towing a trailer, so there is less brakes. You can use it on very steep place on a hill using only the
shifting between gears and when hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the accelerator pedal may damage
going down a steep hill. shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the transmission. The repair will
2 (Second): This position reduces the vehicle is moving forward, the not be covered by the vehicle
vehicle speed even more than transmission does not shift into first warranty. If you are stuck, do not
3 (Third) without using the brakes. gear until the vehicle is going slowly spin the tires. When stopping on
You can use 2 (Second) on hills. enough. a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place.
Manual Mode To use this feature, do the following: Grade Braking is not available when
1. Move the shift lever to Range Selection Mode is active.
Range Selection Mode M (Manual Mode). See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑51.
(Allison® Transmission or While using Range Selection Mode,
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed 2. Press the plus/minus buttons,
located on the steering column Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul
Transmission) Mode can be used.
shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for current driving If the vehicle has an exhaust
conditions. brake, it can also be used, but will
When M (Manual Mode) is selected not automatically downshift the
a number displays next to the M, transmission. See Exhaust Brake in
indicating the current gear. the Duramax Diesel supplement.
This number is the highest gear Notice: Spinning the tires or

that can be used. However, the holding the vehicle in one
The vehicle may have a Range place on a hill using only the
Selection Mode. The Range vehicle can automatically shift to
lower gears as it adjusts to driving accelerator pedal may damage
Selection Mode helps control the transmission. The repair will
the vehicle's transmission and conditions. This means that all
gears below that number are not be covered by the vehicle
vehicle speed while driving down warranty. If you are stuck, do not
hill or towing a trailer by letting you available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,
1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are spin the tires. When stopping on
select a desired range of gears. a hill, use the brakes to hold the
automatically shifted by the vehicle,
but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until vehicle in place.
the plus/minus button located on
the steering column lever is used
to change to the gear.
Low Traction Mode Tow/Haul Mode The selector button is located on

the end of the shift lever. Turn
If your vehicle has the Allison
the Tow/Haul Mode on and off
Transmission, or the Hydra-Matic
by pressing the button. When
6-Speed Automatic Transmission,
the tow/haul is on, a light on the
it has a Low Traction Mode that
instrument panel cluster will
can assist in vehicle acceleration
come on.
when road conditions are slippery,
such as with ice or snow. While See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
the vehicle is at a stop, select the page 5‑29 for more information.
Vehicles with an automatic
second gear range using Range transmission have a Tow/Haul Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
Selection Mode. This will limit Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts Towing Equipment on page 9‑112
torque to the wheels after it detects the transmission shift pattern to for more information.
wheel slip, preventing the tires from reduce shift cycling, providing
spinning. increased performance, vehicle
control, and transmission cooling
when towing or hauling heavy loads.
Tow/Haul Mode Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and Grade Braking

(Allison Transmission off by pressing the button, located (Allison Transmission
or Hydra-Matic 6-Speed on the end of the shift lever. When or Hydra-Matic 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission) the tow/haul is on, a light on the Automatic Transmission)
instrument panel cluster will
come on. The Grade Braking shift modes
can be activated by pressing the
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on button on the end of the shift control
page 5‑29 for more information. lever. While in Range Selection
Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” under Mode, Grade Braking is deactivated
Towing Equipment on page 9‑112 allowing the driver to select a
for more information. desired range of gears.
Vehicles with an Allison Grade Braking is only active while
Transmission or Hydra-Matic the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and
6-Speed Automatic Transmission you are not in the Range Selection
have a Tow/Haul Mode. The Tow/ Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed
Haul Mode adjusts the transmission previously and Manual Mode on
shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, page 9‑50 for more information
providing increased performance, on the Range Selection Mode.
vehicle control, and transmission
cooling when towing or hauling
heavy loads.
Grade Braking assists in Cruise Grade Braking the correct gear for the operating
maintaining desired vehicle (Allison Transmission condition. If vehicle speed is above
speeds when driving on or Hydra-Matic 6-Speed the desired speed the transmission
downhill grades by automatically Automatic Transmission) will downshift to slow the vehicle.
implementing a shift schedule that If vehicle speed is near or below
utilizes the engine and transmission Cruise Grade Braking assists desired speed the trans will upshift,
to slow the vehicle. This reduces when driving on a downhill grade. allowing vehicle speed to increase.
wear on the braking system and It maintains vehicle speed by
automatically implementing a shift While in the Range Selection Mode,
increases control of the vehicle. Cruise Grade Braking is not
Grade Braking monitors vehicle schedule that uses the engine
and the transmission to slow the available.
speed, acceleration, engine torque
and brake pedal usage. Using this vehicle. Cruise Grade Braking This feature is active when
information, it detects when the operates while Cruise Control is the exhaust brake is enabled
truck is on a downhill grade and engaged in Tow/Haul Mode to assist (if equipped).
the driver desires to slow the in maintaining vehicle speed under
See “Range Selection Mode” under
vehicle by pressing the brake. loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes
Manual Mode on page 9‑50.
vehicle acceleration and deviation
This feature is active when from desired speed to determine
the exhaust brake is enabled
(if equipped).
Also see Towing Equipment on
Drive Systems While driving on clean dry pavement Manual Transfer Case
and during tight turns, you may
experience vibration in the steering
Four-Wheel Drive system.
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®,
Drive, you can send the engine's shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
driving power to all four wheels Low will turn Traction Control and
for extra traction. To get the most StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak®
satisfaction out of Four-Wheel System on page 9‑70.
Drive, you must be familiar with its
operation. Read the following before Front Axle
using Four-Wheel Drive. See the The front axle engages and
appropriate text for the transfer disengages automatically when you
case in the vehicle. shift the transfer case. Some delay
Notice: Driving on clean, dry for the axle to engage or disengage The transfer case shift lever is on
pavement in Four-Wheel Drive is normal. the floor to the right of the driver.
High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for Use this lever to shift into and out
an extended period of time may of Four-Wheel Drive.
cause premature wear on the
vehicle's powertrain. Do not
drive on clean, dry pavement
in Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low for
extended periods of time.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
2m 4m 4n N
Normal YES
A Four-Wheel Drive indicator light Severe YES
comes on when you shift into Extreme YES
four-wheel drive and the front axle
engages. See Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle in Tow* YES
Light on page 5‑29. *See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑103 or Towing the Vehicle
Some delay between shifting and on page 10‑103.
when the indicator light comes on is
normal.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This
pavement in four-wheel drive for setting also engages the front axle
an extended period of time can and delivers extra torque. You may
cause premature wear on the never need Four-Wheel Drive Low.
vehicle's powertrain. Do not It sends maximum power to all
drive on clean, dry pavement in four wheels. You might choose
Four-Wheel Drive for extended Four-Wheel Drive Low if you are
periods of time. driving off-road in deep sand,
deep mud, deep snow, and while
climbing or descending steep hills.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This

shifting into Four-Wheel Drive { WARNING setting is used for driving in most
Low will turn Traction Control and street and highway situations.
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak® Shifting the transfer case to
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle The front axle is not engaged in
System on page 9‑70. two-wheel drive. This setting also
to roll even if the transmission
provides the best fuel economy.
is in P (Park). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
Be sure to set the parking brake this setting when you need extra
before placing the transfer case traction, such as on snowy or icy
in N (Neutral). See Parking Brake roads or in most off-road situations.
on page 9‑69. This setting also engages the front
A parking brake symbol is located axle to help drive your vehicle.
next to the N (Neutral) symbol as a This is the best setting to use
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting
reminder to set the parking brake when plowing snow.
only when the vehicle needs to be
before shifting the transfer case into towed. See Recreational Vehicle You can shift from Two-Wheel Drive
N (Neutral). Towing on page 10‑103 or Towing High to Four-Wheel Drive High
the Vehicle on page 10‑103. or Four-Wheel Drive High to
Two-Wheel Drive High while the
vehicle is moving. In extremely
cold weather, it may be necessary
to stop or slow the vehicle to shift
into Four-Wheel Drive High.
When Using the Manual

. If the transfer case shifter is in . Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case the N (Neutral) position and High to Four-Wheel Drive High
you have difficulty reaching the while the vehicle is in motion
. Shifts into or out of Four-Wheel selected transfer case mode, may require that moderate force
Drive Low or N (Neutral) should with the engine running, shift be applied to the shift lever for a
be made using quick motions to the transmission momentarily few seconds before Four-Wheel
avoid excessive gear grinding. to D (Drive) and then back to Drive High can be engaged,
Shifting slowly may make it more N (Neutral). This will realign the especially in cold weather.
difficult to shift. gear teeth in the transfer case . In extremely cold weather, it may
. You may notice that it is harder and allow you to complete the be necessary to slow or stop the
to shift when the vehicle is cold. shift. vehicle to shift into Four-Wheel
After the vehicle warms up the Drive High.
Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive
shifting will return to normal.
High to Four-Wheel Drive High . While in Four-Wheel Drive High,
. While in Four-Wheel High or the vehicle can be driven at any
. Shifts between Two-Wheel Drive
Four-Wheel Drive Low you posted legal speed limit.
High and Four-Wheel Drive High
may experience reduced fuel
can be made at any vehicle
economy.
speed.
. Avoid driving in Four-Wheel . Shift the transfer case lever in
Drive on clean, dry pavement.
one continuous motion into
It may cause your tires to wear
either the Four-Wheel Drive
faster, make the transfer case
High or Two-Wheel Drive
harder to shift, and run noisier.
High position.
Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel

. Shift the transfer case shift lever
Drive Low { WARNING in one continuous motion into
the Four-Wheel Drive Low
Notice: Shifting the transfer Shifting the transfer case to position.
case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
while moving at speeds faster
. When in Four-Wheel Drive
than 5 km/h (3 mph) may cause Low do not drive faster than
is in P (Park). You or someone 72 km/h (45 mph). This will
premature wear to the transfer else could be seriously injured.
case, and may cause the gears reduce wear and extend the
Be sure to set the parking brake life of your transfer case.
to grind. To avoid causing
before placing the transfer case in
premature wear, and grinding the Shifting In or Out of Neutral
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
gears, do not shift the transfer
case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low page 9‑69. 1. With the vehicle running and the
while the vehicle is moving faster engine at an idle, set the parking
than 5 km/h (3 mph). . Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive brake.
. Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low with the vehicle at a stop 2. Place the transmission into
Low should be done, if possible, may be more difficult. You may N (Neutral).
with the vehicle at a slight roll, be unable to complete the shift
Shift the transfer case in one
5 km/h (3 mph) or less. to Four-Wheel Drive Low, and
continuous motion into or out of the
the transfer case will end up in
. Shift the transmission into N (Neutral) position.
N (Neutral). This is normal, and
N (Neutral). is a function of the gear teeth
aligning in the transfer case.
When this happens, make
sure the engine is on, shift
the transmission momentarily
to D (Drive) and back to
N (Neutral), and then complete
the transfer case shift.
Electronic Transfer Case Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
2m 4m 4n N
Normal YES
Severe YES
Extreme YES
Vehicle in Tow* YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑103 or Towing the Vehicle
on page 10‑103.
The transfer case knob is located You can choose among four driving remains illuminated when the
next to the steering column. settings: shift is complete. If for some
Use the dial to shift into and out of Indicator lights in the dial reason the transfer case cannot
four-wheel drive. show which setting you are in. make a requested shift, it will return
The indicator lights will come on to the last chosen setting.
briefly when you turn on the ignition 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
and one will stay on. If the lights do setting is used for driving in most
not come on, you should take the street and highway situations.
vehicle to your dealer for service. The front axle is not engaged in
An indicator light flashes while Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also
shifting the transfer case and provides the best fuel economy.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use Shifting Into Two-Wheel

the Four-Wheel Drive High position
{ WARNING Drive High
when extra traction is needed, such Shifting the transfer case to Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel
as on snowy or icy roads or in most N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle Drive High position. This can be
off-road situations. This setting also to roll even if the transmission done at any speed, except when
engages the front axle to help drive shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.
is in P (Park). You or someone
the vehicle. This is the best setting See “Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
else could be seriously injured.
to use when plowing snow. Drive Low” for more information.
Be sure to set the parking brake
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This before placing the transfer case Shifting Into Four-Wheel
setting also engages the front axle in N (Neutral). See Parking Brake Drive Low
and delivers extra torque. You may on page 9‑69. When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
never need this setting. It sends engaged, vehicle speed should
maximum power to all four wheels. be kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
You might choose Four-Wheel Extended high-speed operation in
transfer case to N (Neutral)
Drive Low while driving off-road in Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage
only when towing the vehicle.
deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on
and while climbing or descending
page 10‑103 or Towing the Vehicle To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive
steep hills.
on page 10‑103 for more Low position, the ignition must be
®
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak , information. in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
shifting into Four-Wheel Drive stopped or moving less than 5 km/h
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
Low will turn Traction Control and (3 mph) with the transmission in
message stays on, you should
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak® N (Neutral). The preferred method
take the vehicle to your dealer for
System on page 9‑70. for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL
DRIVE message” under Low is to have the vehicle moving
Transmission Messages on 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
page 5‑50.
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel 30 seconds and not complete the Notice: Shifting the transmission
Drive Low position. You must shift unless the vehicle is moving into gear before the requested
wait for the Four-Wheel Drive less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the mode indicator light has stopped
Low indicator light to stop flashing transmission is in N (Neutral). flashing could damage the
and remain on before shifting the After 30 seconds the transfer transfer case. To help avoid
transmission in gear. case will shift to Four-Wheel damaging the vehicle, always
Notice: Shifting the transmission Drive High mode. wait for the mode indicator lights
into gear before the requested to stop flashing before shifting
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel the transmission into gear.
mode indicator light has stopped Drive Low
flashing could damage the It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive significant engagement noise
transfer case. To help avoid
Low to Four-Wheel Drive High,
damaging the vehicle, always and bump when shifting between
or Two-Wheel Drive High, the Four-Wheel Drive Low and
wait for the mode indicator lights
vehicle must be stopped or moving Four-Wheel Drive High ranges
to stop flashing before shifting
less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with or from transfer case N (Neutral)
the transmission into gear.
the transmission in N (Neutral)
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit with the engine running.
and the ignition in ON/RUN.
significant engagement noise The preferred method for shifting If the knob is turned to the
and bump when shifting between out of Four-Wheel Drive Low Four-Wheel Drive High,
Four-Wheel Drive Low and is to have the vehicle moving or Two-Wheel Drive High switch
Four-Wheel Drive High ranges 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). position when the vehicle is in gear
or from transfer case N (Neutral) Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
with the engine running. Drive High or Two-Wheel Drive Drive High, or Two-Wheel Drive
If the knob is turned to the High position. You must wait High indicator light will flash for
Four-Wheel Drive Low position for the Four-Wheel Drive High or 30 seconds but will not complete the
when the vehicle is in gear and/or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator shift unless your vehicle is moving
moving, the Four-Wheel Drive light to stop flashing and remain less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
Low indicator light will flash for on before shifting the transmission transmission is in N (Neutral).
into gear.
Shifting into Neutral 10 seconds. Then slowly release Shifting Out of Neutral
To shift the transfer case to the dial to the four low position. To shift the transfer case out of
N (Neutral) do the following: The N (Neutral) light will come N (Neutral) do the following:
on when the transfer case shift
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked to N (Neutral) is complete. 1. Set the parking brake and apply
so that it will not roll. the regular brake pedal.
7. If the engine is running, verify
2. Set the parking brake and that the transfer case is in 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN
press and hold the regular brake N (Neutral) by shifting the with the engine off, and shift
pedal. See Parking Brake on transmission to R (Reverse) the transmission to N (Neutral).
page 9‑69 for more information. for one second, then shift the 3. Turn the transfer case dial to
3. Start the vehicle or turn the transmission to D (Drive) for Two-Wheel Drive High.
ignition to ON/RUN. one second.
After the transfer case has
4. Shift the transmission to 8. Turn the ignition to shifted out of N (Neutral), the
N (Neutral). ACC/ACCESSORY, which N (Neutral) light will go out.
will turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case to 4. Release the parking brake prior
Two-Wheel Drive High. 9. Place the transmission shift to moving the vehicle.
lever in P (Park).
6. Turn the transfer case dial
clockwise to N (Neutral) until 10. Release the parking brake prior
it stops and hold it there until to moving the vehicle.
the Neutral light starts blinking. 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
This will take at least
Notice: Shifting the transmission Automatic Transfer Case You can choose among five driving
into gear before the requested settings:
mode indicator light has stopped Indicator lights in the dial
flashing could damage the show which setting you are in.
transfer case. To help avoid The indicator lights will come on
damaging the vehicle, always briefly when you turn on the ignition
wait for the mode indicator lights and one will stay on. If the lights do
to stop flashing before shifting not come on, you should take the
the transmission into gear. vehicle to your dealer for service.
5. Start the engine and shift the An indicator light will flash while
transmission to the desired shifting the transfer case. It will
position. remain illuminated when the shift
Excessively shifting the transfer is complete. If for some reason
case into or out of the different the transfer case cannot make a
modes may cause the transfer case The transfer case knob is located requested shift, it will return to
to enter the shift protection mode. next to the steering column. the last chosen setting.
This will protect the transfer case Use the dial to shift into and out of 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
from possible damage and will only Four-Wheel Drive. setting is used for driving in most
allow the transfer case to respond street and highway situations.
to one shift per 10 seconds. The front axle is not engaged in
The transfer case may stay in this Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also
mode for up to three minutes. provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
Drive): This setting is ideal for setting also engages the front axle transfer case to N (Neutral)
use when road surface traction and delivers extra torque. You may only when towing the vehicle.
conditions are variable. When never need this setting. It sends See Recreational Vehicle Towing on
driving the vehicle in AUTO, maximum power to all four wheels. page 10‑103 or Towing the Vehicle
the front axle is engaged, but the You might choose Four-Wheel Drive on page 10‑103 for more
vehicle's power is sent only to the Low if you are driving off-road in information.
front and rear wheels automatically deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
based on driving conditions. Driving and while climbing or descending message stays on, you should
in this mode results in slightly lower steep hills. take the vehicle to your dealer for
fuel economy than Two-Wheel service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL
Drive High. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®,
shifting into Four-Wheel Drive DRIVE message” under
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use Low will turn Traction Control and Transmission Messages on
the Four-Wheel Drive High position StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak® page 5‑50.
when extra traction is needed, such System on page 9‑70. Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive
as on snowy or icy roads or in most High or AUTO (Automatic
off-road situations. This setting also
engages the front axle to help drive
{ WARNING Four-Wheel Drive)
the vehicle. This is the best setting Shifting the transfer case to Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
to use when plowing snow. Drive High or AUTO position. This
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four-Wheel
is in P (Park). You or someone Drive Low. The indicator light will
else could be seriously injured. flash while shifting. It will remain
Be sure to set the parking brake on when the shift is completed.
before placing the transfer case in
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
page 9‑69.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive It is typical for the vehicle to
Drive High Low position, the ignition must be exhibit significant engagement
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be noise and bump when shifting
Drive High position. This can be stopped or moving less than 5 km/h between Four-Wheel Drive Low
done at any speed, except when (3 mph) with the transmission in and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. N (Neutral). The preferred method or from N (Neutral) with the engine
The indicator light will flash while for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive running.
shifting. It will remain on when the Low is to have the vehicle moving If the knob is turned to the
shift is completed. 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn Four-Wheel Drive Low position
the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive when the vehicle is in gear and/or
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Low position. You must wait for the moving, the Four-Wheel Drive
Drive Low Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator Low indicator light will flash for
When Four-Wheel Drive Low is light to stop flashing and remain 30 seconds and not complete the
engaged, vehicle speed should on before shifting the transmission shift unless the vehicle is moving
be kept below 72 km/h (45 mph). into gear. less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
Extended high-speed operation in Notice: Shifting the transmission transmission is in N (Neutral).
Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage into gear before the requested After 30 seconds the transfer
or shorten the life of the drivetrain. mode indicator light has stopped case will shift to Four-Wheel
flashing could damage the Drive High mode.
transfer case. To help avoid
damaging the vehicle, always
wait for the mode indicator lights
to stop flashing before shifting
the transmission into gear.
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel transfer case. To help avoid Shifting into Neutral
Drive Low damaging the vehicle, always To shift the transfer case to
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive wait for the mode indicator lights N (Neutral) do the following:
Low to Four-Wheel Drive High, to stop flashing before shifting
the transmission into gear. 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked
AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive High, so that it will not roll.
the vehicle must be stopped or It is typical for the vehicle to
moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) exhibit significant engagement 2. Set the parking brake and
with the transmission in N (Neutral) noise and bump when shifting apply the regular brake pedal.
and the ignition in ON/RUN. between Four-Wheel Drive Low See Parking Brake on page 9‑69
The preferred method for shifting and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges for more information.
out of Four-Wheel Drive Low or from N (Neutral) with the engine 3. Shifting the transfer case into
is to have the vehicle moving running. N (Neutral) can be done with
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn If the knob is turned to the or without the engine running.
the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, Shifting without the engine
High, AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive or Two-Wheel Drive High switch running should be done with
High position. You must wait for position when the vehicle is in gear the ignition in ON/RUN.
the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator 4. Put the transmission in
Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel N (Neutral).
light to stop flashing and remain Drive High indicator light will flash
on before shifting the transmission for 30 seconds but will not complete 5. Shift the transfer case to
into gear. the shift unless the vehicle is Two-Wheel Drive High.
Notice: Shifting the transmission moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)
into gear before the requested and the transmission is in
mode indicator light has stopped N (Neutral).
flashing could damage the
6. Turn the transfer case dial 10. Release the parking brake prior 4. Release the parking brake prior
clockwise to N (Neutral) until to moving the vehicle. to moving the vehicle.
it stops and hold it there until 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Notice: Shifting the transmission
the N (Neutral) light starts into gear before the requested
blinking. This will take at least Shifting Out of Neutral mode indicator light has stopped
10 seconds. Then slowly release To shift out of N (Neutral) do the flashing could damage the
the dial to the four low position. following: transfer case. To help avoid
The N (Neutral) light will come damaging the vehicle, always
on when the transfer case shift 1. Set the parking brake and apply
the regular brake pedal. wait for the mode indicator lights
to N (Neutral) is complete. to stop flashing before shifting
7. If the engine is running, make 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the transmission into gear.
sure that the transfer case is the engine off, and shift the
transmission to N (Neutral). 5. Start the engine and shift the
in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to the desired
transmission to R (Reverse) 3. Turn the transfer case dial position.
for one second, then shift the to Two-Wheel Drive High,
transmission to D (Drive) for Four-Wheel Drive High,
one second. or AUTO.
8. Turn the ignition to After the transfer case has
ACC/ACCESSORY, which shifted out of N (Neutral), the
will turn the engine off. N (Neutral) light will go out.
9. Place the transmission shift
lever in P (Park).
Brakes As the brakes are applied, the

computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
Antilock Brake braking pressure accordingly.
System (ABS) Remember: ABS does not change
This vehicle has the Antilock the time needed to get a foot up to
Brake System (ABS), an advanced If there is a problem with ABS, this the brake pedal or always decrease
electronic braking system that helps warning light stays on. See Antilock stopping distance. If you get too
prevent a braking skid. Brake System (ABS) Warning Light close to the vehicle in front of you,
on page 5‑28. there will not be enough time to
When the engine is started and the
If driving safely on a wet road apply the brakes if that vehicle
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
and it becomes necessary to suddenly slows or stops. Always
checks itself. A momentary motor
slam on the brakes and continue leave enough room up ahead to
or clicking noise might be heard
braking to avoid a sudden obstacle, stop, even with ABS.
while this test is going on, and
it might even be noticed that a computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
the brake pedal moves a little. are slowing down. If one of the
This is normal. wheels is about to stop rolling, Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the computer will separately the brake pedal down firmly and let
work the brakes at each wheel. ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Braking in Emergencies If the ignition is on, the brake Brake Assist (Except
system warning light will come on.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
See Brake System Warning Light on
With 4.3L V6 Engine)
brake at the same time. In many
page 5‑27. If this vehicle has StabiliTrak®, it
emergencies, steering can help
Notice: Driving with the parking also has a Brake Assist feature
more than even the very best
brake on can overheat the brake designed to assist the driver in
braking.
system and cause premature stopping or decreasing vehicle
wear or damage to brake system speed in emergency driving
Parking Brake conditions. This feature uses the
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the stability system hydraulic brake
brake warning light is off before control module to supplement
driving. the power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
To release the parking brake, hold quickly and forcefully applied the
the regular brake pedal down, then brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
push down momentarily on the stop or slow down the vehicle.
parking brake pedal until you feel The stability system hydraulic brake
the pedal release. Slowly pull your control module increases brake
foot up off the parking brake pedal. pressure at each corner of the
If the parking brake is not released vehicle until the ABS activates.
when you begin to drive, the brake
system warning light will flash and a
chime will sound warning you that
Set the parking brake by holding
the parking brake is still on.
the regular brake pedal down, then
pushing down the parking brake If you are towing a trailer and
pedal. are parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑91.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or activated. During the transition Ride Control Systems
pedal movement during this time period between when the driver
is normal and the driver should releases the brake pedal and starts
continue to apply the brake pedal to accelerate to drive off on a grade, StabiliTrak® System
as the driving situation dictates HSA holds the braking pressure The vehicle may have a vehicle
The Brake Assist feature will for a maximum of two seconds stability enhancement system called
automatically disengage when to ensure that there is no rolling. StabiliTrak®. It is an advanced
the brake pedal is released or The brakes will automatically computer-controlled system that
brake pedal pressure is quickly release when the accelerator pedal assists the driver with directional
decreased. is applied within the two‐second control of the vehicle in difficult
window. If the vehicle is equipped driving conditions.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) with the Integrated Trailer Brake
StabiliTrak activates when the
Control (ITBC) system, HSA may
2500 and 3500 series vehicles with also apply the trailer brakes. It will computer senses a discrepancy
StabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist not activate if the vehicle is in a between the intended path and
(HSA) feature, which may be useful drive gear and facing downhill or the direction the vehicle is actually
when the vehicle is stopped on a if the vehicle is facing uphill and traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
grade. This feature is designed to in R (Reverse). There may be applies braking pressure at any one
prevent the vehicle from rolling, situations on minor hills (less than of the vehicle's brakes to assist the
either forward or rearward, during 5% grade) with a loaded vehicle or driver with keeping the vehicle on
vehicle drive off. After the driver while pulling a trailer where HSA the intended path.
completely stops and holds the will not activate.
vehicle in a complete standstill on
a grade, HSA will be automatically
When the vehicle is started CONTROL OFF, SERVICE The system may be heard or felt
and begins to move, the system TRACTION CONTROL, while it is working; this is normal.
performs several diagnostic checks STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
to insure there are no problems. STABILITRAK. If these DIC
The system may be heard or messages appear, make sure the
felt while it is working. This is StabiliTrak system has not been
normal and does not mean there turned off using the StabiliTrak
is a problem with the vehicle. on/off button. Then turn the vehicle
The system should initialize off, wait 15 seconds, and turn it
before the vehicle reaches 32 km/h back on again to reset the system. The traction control disable button
(20 mph). In some cases, it may If any of these messages still is located on the instrument panel
take approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of appear on the DIC, the vehicle below the climate controls.
driving before the system initializes. should be taken in for service.
For more information on the DIC The Traction Control System (TCS)
If cruise control is being used when part of StabiliTrak can be turned
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise messages, see Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑47. off by pressing and releasing the
control automatically disengages. StabiliTrak button. To disable both
The cruise control can be TCS and StabiliTrak, press and
re-engaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on hold 5 until F illuminates and the
page 9‑73 for more information. appropriate DIC message displays.
If the system fails to turn on or TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned
activate, the StabiliTrak light on by pressing and releasing the
along with one of the following StabiliTrak button if they are not
The StabiliTrak light will flash on the automatically shut off for any other
messages will be displayed
instrument panel cluster when the reason.
on the Driver Information
system is both on and activated.
Center (DIC): TRACTION
When TCS or StabiliTrak is When the transfer case is in 4LO, traction while driving. If traction
turned off, the StabiliTrak light the stability system is automatically control is turned off, only the
and the appropriate message disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes brake-traction control portion
will be displayed on the DIC to on, and the STABILITRAK OFF of traction control will work.
warn the driver. The vehicle will message will appear on the DIC. The engine speed management
still have brake-traction control Both traction control and StabiliTrak will be disabled. In this mode,
when traction control is off, but will are automatically disabled in this engine power is not reduced
not be able to use the engine speed condition. automatically and the driven
management system. See “Traction wheels can spin more freely.
Control Operation” next for more Traction Control Operation This can cause the brake-traction
information. The traction control system is part control to activate constantly.
When the traction control system of the StabiliTrak system. Traction Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
has been turned off, system noises control limits wheel spin by reducing is allowed to spin excessively
may still be heard as a result of the engine power to the wheels (engine while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake
brake-traction control coming on. speed management) and by warning lights, and any relevant
applying brakes to each individual DIC messages are displayed, the
It is recommended to leave the wheel (brake-traction control) as
system on for normal driving transfer case could be damaged.
necessary. The repairs would not be covered
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the vehicle The traction control system is by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, enabled automatically when the engine power and do not spin
and you want to “rock” the vehicle vehicle is started. It will activate the wheel(s) excessively while
to attempt to free it. It may also be and the StabiliTrak light will flash these lights and messages are
necessary to turn off the system if it senses that any of the wheels displayed.
when driving in extreme off-road are spinning or beginning to lose
conditions where high wheel spin
is required. See If the Vehicle is
Stuck on page 9‑23.
The traction control system may 2500 and 3500 series vehicles Cruise Control
activate on dry or rough roads with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway
or under conditions such as Control (TSC) feature. See Trailer
heavy acceleration while turning Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑124. { WARNING
or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
transmission. When this happens, Cruise control can be dangerous
with StabiliTrak have a Hill Start where you cannot drive safely at
a reduction in acceleration may be Assist (HSA) feature. See Hill Start
noticed, or a noise or vibration may a steady speed. So, do not use
Assist (HSA) on page 9‑70. the cruise control on winding
be heard. This is normal.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can roads or in heavy traffic.
If cruise control is being used when affect the vehicle's performance.
the system activates, the StabiliTrak Cruise control can be dangerous
See Accessories and Modifications
light will flash and cruise control will on slippery roads. On such roads,
on page 10‑3.
automatically disengage. Cruise fast changes in tire traction can
control may be reengaged when cause excessive wheel slip, and
road conditions allow. See Cruise Locking Rear Axle you could lose control. Do not use
Control on page 9‑73. Vehicles with a locking rear axle can cruise control on slippery roads.
StabiliTrak may also turn off give more traction on snow, mud,
automatically if it determines that ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a
For vehicles with cruise control, a
a problem exists with the system. standard axle most of the time, but
speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
If the problem does not clear itself when traction is low, this feature will
or more can be maintained
after restarting the vehicle, see your allow the rear wheel with the most
without keeping your foot on the
dealer for service. traction to move the vehicle.
accelerator. Cruise control does
not work at speeds below about
40 km/h (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, cruise [ (Cancel): Press to disengage

control is turned off. cruise control without erasing the
For vehicles with an Allison or set speed from memory.
Hydra‐Matic 6‐speed automatic Setting Cruise Control
transmission, see “Grade Braking
and Cruise Grade Braking If the cruise button is on when not in
(Allison Transmission) under use, it could get bumped and go into
Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑51 cruise when not desired. Keep the
for an explanation of how cruise cruise control switch off when cruise
control interacts with the Range is not being used.
Selection Mode, tow/haul and The cruise control light on the
grade braking systems. instrument panel cluster will come
For vehicles with the StabiliTrak The cruise control buttons are on after the cruise control has been
system that begins to limit wheel located on the left side of the set to the desired speed.
spin while you are using cruise steering wheel.
1. Press I.
control, the cruise control will I (On/Off): Press to turn the
automatically disengage. See system on or off. The indicator light 2. Get up to the desired speed.
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑70. is on when cruise control is on and 3. Press the SET− button located
When road conditions allow the turns off when cruise control is off. on the steering wheel and
cruise control to be safely used release it.
again, it can be turned back on. + RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to resume to a 4. Take your foot off the
previously set speed, or press accelerator.
and hold to accelerate.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set
the speed and activate cruise
control or make the vehicle
decelerate.
Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using Using Cruise Control on Hills
If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control How well the cruise control will work
desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is on hills depends upon the vehicle
are applied, the cruise control is already activated, speed, load, and the steepness of
disengaged without erasing the . Press and hold the SET– button the hills. While going up steep hills,
set speed from memory. on the steering wheel until the you might have to step on the
Once the vehicle speed reaches desired lower speed is reached, accelerator pedal to maintain the
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, then release it. vehicle speed. While going downhill,
press the +RES button on the you might have to brake or shift to
. To slow down in small amounts, a lower gear to keep the vehicle
steering wheel. The vehicle returns press the SET– button on the
to the previous set speed and stays speed down. When the brakes
steering wheel briefly. Each time are applied the cruise control is
there. this is done, the vehicle goes disengaged.
Increasing Speed While Using about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While
If the cruise control system is Using Cruise Control
already activated, Use the accelerator pedal to
. Press and hold the +RES button increase the vehicle speed. When
on the steering wheel until the you take your foot off the pedal,
desired speed is reached, then the vehicle will slow down to the
release it. previous set cruise speed.
. To increase vehicle speed in
small amounts, press the +RES
button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) faster.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

There are three ways to end cruise
{ WARNING
control:
Systems The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
. To disengage cruise control; Assist (URPA) system does not
Ultrasonic Parking Assist replace driver vision. It cannot
step lightly on the brake pedal.
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect:
. Press [ on the steering wheel. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . Objects that are below the
. To turn off the cruise control, it operates at speeds less than
bumper, underneath the
8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the
press I on the steering wheel. vehicle, or too close or far
driver with parking and avoiding
from the vehicle.
Erasing Speed Memory objects while in R (Reverse).
The sensors on the rear bumper . Children, pedestrians,
The cruise control set speed is are used to detect the distance to bicyclists, or pets.
erased from memory by pressing an object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind
the I button or if the ignition is If you do not use proper care
the vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm before and while backing, vehicle
turned off. (10 in) off the ground.
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
How the System Works When the System Does Not

URPA comes on automatically Seem to Work Properly
when the shift lever is moved into The following messages may be
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds displayed on the DIC:
to indicate the system is working.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this
URPA operates only at speeds less The system can be disabled by message occurs, take the vehicle to
than 8 km/h (5 mph). pressing the rear park aid disable your dealer to repair the system.
An obstacle is indicated by audible button located next to the radio. PARK ASSIST OFF: This message
beeps. The interval between the The indicator light comes on and occurs if the driver disables the
beeps becomes shorter as the PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the system.
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. Driver Information Center (DIC) to PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
When the distance is less than indicate that URPA is off; see Object OWNERS MANUAL: This
30 cm (12 in) the beeps are Detection System Messages on message can occur under the
continuous. page 5‑46. following conditions:
To be detected, objects must be at Notice: If you use URPA while . The ultrasonic sensors are not
least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground the tailgate is lowered, it may clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
and below tailgate level. Objects not detect an object behind your bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from vehicle, and you might back into ice, and slush. For cleaning
the rear bumper. This distance may the object and damage your instructions, see “Washing the
be less during warmer or humid vehicle. Always verify the tailgate Vehicle” under Exterior Care on
weather. is closed when using URPA or page 10‑108.
turn off URPA when driving with
the tailgate lowered.

. The park assist sensors are
covered by frost or ice. Frost or
Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)
ice can form around and behind Camera (RVC)
the sensors and may not always This vehicle may have a Rear speed backing maneuvers or
be seen; this can occur after Vision Camera (RVC) system. Read where there could be cross-traffic.
washing the vehicle in cold this entire section before using it. Your judged distances using the
weather. The message may screen will differ from actual
not clear until the frost or ice
has melted. { WARNING distances.
If you do not use proper care
. A trailer was attached to the The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
before backing up, you could
vehicle, or a bicycle or an object system does not replace driver
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
was hanging out of the tailgate vision. RVC does not:
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
during the last drive cycle. Once . Detect objects that are vehicle damage, injury, or death.
the attached object is removed
outside the camera's field Even though the vehicle has
and the tailgate is raised, URPA
of view, below the bumper, the RVC system, always check
will return to normal operation.
or underneath the vehicle. carefully before backing up by
. A tow bar is attached to the checking behind and around the
. Detect children, pedestrians,
vehicle. vehicle.
bicyclists, or pets.
. The vehicle's bumper is
Do not back the vehicle by only
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system. looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
. Other conditions are affecting
(Continued)
system performance. Examples
of this are vibrations from a
jackhammer or the compression
of air brakes on a very large
truck.
Vehicles without Navigation To turn the RVC system on again, Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System press and hold z until the left System On or Off
The Rear Vision Camera system is indicator light illuminates. The RVC To turn the RVC system on or off:
designed to help the driver when system display is now enabled and
1. Shift into P (Park).
backing up by displaying a view of the display will appear in the mirror
the area behind the vehicle. When normally. 2. Press the MENU button to enter
the key is in the ON/RUN position the configure menu options,
Vehicles with Navigation then press the MENU hard key
and the driver shifts the vehicle System
into R (Reverse), the video image to select Display or touch the
automatically appears on the inside The RVC system is designed to Display screen button.
rearview mirror. Once the driver help the driver when backing up by 3. Select the Rear Camera Options
shifts out of R (Reverse), the video displaying a view of the area behind screen button. The Rear Camera
image automatically disappears the vehicle. When the driver shifts Options screen will display.
from the inside rearview mirror. the vehicle into R (Reverse), the
video image automatically appears
Turning the Rear Vision Camera on the navigation screen. Once the
System Off or On driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the
To turn off the RVC system, press navigation screen will go back to the
and hold z, located on the inside last screen that had been displayed,
rearview mirror, until the left after a delay.
indicator light turns off. The RVC
display is now disabled.
4. Select the Video screen

button. When the Video screen
button is highlighted the RVC
system is on.
The delay after shifting out of ] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) The symbols appear when an object
R (Reverse) is approximately or – (minus) screen buttons to has been detected by the URPA
10 seconds. The delay can be increase or decrease the brightness system. The symbol may cover the
cancelled by performing one of of the screen. object when viewing the navigation
the following: screen.
_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or
. Pressing a hard key on the – (minus) screen buttons to increase To turn the symbols on or off:
navigation system. or decrease the contrast of the 1. Make sure that URPA has not
. Shifting into P (Park). screen. been disabled.
. Reaching a vehicle speed of Symbols 2. Shift into P (Park).
8 km/h (5 mph). The navigation system may have 3. Press the MENU hard key
There is a message on the rear a feature that lets the driver view to enter the configure menu
vision camera screen that states symbols on the navigation screen options, then press the MENU
“Check Surroundings for Safety.” while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic hard key repeatedly until Display
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system is selected or touch the Display
Adjusting the Brightness and must not be disabled to use the screen button.
Contrast of the Screen caution symbols. If URPA has
4. Select the Rear Camera Options
To adjust the brightness and been disabled and the symbols
screen button. The Rear Camera
contrast of the screen, press the have been turned on, the Rear
Options screen will display.
MENU button while the rear vision Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable
camera image is on the display. error message may display. 5. Touch the Symbols screen
Any adjustments made will only See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on button. The screen button will
affect the rear vision camera screen. page 9‑76. be highlighted when on.
Rear Vision Camera Error The camera uses a special lens. The following illustration shows
Messages The distance of the image that the field of view that the camera
appears on the screen differs from provides.
Service Rear Vision Camera the actual distance. The area
System: This message can display displayed by the camera is limited.
when the system is not receiving The camera does not display
information it requires from other objects which are close to either
vehicle systems. corner of the bumper or under the
If any other problem occurs or if a bumper. The area displayed on
problem persists, see your dealer. the screen can vary according
to vehicle orientation or road
Rear Vision Camera Location conditions.
A. View displayed by the camera

B. Corner of the rear bumper
The rear vision camera is located in

the bezel for the tailgate handle.
Disconnecting the Rear Vision

Camera
The rear vision camera must be
disconnected if the tailgate needs
to be removed.
To disconnect the camera:
1. Remove the license plate.
2. Disconnect the camera
connectors from the chassis
harness, located behind the
license plate, by pressing on the
release tab on each connector. A. Chassis harness connector A. Chassis harness connector
B. Release tab B. Release tab
C. Camera connector 4. Feed the wiring harness through
3. Plug the two exposed chassis the pickup box, then plug the
harness connectors together to camera connectors together
prevent contamination. to prevent contamination.
5. Remove the tailgate.
See Tailgate on page 2‑10
6. Reinstall the license plate.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall
the rear vision camera and make
sure the grommet and connection
are secure.
When the System Does Not

. The back of the vehicle is in an . A fast flash may indicate that
Seem to Work Properly accident. If this happens, the the display has been on for the
position and mounting angle maximum allowable time during
The RVC system might not work of the camera can change or a reverse cycle, or the display
properly or display a clear image if: the camera can be affected. has reached an Over
. The RVC is turned off. Be sure to have the camera Temperature limit.
See “Turning the Rear Camera and its position and mounting The fast flash conditions are
System On or Off” earlier in this angle checked at your dealer. used to protect the video
section. The RVC system display in the device from high temperature
. It is dark. rearview mirror may turn off or not conditions. Once conditions
appear as expected due to one return to normal the device will
. The sun or the beam of of the following conditions. If this reset and the green indicator
headlights is shining directly occurs the left indicator light on will stop flashing.
into the camera lens. the mirror will flash. During any of these fault conditions,
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else . A slow flash may indicate a the display will be blank and the
builds up on the camera lens. loss of video signal, or no video indicator will continue to flash as
Clean the lens, rinse it with signal present during the reverse long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
water, and wipe it with a soft cycle. or until the conditions return to
cloth. normal.
Pressing and holding z when the
left indicator light is flashing will turn
off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
Fuel See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on

page 9‑87. For all other vehicles,
For diesel engine vehicles, see use only the unleaded gasoline
“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in the described under Recommended
Duramax Diesel Supplement. Fuel on page 9‑84.
For Vehicles with gasoline engines,
please read this. Recommended Fuel
Gasoline For all vehicles except those with
the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
Use of the recommended fuel use regular unleaded gasoline
is an important part of the proper with a posted octane rating of 87 or
maintenance of this vehicle. To help higher. If the octane rating is less
keep the engine clean and maintain The eighth digit of the Vehicle than 87, an audible knocking noise,
optimum vehicle performance, we Identification Number (VIN) shows commonly referred to as spark
recommend the use of gasoline the code letter or number that knock, might be heard when driving.
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent identifies the vehicle's engine. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
Gasoline. The VIN is at the top left of the at 87 octane or higher as soon
instrument panel. See Vehicle as possible. If heavy knocking is
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
Identification Number (VIN) on heard when using gasoline rated
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
page 12‑1. at 87 octane or higher, the engine
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge needs service.
of marketers providing TOP TIER and a yellow fuel cap can use either
Detergent Gasoline can be found unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
at www.toptiergas.com. containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine Gasoline Specifications California Fuel
(VIN Code 2), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
(U.S. and Canada Only) Requirements
octane rating of 91 or higher. At a minimum, gasoline should If the vehicle is certified to meet
You can also use regular unleaded meet ASTM specification California Emissions Standards,
gasoline rated at 87 octane or D 4814 in the United States it is designed to operate on fuels
higher, but the vehicle's acceleration or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in that meet California specifications.
could be slightly reduced, and Canada. Some gasolines contain See the underhood emission control
a slight audible knocking noise, an octane-enhancing additive called label. If this fuel is not available in
commonly referred to as spark methylcyclopentadienyl manganese states adopting California Emissions
knock, might be heard. If the octane tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend Standards, the vehicle will operate
is less than 87, you might notice against the use of gasolines satisfactorily on fuels meeting
a heavy knocking noise when you containing MMT. See Fuel Additives federal specifications, but emission
drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline on page 9‑86 for additional control system performance might
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon information. be affected. The malfunction
as possible. Otherwise, you could indicator lamp could turn on and the
damage the engine. If heavy vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
knocking is heard when using See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
gasoline rated at 87 octane or page 5‑25. If this occurs, return to
higher, the engine needs service. your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates,

Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol,
Countries regulations. To help keep fuel and reformulated gasolines
Never use leaded gasoline or any injectors and intake valves clean might be available in your area.
other fuel not recommended in the and avoid problems due to dirty We recommend that you use these
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs injectors or valves, look for gasoline gasolines, if they comply with the
caused by use of improper fuel that is advertised as TOP TIER specifications described earlier.
would not be covered by the vehicle Detergent Gasoline. Look for the However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
warranty. TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to other fuels containing more than
ensure gasoline meets enhanced 10% ethanol must not be used in
To check the fuel availability, ask
detergency standards developed vehicles that were not designed
an auto club, or contact a major oil
by the auto companies. A list of for those fuels.
company that does business in the
marketers providing TOP TIER Notice: This vehicle was not
country where you will be driving.
Detergent Gasoline can be found designed for fuel that contains
at www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel Additives methanol. Do not use fuel
For customers who do not use containing methanol. It can
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline corrode metal parts in the fuel
in the United States are now regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel system and also damage plastic
required to contain additives that System Treatment PLUS, added and rubber parts. That damage
help prevent engine and fuel system to the fuel tank at every engine oil would not be covered under the
deposits from forming, allowing the change, can help clean deposits vehicle warranty.
emission control system to work from fuel injectors and intake
properly. In most cases, nothing valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
should have to be added to the fuel. PLUS is the only gasoline additive
However, some gasolines contain recommended by General Motors.
only the minimum amount of It is available at your dealer.
Some gasolines that are We encourage the use of E85 in To ensure quick starts in the
not reformulated for low vehicles that are designed to use it. wintertime, the E85 fuel must be
emissions can contain an The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” formulated properly for your climate
octane-enhancing additive fuel, meaning it is made from according to ASTM specification
called methylcyclopentadienyl renewable sources such as corn D 5798. If you have trouble starting
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); and other crops. on E85, it could be because the
ask the attendant where you buy Many service stations will not have E85 fuel is not properly formulated
gasoline whether the fuel contains an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump for your climate. If this happens,
MMT. We recommend against available. The U.S. Department switching to gasoline or adding
the use of such gasolines. Fuels of Energy has an alternative fuels gasoline to the fuel tank can
containing MMT can reduce website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ improve starting. For good starting
spark plug life and affect emission locator/stations/) that can help you and heater efficiency below 0°C
control system performance. find E85 fuel. Those stations that (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
The malfunction indicator lamp do have E85 should have a label should contain no more than 70%
might turn on. If this occurs, indicating ethanol content. Do not ethanol. It is best not to alternate
return to your dealer for service. use the fuel if the ethanol content is repeatedly between gasoline and
greater than 85%. E85. If you do switch fuels, it is
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) recommended that you add as
At a minimum, E85 should meet much fuel as possible — do not
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge ASTM Specification D 5798. add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
and a yellow fuel cap can use either By definition, this means that fuel refueling. You should drive the
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol vehicle immediately after refueling
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). content between 70% and 85%. for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow
For all other vehicles, use only the Filling the fuel tank with fuel the vehicle to adapt to the change
unleaded gasoline described under mixtures that do not meet ASTM in ethanol concentration.
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑84. specifications can affect driveability
and could cause the malfunction
indicator lamp to come on.
E85 has less energy per liter Filling the Tank

(gallon) than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
often when using E85 than when see the Duramax diesel supplement
you are using gasoline. See Filling for more information.
the Tank on page 9‑88.
Notice: Some additives are not { WARNING
compatible with E85 fuel and can Fuel vapor burns violently and a
harm the vehicle's fuel system.
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
Do not add anything to E85.
To help avoid injuries to you and
Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the others, read and follow all the
vehicle warranty. instructions on the fuel pump
The tethered fuel cap is located
island. Turn off the engine when
Notice: This vehicle was not behind a hinged fuel door on the
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
designed for fuel that contains driver side of the vehicle. Vehicles
or when refueling the vehicle. that have a FlexFuel badge and
methanol. Do not use fuel Do not use cellular phones. Keep
containing methanol. It can a yellow fuel cap can use either
sparks, flames, and smoking unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
corrode metal parts in the fuel
materials away from fuel. Do not containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
system and also damage plastic
leave the fuel pump unattended See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the when refueling the vehicle. This is page 9‑87.
vehicle warranty. against the law in some places.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
slowly counterclockwise.
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
pumping before removing the

{ WARNING nozzle. Clean fuel from painted { WARNING
surfaces as soon as possible.
Fuel can spray out on you if you See Exterior Care on page 10‑108. If a fire starts while you are
open the fuel cap too quickly. refueling, do not remove the
If you spill fuel and then When replacing the fuel cap, turn it nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
something ignites it, you could be clockwise until it clicks. It will require by shutting off the pump or by
badly burned. This spray can more effort to turn the fuel cap on notifying the station attendant.
happen if the tank is nearly full, the last turn as you tighten it. Make Leave the area immediately.
sure the cap is fully installed. The
and is more likely in hot weather.
diagnostic system can determine if
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait Notice: If a new fuel cap is
the fuel cap has been left off or
for any hiss noise to stop. Then improperly installed. This would needed, be sure to get the right
unscrew the cap all the way. allow fuel to evaporate into the type of cap from your dealer.
atmosphere. See Malfunction The wrong type of fuel cap might
If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank Indicator Lamp on page 5‑25. not fit properly, might cause the
chassis cab model, and it runs out malfunction indicator lamp to
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first light, and could damage the
displays on the Driver Information
to ensure a quick restart. fuel tank and emissions system.
Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not properly installed. See Fuel System
on page 5‑25.
top off or overfill the tank and wait a Messages on page 5‑46 for more
few seconds after you have finished information.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
General Towing
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill Information
Never fill a portable fuel container opening before operating Only use towing equipment that
while it is in the vehicle. Static the nozzle. Contact should has been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the be maintained until the filling Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel is complete. dealer for assistance with preparing
vapor. You can be badly burned the vehicle for towing a trailer.
. Do not smoke while
and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel. See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to information in this section:
. Do not use a cellular phone
you and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving
. Dispense fuel only into while towing a trailer, see
approved containers. “Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while
it is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment
the ground. to tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled

. Consider using a sway control. . Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on See “Hitches” under Towing Shift the transmission to a lower
page 10‑103. For information on Equipment on page 9‑112. gear if the transmission shifts
towing the vehicle behind another . Do not tow a trailer at all during too often under heavy loads
vehicle such as a motor home, see the first 800 km (500 miles) and/or hilly conditions.
Recreational Vehicle Towing on the new vehicle is driven. Important considerations that have
page 10‑103. The engine, axle, or other to do with weight:
parts could be damaged. . Weight of the trailer
Driving Characteristics . During the first 800 km
and Towing Tips
. Weight of the trailer tongue
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over . Weight on the vehicle's tires
Pulling a Trailer 80 km/h (50 mph) and do . Weight of the trailering
Important points for pulling a trailer: not make starts at full throttle. combination
. There are many different laws, This helps the engine and other
including speed limit restrictions, parts of the vehicle wear in at
having to do with trailering. the heavier loads.
Make sure the rig will be legal,
not only where you live but
also where you will be driving.
A good source for this
information can be state
or provincial police.
Driving with a Trailer Before starting, check all trailer

WARNING (Continued) hitch parts and attachments, safety
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets
chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires, and mirrors. If the
on or under the instrument trailer has electric brakes, start the
When towing a trailer, exhaust panel.
gases may collect at the rear combination moving and then apply
of the vehicle and enter if the
. Adjust the Climate Control the trailer brake controller by hand
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most system to a setting that to be sure the brakes work.
window is open. brings in only outside air During the trip, check occasionally
and set the fan speed to the to be sure that the load is secure
Engine exhaust contains Carbon highest setting. See Climate and the lamps and any trailer
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Control System in the Index. brakes still work.
seen or smelled. It can cause
For more information about
unconsciousness and even death.
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine Following Distance
To maximize safety when towing Exhaust on page 9‑44. Stay at least twice as far behind the
a trailer: vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
. Have the exhaust system Towing a trailer requires a
This can help to avoid heavy
inspected for leaks and make certain amount of experience.
braking and sudden turns.
necessary repairs before The combination you are driving is
starting a trip. longer and not as responsive as the
. Never drive with the liftgate, vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
trunk/hatch, or rear-most the handling and braking of the rig
window open. before setting out for the open road.
(Continued)
Passing Making Turns Driving on Grades

More passing distance is Notice: Making very sharp turns Reduce speed and shift to a
needed when towing a trailer. while trailering could cause the lower gear before starting down
The combination will not accelerate trailer to come in contact with a long or steep downgrade. If the
as quickly and is longer so it is the vehicle. The vehicle could be transmission is not shifted down,
necessary to go much farther damaged. Avoid making very the brakes might get hot and no
beyond the passed vehicle before sharp turns while trailering. longer work well.
returning to the lane. When turning with a trailer, Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
Backing Up make wider turns than normal. Shift the transmission to a lower
Do this so the trailer will not strike gear if the transmission shifts too
Hold the bottom of the steering soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, often under heavy loads and/or
wheel with one hand. To move the trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky hilly conditions.
trailer to the left, move that hand or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
to the left. To move the trailer to The Tow/Haul Mode may be used
in advance. if the transmission shifts too often.
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑51.
if possible, have someone out, the arrows on the instrument When towing at high altitude on
guide you. panel will still flash for turns. It is steep uphill grades, consider the
important to check occasionally to following: Engine coolant will boil
be sure the trailer bulbs are still at a lower temperature than at
working. normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, the vehicle may show
signs similar to engine overheating.
To avoid this, let the engine If parking the rig on a hill:

run while parked, preferably on 1. Press the brake pedal, but
{ WARNING
level ground, with the automatic do not shift into P (Park) yet.
transmission in P (Park) for a few It can be dangerous to get out of
Turn the wheels into the curb if the vehicle if the shift lever is not
minutes before turning the engine facing downhill or into traffic if
off. If the overheat warning comes fully in P (Park) with the parking
facing uphill. brake firmly set. The vehicle
on, see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑25. 2. Have someone place chocks can roll.
under the trailer wheels. If the engine has been left
Parking on Hills
3. When the wheel chocks are in running, the vehicle can move
place, release the regular brakes suddenly. You or others could be
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load. injured. To be sure the vehicle will
Parking the vehicle on a hill 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then not move, even when on fairly
with the trailer attached can be apply the parking brake and shift level ground, use the steps that
dangerous. If something goes into P (Park). follow.
wrong, the rig could start to move. 5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive, Always put the shift lever fully in
People can be injured, and both be sure the transfer case is in a P (Park) with the parking brake
the vehicle and the trailer can be drive gear and not in N (Neutral). firmly set.
damaged. When possible, always
6. Release the brake pedal. If the transfer case on a
park the rig on a flat surface.
four-wheel-drive vehicle is in
N (Neutral), the vehicle will be
free to roll, even if the shift lever
is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
Leaving After Parking on a Hill Trailer Towing WARNING (Continued)

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
2. Start the engine. see the Duramax diesel supplement vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
3. Shift into a gear. for more information. only if all the steps in this section
4. Release the parking brake.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see have been followed. Ask your
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is the hybrid supplement for more dealer for advice and information
clear of the chocks. information. about towing a trailer with the
7. Stop and have someone pick up Do not tow a trailer during break‐in. vehicle.
and store the chocks. See New Vehicle Break-In on
page 9‑34 for more information. Notice: Pulling a trailer
Maintenance when Trailer
improperly can damage the
Towing
The vehicle needs service more
{ WARNING vehicle and result in costly
repairs not covered by the
often when pulling a trailer. See this The driver can lose control when vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer
manual's Maintenance Schedule pulling a trailer if the correct correctly, follow the advice in
or Index for more information. equipment is not used or the this section and see your dealer
Things that are especially important vehicle is not driven properly. for important information about
in trailer operation are automatic For example, if the trailer is too towing a trailer with the vehicle.
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle heavy, the brakes may not work To identify the trailering capacity of
lubricant, belts, cooling system, well or even at all. The driver and the vehicle, read the information in
and brake system. It is a good passengers could be seriously “Weight of the Trailer” later in this
idea to inspect these before injured. The vehicle may also be section.
and during the trip.
damaged; the resulting repairs
Check periodically to see that all would not be covered by the
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. (Continued)
Trailering is different than just Weight of the Trailer Trailer weight rating (TWR) is
driving the vehicle by itself. calculated assuming the tow vehicle
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Trailering means changes in has only the driver but all required
handling, acceleration, braking, It depends on how the rig is used. trailering equipment. Weight of
durability, and fuel economy. Speed, altitude, road grades, additional optional equipment,
Successful, safe trailering takes outside temperature, and how much passengers, and cargo in the tow
correct equipment, and it has to the vehicle is used to pull a trailer vehicle must be subtracted from
be used properly. are all important. It can depend the trailer weight rating.
on any special equipment on the
The following information has many Use the following chart to determine
vehicle, and the amount of tongue
time-tested, important trailering tips how much the vehicle can weigh,
weight the vehicle can carry. See
and safety rules. Many of these are based upon the vehicle model and
“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
important for your safety and that of options.
in this section for more information.
your passengers. So please read Weights listed apply for
this section carefully before pulling conventional trailers and fifth-wheel
a trailer. trailers unless otherwise noted.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 2 177 kg (4,800 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.3L V6 — With Automatic
3.73 2 449 kg (5,400 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
Transmission (c)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L LMG V8 3.08 2 994 kg (6,600 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L LMG V8, K5L HD
3.08 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Cooling Pkg
5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
Conventional Trailer
5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 1 996 kg (4,400 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

5.3L V8 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 3 130 kg (6,900 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
3.42 4 173 kg (9,200 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering
3.73 4 853 kg (10,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8L V8 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (LMG) 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

5.3L V8 (LMG) K5L HD
3.08 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Cooling Pkg
3.08 3 175 kg (7,000 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Pkg (XFE)
6.2L V8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3.73 4 808 kg (10,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 2 359 kg (5,200 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 3 992 kg (8,800 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 903 kg (6,400 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (c) 3.08 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.73 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8L V8 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
6.2L V8 3.42 2 903 kg (6,400 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3.73 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 2 223 kg (4,900 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 858 kg (6,300 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (c) 3.08 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 — Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
6.0L V8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 486 kg (14,300 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 — Payload Performance
3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Pkg (UB7)
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3500 Series 2WD Regular Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 577 kg (14,500 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer

3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box (e)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 305 kg (13,900 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 214 kg (13,700 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box (e)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 173 kg (9,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 169 kg (13,600 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
(b) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to
680 kg (1,500 lbs) maximum.
(c) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
(d) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to
1 361 kg (3,000 lbs) maximum.
(e) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to
1 587 kg (3,500 lbs) maximum.
Ask your dealer for trailering vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and
information or advice, or write us at the people who will be riding in the
our Customer Assistance Offices. vehicle as well as trailer tongue
See Customer Assistance Offices weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 passengers and cargo in the vehicle
or Customer Assistance Offices reduce the amount of tongue weight
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more the vehicle can carry, which will also
information. reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
can tow. See “ Vehicle Load Limits”
Weight of the Trailer Tongue for more information about the
The tongue load (A) of any vehicle's maximum load capacity.
trailer is very important because
it is also part of the vehicle weight.
Trailer tongue weight (A) should be
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
10 to 15 percent and fifth-wheel or
includes the curb weight of the
gooseneck kingpin weight should be
15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailer
weight up to the maximums for
vehicle series and hitch type
shown here:
Maximum Tongue After loading the trailer, weigh

Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs) proper. If they are not, adjustments
2500HD/3500 Weight Carrying 453 kg (1,000 lbs) might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
2500HD/3500 Weight Distributing 680 kg (1,500 lbs) Tires
1500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 680 kg (1,500 lbs) Be sure the vehicle's tires are
2500HD Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 134 kg (2,500 lbs) inflated to the inflation pressures
found on the Certification Tire label
3500 Single Rear on the drivers door or see Vehicle
Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 360 kg (3,000 lbs)
Wheels Load Limits on page 9‑25 for more
3500 Dual Rear information. Make sure not to
Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 587 kg (3,500 lbs) exceed the GVWR limit for the
Wheels
vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the
tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded
Do not exceed the maximum Trailering may be limited by the for the trip including the weight
allowable tongue weight for the vehicle's ability to carry tongue of the trailer tongue. If using a
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch weight. Tongue or kingpin weight weight-distributing hitch, make
extension that will position the hitch cannot cause the vehicle to exceed sure not to exceed the RGAWR
ball closest to the vehicle. This will the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight before applying the weight
help reduce the effect of trailer Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross distribution spring bars.
tongue weight on the rear axle. Axle Weight Rating). See “Total
Weight on the Vehicle's Tires” later
Weight of the Trailering Larger trailers may require a Weight‐Distributing Hitch

Combination weight-distributing hitch that Adjustment
uses spring bars to distribute
It is important that the combination the trailer tongue weight among
of the tow vehicle and trailer the two vehicle and trailer axles.
does not exceed any of its weight Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitches
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, may also be used. See “Weight of
Trailer Weight Rating, or Tongue the Trailer Tongue” under Trailer
Weight. The only way to be sure it is Towing on page 9‑95 for rating
not exceeding any of these ratings limits with various hitch types.
is to weigh the tow vehicle and
trailer combination, fully loaded for If a step-bumper hitch will be used,
the trip, getting individual weights the bumper could be damaged
for each of these items. in sharp turns. Make sure there
is ample room when turning to
Towing Equipment avoid contact between the trailer
and the bumper. A. Body to Ground Distance
Hitches Consider using sway controls B. Front of Vehicle
The correct hitch equipment helps with any trailer. Ask a trailering
When using a weight-distributing
maintain combination control. professional about sway controls
hitch, the spring bars should be
Most small-to-medium trailers can or refer to the trailer manufacturer's
adjusted so the distance (A) is the
be towed with a weight-carrying recommendations and instructions.
same after coupling the trailer to the
hitch which simply features a tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.
coupler latched to the hitch ball.
Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck The hitch should be located in the Safety Chains
Trailering pickup bed so that its centerline is
Always attach chains between the
over or slightly in front of the rear
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailers vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
axle. Take care that it is not so far
can be used with many pickup safety chains under the tongue
forward that it will contact the back
models. These trailers place a of the trailer to help prevent the
of the cab in sharp turns. This is
larger percentage of the weight tongue from contacting the road
especially important for short box
(kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle if it becomes separated from the
pickups. Trailer pin box extensions
than conventional trailers. Make hitch. Instructions about safety
and sliding fifth-wheel hitch
sure this weight does not cause the chains may be provided by the
assemblies can help this condition.
vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR. hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
There should be at least six inches
manufacturer. If the trailer being
Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin of clearance between the top of the
towed weighs up to 2 271 kg
weight should be 15 to 25 percent of pickup box and the bottom of the
(5,000 lbs) with a factory-installed
the trailer weight up to the maximum trailer shelf that extends over
step bumper, safety chains may
amount specified in the trailering the box.
be attached to the attaching points
chart for the vehicle. See “Weight of Make sure the hitch is attached to on the bumper; otherwise, safety
the Trailer” under Trailer Towing on the tow vehicle frame rails. Do not chains should be attached to holes
page 9‑95 for more information. use the pickup box for support. on the trailer hitch platform. Always
leave just enough slack so the
combination can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes If everything checks out this far, Trailer Wiring Harness
make the brake tap at the port on
A loaded trailer that weighs more The vehicle is equipped with one of
the master cylinder that sends the
than 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs to the following wiring harnesses for
fluid to the rear brakes. Use only
have its own brake system that towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in
steel brake tubing to make the tap.
is adequate for the weight of the camper.
trailer. Be sure to read and follow Auxiliary Battery
the instructions for the trailer brakes Basic Trailer Wiring
so they are installed, adjusted, and The auxiliary battery provision can All regular, extended cab and crew
maintained properly. be used to supply electrical power cab pickups have a seven‐wire
to additional equipment that may be trailer towing harness.
If the vehicle is equipped with added, such as a slide-in camper.
StabiliTrak, the trailer cannot tap If the vehicle has this provision, For vehicles not equipped with
into the vehicle's hydraulic brake this relay will be located on the heavy duty trailering, the harness
system. driver side of the vehicle, next to is secured to the vehicle's frame
The trailer brake system can tap the underhood electrical center. behind the spare tire mount.
into the vehicle's hydraulic brake The harness requires the installation
Be sure to follow the proper of a trailer connector, which is
system only if: installation instructions included available through your dealer.
. The trailer parts can withstand with any electrical equipment that
20 650 kPa (3,000 psi) of is installed. If towing a light‐duty trailer with
pressure. a standard four‐way round pin
Notice: Leaving electrical connector, an adapter is available
. The trailer's brake system equipment on for extended from your dealer.
will use less than 0.3 cc periods will drain the battery.
(0.02 cubic inch) of fluid from Always turn off electrical
the vehicle's master cylinder. equipment when not in use
Otherwise, both braking systems and do not use equipment that
will not work well or at all. exceeds the maximum amperage
rating for the auxiliary battery
provision.
Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness

. Brown: Taillamps If charging a remote (non-vehicle)
Package . White: Ground battery, press the Tow/Haul Mode
.
button, if equipped, located at
Light Green: Back-up Lamps the end of the shift lever. This will
. Red: Battery Feed* boost the vehicle system voltage
and properly charge the battery.
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
If the trailer is too light for Tow/
*The fuses for these two circuits Haul Mode, or the vehicle is not
are installed in the underhood equipped with Tow/Haul, turn on
electrical center, but the wires are the headlamps as a second way
not connected. They should be to boost the vehicle system and
connected by your dealer or a charge the battery.
qualified service center. The fuse
and wire for the ITBC is factory
installed and connected if the
For vehicles equipped with heavy vehicle is equipped with an ITBC.
duty trailering, the harness is The fuse for the battery feed is
connected to a bracket on the hitch not required if the vehicle has an
platform. The seven-wire harness auxiliary battery. If the vehicle does
contains the following trailer circuits: not have an auxiliary battery, have
your dealer or authorized service
. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal center install the required fuse.
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
Signal
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Electric Brake Control Wiring

Package Provisions
The seven-wire camper harness These wiring provisions are
is located under the front edge of included with the vehicle as part
the pickup box on the driver side of the trailer wiring package. These
of the vehicle, attached to the provisions are for an electric brake
frame bracket. A connector must controller. The instrument panel
be added to the wiring harness contains blunt cut wires behind the
which connects to the camper. steering column for the trailer brake
The harness contains the following controller. The harness contains the
camper/trailer circuits: following wires:
. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal . Dark Blue: Brake Signal to
If the vehicle is equipped with the
Trailer Connector
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn “Heavy-Duty Trailering” option,
Signal please refer to “Heavy-Duty Trailer . Red/Black: Battery
Wiring Package” earlier in this . Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
. Brown: Taillamps
section.
. White: Ground . White: Ground
When the camper-wiring harness
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps is ordered without the heavy-duty The harness should be installed by
trailering package, an eight-wire your dealer or a qualified service
. Red: Battery Feed center.
harness with a seven-pin connector
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake is located at the rear of the vehicle
and is tied to the vehicle's frame.
If the vehicle is equipped with an

. When pulling a heavy trailer
Integrated Trailer Brake Control or a large or heavy load in
(ITBC) System, the blunt cuts stop-and-go traffic.
exist, but are not connected further . When pulling a heavy trailer
in the harness. If an aftermarket or a large or heavy load in busy
trailer brake controller is installed, parking lots where improved low
the ITBC must be disconnected. This indicator light on the instrument speed control of the vehicle is
Do not power both ITBC and panel cluster comes on when the desired.
aftermarket controllers to control Tow/Haul Mode is on.
the trailer brakes at the same time. Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when lightly loaded or with no
Tow/Haul Mode when pulling a heavy trailer or a trailer at all will not cause damage.
large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul However, there is no benefit to
Mode on page 9‑51 for more the selection of Tow/Haul when
information. the vehicle is unloaded. Such a
selection when unloaded may
Tow/Haul is designed to be most result in unpleasant engine and
effective when the vehicle and transmission driving characteristics
trailer combined weight is at least and reduced fuel economy. Tow/
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Haul is recommended only when
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). pulling a heavy trailer or a large
See “Weight of the Trailer” under or heavy load.
Trailer Towing on page 9‑95.
Tow/Haul is most useful under
the following driving conditions:
. When pulling a heavy trailer or
Pressing this button at the end of a large or heavy load through
the shift lever turns on and off the rolling terrain.
Tow/Haul Mode.
Integrated Trailer Brake cause the vehicle’s antilock brake The ITBC system is fully functional
Control System or StabiliTrak systems to activate, only when the ignition is in ON or
power sent to the trailer's brakes in RUN.
will be automatically adjusted to The ITBC system can only be used
minimize trailer wheel lock-up. with trailers with electric brakes.
This does not imply that the trailer
has StabiliTrak.
2500 and 3500 series vehicles
{ WARNING
with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Connecting a trailer that is not
The vehicle may have an Integrated Control (TSC) feature. See Trailer compatible with the ITBC system
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑124. may result in reduced or complete
for electric trailer brakes. loss of trailer braking. There
2500 and 3500 series vehicles
This symbol is located on the with StabiliTrak have a Hill Start may be an increase in stopping
Trailer Brake Control Panel on Assist (HSA) feature. See Hill Start distance or trailer instability which
vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Assist (HSA) on page 9‑70. could result in personal injury or
Brake Control system. The power damage to the vehicle, trailer,
output to the trailer brakes is based If the vehicle’s brake, antilock
brake, or StabiliTrak systems are or other property. An aftermarket
on the amount of brake pressure controller may be available for
being applied by the vehicle’s brake not functioning properly, the ITBC
system may not be fully functional use with trailers with surge, air,
system. This available power output or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailer
to the trailer brakes can be adjusted or may not function at all. Make
sure all of these systems are brake systems. To determine the
to a wide range of trailering
fully operational to ensure full type of brakes on the trailer and
situations.
functionality of the ITBC system. the availability of controllers,
The ITBC system is integrated check with your trailer
with the vehicle’s brake, antilock The ITBC system is powered
through the vehicle's electrical manufacturer or dealer.
brake, and StabiliTrak (if equipped)
systems. In trailering conditions that system. Turning the ignition off
will also turn off the ITBC system.
When trailering, make sure of the Trailer Brake Control Panel information. The control panel
following: allows adjustment to the amount
. The ITBC system is used only of output, referred to as trailer
with trailers that are equipped gain, available to the electric
with electric brakes. trailer brakes and allows manual
application of the trailer brakes.
. All applicable local and federal The Trailer Brake Control Panel is
laws and regulations are used along with the Trailer Brake
followed. Display Page on the DIC to adjust
. All electrical and mechanical and display power output to the
connections to the trailer are trailer brakes.
made correctly. Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
. The trailer’s brakes are in proper The ITBC system displays
working condition. messages on the vehicle’s
. The trailer and vehicle are A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Driver Information Center (DIC).
properly loaded for the towing Lever See Driver Information Center (DIC)
condition. on page 5‑33 for more information.
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
The ITBC system is a The display page indicates Trailer
The ITBC system has a control
factory-installed item. Out‐of‐factory Gain setting, power output to
panel located on the instrument
installation of this system should not the electric trailer brakes, trailer
panel to the left of the steering
be attempted. GM is not responsible connection, and system operational
column. See Instrument Panel
for warranty or performance of the status.
(Base/Uplevel Version) on page 1‑2
system resulting from out‐of‐factory or Instrument Panel (Premium
installation. Version) on page 1‑6 for more
The Trailer Brake Display Page can All DIC warning and service 0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default
be displayed by performing any of messages must first be setting. To properly adjust trailer
the following actions: acknowledged by the driver gain, see “Trailer Gain Adjustment
. Scrolling through the DIC menu by pressing the odometer trip stem Procedure” later in this section.
pages using the odometer or the DIC Vehicle Information TRAILER OUTPUT: This is
trip stem or the DIC Vehicle button (if equipped) before the displayed any time a trailer with
Information button (if equipped). Trailer Brake Display Page can electric brakes is connected.
be displayed and Trailer Gain Output to the electric brakes is
. Pressing a Trailer Gain can be adjusted.
button—If the Trailer Brake based on the amount of vehicle
Display Page is not currently TRAILER GAIN: This setting is braking present and relative to
displayed, pressing a Trailer displayed any time the Trailer Brake the Trailer Gain setting. Output
Gain button will first recall the Display Page is active. This setting is displayed from 0 to 10 bars for
current Trailer Gain setting. can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 each gain setting.
After the Trailer Brake Display with either a trailer connected or On vehicles with Trailer Sway
Page is displayed, each press disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Control (TSC) or Hill Start Assist
and release of the gain buttons Gain, press one of the Trailer Gain (HSA), output to the electric trailer
will then cause the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the brakes may be displayed when the
setting to change. Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press systems are active. See Trailer
and hold a gain button to cause the Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑124
. Activating the Manual Trailer Trailer Gain to continuously adjust.
Brake Apply lever. and Hill Start Assist (HSA) on
To turn the output to the trailer off, page 9‑70.
. Connecting a trailer equipped adjust the Trailer Gain setting to
with electric trailer brakes. 0.0 (zero).
The Trailer Output will indicate Manual Trailer Brake Apply Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
“- - - - - -” on the Trailer Brake The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Trailer Gain should be set for a
Display Page whenever the Lever is located on the Trailer specific trailering condition and
following occur: Brake Control Panel and is used must be adjusted any time vehicle
. No trailer is connected to apply the trailer’s electric brakes loading, trailer loading, or road
. A trailer without electric brakes independent of the vehicle’s brakes. surface conditions change.
is connected (no DIC message This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Setting the Trailer Gain properly
is displayed) Adjustment Procedure to properly is needed for the best trailer
adjust the power output to the trailer stopping performance. A trailer
. A trailer with electric brakes brakes. Sliding the lever to the left
has become disconnected that is over-gained may result in
will apply only the trailer brakes. locked trailer brakes. A trailer that
(a CHECK TRAILER WIRING The power output to the trailer is
message will also be displayed is under-gained may result in not
indicated in the Trailer Brake enough trailer braking. Both of
on the DIC) Display Page on the DIC. If the these conditions may result in
. There is a fault present in the vehicle’s service brakes are applied poorer stopping and stability of
wiring to the electric trailer while using the Manual Trailer Brake the vehicle and trailer.
brakes (a CHECK TRAILER Apply Lever, the trailer output power
WIRING message will also be will be the greater of the two.
displayed on the DIC) The trailer's and the vehicle's brake
. There is a fault in the ITBC lamps will come on when either
system (a SERVICE TRAILER vehicle braking or manual trailer
BRAKE SYSTEM message will brakes are applied.
also be displayed in the DIC)
Use the following procedure to

. In the Trailer Output display 6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just
correctly adjust Trailer Gain for on the DIC, “- - - - - -” will below the point of trailer wheel
each towing condition: disappear if there is no lock-up, indicated by trailer
error present. Connecting wheel squeal or tire smoke
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are a trailer without electric
in proper working condition. when a trailer wheel locks.
brakes will not clear the
2. Connect a properly loaded six dashed lines. Trailer wheel lock-up may not
trailer to the vehicle and make occur if towing a heavily loaded
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using trailer. In this case, adjust the
all necessary mechanical the gain adjustment (+ / -)
and electrical connections. Trailer Gain to the highest
buttons on the Trailer Brake allowable setting for the towing
See Vehicle Load Limits on Control Panel.
page 9‑25 for more information. condition.
5. Drive the vehicle with the 7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time
3. After the electrical connection is trailer attached on a level road
made to a trailer equipped with vehicle loading, trailer loading or
surface representative of the road surface conditions change
electric brakes: towing condition and free of or if trailer wheel lock-up is
. A TRAILER CONNECTED traffic at about 32 to 40 km/h noticed at any time while towing.
message will be briefly (20 to 25 mph) and fully apply
displayed on the DIC. the Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Lever.
. The Trailer Brake Display
Page will appear on the Adjusting trailer gain at speeds
DIC showing TRAILER lower than 32 to 40 km/h
GAIN and TRAILER (20 to 25 mph) may result
OUTPUT. in an incorrect gain setting.
Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages If the disconnect occurs while To determine if the electrical
In addition to displaying TRAILER the vehicle is stationary, this fault is on the vehicle side or trailer
GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT message will automatically side of the trailer wiring harness
through the DIC, trailer connection turn off in about 30 seconds. connection, do the following:
and ITBC system status are This message will also turn off 1. Disconnect the trailer wiring
displayed on the DIC. if the driver acknowledges this harness from the vehicle.
message or if the trailer harness
TRAILER CONNECTED: This is re-connected. 2. Turn the ignition off.
message will be briefly displayed 3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the
when a trailer with electric brakes If the disconnect occurs
while the vehicle is moving, ignition back to RUN.
is first connected to the vehicle.
This message will automatically turn this message will continue 4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING
off in about 10 seconds. The driver until the ignition is turned off. message re-appears, the
can also acknowledge this message This message will also turn off electrical fault is on the
before it automatically turns off. if the driver acknowledges this vehicle side.
message or if the trailer harness
CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This is re-connected. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will be displayed if: message only re-appears when
2. There is an electrical fault in connecting the trailer wiring
1. The ITBC system first the wiring to the electric trailer harness to the vehicle, the
determines connection to a brakes. This message will electrical fault is on the
trailer with electric brakes and continue as long as there is trailer side.
then the trailer harness becomes an electrical fault in the trailer
disconnected from the vehicle. wiring. This message will
also turn off if the driver
acknowledges this message.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE An authorized GM dealer may without the driver pressing the brake
SYSTEM: This message will be be able to diagnose and repair pedal. If the vehicle is equipped with
displayed when there is a problem problems with the trailer. However, the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
with the ITBC system. If this any diagnosis and repair of the (ITBC) system, StabiliTrak may also
message persists over multiple trailer is not covered under the apply the trailer brakes. The TCS/
ignition cycles, there is a problem vehicle warranty. Please contact StabiliTrak warning light will flash on
with the ITBC system. Take the your trailer dealer for assistance the instrument panel cluster to notify
vehicle to an authorized GM dealer with trailer repairs and trailer the driver to reduce speed. If the
to have the ITBC system diagnosed warranty information. trailer continues to sway, StabiliTrak
and repaired. will reduce engine torque to help
If either the CHECK TRAILER Trailer Sway slow the vehicle.
WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER Control (TSC) Adding non‐dealer accessories can
BRAKE SYSTEM message is affect the vehicle's performance.
displayed while driving the vehicle, Trailer Sway Control (TSC) See Accessories and Modifications
power is no longer available 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with on page 10‑3 for more information.
to the trailer brakes. When traffic StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway
conditions allow, carefully pull the Control (TSC) feature. If the vehicle
vehicle over to the side of the road is towing a trailer and the system
and turn the ignition off. Check the detects that the trailer is swaying,
wiring connection to the trailer and the vehicle's brakes are applied
turn the ignition back on. If either of
these messages continues, either
the vehicle or trailer needs service.
Conversions and Adding a Snow Plow or Some vehicles are built with a
special snow plow prep package,
Add-Ons Similar Equipment called RPO VYU. If your vehicle
Before installing a snow plow on the has this option, you can add a
Add-On Electrical vehicle, here are some things you plow to it, provided certain weights,
need to know: such as the weights on the vehicle's
Equipment axles and the Gross Vehicle
Notice: If your vehicle does
Notice: Do not add anything Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.
not have the snow plow prep
electrical to the vehicle unless The plow the vehicle can carry
package, adding a plow can
you check with your dealer first. depends on many things, such as:
damage your vehicle, and the
Some electrical equipment can
repairs would not be covered by . The options the vehicle came
damage the vehicle and the
warranty. Unless your vehicle was with, and the weight of those
damage would not be covered
built to carry a snow plow, do not options.
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add one to your vehicle. If your
add-on electrical equipment can . The weight and number of
vehicle has the snow plow prep
keep other components from passengers you intend to carry.
package, called RPO VYU, then
working as they should.
the payload your vehicle can . The weight of items added to
Add-on equipment can drain the carry will be reduced when a the vehicle, like a tool box or
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle snow plow is installed. Your truck cap.
is not operating. vehicle can be damaged if either
the front or rear axle ratings or
. The total weight of any
The vehicle has an airbag system. additional cargo you intend
Before attempting to add anything the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
are exceeded. to carry.
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑46 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑46.
Say, for example, you have a 318 kg

. Follow the snow fuel and passengers. Basically,
(700 lb) snow plow. The total weight plow manufacturer's it is the amount of weight that can
of all occupants and cargo inside recommendations regarding be added to the front axle before
the cab should not exceed 135 kg rear ballast. Rear ballast may reaching the front GAWR.
(300 lb). This means that you may be required to ensure a proper
front and rear weight distribution The front axle reserve capacity
only be able to carry one passenger. for the vehicle can be found
But, even this may be too much ratio, even though the actual
weight at the front axle may be in the lower right corner of the
if you have got other equipment Certification/Tire label, as shown.
already adding to the weight of less than the front axle rating.
the vehicle. . The snow plow manufacturer
Here are some guidelines for safely or installer can assist you in
carrying a snow plow on the vehicle: determining the amount of rear
ballast required, to help make
. Make sure the weight on the sure the snowplow/vehicle
front and rear axles does not combination does not exceed
exceed the axle rating for each. the GVW rating, the front and
. For the front axle, if more cargo rear axle ratings, and the front
or passengers must be carried, and rear weight distribution ratio.
appropriate counter ballast must . The total vehicle must not
be installed rear of the rear axle. exceed the GVW rating.
Counter ballast must be properly
secured so it will not move Front axle reserve capacity is the United States
during driving. difference between the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front
axle weight of the vehicle with full
For example, adding a 318 kg

(700 lb) snow plow actually adds
more than 318 kg (700 lbs) to the
front axle. Using the formula, if the
snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of
the front axle and the wheel base is
305 cm (10 ft), then:
W = 318 kg (700 lb)
A = 122 cm (4 ft)
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. =
(700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 445 kg (980 lbs)
Canada (W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight So, if the front axle reserve capacity
In order to calculate the amount of the accessory is adding to the is more than 445 kg (980 lbs), you
weight any front accessory, such as front axle. could add the snow plow without
a snow plow, is adding to the front Where: exceeding the front GAWR.
axle, use the following formula: W = Weight of added accessory You can add heavier equipment
A = Distance that the accessory on the front of the vehicle if you
is in front of the front axle compensate for it by carrying fewer
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase passengers, less cargo, or by
positioning cargo toward the rear.
This has the effect of reducing the Total vehicle reserve capacity is the
load on the front. However, the front WARNING (Continued) difference between the GVWR and
GAWR, rear GAWR, and the Gross the weight of the truck with full fuel
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must always follow the snow plow and passengers. It is the amount of
never be exceeded. manufacturer or installer's weight that can be added to the
recommendation for rear ballast vehicle before reaching the GVWR.
{ WARNING to ensure a proper front and rear
weight distribution ratio, even
Keep in mind that reserve capacity
numbers are intended as a guide
On some vehicles that have though the actual front weight when selecting the amount of
certain front mounted equipment, may be less than the front equipment or cargo the truck can
such as a snow plow, it may be GAWR, and the total vehicle carry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,
possible to load the front axle to weight is less than the gross rear, or total weight, go to a weigh
the front gross axle weight rating vehicle weight rating (GVWR). station and weigh the vehicle.
(GAWR) but not have enough Maintaining a proper front and Your dealer can also help with this.
weight on the rear axle to have rear weight distribution ratio is The total vehicle reserve capacity
proper braking performance. necessary to provide proper for the vehicle can be found
If your brakes can not work braking performance. in the lower right corner of the
properly, you could have a crash. Certification/Tire label as shown
To help your brakes work properly previously.
when a snow plow is installed, See your dealer for additional
(Continued) advice and information about
using a snow plow on the vehicle.
Also, see Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑25.
Emergency Roof Lamp

Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow
plow prep package also have an
emergency roof lamp provision
package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the
emergency roof lamp is provided
above the overhead console. See
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on
page 6‑7 for switch location.
Pickup Conversion to
Chassis Cab
We are aware that some vehicle
owners might consider having
the pickup box removed and a
commercial or recreational body
installed. Owners should be aware
that, as manufactured, there are
differences between a chassis cab
and a pickup with the box removed
which could affect vehicle safety.
The components necessary to adapt
a pickup to permit its safe use with
a specialized body should be
installed by the body builder.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-25

Vehicle Care Overheated Engine
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Protection Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
General Information Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Pick-Up Box Identification
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-29 and Fender Marker
California Proposition Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Taillamps (Chassis Cab
California Perchlorate Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Accessories and Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Vehicle Checks Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Center High-Mounted
Doing Your Own Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-38 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-39 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Automatic Transmission Shift License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Compartment Lock Control Function Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Ignition Transmission Lock Electrical System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Electrical System
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11
Park Brake and P (Park) Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Automatic Transmission
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-40 Fuses and Circuit
Fluid (4-Speed
Wiper Blade Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Engine Compartment Fuse
Automatic Transmission
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-41 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Fluid (6-Speed
Instrument Panel Fuse
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Headlamp Aiming Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-19 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Uniform Tire Quality General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-58 Wheel Alignment and Tire For service and parts needs,
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 visit your dealer. You will receive
Tire Terminology and Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-82 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 and supported service people.
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86 these marks:
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-97
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Jump Starting
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Towing
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-103
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Recreational Vehicle
Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Appearance Care
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
Different Size Tires and Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition Accessories and covered under the terms of the

vehicle warranty and may affect
65 Warning Modifications remaining warranty coverage for
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories affected parts.
one, contain and/or emit chemicals to the vehicle can affect vehicle GM Accessories are designed to
known to the State of California to performance and safety, including complement and function with other
cause cancer and birth defects or such things as airbags, braking, systems on the vehicle. Your GM
other reproductive harm. Engine stability, ride and handling, dealer can accessorize the vehicle
exhaust, many parts and systems, emissions systems, aerodynamics, using genuine GM Accessories.
many fluids, and some component durability, and electronic systems When you go to your GM dealer
wear by-products contain and/or like antilock brakes, traction control, and ask for GM Accessories,
emit these chemicals. and stability control. Some of these you will know that GM-trained and
accessories could even cause supported service technicians will
California Perchlorate malfunction or damage not covered perform the work using genuine
by the vehicle warranty.
Materials Requirements GM Accessories.
Damage to vehicle components Also, see Adding Equipment to
Certain types of automotive
resulting from the installation or use the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
applications, such as airbag
of non‐GM certified parts, including page 3‑46.
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
control module modifications, is not
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks WARNING (Continued)

This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper Check on page 3‑48.
Service Work nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and Keep a record with all parts receipts
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see English fasteners can be and list the mileage and the date
the hybrid supplement for more easily confused. If the wrong of any service work performed.
information. See Maintenance Records on
fasteners are used, parts
page 11‑12.
can later break or fall off.
{ WARNING You could be hurt.
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you If doing some of your own service
try to do service work on a vehicle work, use the proper service
without knowing enough about it. manual. It tells you much more
.
about how to service the vehicle
Be sure you have sufficient than this manual can. To order the
knowledge, experience, proper service manual, see Service
the proper replacement Publications Ordering Information
parts, and tools before on page 13‑15.
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood 3. Push the secondary hood

release to the right.
To open the hood:
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then bring the hood from full
open to within 152 mm (6 in)
from the closed position, pause,
and push the front center of the
1. Pull the handle with this symbol hood with a swift, firm motion to
on it. It is located inside the fully close the hood.
vehicle to the left of the brake
pedal. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle
and locate the secondary hood
release. This is located under
the hood, near the center of
the grille.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
5.3 L V8 Engine Shown (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine, 6.0 L V8 Engine, and 6.2 L V8 Engine Similar)
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Engine Oil

page 10‑19. View). See “Checking Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on For diesel engine vehicles, see
B. Coolant Surge Tank and “Engine Oil” in the Duramax Diesel
Pressure Cap. See Cooling page 10‑7.
Supplement.
System on page 10‑20. I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on To ensure proper engine
C. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump performance and long life, careful
Starting on page 10‑98. page 10‑20.
attention must be paid to engine
D. Battery on page 10‑34. J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. oil. Following these simple, but
See Power Steering Fluid on important steps will help protect
E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal page 10‑29. your investment:
(Out of View). See Jump
Starting on page 10‑98. K. Brake Master Cylinder . Always use engine oil approved
Reservoir. See Brake Fluid on to the proper specification and
F. Automatic Transmission page 10‑32. of the proper viscosity grade.
Dipstick (Out of View).
L. Engine Compartment Fuse See “Selecting the Right Engine
See “Checking the Fluid Level” Oil” in this section.
under Automatic Transmission Block on page 10‑50.
Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) M. Windshield Washer Fluid . Check the engine oil level
on page 10‑13 or Automatic Reservoir. See “Adding Washer regularly and maintain the
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Fluid” under Washer Fluid on proper oil level. See “Checking
Transmission) on page 10‑16. page 10‑29. Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When If the vehicle has a diesel engine
to Add Engine Oil” under and/or an Allison Transmission, see . Change the engine oil at the
Engine Oil on page 10‑7. the Duramax Diesel Supplement. appropriate time. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑11.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much
oil. Oil levels above or below
It is a good idea to check the
the acceptable operating range
engine oil level at each fuel fill.
shown on the dipstick are harmful
In order to get an accurate reading,
to the engine. If you find that
the vehicle must be on level ground.
you have an oil level above the
The engine oil dipstick handle
operating range, i.e., the engine
is a yellow loop. See Engine
has so much oil that the oil level
Compartment Overview on
gets above the cross-hatched
page 10‑6 for the location If the oil is below the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
of the engine oil dipstick. area at the tip of the dipstick, add operating range, the engine
Obtaining an accurate oil level 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended could be damaged. You should
reading is essential: oil and then recheck the level. drain out the excess oil or limit
See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” driving of the vehicle and seek a
1. If the engine has been running in this section for an explanation of
recently, turn off the engine and service professional to remove
what kind of oil to use. For engine the excess amount of oil.
allow several minutes for the oil oil crankcase capacity, see
to drain back into the oil pan. Capacities and Specifications on See Engine Compartment Overview
Checking the oil level too soon page 12‑2. on page 10‑6 for the location of the
after engine shutoff will not engine oil fill cap.
provide an accurate oil level
Add enough oil to put the level
reading.
somewhere in the proper operating
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean range. Push the dipstick all the way
it with a paper towel or cloth, back in when through.
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
Vehicle Care 10-9
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Failure to use the recommended

engine oil or equivalent can
Selecting the right engine oil
result in engine damage not
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
If you are unsure whether the
Specification oil is approved to the dexos
specification, ask your service
Use and ask for engine oils with This vehicle was filled at the factory provider.
the dexos™ certification mark. with dexos‐approved engine oil.
Oils meeting the requirements Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
Notice: Use only engine oil dexos is unavailable: In the event
of the vehicle should have the
that is approved to the dexos that dexos‐approved engine oil is
dexos certification mark on the
specification or an equivalent not available at an oil change or
container. This certification mark
engine oil of the appropriate for maintaining proper oil level,
indicates that the oil has been
viscosity grade. Engine oils you may use substitute engine oil
approved to the dexos specification.
approved to the dexos displaying the API Starburst symbol
specification will show the and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
dexos symbol on the container.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Use of oils that do not meet the Cold Temperature Operation: In an

dexos specification, however, may area of extreme cold, where the
result in reduced performance under temperature falls below −29°C
certain circumstances. (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil
should be used. An oil of this
Viscosity Grade viscosity grade will provide easier
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity cold starting for the engine at
grade for the vehicle. Do not extremely low temperatures.
use other viscosity oils such as When selecting an oil of the
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50. appropriate viscosity grade, be
sure to always select an oil that
meets the required specification,
dexos. See “Specification” earlier
Vehicle Care 10-11
Engine Oil Additives/Engine What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
Oil Flushes Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
Do not add anything to the oil. elements that can be unhealthy for
The recommended oils with the your skin and could even cause This vehicle has a computer system
dexos specification and displaying cancer. Do not let used oil stay on that indicates when to change the
the dexos certification mark are all your skin for very long. Clean your engine oil and filter. This is based
that is needed for good performance skin and nails with soap and water, on engine revolutions and engine
and engine protection. or a good hand cleaner. Wash or temperature, and not on mileage.
properly dispose of clothing or rags Based on driving conditions, the
Engine oil system flushes are not mileage at which an oil change is
containing used engine oil. See the
recommended and could cause indicated can vary considerably.
manufacturer's warnings about the
engine damage not covered by For the oil life system to work
use and disposal of oil products.
the vehicle warranty. properly, the system must be reset
Used oil can be a threat to the
every time the oil is changed.
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the On some vehicles, when the system
oil from the filter before disposal. has calculated that oil life has been
Never dispose of oil by putting it diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE
in the trash or pouring it on the OIL SOON message comes on
ground, into sewers, or into streams to indicate that an oil change is
or bodies of water. Recycle it by necessary. See Engine Oil
taking it to a place that collects Messages on page 5‑45. Change
used oil. the oil as soon as possible within
the next 1 000 km (600 miles).
10-12 Vehicle Care
It is possible that, if driving under How to Reset the Engine Oil On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life
the best conditions, the oil life Life System System can be reset as follows:
system might indicate that an oil 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
change is not necessary for up Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the the engine off.
to a year. The engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once system can calculate the next 2. Fully press the accelerator
a year and, at this time, the engine oil change. Always reset the pedal slowly three times within
system must be reset. For vehicles engine oil life to 100% after every five seconds.
without the CHANGE ENGINE OIL oil change. It will not reset itself.
To reset the system on most 3. Display the OIL LIFE
SOON message, an oil change REMAINING on the DIC.
is needed when the OIL LIFE vehicles:
If the display shows 100%,
REMAINING percentage is near 1. Display the OIL LIFE the system is reset. See Driver
0%. Your dealer has trained service REMAINING on the DIC. Information Center (DIC) on
people who will perform this work If the vehicle does not have page 5‑33.
and reset the system. It is also DIC buttons, the vehicle must
important to check the oil regularly be in P (Park) to access this If the vehicle has a CHANGE
over the course of an oil drain display. See Driver Information ENGINE OIL SOON message
interval and keep it at the proper Center (DIC) on page 5‑33. and it comes back on when
level. the vehicle is started and/or the
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET OIL LIFE REMAINING is near 0%,
If the system is ever reset button on the DIC, or the the engine oil life system has not
accidentally, the oil must be trip odometer reset stem been reset. Repeat the procedure.
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) if the vehicle does not have
since the last oil change. DIC buttons, for more than
Remember to reset the oil life five seconds. The oil life will
system whenever the oil is changed. change to 100%.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Automatic How to Check Automatic Wait at least 30 minutes before

Transmission Fluid checking the transmission fluid
Transmission Fluid level if you have been driving:
(4-Speed Transmission) Because this operation can be a
little difficult, it may be best to have . When outside temperatures are
When to Check and Change this done at the dealer service above 32°C (90°F).
Automatic Transmission Fluid department. . At high speed for quite a while.
A good time to check the automatic If not taken to the dealer, be sure to . In heavy traffic — especially in
transmission fluid level is when the follow all the instructions here or a hot weather.
engine oil is changed. false reading on the dipstick could
result.
. While pulling a trailer.
Change the fluid and filter at
the intervals listed in Scheduled Notice: Too much or too To get the right reading, the fluid
Maintenance on page 11‑2 and be little fluid can damage the should be at normal operating
sure to use the transmission fluid transmission. Too much can temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
listed in Recommended Fluids and mean that some of the fluid could (180°F to 200°F).
Lubricants on page 11‑8. come out and fall on hot engine Get the vehicle warmed up by
parts or exhaust system parts, driving about 24 km (15 miles) when
starting a fire. Too little fluid outside temperatures are above
could cause the transmission 10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C
to overheat. Be sure to get an (50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)
accurate reading if checking until the engine temperature gauge
the transmission fluid. moves and then remains steady for
10 minutes.
10-14 Vehicle Care
A cold fluid check can be made Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the
after the vehicle has been sitting Prepare the vehicle as follows: engine, follow these steps:
for eight hours or more with the
engine off, but this is used only 1. Park the vehicle on a level
as a reference. Let the engine place. Keep the engine running.
run at idle for five minutes if outside 2. With the parking brake applied,
temperatures are 10°C (50°F) place the shift lever in P (Park).
or more. If it is colder than 10°C
(50°F), the engine may have to idle 3. With your foot on the brake
longer. Should the fluid level be low pedal, move the shift lever 1. Locate the transmission dipstick
during this cold check, the fluid must through each gear range, handle with this graphic which is
be checked when hot before adding pausing for about three seconds located at the rear of the engine
fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give in each range. Then, position compartment, on the passenger
you a more accurate reading of the the shift lever in P (Park). side of the vehicle.
fluid level. 4. Let the engine run at idle for See Engine Compartment
three minutes or more. Overview on page 10‑6 for
more information on location.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean rag or paper towel.
3. Push it back in all the way, wait
three seconds and then pull it
back out again.
Vehicle Care 10-15
Consistency of Readings Notice: Use of the incorrect

Always check the fluid level at least automatic transmission fluid
twice using the procedure described may damage the vehicle, and the
previously. Consistency (repeatable damages may not be covered by
readings) is important to maintaining the vehicle warranty. Always use
proper fluid level. If readings are still the automatic transmission fluid
inconsistent, contact the dealer. listed in Recommended Fluids
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and Lubricants on page 11‑8.
and read the lower level. The How to Add Automatic
fluid level must be in the COLD . After adding fluid, recheck the
area, below the cross-hatched Transmission Fluid fluid level as described under
area, for a cold check or in the Refer to Recommended Fluids “How to Check Automatic
HOT or cross-hatched area for a and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to Transmission Fluid,” earlier
hot check. Be sure to keep the determine what kind of transmission in this section.
dipstick pointed down to get an fluid to use. . When the correct fluid level
accurate reading. Using a funnel, add fluid down is obtained, push the dipstick
5. If the fluid level is in the the transmission dipstick tube only back in all the way; then flip the
acceptable range, push the after checking the transmission handle down to lock the dipstick
dipstick back in all the way; fluid while it is hot. A cold check in place.
then flip the handle down to is used only as a reference. If the
lock the dipstick in place. fluid level is low, add only enough
of the proper fluid to bring the
level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It does not take much fluid,
generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint).
Do not overfill.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Automatic Notice: Use of the incorrect How to Check Automatic

automatic transmission fluid Transmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid may damage the vehicle, and the
(6-Speed Transmission) damages may not be covered by Notice: Too much or too
the vehicle warranty. Always use little fluid can damage the
When to Check and Change the automatic transmission fluid transmission. Too much can
Automatic Transmission Fluid listed in Recommended Fluids mean that some of the fluid could
and Lubricants on page 11‑8. come out and fall on hot engine
It is usually not necessary to
parts or exhaust system parts,
check the transmission fluid level. Change the fluid and filter starting a fire. Too little fluid
The only reason for fluid loss is a at the scheduled maintenance could cause the transmission
transmission leak or overheated intervals listed in Scheduled to overheat. Be sure to get an
transmission. If a small leak is Maintenance on page 11‑2. accurate reading if checking
suspected, then use the following Be sure to use the transmission the transmission fluid.
checking procedures to check the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids
fluid level. However, if there is a and Lubricants on page 11‑8. Before checking the fluid level,
large leak, then it may be necessary prepare the vehicle as follows:
to have the vehicle towed to a 1. Start the engine and park the
dealer service department and have vehicle on a level surface.
it repaired before driving the vehicle Keep the engine running.
further.
2. Apply the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (Park).
Vehicle Care 10-17
3. With your foot on the brake Cold Check Procedure

pedal, move the shift lever Use this procedure only as a
through each gear range, reference to determine if the
pausing for about three seconds transmission has enough fluid
in each range. Then, move the to be operated safely until a hot
shift lever back to P (Park). check procedure can be made. 1. Locate the transmission
4. Allow the engine to idle The hot check procedure is the dipstick at the rear of the engine
(500 – 800 rpm) for at least most accurate method to check the compartment, on the passenger
1 minute. Slowly release the fluid level. Perform the hot check side of the vehicle.
brake pedal. procedure at the first opportunity. See Engine Compartment
5. Keep the engine running and Use this cold check procedure Overview on page 10‑6 for
press the Trip/Fuel button or to check fluid level when the more information.
trip odometer reset stem until transmission temperature is
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
TRANS TEMP (Transmission between 27°C and 32°C
the dipstick and wipe it with a
Temperature) displays on the (80°F and 90°F).
clean rag or paper towel.
Driver Information Center (DIC).
3. Install the dipstick by pushing
6. Using the TRANS TEMP it back in all the way; wait
reading, determine and three seconds, and then pull
perform the appropriate check it back out again.
procedure. If the TRANS TEMP
4. Check both sides of the dipstick
reading is not within the required
and read the lower level. Repeat
temperature ranges, allow the
the check procedure to verify the
vehicle to cool, or operate the
reading.
vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature
is reached.
10-18 Vehicle Care
Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check the
transmission fluid level when the
transmission fluid temperature
is between 71°C and 93°C
(160°F and 200°F).
1. Locate the transmission
5. If the fluid level is below the The hot check is the most accurate dipstick at the rear of the engine
COLD check band, add only method to check the fluid level. compartment, on the passenger
enough fluid as necessary to The hot check should be performed side of the vehicle.
bring the level into the COLD at the first opportunity in order to
band. It does not take much verify the cold check. The fluid level See Engine Compartment
fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter rises as fluid temperature increases, Overview on page 10‑6 for
(1 Pint). Do not overfill. so it is important to ensure the more information.
6. Perform a hot check at transmission temperature is within 2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
the first opportunity after the range. the dipstick and wipe it with a
transmission reaches a normal clean rag or paper towel.
operating temperature between 3. Install the dipstick by pushing
71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F). it back in all the way; wait
7. If the fluid level is in the three seconds, and then pull
acceptable range, push the it back out again.
dipstick back in all the way, 4. Check both sides of the dipstick
then flip the handle down to and read the lower level. Repeat
lock the dipstick in place. the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Vehicle Care 10-19
Consistency of Readings When to Inspect the Engine Air

Always check the fluid level at least Cleaner/Filter
twice using the procedure described Inspect the air cleaner/filter at
previously. Consistency (repeatable the scheduled maintenance
readings) is important to maintaining intervals and replace it at the first
proper fluid level. If readings are still oil change after each 80 000 km
5. Safe operating level is within the inconsistent, contact the dealer. (50,000 mi) interval. See Scheduled
HOT cross hatch band on the Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
dipstick. If the fluid level is not Engine Air Cleaner/Filter information. If driving on dusty/dirty
within the HOT band, and the conditions, inspect the filter at each
transmission temperature is If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
engine oil change.
between 71°C and 93°C (160°F see “Pickup Models” under “Engine
and 200°F), add or drain fluid as Air Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramax® How to Inspect the Engine Air
necessary to bring the level into Diesel Supplement for the correct Cleaner/Filter
the HOT band. If the fluid level inspection and replacement
procedures. To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
is low, add only enough fluid remove the engine air cleaner/
to bring the level into the HOT See Engine Compartment Overview filter from the vehicle by following
band. It does not take much on page 10‑6 for the location of the Steps 1 through 6. When the engine
fluid, generally less than 0.5 L engine air cleaner/filter. air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly
(1 pint). Do not overfill. shake it to release loose dust and
6. If the fluid level is in the dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
acceptable range, push the remains covered with dirt, a new
dipstick back in all the way, filter is required. Never use
then flip the handle down to compressed air to clean the filter.
lock the dipstick in place.
10-20 Vehicle Care
Replacing the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter { WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air;
it helps to stop flames if the
engine backfires. Use caution
when working on the engine
and do not drive with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the housing. Cooling System
Take care to dislodge as little
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter dirt as possible. If the vehicle has the Duramax®
assembly. See Engine Diesel engine, see the Duramax®
Compartment Overview on 4. Clean the engine air Diesel Supplement for more
page 10‑6. cleaner/filter sealing surfaces information.
and the housing.
2. Loosen the four screws on the The cooling system allows the
cover of the housing and lift up 5. Inspect or replace the engine air engine to maintain the correct
the cover. cleaner/filter. working temperature.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten
the screws.
Vehicle Care 10-21
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

An electric engine cooling fan Do not run the engine if there is
can start even when the engine a leak. If you run the engine, it
is not running. To avoid injury, could lose all coolant. That could
always keep hands, clothing, cause an engine fire, and you
and tools away from any engine could be burned. Get any leak
cooling fan. fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than
5.3 L Engine Shown (4.3 L, 4.8 L,

{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
6.0 L and, 6.2 L Engines Similar) Heater and radiator hoses, and corrosion. In addition, the engine
other engine parts, can be very coolant could require changing
A. Coolant Surge Tank
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
B. Coolant Surge Tank you can be burned. or 24 months, whichever occurs
Pressure Cap first. Any repairs would not be
(Continued)
C. Engine Cooling Fan covered by the vehicle warranty.
(Out of View) Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL® engine { WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
coolant. This coolant is designed to This mixture:
Adding only plain water or some
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside
and other liquids, can boil before temperature
The following explains the cooling the proper coolant mixture will.
system and how to check and add
. Gives boiling protection
The coolant warning system is up to 129°C (265°F), engine
coolant when it is low. If there is a set for the proper coolant mixture.
problem with engine overheating, temperature
With plain water or the wrong
see Engine Overheating on mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and
page 10‑25. corrosion
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts
could catch fire and you or . Helps keep the proper engine
others could be burned. Use a temperature
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Notice: If extra inhibitors Checking Coolant

and/or additives are used in
The coolant surge tank is located
the vehicle cooling system,
in the engine compartment on the
the vehicle could be damaged.
passenger side of the vehicle.
Use only the proper mixture of
See Engine Compartment Overview
the engine coolant listed in this
on page 10‑6 for more information
manual for the cooling system.
on location.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑8 for more The vehicle must be on a level
information. surface when checking the coolant
level.
Never dispose of engine coolant
by putting it in the trash, pouring Check to see if coolant is visible
it on the ground, or into sewers, in the coolant surge tank. If the The coolant level should be at or
streams, or bodies of water. coolant inside the coolant surge above the FULL COLD mark. If it is
Have the coolant changed by an tank is boiling, do not do anything not, there may be a leak in the
authorized service center, familiar else until it cools down. If coolant is cooling system.
with legal requirements regarding visible but the coolant level is not at
used coolant disposal. This will help or above the FULL COLD mark, add
protect the environment and your a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
health. water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this
is done.
10-24 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the If no coolant is visible in the surge

Coolant Surge Tank for { WARNING tank, add coolant as follows:
Gasoline Engines An electric engine cooling fan
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, under the hood can start up even
see “Cooling System” in the when the engine is not running
Duramax Diesel Supplement for and can cause injury. Keep
the proper coolant fill procedure. hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
You can be burned if you spill system, including the coolant
coolant on hot engine parts. { WARNING surge tank pressure cap and
Coolant contains ethylene glycol upper radiator hose, is no
Steam and scalding liquids from a
and it will burn if the engine parts longer hot.
hot cooling system can blow out
are hot enough. Do not spill
and burn you badly. They are Turn the pressure cap slowly
coolant on a hot engine. counterclockwise about one full
under pressure, and if you turn
the coolant surge tank pressure turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for
Notice: This vehicle has a cap — even a little — they can that to stop. A hiss means there
specific coolant fill procedure. come out at high speed. Never is still some pressure left.
Failure to follow this procedure turn the cap when the cooling 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
could cause the engine to system, including the coolant slowly, and remove it.
overheat and be severely surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
damaged. Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Vehicle Care 10-25
By this time, the coolant level Engine Overheating

inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is If the vehicle has the Duramax®
lower, add more of the proper Diesel engine, see the Duramax
mixture to the coolant surge Diesel Supplement for more
tank until the level reaches the information.
FULL COLD mark. The vehicle has several indicators
5. Replace the pressure cap. to warn of engine overheating.
Be sure the pressure cap is There is a coolant temperature
hand-tight and fully seated. gauge on the vehicle's instrument
6. Verify coolant level after the panel. See Engine Coolant
engine is shut off and the Temperature Gauge on page 5‑17.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank coolant is cold. If necessary, In addition, there are ENGINE
with the proper mixture to the repeat coolant fill procedure OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
FULL COLD mark. Steps 1 through 6. ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
4. With the coolant surge tank Notice: If the pressure cap is ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS
pressure cap off, start the not tightly installed, coolant loss REDUCED messages in the Driver
engine and let it run until the and possible engine damage may Information Center (DIC) on the
engine coolant temperature occur. Be sure the cap is properly instrument panel. See Engine
gauge indicates approximately and tightly secured. Cooling System Messages on
90°C (195°F). page 5‑44 and Engine Power
Messages on page 5‑45.
10-26 Vehicle Care
If the decision is made not to lift the Notice: If the engine catches fire
hood when this warning appears, while driving with no coolant, the WARNING (Continued)
get service help right away. vehicle can be badly damaged.
See Roadside Assistance Program The costly repairs would not If you keep driving when the
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 be covered by the vehicle vehicles engine is overheated,
or Roadside Assistance Program warranty. See Overheated Engine the liquids in it can catch fire.
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. Protection Operating Mode on You or others could be badly
page 10‑28 for information on burned. Stop the engine if it
If the decision is made to lift the overheats, and get out of the
hood, make sure the vehicle is driving to a safe place in an
emergency. vehicle until the engine is cool.
parked on a level surface.
If Steam is Coming from the See Overheated Engine
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the Engine Compartment Protection Operating Mode on
engine is overheating, both fans page 10‑28 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
{ WARNING emergency.
and have the vehicle serviced. Steam from an overheated engine
Notice: Engine damage from can burn you badly, even if you
running your engine without just open the hood. Stay away
coolant is not covered by the from the engine if you see or
vehicle warranty. See Overheated hear steam coming from it.
Engine Protection Operating Turn it off and get everyone
Mode for information on driving away from the vehicle until it
to a safe place in an emergency. cools down. Wait until there
is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-27
If No Steam is Coming from If the ENGINE OVERHEATED Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
the Engine Compartment STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE vehicle distance from the vehicle in
The ENGINE OVERHEATED message appears with no sign of front. If the warning does not come
STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE steam, try this for a minute or so: back on, continue to drive normally.
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
message, along with a low coolant 1. Turn the air conditioning off. If the warning continues, pull
condition, can indicate a serious 2. Turn the heater on to the highest over, stop, and park the vehicle
problem. temperature and to the highest right away.
If there is an engine overheat fan speed. Open the windows If there is no sign of steam, idle
warning, but no steam is seen or as necessary. the engine for five minutes while
heard, the problem may not be too 3. If stopped in a traffic jam, apply parked. If the warning is still
serious. Sometimes the engine can the brake, shift to N (Neutral); displayed, turn off the engine until it
get a little too hot when the vehicle: otherwise, shift to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated
gear while driving — D (Drive) Engine Protection Operating Mode”
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day later in this section.
or 3 (Third).
. Stops after high-speed driving
If the temperature overheat gauge
. Idles for long periods in traffic is no longer in the overheat zone
. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing or an overheat warning no longer
on page 9‑95. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Overheated Engine Engine Fan This fan noise may also be heard
when starting the engine. It will go
Protection If the vehicle has a clutched engine away as the fan clutch partially
Operating Mode cooling fan, when the clutch is disengages.
engaged, the fan spins faster to
If an overheated engine condition provide more air to cool the engine. If the vehicle has electric cooling
exists and the ENGINE POWER IS In most everyday driving conditions, fans, the fans may be heard
REDUCED message displays, an the fan is spinning slower and spinning at low speed during
overheat protection mode which the clutch is not fully engaged. most everyday driving. The fans
alternates firing groups of cylinders This improves fuel economy and may turn off if no cooling is required.
helps to prevent engine damage. reduces fan noise. Under heavy Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
In this mode, a loss in power and vehicle loading, trailer towing, towing, high outside temperatures,
engine performance will be noticed. and/or high outside temperatures, or operation of the air conditioning
This operating mode allows the the fan speed increases as the system, the fans may change to
vehicle to be driven to a safe clutch more fully engages, so an high speed and an increase in fan
place in an emergency. Driving increase in fan noise may be heard. noise may be heard. This is normal
extended km (mi) and/or towing a This is normal and should not be and indicates that the cooling
trailer in the overheat protection mistaken as the transmission system is functioning properly.
mode should be avoided. slipping or making extra shifts. The fans will change to low speed
Notice: After driving in the It is merely the cooling system when additional cooling is no
overheated engine protection functioning properly. The fan will longer required.
operating mode, to avoid engine slow down when additional cooling
damage, allow the engine to cool is not required and the clutch
before attempting any repair. disengages.
The engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repair the cause
of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering What to Use

Fluid To determine what kind of fluid to
To check the power steering fluid: use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑8. Always
1. Turn the key off and let the
use the proper fluid.
engine compartment cool down.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
may damage the vehicle and the
reservoir clean.
damages may not be covered by
See Engine Compartment Overview 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the the vehicle's warranty. Always
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. dipstick with a clean rag. use the correct fluid listed in
When to Check Power Steering 4. Replace the cap and completely Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑8.
Fluid tighten it.
It is not necessary to regularly 5. Remove the cap again and look Washer Fluid
check power steering fluid unless at the fluid level on the dipstick.
there is a leak suspected in the The level should be at the What to Use
system or an unusual noise is FULL COLD mark. If necessary, When windshield washer fluid needs
heard. A fluid loss in this system add only enough fluid to bring the to be added, be sure to read the
could indicate a problem. Have the level up to the mark. manufacturer's instructions before
system inspected and repaired. use. Use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing in an
area where the temperature may
fall below freezing.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Adding Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes

The vehicle has a low washer fluid . When using concentrated This vehicle has front disc brakes
message on the DIC that comes washer fluid, follow the and could have rear drum brakes or
on when the washer fluid is low. manufacturer's instructions rear disc brakes.
The message is displayed for for adding water.
15 seconds at the start of each Disc brake pads have built-in wear
. Do not mix water with indicators that make a high-pitched
ignition cycle. When the WASHER ready-to-use washer fluid.
FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message warning sound when the brake pads
Water can cause the solution are worn and new pads are needed.
displays, washer fluid will need to to freeze and damage the
be added to the windshield washer The sound can come and go or
washer fluid tank and other be heard all the time the vehicle is
fluid reservoir. parts of the washer system. moving, except when applying the
Also, water does not clean brake pedal firmly.
as well as washer fluid.
. Fill the washer fluid tank
only three-quarters full
{ WARNING
when it is very cold. This The brake wear warning sound
allows for fluid expansion means that soon the brakes will
if freezing occurs, which not work well. That could lead to
Open the cap with the washer could damage the tank if a crash. When the brake wear
symbol on it. Add washer fluid it is completely full.
until the tank is full. See Engine warning sound is heard, have the
Compartment Overview on . Do not use engine coolant vehicle serviced.
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. (antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the Notice: Continuing to drive with
windshield washer system worn-out brake pads could result
and paint. in costly brake repair.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Some driving conditions or climates Drum brakes have an inspection Replacing Brake System Parts
can cause a brake squeal when hole to inspect lining wear during
The braking system on a vehicle is
the brakes are first applied or scheduled maintenance. When
complex. Its many parts have to be
lightly applied. This does not mean the front brake pads are replaced,
of top quality and work well together
something is wrong with the brakes. have the rear brakes inspected, too.
if the vehicle is to have really good
Properly torqued wheel nuts are Brake linings should always be braking. The vehicle was designed
necessary to help prevent brake replaced as complete axle sets. and tested with top-quality brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated, parts. When parts of the braking
inspect brake pads for wear and Brake Pedal Travel system are replaced, be sure to get
evenly tighten wheel nuts in See your dealer if the brake pedal new, approved replacement parts.
the proper sequence to torque does not return to normal height, If this is not done, the brakes might
specifications in Capacities and or if there is a rapid increase in not work properly. For example,
Specifications on page 12‑2. pedal travel. This could be a installing disc brake pads that
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, sign that brake service might are wrong for the vehicle, can
they do not have wear indicators, be required. change the balance between the
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is front and rear brakes — for the
Brake Adjustment worse. The braking performance
heard, have the rear brake linings
inspected immediately. Rear brake Every time the brakes are applied, expected can change in many
drums should be removed and with or without the vehicle moving, other ways if the wrong replacement
inspected each time the tires are the brakes adjust for wear. brake parts are installed.
removed for rotation or changing.
10-32 Vehicle Care

. A fluid leak in the brake
Brake Fluid hydraulic system can also WARNING (Continued)
cause a low fluid level. Have
the brake hydraulic system fixed, and the vehicle could be
since a leak means that sooner damaged. Add brake fluid only
or later the brakes will not when work is done on the brake
work well. hydraulic system. See “Checking
Do not top off the brake fluid. Brake Fluid” in this section.
Adding fluid does not correct a
The brake master cylinder reservoir
leak. If fluid is added when the When the brake fluid falls to a low
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid.
linings are worn, there will be too level, the brake warning light comes
See Engine Compartment Overview
much fluid when new brake linings on. See Brake System Warning
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
are installed. Add or remove brake Light on page 5‑27.
reservoir.
fluid, as necessary, only when work
There are only two reasons why is done on the brake hydraulic Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
the brake fluid level in the reservoir system. to determine when to check the
might go down: brake fluid. See Scheduled
. The brake fluid level goes down { WARNING Maintenance on page 11‑2.
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are If too much brake fluid is added,
installed, the fluid level goes it can spill on the engine and
back up. burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned,
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-33
Checking Brake Fluid After work is done on the brake Notice:

hydraulic system, make sure the . Using the wrong fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the
level is above the MIN but not can badly damage brake
brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
over the MAX mark. hydraulic system parts.
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6. What to Add For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil,
Use only new DOT 3 brake such as engine oil, in the
fluid from a sealed container. brake hydraulic system can
See Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic
Lubricants on page 11‑8. system parts so badly that
Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced.
reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in
the cap before removing it. the wrong kind of fluid.
This helps keep dirt from . If brake fluid is spilled on the
entering the reservoir. vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
{ WARNING damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
With the wrong kind of fluid in vehicle. If you do, wash it
The fluid level should be above the brake hydraulic system,
MIN. If it is not, have the brake off immediately.
the brakes might not work well.
hydraulic system checked to see
This could cause a crash. Always
if there is a leak.
use the proper brake fluid.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Battery Vehicle Storage Four-Wheel Drive

If the vehicle is a Hybrid, see Transfer Case
the Hybrid Supplement for more { WARNING
information. When to Check Lubricant
Batteries have acid that can burn
This vehicle has a maintenance free you and gas that can explode. Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
battery (or batteries). Refer to the You can be badly hurt if you are page 11‑2 to determine when to
replacement number on the original not careful. See Jump Starting on check the lubricant.
battery label when a new battery is page 10‑98 for tips on working How to Check Lubricant
needed. See Engine Compartment around a battery without
Overview on page 10‑6 for battery getting hurt.
location.
{ DANGER Infrequent Usage: Remove the

black, negative (−) cable from the
Battery posts, terminals, and battery to keep the battery from
related accessories contain lead running down.
and lead compounds, chemicals Extended Storage: Remove the
known to the State of California black, negative (−) cable from the
to cause cancer and reproductive battery or use a battery trickle
harm. Wash hands after handling. charger.
Electric Shift Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
Vehicle Care 10-35
If the level is below the bottom of

the fill plug hole, located on the
transfer case, some lubricant will
need to be added. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the fill plug hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 to determine how often to
change the lubricant.
Manual Shift Transfer Case Active Transfer Case What to Use
A. Fill Plug A. Fill Plug Refer to Recommended Fluids
B. Drain Plug B. Drain Plug and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to
determine what kind of lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the to use.
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Front Axle
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly
check front axle fluid unless a leak
is suspected, or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and
repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the 1500 Series All Except 1500 Series
vehicle should be on a level
A. Fill Plug A. Fill Plug
surface.
B. Drain Plug B. Drain Plug
. When the differential is cold,
add enough lubricant to raise the
level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm
(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.
. When the differential is at
operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise
the level to the bottom of the fill
plug hole.
Vehicle Care 10-37
What to Use normal because fluid has traveled

Refer to Recommended Fluids out along the axle tubes and has
and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to not drained back to the sump
determine what kind of lubricant area. Therefore, a reading taken
to use. five minutes after the vehicle has
been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that
Rear Axle has been stationary for an hour or
When to Check Lubricant two. Remember that the rear axle
assembly must be supported to
It is not necessary to regularly get a true reading.
check rear axle fluid unless a leak
is suspected or an unusual noise How to Check Lubricant
is heard. A fluid loss could indicate All Other Series and Engines
a problem. Have it inspected and To get an accurate reading, the
repaired. vehicle should be on a level
All axle assemblies are filled by surface.
volume of fluid during production. . For all 4.3 L, 4.8 L and 5.3 L
They are not filled to reach a 1500 Series applications,
certain level. When checking the the proper level is 1.0 mm to
fluid level on any axle, variations 19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in)
in the readings can be caused by below the bottom of the fill
factory fill differences between the hole, located on the rear axle.
minimum and the maximum fluid Add only enough fluid to reach
volume. Also, if a vehicle has just the proper level.
been driven before checking the 2500HD with 6.0 L
fluid level, it may appear lower than
10-38 Vehicle Care

. For all 6.0 L and 6.2 L 1500 What to Use These standards apply only to
Series applications, the proper vehicles sold in the United States.
level is from 15 mm to 40 mm Refer to Recommended Fluids
(0.6 in to 1.6 in) below the and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to Federal law prohibits the following
bottom of the fill plug hole, determine what kind of lubricant acts or the causing thereof:
located on the rear axle. to use. 1. The removal or rendering
Add only enough fluid to inoperative by any person,
reach the proper level. Noise Control System other than for purposes
. For all 6.0 L 2500HD Series The following information relates of maintenance, repair or
applications, the proper level is to compliance with federal noise replacement, of any device or
from 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in) emission standards for vehicles element of design incorporated
below the bottom of the fill plug with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating into any new vehicle for the
hole, located on the rear axle. (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg purpose of noise control, prior to
Add only enough fluid to reach (10,000 lbs). The Scheduled its sale or delivery to the ultimate
the proper level. Maintenance on page 11‑2 provides purchaser or while it is in use; or
. For all 6.6 L Duramax Diesel information on maintaining the 2. The use of the vehicle after
2500HD Series applications and noise control system to minimize such device or element of
all 3500 Series applications, the degradation of the noise emission design has been removed or
proper level is from 17 mm to control system during the life of your rendered inoperative by any
21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) below vehicle. The noise control system person.
the bottom of the fill plug hole, warranty is given in your warranty
located on the rear axle. Add booklet.
only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.
Vehicle Care 10-39
Among those acts presumed to Exhaust: 2. Firmly apply both the parking
constitute tampering are the acts . Removal of the muffler and/or brake and the regular brake.
listed below. resonator. See Parking Brake on
page 9‑69.
Insulation: . Removal of the exhaust pipes
and exhaust pipe clamps. Do not use the accelerator
Removal of the noise shields or any pedal, and be ready to turn off
underhood insulation. the engine immediately if it
Engine:
Starter Switch Check starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
Removal or rendering engine speed
governor, if the vehicle has one,
{ WARNING gear. The vehicle should start
inoperative so as to allow engine When you are doing this only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
speed to exceed manufacturer inspection, the vehicle could If the vehicle starts in any other
specifications. move suddenly. If the vehicle position, contact your dealer for
service.
Fan and Drive: moves, you or others could be
injured.
. Removal of fan clutch, if the
vehicle has one, or rendering
clutch inoperative. 1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
. Removal of the fan shroud, if the
around the vehicle.
vehicle has one.
Air Intake:
. Removal of the air cleaner
silencer.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park)
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { WARNING
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
When you are doing this your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move.
inspection, the vehicle could You or others could be injured
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
moves, you or others could be Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
injured.
While parked, and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake set, try to turn the ignition brake at once should the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, be to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move.
sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should
be parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the
2. Firmly apply the parking shift lever is in P (Park).
brake. See Parking Brake on
page 9‑69.
. The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle Contact your dealer if service is
begins to move. required.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement

vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set Windshield wiper blades should
the parking brake. be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
. To check the parking brake's page 11‑2 for more information
holding ability: With the engine on wiper blade inspection.
running and the transmission in 3. Install the new blade onto the
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot Replacement blades come in
arm connector and make sure
pressure from the regular brake different types and are removed
the grooved areas are fully set
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is in different ways. To remove the
in the locked position.
held by the parking brake only. wiper blade:
For the proper type and size, see
. To check the P (Park) 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
mechanism's holding ability: connector away from the
page 11‑11.
With the engine running, shift windshield.
to P (Park). Then release the Glass Replacement
parking brake followed by the
regular brake. If the windshield or front side
glass must be replaced, see your
Contact your dealer if service is dealer to determine the correct
required. replacement glass.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on

each side of the blade, and turn
the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should: Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
. Be placed so the headlamps
The vehicle has a visual optical The high-beam headlamps will be
are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a
headlamp aiming system. The aim correctly aimed if the low-beam
light‐colored wall.
of the headlamps has been preset headlamps are aimed properly.
. Have all four tires on a level
at the factory and should need no
surface which is level all the To adjust the vertical aim:
further adjustment.
way to the wall. 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
However, if the vehicle is damaged
. Be placed so it is perpendicular page 10‑5.
in a crash, the aim of the headlamps
may be affected and adjustment to the wall.
may be necessary. . Not have any snow, ice, or mud
If oncoming vehicles flash their high on it.
beams at you, this may mean the . Be fully assembled and all other
vertical aim of the headlamps needs work stopped while headlamp
to be adjusted. aiming is being performed.
It is recommended that the vehicle . Be loaded with a full tank of
be taken to the dealer for service if fuel and one person or 75 kg
the headlamps need to be adjusted. (160 lbs) sitting on the
It is possible, however, to re-aim the driver seat.
headlamps as described.
. Have the tires properly inflated.
. Have the spare tire in its proper 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
location in the vehicle. the low‐beam headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp.
Vehicle Care 10-43
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp

to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent
4. At a wall, measure from the in front of the headlamp not
ground upward (A) to the being adjusted. This allows
recorded distance from only the beam of light from the
Step 3 and mark it. headlamp being adjusted to be 7. Locate the vertical headlamp
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) seen on the flat surface. aiming screws, which are under
on the wall the width of the the hood near each headlamp
vehicle at the height of the assembly.
mark in Step 4. The adjustment screw can be
turned with an E8 Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam
is aimed to the horizontal
tape line. Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
10-44 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement Headlamps

For the proper type of replacement To replace one of these bulbs:
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑48. page 10‑5
For any bulb‐changing procedure 2. If you are replacing the bulb
not listed in this section, contact on the passenger side, remove
your dealer. the Engine Air Cleaner cover.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
9. Make sure that the light from the Halogen Bulbs page 10‑19 for more information.
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal 3. Reach in and access the bulb
tape line. The lamp on the { WARNING sockets from inside the engine
left (A) shows the correct compartment.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
headlamp aim. The lamp on
the right (B) shows the incorrect gas inside and can burst if you
headlamp aim. drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for to read and follow the instructions
the opposite headlamp. on the bulb package.
Vehicle Care 10-45
4. Turn the bulb socket Pick-Up Box Identification

counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly
and Fender Marker
and pull it straight out. Lamps
5. Unplug the electrical connector The pick-up box identification lamps
from the old bulb by releasing are LEDs. For replacement of the
the clips on the bulb socket. LED lighting assembly contact your
dealer.
6. Replace it with a new bulb
socket. To replace a pickup box fender
marker lamp bulb:
7. Plug in the electrical connector
to the new bulb socket. 1. Press the tab from the back to
A. Sidemarker Lamp remove the lamp.
8. Reinstall the new bulb socket
B. Low Beam Headlamp into the headlamp assembly and 2. Turn the bulb socket
turn it clockwise to secure. counterclockwise to remove
C. High Beam Headlamp
from the lamp assembly.
D. Turn Signal Lamp/
3. Gently pry the bulb from the
Parking Lamp
socket.
4. Install the new bulb in socket.
5. Reinstall socket into lamp
assembly.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Taillamps (Chassis To replace one of these bulbs: Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Cab Models) 1. Remove the four screws. Stoplamps, and Back-Up
2. Lift the lens off the lamp Lamps
assembly.
To replace one of these bulbs:
3. Turn the old bulb
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate
counterclockwise and
on page 2‑10 for more
pull the it straight out
information.
from the socket.
4. Install a new bulb into the
socket, turn it clockwise, and
press it in until it is tight.
5. Reinstall the lens and the four
screws.
A. Backup Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
2. Remove the two rear lamp

assembly screws near the
tailgate latch strikerpost and pull
rearward until disengaging the
two outer pins on the taillamp
assembly from the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Center High-Mounted 2. On the reverse side of the lamp

assembly, remove the bulb
Stoplamp (CHMSL) and socket by turning it one quarter
Cargo Lamp turn counterclockwise and pull it
To replace one of these bulbs: straight out.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of the socket.
4. Install the bulb by pushing the
bulb straight into the socket.
5. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp asembly by turning it
A. Stoplamp/Turn one quarter turn clockwise.
Signal/Taillamp 1. Remove the two screws and lift
off the lamp assembly. 6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and
B. Back-up Lamp tighten the screws.
C. Sidemarker Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out
from the socket.
A. Cargo Lamp
5. Press a new bulb into the socket
and turn the socket clockwise B. Center High-Mounted
into the taillamp assembly. Stoplamp (CHMSL) Bulb
6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
10-48 Vehicle Care
License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb

To replace one of these bulbs: Number
Exterior Lamp Bulb
1. Reach under the rear bumper for Number License
168
the bulb socket. Plate Lamp
Back-up Lamp 921
Stoplamp/Taillamp/
Back-up Lamp* 1156 3047K
Turn Signal Lamp
Cargo Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp 194
and Center
High-Mounted 912 Stoplamp/Turn
Stoplamp Signal Lamp/ 1157
(CHMSL) Taillamp*
2. Turn the bulb socket Fender Marker W5WLL * Chassis Cab Models
counterclockwise and pull
the bulb socket out of the High-Beam
9005 For replacement bulbs not listed
lamp assembly. Headlamp
here, contact your dealer.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out Low-Beam
H11
from the bulb socket. Headlamp
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to
reinstall the bulb socket.
Vehicle Care 10-49
Electrical System Replace a bad fuse with a new one Windshield Wipers
of the identical size and rating.
If the wiper motor overheats due to
Electrical System If there is a problem on the road heavy snow or ice, the windshield
and a fuse needs to be replaced, wipers will stop until the motor cools
Overload the same amperage fuse can be and will then restart.
The vehicle has fuses and circuit borrowed. Choose some feature of
Although the circuit is protected
breakers to protect against an the vehicle that is not needed to use
from electrical overload, overload
electrical system overload. and replace it as soon as possible.
due to heavy snow or ice may
When the current electrical load is Headlamp Wiring cause wiper linkage damage.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens Always clear ice and heavy snow
and closes, protecting the circuit An electrical overload may cause from the windshield before using
until the current load returns to the lamps to go on and off, or in the windshield wipers.
normal or the problem is fixed. some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right If the overload is caused by an
This greatly reduces the chance
away if the lamps go on and off or electrical problem and not snow or
of circuit overload and fire caused
remain off. ice, be sure to get it fixed.
by electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
. Headlamp Wiring
. Windshield Wiper Motor
. Power Windows and Other
Power Accessories
10-50 Vehicle Care
Fuses and Circuit feature of your vehicle that you can

get along without – like the radio
Breakers or cigarette lighter – and use its
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
the hybrid supplement for more Replace it as soon as you can.
information.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle Engine Compartment
are protected from short circuits Fuse Block
by a combination of fuses, circuit
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
breakers and fusible thermal links.
see the Duramax Diesel supplement
This greatly reduces the chance of
fires caused by electrical problems.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see Lift the cover to access the fuse
Look at the silver-colored band
the hybrid supplement for more block.
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
information.
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure Notice: Spilling liquid on any
you replace a bad fuse with a new The Engine Compartment Fuse electrical component on the
one of the identical size and rating. Block is located in the engine vehicle may damage it. Always
compartment, on the driver side keep the covers on any electrical
If you ever have a problem on the
of the vehicle. component.
road and don't have a spare fuse,
you can borrow one that has the To remove fuses, hold the end of
same amperage. Just pick some the fuse between your thumb and
index finger and pull straight out.
Vehicle Care 10-51
Fuses Usage
Trailer Brake
6
Controller
7 Front Washer
8 Oxygen Sensor
Antilock Brakes
9
System 2
Trailer Back-up
10
Lamps
Driver Side
11 Low-Beam
Headlamp
Engine Control
12
Module (Battery)
Fuel Injectors,
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage 13 Ignition Coils
Right Trailer Left Trailer (Right Side)
1 3
Stop/Turn Lamp Stop/Turn Lamp Transmission
Electronic 4 Engine Controls 14 Control Module
Suspension (Battery)
Engine Control
2 Control, Automatic 5 Module, Throttle Vehicle Back-up
Level Control 15
Control Lamps
Exhaust
10-52 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Passenger Side 28 Fog Lamps Climate Controls
39
16 Low-Beam (Battery)
29 Horn
Headlamp
Airbag System
Passenger Side 40
Air Conditioning (Ignition)
17 30 High-Beam
Compressor
Headlamp 41 Amplifier
18 Oxygen Sensors
Daytime Running 42 Audio System
31
Transmission Lamps (DRL)
19 Miscellaneous
Controls (Ignition)
Driver Side 43 (Ignition),
20 Fuel Pump 32 High-Beam Cruise Control
Headlamp
Fuel System 44 Not Used
21
Control Module Daytime Running
33 Airbag System
Lamps 2 45
22 Not Used (Battery)
34 Sunroof
23 Not Used Instrument Panel
46
Key Ignition Cluster
Fuel Injectors,
35 System, Theft
24 Ignition Coils 47 Power Take-Off
Deterrent System
(Left Side)
Auxiliary Climate
36 Windshield Wiper 48
25 Trailer Park Lamps Control (Ignition)
SEO B2 Upfitter
Driver Side Park 37 Center
26 Usage (Battery)
Lamps 49 High-Mounted
Electric Adjustable Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Passenger Side 38
27 Pedals
Park Lamps 50 Rear Defogger
Vehicle Care 10-53
Fuses Usage J-Case Usage J-Case Usage

Fuses Fuses
51 Heated Mirrors
60 Cooling Fan 2 71 Not Used
SEO B1 Upfitter
52
Usage (Battery) Antilock Brake Left Bussed
61 72
System 1 Electrical Center 2
Cigarette Lighter,
53 Auxiliary Power 62 Starter
Outlet Relays Usage
Stud 2
63 Cooling Fan High
SEO Upfitter (Trailer Brakes) FAN HI
54 Speed
Usage
Left Bussed
64 Cooling Fan Low
Climate Controls Electrical Center 1 FAN LO
55 Speed
(Ignition)
65 Not Used
Engine Control Cooling Fan
Heated Windshield FAN CNTRL
Module, Secondary 66 Control
56 Washer System
Fuel Pump HDLP Low-Beam
(Ignition) 67 Transfer Case LO/HID Headlamp
Stud 1 (Trailer FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps
J-Case Usage Connector
Fuses 68 Battery Power) A/C Air Conditioning
(Optional - 40A CMPRSR Compressor
57 Cooling Fan 1
Fuse Required) STRTR Starter
58 Not Used
Mid-Bussed PWR/TRN Powertrain
Heavy Duty 69
Electrical Center 1
59 Antilock Brake FUEL PMP Fuel Pump
System Climate Control
70 PRK LAMP Parking Lamps
Blower
10-54 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage
REAR
Rear Defogger
DEFOG
RUN/CRNK Switched Power
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. Steering Wheel
3
Controls Backlight
Fuses Usage
The instrument panel fuse block 4 Driver Door Module
access door is located on the driver 1 Rear Seats
side edge of the instrument panel. Dome Lamps, Driver
Rear Accessory 5
2 Side Turn Signal
Pull off the cover to access the fuse Power Outlet
block.
Vehicle Care 10-55
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Driver Side Turn Body Control Driver Seat Module,
6 15
Signal, Stoplamp Module (BCM) 25 Remote Keyless Entry
System
Instrument Panel Accessory Power
7 16
Back Lighting Outlets Driver Power Door
26
Lock (Unlock Feature)
Passenger Side Turn 17 Interior Lamps
8
Signal, Stoplamp
Power Door Lock 1 Circuit
18 Usage
Passenger Door (Unlock Feature) Breaker
9
Module, Driver Unlock
Rear Seat Driver Side Power
19
Power Door Lock 2 Entertainment LT DR Window Circuit
10
(Unlock Feature) Breaker
Ultrasonic Rear
Power Door Lock 2 20 Parking Assist, Power
11
(Lock Feature) Liftgate Harness
Stoplamps, Center Power Door Lock 1 Connector Usage
21
12 High‐ Mounted (Lock Feature) Driver Door
Stoplamp LT DR Harness
Driver Information
22 Connection
13 Rear Climate Controls Center (DIC)
14 Power Mirror 23 Rear Wiper BODY Harness Connector
24 Cooled Seats BODY Harness Connector
10-56 Vehicle Care
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Harness Circuit

Block Connector Usage Breaker Usage
The center instrument panel fuse Body Harness Passenger Side
block is located underneath the BODY 2
Connector 2 CB1 Power Window Circuit
instrument panel, to the left of the Breaker
steering column. Body Harness
BODY 1
Connector 1 Passenger Seat
Top View CB2
Circuit Breaker
Body Harness
BODY 3
Connector 3 Driver Seat Circuit
CB3
Breaker
HEADLINER Headliner Harness
3 Connector 3 CB4 Rear Sliding Window
2 Connector 2
1 Connector 1
Special Equipment
SEO/
Option Upfitter
UPFITTER
Harness Connector
Vehicle Care 10-57
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires
same danger as overloaded can cause a crash. Only the
Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
a leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
If you ever have questions about maintain the recommended the tires.
your tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
Warranty booklet for details. the tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
For additional information refer . Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
to the tire manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure.
Operation on page 10‑67 for
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause inflation pressure adjustment for
dangerous. a crash. If the tread is badly high speed driving.
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc.
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑25. (Continued)
(Continued)
10-58 Vehicle Care
20‐Inch Tires Tire and/or wheel assembly

If your vehicle has the optional damage can occur when
20‐inch P275/55R20 size tires, coming into contact with
they are classified as touring road hazards like, potholes,
tires and are designed for or sharp edged objects,
on road use. The low‐profile, or when sliding into a curb.
wide tread design is not The vehicle warranty does
recommended for “off‐road” not cover this type of damage.
driving or commercial uses Keep tires set to the correct
such as snow plowing. See inflation pressure and, when
Off-Road Driving on page 9‑7 possible avoid contact with
and Adding a Snow Plow curbs, potholes, and other Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
or Similar Equipment on road hazards.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size
page 9‑125 for additional code is a combination of letters
information. Tire Sidewall Labeling
and numbers used to define a
Notice: If the vehicle has Useful information about a particular tire's width, height,
low‐profile tires, they are more tire is molded into the sidewall. aspect ratio, construction type,
susceptible to damage from The following illustrations are and service description. See the
road hazards or curb impact examples of a typical P‐Metric “Tire Size” illustration later in this
than standard profile tires. and a LT‐Metric tire sidewall. section for more detail.
Vehicle Care 10-59
(B) TPC Spec (Tire The TIN is molded onto both

Performance Criteria sides of the tire, although only
Specification): Original one side may have the date of
equipment tires designed to manufacture.
GM's specific tire performance (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
criteria have a TPC specification of cord and number of plies in
code molded onto the sidewall. the sidewall and under the tread.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required
(C) DOT (Department to grade tires based on three
of Transportation): The Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
performance factors: treadwear,
Department of Transportation traction, and temperature (A) Tire Size: The tire size
(DOT) code indicates that resistance. For more code is a combination of letters
the tire is in compliance information, see Uniform Tire and numbers used to define
with the U.S. Department of Quality Grading on page 10‑80. a particular tire's width, height,
Transportation Motor Vehicle aspect ratio, construction type,
Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation and service description. See the
Load Limit: Maximum load “Tire Size” illustration later in this
(D) Tire Identification Number that can be carried and the
(TIN): The letters and numbers section for more detail.
maximum pressure needed
following DOT code are the Tire to support that load. For
Identification Number (TIN). The information on recommended
TIN shows the manufacturer and tire pressure see Tire Pressure
plant code, tire size, and date on page 10‑66 and Vehicle
the tire was manufactured. Load Limits on page 9‑25.
10-60 Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (Tire (D) DOT (Department of (F) Tire Ply Material : The type
Performance Criteria Transportation): The of cord and number of plies in
Specification): Original Department of Transportation the sidewall and under the tread.
equipment tires designed to (DOT) code indicates that (G) Single Tire Maximum
GM's specific tire performance the tire is in compliance Load: Maximum load that can
criteria have a TPC specification with the U.S. Department of be carried and the maximum
code molded onto the sidewall. Transportation Motor Vehicle pressure needed to support
GM's TPC specifications meet Safety Standards. that load when used as a
or exceed all federal safety (E) Tire Identification Number single. For information on
guidelines. (TIN): The letters and numbers recommended tire pressure see
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: following DOT code are the Tire Tire Pressure on page 10‑66
Maximum load that can be Identification Number (TIN). The and Vehicle Load Limits on
carried and the maximum TIN shows the manufacturer and page 9‑25.
pressure needed to support plant code, tire size, and date
that load when used in a dual the tire was manufactured.
configuration. For information on The TIN is molded onto both
recommended tire pressure see sides of the tire, although only
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66 one side may have the date of
and Vehicle Load Limits on manufacture.
page 9‑25.
Vehicle Care 10-61
Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit (F) Service Description: These
number that indicates the tire characters represent the load
Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. index and speed rating of the
The following examples show For example, if the tire size tire. The load index represents
the different parts of a tire size. aspect ratio is 75, as shown the load carrying capacity a tire
in item C of the tire illustration, is certified to carry. The speed
it would mean that the tire's rating is the maximum speed a
sidewall is 75 percent as high tire is certified to carry a load.
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire the type of ply construction in
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: the tire. The letter R means
The United States version of radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire
a metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first bias ply construction; and the (A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)
character in the tire size letter B means belted‐bias ply Tire: The United States version
means a passenger vehicle construction. of a metric tire sizing system.
tire engineered to standards (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of The letters LT as the first two
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim the wheel in inches. characters in the tire size means
Association. a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
and Rim Association.
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
10-62 Vehicle Care
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: This
number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches. means the combined weight
width in millimeters from (F) Load Range : Load Range. of optional accessories.
sidewall to sidewall. Some examples of optional
(G) Service Description: The accessories are, automatic
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit service description indicates the
number that indicates the tire transmission, power steering,
load index and speed rating of a power brakes, power windows,
height‐to‐width measurements. tire. If two numbers are given as
For example, if the tire size power seats, and air
in the example, 120/116, then conditioning.
aspect ratio is 75, as shown this represents the load index for
in item C of the light truck single versus dual wheel usage Aspect Ratio: The relationship
(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, (single/dual). The speed rating of a tire's height to its width.
it would mean that the tire's is the maximum speed a tire is Belt: A rubber coated layer of
sidewall is 75 percent as high certified to carry a load. cords that is located between
as it is wide. the plies and the tread. Cords
(D) Construction Code: A Tire Terminology and may be made from steel or
letter code is used to indicate Definitions other reinforcing materials.
the type of ply construction in Bead: The tire bead contains
the tire. The letter R means Air Pressure: The amount
of air inside the tire pressing steel wires wrapped by steel
radial ply construction; the cords that hold the tire onto
letter D means diagonal or outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is the rim.
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply expressed in psi (pounds per
construction. square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Vehicle Care 10-63
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic DOT Markings: A code GAWR RR: Gross Axle
tire in which the plies are laid molded into the sidewall of Weight Rating for the rear axle.
at alternate angles less than a tire signifying that the tire See Vehicle Load Limits on
90 degrees to the centerline is in compliance with the U.S. page 9‑25.
of the tread. Department of Transportation Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Cold Tire Pressure: The (DOT) motor vehicle safety The side of an asymmetrical tire,
amount of air pressure in a tire, standards. The DOT code that must always face outward
measured in kPa (kilopascal) includes the Tire Identification when mounted on a vehicle.
or psi (pounds per square inch) Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
before a tire has built up heat unit for air pressure.
from driving. See Tire Pressure identify the tire manufacturer,
on page 10‑66. production plant, brand, and Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
date of production. tire used on light duty trucks and
Curb Weight: The weight of a some multipurpose passenger
motor vehicle with standard and GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits vehicles.
optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, on page 9‑25. Load Index: An assigned
oil, and coolant, but without GAWR FRT: Gross Axle number ranging from 1 to 279
passengers and cargo. Weight Rating for the front axle. that corresponds to the load
See Vehicle Load Limits on carrying capacity of a tire.
page 9‑25.
10-64 Vehicle Care
Maximum Inflation Pressure: Occupant Distribution : Recommended Inflation

The maximum air pressure to Designated seating positions. Pressure: Vehicle
which a cold tire can be inflated. Outward Facing Sidewall: manufacturer's recommended
The maximum air pressure is The side of an asymmetrical tire tire inflation pressure as
molded onto the sidewall. that has a particular side that shown on the tire placard.
Maximum Load Rating: faces outward when mounted See Tire Pressure on
The load rating for a tire at the on a vehicle. The side of the page 10‑66 and Vehicle
maximum permissible inflation tire that contains a whitewall, Load Limits on page 9‑25.
pressure for that tire. bears white lettering, or bears Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
Maximum Loaded Vehicle manufacturer, brand, and/or tire in which the ply cords that
Weight: The sum of curb model name molding that is extend to the beads are laid at
weight, accessory weight, higher or deeper than the same 90 degrees to the centerline of
vehicle capacity weight, and moldings on the other sidewall the tread.
production options weight. of the tire. Rim: A metal support for a tire
Normal Occupant Weight: The Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: and upon which the tire beads
number of occupants a vehicle A tire used on passenger cars are seated.
is designed to seat multiplied and some light duty trucks and Sidewall: The portion of a tire
by 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle multipurpose vehicles. between the tread and the bead.
Load Limits on page 9‑25.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Speed Rating: An UTQGS (Uniform Tire Vehicle Maximum Load on the

alphanumeric code assigned to Quality Grading Standards): Tire: Load on an individual tire
a tire indicating the maximum A tire information system due to curb weight, accessory
speed at which a tire can that provides consumers with weight, occupant weight, and
operate. ratings for a tire's traction, cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between temperature, and treadwear. Vehicle Placard: A label
the tire and the road surface. Ratings are determined by permanently attached to a
The amount of grip provided. tire manufacturers using vehicle showing the vehicle
government testing procedures. capacity weight and the
Tread: The portion of a tire The ratings are molded into
that comes into contact with original equipment tire size
the sidewall of the tire. and recommended inflation
the road. See Uniform Tire Quality pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Grading on page 10‑80. Information Label” under Vehicle
bands, sometimes called wear Vehicle Capacity Weight: Load Limits on page 9‑25.
bars, that show across the The number of designated
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm seating positions multiplied by
(1/16 in) of tread remains. 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
See When It Is Time for New cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Tires on page 10‑76. Limits on page 9‑25.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Overinflated tires, or tires For additional information

that have too much air, can regarding how much weight
Tires need the correct amount result in: the vehicle can carry, and an
of air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading
effectively. . Unusual wear.
Information label, see Vehicle
Notice: Neither tire . Poor handling. Load Limits on page 9‑25.
underinflation nor . Rough ride. How you load the vehicle
overinflation is good. affects vehicle handling and
Underinflated tires, or
. Needless damage from ride comfort. Never load the
tires that do not have road hazards. vehicle with more weight than
enough air, can result in: A vehicle-specific Tire and it was designed to carry.
. Tire overloading and Loading Information label
is attached to the vehicle. When to Check
over-heating which
This label shows the vehicle's Check the tires once a month
could lead to a blowout.
original equipment tires and the or more.
. Premature or correct inflation pressures for Do not forget to check the
irregular wear. the tires when they are cold. pressure of the spare tire, if the
. Poor handling. The recommended cold tire vehicle has one. See Full-Size
inflation pressure, shown on Spare Tire on page 10‑97 for
. Reduced fuel economy. the label, is the minimum additional information.
amount of air pressure needed
to support the vehicle's
maximum load-carrying capacity.
Vehicle Care 10-67
How to Check If you overfill the tire, release air

by pushing on the metal stem WARNING (Continued)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure. in the center of the tire valve. inflation pressure adjustment
You cannot tell if the tires are Recheck the tire pressure with for high speed operation. When
properly inflated simply by the tire gauge. speed limits and road conditions
looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps are such that a vehicle can be
look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. driven at high speeds, make sure
they are under-inflated. Check They help prevent leaks by the tires are rated for high speed
the tire's inflation pressure when keeping out dirt and moisture. operation, in excellent condition,
the tires are cold. Cold means and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
the vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure for vehicle load.
at least three hours or driven no High-Speed Operation
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Vehicles with P265/70R17 or
Remove the valve cap from the { WARNING P275/55R20 size tires require
tire valve stem. Press the tire inflation pressure adjustment
Driving at high speeds,
gauge firmly onto the valve to when driving the vehicle at speeds
160 km/h (100 mph) or higher,
get a pressure measurement. of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.
puts an additional strain on tires.
If the cold tire inflation pressure Sustained high-speed driving
Set the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended to 20 kPa (3 psi) above the
causes excessive heat build up recommended cold tire pressure
pressure on the Tire and and can cause sudden tire failure.
Loading Information label, shown on the Tire and Loading
You could have a crash and you Information label.
no further adjustment is or others could be killed. Some
necessary. If the pressure high-speed rated tires require
is low, add air until you reach (Continued)
the recommended amount.
10-68 Vehicle Care
When you end this high‐speed pressure label. (If your vehicle has Please note that the TPMS is
driving, return the tires to the cold tires of a different size than the size not a substitute for proper tire
inflation pressure shown on the indicated on the vehicle placard or maintenance, and it is the driver's
Tire and Loading Information tire inflation pressure label, you responsibility to maintain correct tire
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on should determine the proper tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
page 9‑25 and Tire Pressure on inflation pressure for those tires.) has not reached the level to trigger
page 10‑66. As an added safety feature, your illumination of the TPMS low tire
vehicle has been equipped with a pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor tire pressure monitoring system Your vehicle has also been
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low equipped with a TPMS malfunction
tire pressure telltale when one or indicator to indicate when the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
more of your tires is significantly system is not operating properly.
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
under‐inflated. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
technology to check tire pressure
Accordingly, when the low tire combined with the low tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
pressure telltale illuminates, you telltale. When the system detects a
the air pressure in your tires and
should stop and check your tires as malfunction, the telltale will flash for
transmit tire pressure readings to
soon as possible, and inflate them approximately one minute and then
a receiver located in the vehicle.
to the proper pressure. Driving on remain continuously illuminated.
Each tire, including the spare This sequence will continue upon
a significantly under‐inflated tire
(if provided), should be checked subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
causes the tire to overheat and can
monthly when cold and inflated to long as the malfunction exists.
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
the inflation pressure recommended
also reduces fuel efficiency and
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
Vehicle Care 10-69
When the malfunction indicator Federal Communications

is illuminated, the system may Commission (FCC) and
not be able to detect or signal low Industry Canada
tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety See Radio Frequency Statement on
of reasons, including the installation page 13‑19 for information
of replacement or alternate tires or regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission When a low tire pressure condition
wheels on the vehicle that prevent is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the TPMS from functioning properly. (FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310. the low tire pressure warning light
Always check the TPMS malfunction located on the instrument cluster.
telltale after replacing one or more If the warning light comes on, stop
tires or wheels on your vehicle to Tire Pressure Monitor as soon as possible and inflate the
ensure that the replacement or Operation tires to the recommended pressure
alternate tires and wheels allow shown on the Tire and Loading
the TPMS to continue to function This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Information label. See Vehicle
properly. Load Limits on page 9‑25.
The TPMS is designed to warn the
See Tire Pressure Monitor driver when a low tire pressure A message to check the pressure
Operation on page 10‑69 for condition exists. TPMS sensors are in a specific tire displays in the
additional information. mounted onto each tire and wheel Driver Information Center (DIC).
assembly, excluding the spare tire The low tire pressure warning
and wheel assembly. The TPMS light and the DIC warning message
sensors monitor the air pressure come on at each ignition cycle
in the tires and transmit the tire until the tires are inflated to the
pressure readings to a receiver correct inflation pressure. If the
located in the vehicle. vehicle has DIC buttons, tire
pressure levels can be viewed.
10-70 Vehicle Care
For additional information and The TPMS can warn about a TPMS Malfunction Light and
details about the DIC operation and low tire pressure condition but Message
displays, see Driver Information it does not replace normal tire
Center (DIC) on page 5‑33 and maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly
Tire Messages on page 5‑49. on page 10‑73, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors
page 10‑73 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When
The low tire pressure warning light the system detects a malfunction,
may come on in cool weather when page 10‑57.
the low tire pressure warning light
the vehicle is first started, and then Notice: Tire sealant materials are flashes for about one minute and
turn off as the vehicle is driven. not all the same. A non-approved then stays on for the remainder of
This could be an early indicator that tire sealant could damage the the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
the air pressure is getting low and TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor message also displays. The
needs to be inflated to the proper damage caused by using malfunction light and DIC warning
pressure. an incorrect tire sealant is message come on at each ignition
A Tire and Loading Information not covered by the vehicle cycle until the problem is corrected.
label shows the size of the original warranty. Always use only Some of the conditions that can
equipment tires and the correct the GM-approved tire sealant cause these to come on are:
inflation pressure for the tires when available through your dealer
or included in the vehicle.
. One of the road tires has been
they are cold. See Vehicle Load replaced with the spare tire.
Limits on page 9‑25, for an example The spare tire does not have a
of the Tire and Loading Information TPMS sensor. The malfunction
label and its location. Also see light and the DIC message
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66. should go off after the road
tire is replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-71

. The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching
process was not done or not match the original equipment Process
not completed successfully tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
after rotating the tires. The other than those recommended Each TPMS sensor has a unique
malfunction light and the DIC could prevent the TPMS from identification code. The identification
message should go off after functioning properly. See Buying code needs to be matched to a
successfully completing the New Tires on page 10‑77. new tire/wheel position after rotating
sensor matching process. the vehicle’s tires or replacing
. Operating electronic devices or one or more of the TPMS sensors.
See "TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio
Process" later in this section. Also, the TPMS sensor matching
wave frequencies similar to the process should be performed after
. One or more TPMS sensors TPMS could cause the TPMS replacing a spare tire with a road
are missing or damaged. sensors to malfunction. tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The malfunction light and If the TPMS is not functioning The malfunction light and the DIC
the DIC message should go properly, it cannot detect or signal a message should go off at the next
off when the TPMS sensors low tire condition. See your dealer ignition cycle. The sensors are
are installed and the sensor for service if the TPMS malfunction matched to the tire/wheel positions,
matching process is performed light and DIC message come on using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
successfully. See your dealer and stay on. following order: driver side front tire,
for service. passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.
10-72 Vehicle Care
There are two minutes to match The horn sounds twice to signal 6. Proceed to the passenger
the first tire/wheel position, and the receiver is in relearn mode side front tire, and repeat the
five minutes overall to match all and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE procedure in Step 5.
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes message displays on the DIC 7. Proceed to the passenger
longer, the matching process stops screen. side rear tire, and repeat the
and must be restarted. If the vehicle does not have RKE procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS sensor matching or DIC buttons, press the trip 8. Proceed to the driver side rear
process is: odometer reset stem located on tire, and repeat the procedure
1. Set the parking brake. the instrument panel cluster until in Step 5. The horn sounds two
the PRESS V TO RELEARN times to indicate the sensor
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with TIRE POSITIONS message
the engine off. identification code has been
displays. The horn sounds matched to the driver side rear
3. Press the Remote Keyless twice to signal the receiver tire, and the TPMS sensor
Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK is in relearn mode and TIRE matching process is no longer
and UNLOCK buttons at the LEARNING ACTIVE message active. The TIRE LEARNING
same time for approximately displays on the DIC screen. ACTIVE message on the DIC
five seconds. The horn sounds 4. Start with the driver side display screen goes off.
twice to signal the receiver front tire.
is in relearn mode and TIRE 9. Turn the ignition switch to
LEARNING ACTIVE message 5. Place the relearn tool against LOCK/OFF.
displays on the DIC screen. the tire sidewall, near the valve 10. Set all four tires to the
stem. Then press the button recommended air pressure
If the vehicle does not have
to activate the TPMS sensor. level as indicated on the Tire
RKE, press the Driver A horn chirp confirms that the
Information Center (DIC) vehicle and Loading Information label.
sensor identification code has
information button until the
been matched to this tire and
PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE wheel position.
POSITIONS message displays.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a bump, bulge, See When It Is Time for New
or split. Tires on page 10‑76 and Wheel
We recommend that you Replacement on page 10‑82.
regularly inspect the vehicle's
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
tires, including the spare tire, or other damage that cannot If your vehicle has dual rear
if the vehicle has one, for signs be repaired well because of wheels, also see Dual Tire
of wear or damage at least once the size or location of the Rotation on page 10‑75.
a month. damage.
Always remove the tires if any Tire Rotation
of the following statements
are true: Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 miles).
. You can see the indicators at See Scheduled Maintenance on
three or more places around page 11‑2.
the tire.
The purpose of a regular tire
. You can see cord or fabric rotation is to achieve a uniform
showing through the tire's wear for all tires on the vehicle.
rubber. This will ensure that your vehicle
. The tread or sidewall is continues to perform most like it
cracked, cut, or snagged did when the tires were new. If your vehicle has single rear
deep enough to show cord wheels and the tread design for
Any time you notice unusual the front tires is the same as
or fabric. wear, rotate your tires as soon the rear tires, use the rotation
as possible and check wheel pattern shown here when
alignment. Also check for rotating the tires.
damaged tires or wheels.
10-74 Vehicle Care
The dual tires are rotated as a

pair, and the inside rear tires
become the outside rear tires.
When you install dual wheels,
be sure the vent holes in the
inner and outer wheels on each
side are lined up.
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
If your vehicle has dual rear the Tire and Loading Information
If your vehicle has dual rear label. See Tire Pressure on
wheels and the tread design for wheels and the tread design for
the front tires is different from page 10‑66 and Vehicle Load
the front tires is the same as the Limits on page 9‑25.
rear tires, always use one of the the dual rear tires, always use
correct rotation patterns shown the correct rotation pattern Make certain that all wheel
here when rotating the tires. shown here when rotating the nuts are properly tightened.
tires. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Vehicle Care 10-75
Lightly coat the center of the Make sure the spare tire, if your
{ WARNING wheel hub with wheel bearing vehicle has one, is stored
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on grease after a wheel change or securely. Push, pull, and then
the parts to which it is fastened, tire rotation to prevent corrosion try to rotate or turn the tire.
can make wheel nuts become or rust build-up. Do not get If it moves, tighten the cable.
loose after time. The wheel could grease on the flat wheel See “Storing a Flat or Spare
come off and cause an accident. mounting surface or on Tire and Tools” under Tire
When changing a wheel, remove the wheel nuts or bolts. Changing on page 10‑86.
any rust or dirt from places where If your vehicle has a Tire
the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Pressure Monitor System Dual Tire Rotation
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
(TPMS), reset the TPMS When the vehicle is new,
paper towel to do this; but be sure or whenever a wheel, wheel
sensors after rotating the tires.
to use a scraper or wire brush bolt or wheel nut is replaced,
later, if needed, to get all the rust
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑69. check the wheel nut torque
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat after 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km
on page 10‑84. (100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles) of
driving. For proper torque and
wheel nut tightening information,
see “Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools” under Tire Changing on
page 10‑86.
10-76 Vehicle Care
The outer tire on a dual wheel When It Is Time for New tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
setup generally wears faster than or less of tread remaining.
the inner tire. Your tires will wear
Tires Some commercial truck tires may
more evenly and last longer if you Various factors, such as not have treadwear indicators.
rotate the tires periodically, see Tire maintenance, temperatures, See Tire Inspection on page 10‑73
Inspection on page 10‑73 and Tire driving speeds, vehicle loading, and Tire Rotation on page 10‑73
Rotation on page 10‑73. Also see and road conditions influence for additional information.
Scheduled Maintenance on when you need new tires. The rubber in tires ages over time.
page 11‑2. This is also true for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
{ WARNING not being used. Multiple conditions
affect how fast this aging takes
If you operate your vehicle with a place, including temperatures,
tire that is badly underinflated, the loading conditions, and inflation
tire can overheat. An overheated pressure maintenance. Tires will
tire can lose air suddenly or catch typically need to be replaced due to
fire. You or others could be wear before they may need to be
injured. Be sure all tires (including replaced due to age. Consult the tire
the spare) are properly inflated. manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑66,
for information on proper tire One way to tell when it is time for
inflation. new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
Vehicle Care 10-77
Vehicle Storage Buying New Tires GM's exclusive TPC Spec system
considers over a dozen critical
Tires age when stored normally GM has developed and matched specifications that impact the
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park specific tires for the vehicle. overall performance of the
a vehicle that will be stored for at The original equipment tires vehicle, including brake system
least a month in a cool, dry, clean installed on the vehicle, when performance, ride and handling,
area away from direct sunlight to it was new, were designed to meet traction control, and tire pressure
slow aging. This area should be General Motors Tire Performance monitoring performance. GM's TPC
free of grease, gasoline or other Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) Spec number is molded onto the
substances that can deteriorate system rating. If you need tire's sidewall near the tire size.
rubber. replacement tires, GM strongly If the tires have an all‐season
Parking for an extended period recommends that you get tires tread design, the TPC spec
can cause flat spots on the tires with the same TPC Spec rating. number will be followed by an
that may result in vibrations while This way, the vehicle will continue MS for mud and snow. See Tire
driving. When storing a vehicle for to have tires that are designed to Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑58
at least a month, remove the tires give the same performance and for additional information.
or raise the vehicle to reduce the vehicle safety, during normal use,
weight from the tires. as the original tires.
10-78 Vehicle Care
GM recommends replacing tires in

sets of four. This is because uniform { WARNING { WARNING
tread depth on all tires will help
keep the vehicle performing most Mixing tires could cause you Using bias-ply tires on the
like it did when the tires were new. to lose control while driving. vehicle may cause the wheel
Replacing less than a full set of If you mix tires of different sizes, rim flanges to develop cracks
tires can affect the braking and brands, or types (radial and after many miles of driving.
handling performance of the vehicle. bias-belted tires), the vehicle A tire and/or wheel could fail
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑73 might not handle properly, and suddenly and cause a crash.
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑73 for you could have a crash. Using Use only radial-ply tires with
information on proper tire rotation. tires of different sizes, brands, the wheels on the vehicle.
or types could also cause
{ WARNING damage to the vehicle. Be sure
to use the same size, brand, If you must replace the vehicle's
Tires could explode during and type of tires on all wheels. tires with those that do not have
improper service. Attempting to a TPC Spec number, make sure
This vehicle may have a different they are the same size, load range,
mount or dismount a tire could
size spare than the road tires speed rating, and construction type
cause injury or death. Only your
(those originally installed on the (radial and bias‐belted tires) as the
dealer or authorized tire service
vehicle). When new, the vehicle vehicle's original tires.
center should mount or dismount
included a spare tire and wheel
the tires.
assembly with a similar overall
diameter as the vehicle's road
tires and wheels, so it is all right
to drive on it. Because this spare
was developed for use on the
vehicle, it will not affect vehicle
handling.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Vehicles that have a tire pressure Different Size Tires and

monitoring system may give an
Wheels
{ WARNING
inaccurate low‐pressure warning
if non‐TPC Spec-rated tires are If you add wheels or tires that are If different sized wheels are used,
installed on the vehicle. Non‐TPC a different size than the original there may not be an acceptable
Spec-rated tires may give a equipment wheels and tires, this level of performance and safety
low‐pressure warning that is could affect the way the vehicle if tires not recommended for
higher or lower than the proper performs, including its braking, those wheels are selected.
warning level you would get with ride and handling characteristics, This increases the chance
TPC Spec-rated tires. See Tire stability, and resistance to rollover. of a crash and serious injury.
Pressure Monitor System on Additionally, if the vehicle has Only use GM specific wheel
page 10‑68. electronic systems such as antilock and tire systems developed
The vehicle's original equipment brakes, rollover airbags, traction for the vehicle, and have them
tires are listed on the Tire and control, and electronic stability properly installed by a GM
Loading Information label. See control, the performance of these certified technician.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑25 systems can be affected.
for more information about the Tire See Buying New Tires on
and Loading Information label and page 10‑77 and Accessories
its location on the vehicle. and Modifications on page 10‑3
for additional information.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system Treadwear

Grading does not apply to deep The treadwear grade is a
tread, winter-type snow tires, comparative rating based
Quality grades can be found space-saver, or temporary use
where applicable on the tire on the wear rate of the tire
spare tires, tires with nominal when tested under controlled
sidewall between tread shoulder rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
and maximum section width. conditions on a specified
(25 to 30 cm), or to some government test course.
For example: limited-production tires. For example, a tire graded
Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on 150 would wear one and a
Temperature A General Motors passenger half (1½) times as well on
The following information relates cars and light trucks may vary the government course as
to the system developed by the with respect to these grades, a tire graded 100. The relative
United States National Highway they must also conform to performance of tires depends
Traffic Safety Administration federal safety requirements and upon the actual conditions of
(NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire their use, however, and may
by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC) depart significantly from the
temperature performance. standards. norm due to variations in
This applies only to vehicles All Passenger Car Tires Must driving habits, service practices
sold in the United States. Conform to Federal Safety and differences in road
The grades are molded on the Requirements In Addition To characteristics and climate.
sidewalls of most passenger car These Grades.
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Vehicle Care 10-81
Traction – AA, A, B, C tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire

The traction grades, from conditions on a specified Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can The tires and wheels on the vehicle
and C. Those grades represent were aligned and balanced carefully
the tire's ability to stop on cause the material of the tire to
at the factory to give the longest tire
wet pavement as measured degenerate and reduce tire life, life and best overall performance.
under controlled conditions and excessive temperature Adjustments to wheel alignment and
on specified government can lead to sudden tire failure. tire balancing will not be necessary
test surfaces of asphalt and The grade C corresponds to a on a regular basis. However, if there
concrete. A tire marked C may level of performance which all is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
have poor traction performance. passenger car tires must meet pulls to one side or the other, the
under the Federal Motor Safety alignment should be checked. If the
Warning: The traction grade vehicle vibrates when driving on a
assigned to this tire is based Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of smooth road, the tires and wheels
on straight-ahead braking might need to be rebalanced. See
traction tests, and does not performance on the laboratory
your dealer for proper diagnosis.
include acceleration, cornering, test wheel than the minimum
hydroplaning, or peak traction required by law. Warning: The
characteristics. temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that
Temperature – A, B, C is properly inflated and not
The temperature grades overloaded. Excessive speed,
are A (the highest), B, and C, underinflation, or excessive
representing the tire's resistance loading, either separately or in
to the generation of heat and its combination, can cause heat
ability to dissipate heat when buildup and possible tire failure.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Wheel Replacement Whenever a wheel, wheel

{ WARNING bolt or wheel nut is replaced
Replace any wheel that is bent, on a dual wheel setup, check
cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement the wheel nut torque after
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and nuts can be dangerous. It could (100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles)
wheel nuts should be replaced. affect the braking and handling of driving. For proper torque,
If the wheel leaks air, replace it of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under
(except some aluminum wheels, and cause loss of control, causing Capacities and Specifications on
which can sometimes be repaired). a crash. Always use the correct page 12‑2.
See your dealer if any of these wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
conditions exist. See If a Tire Goes Flat on
nuts for replacement. page 10‑84 for more information.
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need. Used Replacement Wheels
Notice: The wrong wheel
Each new wheel should have can also cause problems with
the same load-carrying capacity, bearing life, brake cooling, { WARNING
diameter, width, offset and be speedometer or odometer
calibration, headlamp aim, Replacing a wheel with a used
mounted the same way as the
bumper height, vehicle ground one is dangerous. How it has
one it replaces.
clearance, and tire or tire chain been used or how far it has been
If you need to replace any of the driven may be unknown. It could
clearance to the body and
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts fail suddenly and cause a crash.
chassis.
or Tire Pressure Monitor System When replacing wheels, use a
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only new GM original equipment
with new GM original equipment wheel.
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-83
Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)

Notice: If the vehicle does not
have dual wheels and has a
tire size other than P265/65R18,
{ WARNING Use another type of traction P275/55R20, LT265/70R17, LT265/
device only if its manufacturer 70R18, LT265/60R20, P285/50R20,
If the vehicle has dual wheels recommends it for use on the P285/45R22, or 285/45R22, use
or P265/65R18, P275/55R20, vehicle and tire size combination tire chains only where legal and
LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18, and road conditions. Follow only when you must. Use chains
LT265/60R20, P285/50R20, that manufacturer's instructions. that are the proper size for the
P285/45R22 or 285/45R22 size To help avoid damage to the tires. Install them on the tires
tires, do not use tire chains. vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, of the rear axle. Do not use
They can damage the vehicle or remove the device if it is chains on the tires of the front
because there is not enough contacting the vehicle, and do axle. Tighten them as tightly as
clearance. Tire chains used on not spin the vehicle's wheels. possible with the ends securely
a vehicle without the proper fastened. Drive slowly and
amount of clearance can If you do find traction devices that follow the chain manufacturer's
cause damage to the brakes, will fit, install them on the rear instructions. If you can hear the
suspension, or other vehicle tires. chains contacting the vehicle,
parts. The area damaged by the stop and retighten them. If the
tire chains could cause you to contact continues, slow down
lose control of the vehicle and until it stops. Driving too fast or
you or others may be injured in spinning the wheels with chains
a crash. on will damage the vehicle.
(Continued)
10-84 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle

under control by steering the way { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout you want the vehicle to go. It may
while you are driving, especially if be very bumpy and noisy, but you Lifting a vehicle and getting
you maintain your vehicle's tires can still steer. Gently brake to a under it to do maintenance or
properly. If air goes out of a tire, stop, well off the road, if possible. repairs is dangerous without the
it is much more likely to leak out appropriate safety equipment and
slowly. But if you should ever have training. If a jack is provided with
a blowout, here are a few tips about { WARNING the vehicle, it is designed only for
what to expect and what to do: Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for
If a front tire fails, the flat tire permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle Re-inflating a tire after it has be badly injured or killed if the
toward that side. Take your foot been driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
off the accelerator pedal and grip underinflated or flat may cause is provided with the vehicle, only
the steering wheel firmly. Steer to a blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
maintain lane position, and then Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
gently brake to a stop, well off the that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, the next part
road, if possible. severely underinflated or flat. shows how to use the jacking
A rear blowout, particularly on a Have your dealer or an authorized equipment to change a flat tire
curve, acts much like a skid and tire service center repair or safely.
may require the same correction replace the flat tire as soon
you would use in a skid. In any rear as possible.
blowout remove your foot from the
Vehicle Care 10-85
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
and wheel damage by driving slowly WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a
to a level place, well off the road, guide to assist you in the placement
if possible. Turn on the hazard 3. If you have a of wheel blocks (A).
warning flashers. See Hazard four-wheel-drive vehicle,
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5. be sure the transfer case
is in a drive gear – not in
N (Neutral).
{ WARNING 4. Turn off the engine and do
Changing a tire can be not restart while the vehicle
dangerous. The vehicle can is raised.
slip off the jack and roll over 5. Do not allow passengers to
or fall on you or other people. remain in the vehicle.
You and they could be badly
To be even more certain the A. Wheel Block
injured or even killed. Find a level
vehicle will not move, put blocks B. Flat Tire
place to change your tire. To help
at the front and rear of the tire
prevent the vehicle from moving: The following information explains
farthest away from the one being
1. Set the parking brake firmly. changed. That would be the tire how to use the jack and change
on the other side, at the opposite a tire.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in end of the vehicle.
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)
10-86 Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
Regular Cab Extended Cab

A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
B. Tool Kit B. Tool Kit
Crew Cab C. Wheel Blocks C. Wheel Blocks
A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit D. Jack D. Jack
B. Tool Kit E. Jack Knob E. Jack Knob
C. Wheel Blocks F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
Blocks
D. Jack
E. Jack Knob
F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
Blocks
Vehicle Care 10-87
For regular cab models, the 1. Open the spare tire lock cover
equipment you will need is on the bumper and use the
behind the passenger seat. ignition key to remove the spare
For extended and crew cab tire lock (J). To remove the spare
models, the equipment is on the tire lock, insert the ignition key
shelf behind the passenger side turn and pull straight out.
second row seat.
1. Turn the knob on the jack
counterclockwise to lower the
jack head to release the jack
from its holder.
2. Remove the wheel blocks
A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
and the wheel block retainer
Pointed Down)
by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise. B. Hoist Assembly
3. Remove the wing nut used to C. Hoist Cable
retain the storage bag and tools D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
by turning it counterclockwise.
E. Hoist Shaft
You will use the jack handle 2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H)
extensions and the wheel wrench F. Hoist End of Extension Tool and the two jack handle
to remove the underbody-mounted G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole extensions (I) as shown.
spare tire.
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock (If equipped)
10-88 Vehicle Care
wrench until the spare tire can Removing the Flat Tire and
be pulled out from under the Installing the Spare Tire
vehicle.
Use the following pictures and
5. Pull the spare tire out from under instructions to remove the flat tire
the vehicle. and raise the vehicle.
3. Insert the hoist end (open

end) (F) of the extension through
the hole (G) in the rear bumper.
Do not use the chiseled end of
the wheel wrench.
Be sure the hoist end of the
extension (F) connects to the 6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle The tools you will be using include
hoist shaft (E). The ribbed with some slack in the cable to the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B),
square end of the extension is access the tire/wheel retainer. the jack handle (C), the jack handle
used to lower the spare tire. Tilt the retainer and pull it extensions (D), and the wheel
through the center of the wheel wrench (E).
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H)
counterclockwise to lower along with the cable and spring. 1. Do a safety check before
the spare tire to the ground. 7. Put the spare tire near the proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Continue to turn the wheel flat tire. Flat on page 10‑84 for more
information.
Vehicle Care 10-89
2. If your vehicle has wheel nut If the wheel has a smooth center 3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it
caps, loosen them by turning the cap, place the chisel end of the counterclockwise to loosen the
wheel wrench counterclockwise. wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel nuts. Do not remove the
If the vehicle has a center cap wheel, and gently pry it out. wheel nuts yet.
with wheel nut caps, the wheel
nut caps are designed to stay
with the center cap after they
are loosened. Remove the
entire center cap.
10-90 Vehicle Care
Front Position - 1500 Models Front Position - All Other Models Rear Position – 1500 Models
4. Position the jack under the Position the jack under the 5. If the flat tire is on the rear,
vehicle as shown. If the flat tire vehicle as shown. If the flat tire for 1500 models position the
is on the front of the vehicle is on the front of the vehicle (all jack under the rear axle about
(1500 Model vehicles), position other models), position the jack 2 inches (5 cm) inboard of the
the jack under the bracket on the frame behind the flat tire. shock absorber bracket.
attached to the vehicle's frame,
behind the flat tire.
Vehicle Care 10-91
6. Turn the wheel wrench

{ WARNING clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Raise the vehicle far enough off
Getting under a vehicle when it the ground so there is enough
is jacked up is dangerous. If the room for the spare tire to fit
vehicle slips off the jack, you under the wheel well.
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when
it is supported only by a jack.
Rear Position – All Other Models

{ WARNING
For all other models, position the Raising the vehicle with the
jack under the rear axle between jack improperly positioned can
the spring anchor and the shock damage the vehicle and even
absorber bracket. make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
If you have added a snow plow
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
to the front of your vehicle, lower 7. Remove all the wheel nuts and
head into the proper location
the snow plow fully before take off the flat tire.
raising the vehicle. before raising the vehicle.
Make sure that the jack head is

positioned so that the rear axle
is resting securely between
the grooves that are on the
jack head.
10-92 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Never use oil or grease on bolts
parts to which it is fastened, can or nuts because the nuts might
make wheel nuts become loose come loose. The vehicle's wheel
after time. The wheel could come could fall off, causing a crash.
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any 10. Put the wheel nuts back on
rust or dirt from places where the with the rounded end of the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. nuts toward the wheel.
In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be 11. Tighten each wheel nut by
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the hand. Then use the wheel
sure to use a scraper or wire
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, wrench to tighten the nuts
brush later, if needed, to get all and spare wheel. until the wheel is held against
the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire
9. Install the spare tire. the hub.
Goes Flat on page 10‑84.
12. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack
completely.
Vehicle Care 10-93
{ WARNING { WARNING
If wheel studs are damaged, they Wheel nuts that are improperly or
can break. If all the studs on a incorrectly tightened can cause
wheel broke, the wheel could the wheels to become loose or
come off and cause a crash. come off. The wheel nuts should
If any stud is damaged because be tightened with a torque wrench
of a loose-running wheel, it could to the proper torque specification
be that all of the studs are after replacing. Follow the torque
damaged. To be sure, replace all specification supplied by the
studs on the wheel. If the stud aftermarket manufacturer when
holes in a wheel have become using accessory locking wheel
13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a
larger, the wheel could collapse in nuts. See Capacities and
crisscross sequence as shown
operation. Replace any wheel if Specifications on page 12‑2 for by turning the wheel wrench
its stud holes have become larger original equipment wheel nut clockwise.
or distorted in any way. Inspect torque specifications.
hubs and hub‐piloted wheels For vehicles with dual wheels, have
for damage. Because of loose a technician check the wheel nut
Notice: Improperly tightened tightness of all wheels with a torque
running wheels, piloting pad wheel nuts can lead to brake
damage may occur and require wrench after the first 100 miles
pulsation and rotor damage. (160 km) and then 1,000 miles
replacement of the entire hub, for To avoid expensive brake repairs, (1600 km) after that. Repeat
proper centering of the wheels. evenly tighten the wheel nuts this service whenever you have
When replacing studs, hubs, in the proper sequence and to a tire removed or serviced. See
wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to the proper torque specification. Capacities and Specifications on
use GM original equipment parts. See Capacities and Specifications page 12‑2 for more information.
on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
10-94 Vehicle Care
When you reinstall the regular Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

wheel and tire, you must also and Tools
reinstall either the center cap,
or bolt-on hub cap, depending
on what your vehicle is equipped
{ WARNING
with. For center caps, place the cap Storing a jack, a tire, or other
on the wheel and tap it into place equipment in the passenger
until it seats flush with the wheel. compartment of the vehicle could
The cap only goes on one way. cause injury. In a sudden stop or
Be sure to line up the tab on the
collision, loose equipment could
center cap with the indentation on
strike someone. Store all these in
the wheel. For bolt-on hub caps,
align the plastic nut caps with the the proper place.
A. Flat or Spare Tire
wheel nuts and then tighten by (Valve Stem Pointed Down)
hand. Then use the wheel wrench Notice: Storing an aluminum
to tighten. wheel with a flat tire under your B. Hoist Assembly
vehicle for an extended period C. Hoist Cable
of time or with the valve stem
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel E. Hoist Shaft
with the valve stem pointing F. Hoist End of Extension Tool
down and have the wheel/tire
repaired as soon as possible. G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
Store the tire under the rear of the H. Wheel Wrench
vehicle in the spare tire carrier. I. Jack Handle Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)
Vehicle Care 10-95
1. Put the tire on the ground at

the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
2. Pull the cable and spring
through the center of the wheel.
Tilt the wheel retainer plate
down and through the center
wheel.
Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) 4. Insert the hoist end (F) through
and extensions (I) together, the hole (G) in the rear bumper
as shown. and onto the hoist shaft.
Do not use the chiseled end of
the wheel wrench.
5. Raise the tire part way upward.
Make sure the retainer is seated
in the wheel opening.
10-96 Vehicle Care
6. Raise the tire fully against the To store the jack and jack tools: 1. Put the tools (D) in the tool
underside of the vehicle by bag (E) and place them in the
turning the wheel wrench retaining bracket (C).
clockwise until you hear two 2. Tighten down the wing nut (C).
clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the 3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B)
cable. and jack (G) together with the
wing nut (A) and retaining
bolt (H).
4. Position the jack (G) in the
mounting bracket (F). Position
the holes in the base of the
jack (G) onto the pin in the
mounting bracket (F).
A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel 5. Return them to their original
Blocks location in the vehicle. For more
information, refer to “Removing
B. Wheel Blocks the Spare Tire and Tools” for
C. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit more information.
7. Make sure the tire is stored D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions

securely. Push, pull (A), and then E. Tool Bag
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench F. Jack Mounting Bracket
to tighten the cable. G. Jack
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, H. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks
if the vehicle has one.
Vehicle Care 10-97
Full-Size Spare Tire Notice: If the vehicle has After installing the spare tire on your
four-wheel drive and the different vehicle, you should stop as soon as
Your vehicle, when new, had a size spare tire is installed on the possible and make sure the spare
fully-inflated spare tire. A spare vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel tire is correctly inflated. Have the
tire may lose air over time, so drive until you can have your damaged or flat road tire repaired
check its inflation pressure regularly. flat tire repaired and/or replaced. or replaced as soon as you can
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑66 You could damage the vehicle, and installed back onto your vehicle.
and Vehicle Load Limits on and the repair costs would not This way, the spare tire will be
page 9‑25 for information regarding be covered by your warranty. available in case you need it again.
proper tire inflation and loading your Never use four-wheel drive when
vehicle. For instruction on how to Do not mix tires and wheels of
the different size spare tire is different sizes, because they will
remove, install or store a spare tire, installed on the vehicle.
see “Removing the Flat Tire and not fit. Keep your spare tire and its
Installing the Spare” and “Storing a Your vehicle may have a different wheel together. If your vehicle has
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” under size spare tire than the road tires a spare tire that does not match
Tire Changing on page 10‑86. originally installed on your vehicle. your vehicle's original road tires
This spare tire was developed for and wheels in size and type, do not
use on your vehicle, so it is all right include the spare in the tire rotation.
to drive on it. If your vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the different
size spare tire is installed, keep
the vehicle in two-wheel drive.
10-98 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting Notice: Only use a vehicle

{ WARNING that has a 12-volt system with
For more information about the a negative ground for jump
vehicle battery, see Battery on Batteries can hurt you. They can starting. If the other vehicle does
page 10‑34. be dangerous because: not have a 12-volt system with a
. They contain acid that can negative ground, both vehicles
the hybrid supplement for more burn you. can be damaged.
information. . They contain gas that can 2. If you have a vehicle with a
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) explode or ignite. diesel engine with two batteries,
has run down, you may want to use . you should know before you
They contain enough
another vehicle and some jumper begin that, especially in cold
electricity to burn you.
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure weather, you may not be able
to use the following steps to do it If you do not follow these steps to get enough power from a
safely. exactly, some or all of these single battery in another vehicle
things can hurt you. to start your diesel engine.
If your vehicle has more than
one battery, using the battery
Notice: Ignoring these steps that is closer to the starter will
could result in costly damage reduce electrical resistance.
to the vehicle that would not be This is located on the passenger
covered by the warranty. side, in the rear of the engine
Trying to start the vehicle by compartment.
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Vehicle Care 10-99
3. Get the vehicles close enough would not be covered by the

so the jumper cables can reach, warranty. Always turn off the
but be sure the vehicles are not radio and other accessories
touching each other. If they are, when jump starting the vehicle.
it could cause an unwanted 4. Turn off the ignition on both
ground connection. You would vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
not be able to start your vehicle, accessories plugged into the
and the bad grounding could cigarette lighter or the accessory
damage the electrical systems. power outlets. Turn off the radio
To avoid the possibility of the and all the lamps that are not
vehicles rolling, set the parking needed. This will avoid sparks
brake firmly on both vehicles and help save both batteries.
involved in the jump start And it could save the radio! If your vehicle has a gasoline
procedure. Put the automatic 5. Open the hood on the other engine, the remote negative (−)
transmission in P (Park) or a vehicle and locate the terminal is a stud located on the
manual transmission in Neutral positive (+) and negative (−) right front of the engine, where
before setting the parking brake. terminal locations on that the negative battery cable
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle. attaches.
vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear, not in The positive (+) terminal, is If your vehicle has a diesel
Neutral. located under a red plastic engine, the remote negative (−)
cover at the positive battery terminal is the negative (−) post
Notice: If the radio or other post. To uncover the positive (+) on the auxiliary battery on the
accessories are left on during terminal, open the red plastic driver side of the engine
the jump starting procedure, they cover. compartment.
could be damaged. The repairs
10-100 Vehicle Care
For more information on 6. Check that the jumper cables

the location of the remote WARNING (Continued) do not have loose or missing
positive (+) and remote insulation. If they do, you could
negative (−) terminals, Be sure the battery has enough get a shock. The vehicles could
see Engine Compartment water. You do not need to add be damaged too.
Overview on page 10‑6 water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery Before you connect the cables,
has filler caps, be sure the right here are some basic things you
{ WARNING amount of fluid is there. If it is low, should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
and can injure you. Keep hands, gas could be present. heavy, unpainted metal engine
clothing and tools away from any Battery fluid contains acid that part or to a remote negative (−)
underhood electric fan. can burn you. Do not get it on terminal if the vehicle has one.
you. If you accidentally get it in Do not connect positive (+) to
your eyes or on your skin, flush negative (−) or you will get a
{ WARNING the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
Using an open flame near a too. And do not connect the
battery can cause battery gas to negative (−) cable to the
explode. People have been hurt negative (−) terminal on the
doing this, and some have been
{ WARNING dead battery because this
blinded. Use a flashlight if you can cause sparks.
Fans or other moving engine
need more light. parts can injure you badly. Keep
(Continued) your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Vehicle Care 10-101
8. Do not let the other end 10. Connect the other end of the
touch metal. Connect it to negative (−) cable to a heavy,
the positive (+) terminal of the unpainted metal engine part
good battery. Use a remote or to the remote negative (−)
positive (+) terminal if the terminal, on the vehicle with
vehicle has one. the dead battery.
9. Now connect the black 11. Start the vehicle with the good
negative (−) cable to the battery and run the engine for a
negative (−) terminal of the while.
good battery. Use a remote 12. Try to start the vehicle that
negative (−) terminal if the had the dead battery. If it will
vehicle has one. not start after a few tries, it
5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L
Do not let the other end touch probably needs service.
and 6.2L similar) anything until the next step.
7. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the dead
battery.
10-102 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables

connected or removed in the from both vehicles do the following:
wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black
may occur and damage the negative (−) cable from the
vehicle. The repairs would not be vehicle that had the bad battery.
Always connect and remove the 2. Disconnect the black
jumper cables in the correct negative (−) cable from the
order, making sure that the vehicle with the good battery.
cables do not touch each other 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
or other metal. cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine cable from the other vehicle.
Part or Remote Negative (−) 5. Return the positive (+) terminal
Terminal cover, to its original position.
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-103

. What is the distance that will be
Towing Recreational Vehicle travelled? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means long they can tow.
Notice: To avoid damage, towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment
the disabled vehicle should be vehicle, such as a motor home. going to be used? See your
towed with all four wheels off The two most common types of dealer or trailering professional
the ground. Care must be taken recreational vehicle towing are for additional advice and
with vehicles that have low known as dinghy towing and dolly equipment recommendations.
ground clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
. Is the vehicle ready to be
equipment. Always flatbed on a
ground. Dolly towing is towing the towed? Just as preparing the
car carrier.
vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make sure
Consult your dealer or a the vehicle is prepared to be
ground and two wheels up on a
professional towing service if the towed.
device known as a dolly.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program Here are some important things to
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 consider before recreational vehicle
or Roadside Assistance Program towing:
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. . What is the towing capacity
To tow the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle?
vehicle for recreational purposes, Be sure to read the tow
such as behind a motor home, see vehicle manufacturer's
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this recommendations.
section.
10-104 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles should 2. Turn the engine off and firmly set
not be towed with all four wheels the parking brake.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles on the ground. Two-wheel-drive 3. Securely attach the vehicle
transmissions have no provisions being towed to the tow vehicle.
for internal lubrication while being
towed.
{ WARNING
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
vehicle's transfer case into
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is
in P (Park). The driver or others
could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before
the transfer case is shifted to
Notice: If the vehicle is N (Neutral).
towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. 4. Shift the transfer case to
The repairs would not be covered N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
by the vehicle warranty. Do not Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive
Use the following procedure to
tow the vehicle with all four on page 9‑54 for the proper
dinghy tow a four-wheel-drive
wheels on the ground. procedure to select the Neutral
vehicle:
position for the vehicle.
1. Position the vehicle being towed
behind the tow vehicle and shift
the transmission to P (Park).
Vehicle Care 10-105
5. Release the parking brake only Dolly Towing transmission could be damaged.
after the vehicle being towed is The repairs would not be covered
firmly attached to the towing Front Towing (Front Wheels Off by the vehicle warranty. Never
vehicle. the Ground) – Two-Wheel-Drive tow the vehicle with the rear
Vehicles wheels on the ground.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and remove the key — the Two-wheel-drive vehicles should
steering wheel will still turn. not be towed with the rear wheels
After towing, see “Shifting Out of on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on transmissions have no provisions
page 9‑54 for the proper procedure for internal lubrication while being
to take the vehicle out of the Neutral towed.
position. To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive
vehicle, the vehicle must be towed
with the rear wheels on the dolly.
See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
the Ground)” later in this section for
more information.
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive
vehicle is towed with the rear
wheels on the ground, the
10-106 Vehicle Care
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off 3. Shift the transmission to 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
the Ground) – Four-Wheel-Drive P (Park). following the manufacturer's
Vehicles 4. Firmly set the parking brake. instructions.
7. Shift the transfer case to
{ WARNING N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive
Shifting a four-wheel-drive on page 9‑54 for the proper
vehicle's transfer case into procedure to select the neutral
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle position for the vehicle.
to roll even if the transmission is 8. Release the parking brake only
in P (Park). The driver or others after the vehicle being towed is
could be injured. Make sure the firmly attached to the towing
parking brake is firmly set before vehicle.
the transfer case is shifted to 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
N (Neutral).
After towing, see “Shifting Out of
Use the following procedure to dolly Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on
tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from 5. Use an adequate clamping page 9‑54.
the front: device designed for towing to
1. Attach the dolly to the tow ensure that the front wheels are
vehicle following the dolly locked into the straight position.
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-107
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels 3. Firmly set the parking brake. Four‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
Off the Ground) See Parking Brake on Use the following procedure to dolly
page 9‑69. tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from
Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). the rear:
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
following the manufacturer's vehicle following the dolly
instructions. manufacturer's instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping 2. Drive the rear wheels onto
device designed for towing to the dolly.
ensure that the front wheels are 3. Firmly set the parking brake.
locked into the straight position. See Parking Brake on
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. page 9‑69.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
Use the following procedure to dolly
instructions.
tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from
the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly.
10-108 Vehicle Care
6. Use an adequate clamping Appearance Care Do not wash the vehicle in direct
device designed for towing to sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
ensure that the front wheels are Do not use cleaning agents that
locked into the straight position. Exterior Care are petroleum based or that contain
Silicone grease on weatherstrips acid or abrasives, as they can
{ WARNING will make them last longer, seal damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
better, and not stick or squeak.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive Apply silicone grease with a clean products can be obtained from your
vehicle's transfer case into cloth. During very cold, damp dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle weather frequent application may directions regarding correct
to roll even if the transmission is be required. See Recommended product usage, necessary safety
in P (Park). The driver or others Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑8. precautions and appropriate
could be injured. Make sure the disposal of any vehicle care
Washing the Vehicle product.
parking brake is firmly set before
the transfer case is shifted to The best way to preserve the Rinse the vehicle well, before
N (Neutral). vehicle's finish is to keep it clean washing and after to remove all
by washing it often. cleaning agents completely. If they
Notice: Certain cleaners contain are allowed to dry on the surface,
7. Shift the transfer case to they could stain.
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into chemicals that can damage the
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive emblems or nameplates on the Dry the finish with a soft, clean
on page 9‑54 for the proper vehicle. Check the cleaning chamois or an all-cotton towel to
procedure to select the neutral product label. If it states that it avoid surface scratches and water
position for the vehicle. should not be used on plastic spotting.
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. or damage may occur and it
After towing, see “Shifting Out of would not be covered by the
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on warranty.
page 9‑54.
Vehicle Care 10-109
High pressure car washes may If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are
cause water to enter the vehicle. clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and
Avoid using high pressure washes gives more depth and gloss to chemical fallout that can take
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the colored basecoat. Always their toll over a period of years.
the surface of the vehicle. Use of use waxes and polishes that are To help keep the paint finish looking
power washers exceeding 8 274 kPa non-abrasive and made for a new, keep the vehicle garaged or
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. covered whenever possible.
removal of paint and decals. Notice: Machine compounding Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Cleaning Exterior or aggressive polishing on a Parts
Lamps/Lenses basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
Bright metal parts should be
may damage it. Use only
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a cleaned regularly to keep their
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
soft cloth and a car washing soap luster. Washing with water is all that
that are made for a basecoat/
to clean exterior lamps and lenses. is usually needed. However, chrome
clearcoat paint finish on the
Follow instructions under “Washing polish may be used on chrome or
vehicle.
the Vehicle”. stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Foreign materials such as calcium
Finish Care Use special care with aluminum
chloride and other salts, ice melting
trim. To avoid damaging protective
Occasional waxing or mild polishing agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
trim, never use auto or chrome
of the vehicle by hand may be bird droppings, chemicals from
polish, steam or caustic soap to
necessary to remove residue from industrial chimneys, etc., can
clean aluminum. A coating of
the paint finish. Approved cleaning damage the vehicle's finish if they
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
products can be obtained from your remain on painted surfaces. Wash
recommended for all bright metal
dealer. the vehicle as soon as possible.
parts.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
10-110 Vehicle Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Notice: Using strong soaps,
Wheels and Trim chemicals, abrasive polishes,
Clean the outside of the windshield
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
with glass cleaner. The vehicle may have either that contain acid on aluminum
Clean the rubber blades using a aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. or chrome-plated wheels, could
lint free cloth or paper towel soaked Keep the wheels clean using a damage the surface of the
with windshield washer fluid or a soft clean cloth with mild soap and wheel(s). The repairs would
mild detergent. Wash the windshield water. Rinse with clean water. After not be covered by the vehicle
thoroughly when cleaning the rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft warranty. Use only approved
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap clean towel. A wax may then be cleaners on aluminum or
and a buildup of vehicle wash/ applied. chrome-plated wheels.
wax treatments may cause wiper
Notice: Chrome wheels and other The surface of these wheels is
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
chrome trim may be damaged similar to the painted surface of the
if they are worn or damaged.
if the vehicle is not washed vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
Wipers can be damaged by: after driving on roads that have chemicals, abrasive polishes,
. Extreme dusty conditions been sprayed with magnesium, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
calcium or sodium chloride. acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
. Sand and salt These chlorides are used on on them because they could
. Heat and sun roads for conditions such as damage the surface. Do not use
.
ice and dust. Always wash the chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Snow and ice, without proper vehicle's chrome with soap
removal Notice: Using chrome polish on
and water after exposure. aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Vehicle Care 10-111
Use chrome polish only on Sheet Metal Damage Chemicals used for ice and snow
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid removal and dust control can collect
If the vehicle is damaged and
any painted surface of the wheel, on the underbody. If these are not
requires sheet metal repair or
and buff off immediately after removed, corrosion and rust can
replacement, make sure the body
application. develop on the underbody parts
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
Notice: Driving the vehicle such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
material to parts repaired or
through an automatic car wash and exhaust system even though
replaced to restore corrosion
that has silicone carbide tire they have corrosion protection.
protection.
cleaning brushes, could damage At least every spring, flush these
Original manufacturer replacement
the aluminum or chrome-plated materials from the underbody
parts will provide the corrosion
wheels. The repairs would not be with plain water. Clean any areas
protection while maintaining the
covered by the vehicle warranty. where mud and debris can collect.
vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has Dirt packed in close areas of the
aluminum or chrome-plated Finish Damage frame should be loosened before
wheels through an automatic being flushed. Your dealer or an
car wash that uses silicone Any stone chips, fractures or deep underbody car washing system
carbide tire cleaning brushes. scratches in the finish should be can do this.
repaired right away. Bare metal will
Tires corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush
with tire cleaner. Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
Notice: Using petroleum-based
available from your dealer. Larger
tire dressing products on the
areas of finish damage can be
vehicle may damage the paint
corrected in your dealer's body
finish and/or tires. When applying
and paint shop.
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
10-112 Vehicle Care
Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Interior Care

Chemicals used for ice and snow Some weather and atmospheric The interior will continue to look
removal and dust control can collect conditions can create a chemical its best if it is cleaned often. Dust
on the underbody. If these are not fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall and dirt can accumulate on the
removed, corrosion and rust can upon and attack painted surfaces upholstery and cause damage
develop on the underbody parts on the vehicle. This damage can to the carpet, fabric, leather, and
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped plastic surfaces. Stains should be
and exhaust system even though discolorations, and small, irregular removed quickly as extreme heat
they have corrosion protection. dark spots etched into the paint could cause them to set rapidly.
At least every spring, flush these surface.
Lighter colored interiors may
materials from the underbody Although no defect in the paint job require more frequent cleaning.
with plain water. Clean any areas causes this, we will repair, at no Newspapers and garments that can
where mud and debris can collect. charge to the owner, the surfaces transfer color to home furnishings
Dirt packed in close areas of the of new vehicles damaged by this can also transfer color to the
frame should be loosened before fallout condition within 12 months interior.
being flushed. Your dealer or an or 20 000 km (12,000 miles) of
underbody car washing system purchase, whichever occurs first. Remove dust from small buttons
can do this. and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Vehicle Care 10-113
Your dealer has products for Cleaners can contain solvents that
. Never apply heavy pressure or
cleaning the interior. When cleaning can become concentrated in the rub aggressively with a cleaning
the interior, only use cleaners interior. Before using cleaners, cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
specifically designed for the read and adhere to all safety damage the interior and does
surfaces that are being cleaned. instructions on the label. While not improve the effectiveness
Permanent damage can result cleaning the interior, maintain of soil removal.
from using cleaners on surfaces adequate ventilation by opening . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
for which they were not intended. the doors and windows. Avoid laundry detergents
Apply the cleaner directly to the Do not clean the interior using the or dishwashing soaps with
cleaning cloth to prevent over-spray. following cleaners or techniques: degreasers. Using too much
Remove any accidental over-spray soap will leave a residue that
from other surfaces immediately. . Never use a knife or any other leaves streaks and attracts
sharp object to remove a soil dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners from any interior surface.
when cleaning glass surfaces on 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
the vehicle, could scratch the . Never use a stiff brush. It can water is a good guide.
glass and/or cause damage to cause damage to the interior . Do not heavily saturate the
the rear window defogger. When surfaces. upholstery while cleaning.
cleaning the glass on the vehicle, .
use only a soft cloth and glass Cleaners that contain solvents
cleaner. can damage the interior.
10-114 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the Leather/Leatherette

soil and gently rub toward the
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft Leather, and lighter colored leather
center. Continue cleaning, using
brush attachment to remove dust in particular, will need more frequent
a clean area of the cloth each
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum cleaning to prevent the buildup of
time it becomes soiled.
with a beater bar in the nozzle dust, dirt, and colors transferred
may only be used on floor carpet 4. Continue to gently rub the from other items so that these do
and carpeted floor mats. For soils, soiled area. not become permanent stains.
always try to remove them first with 5. If the soil is not completely To remove dust, a soft cloth
plain water or club soda. Before removed, use a mild soap dampened with water can be used.
cleaning, gently remove as much solution and repeat the cleaning If a more thorough cleaning is
of the soil as possible using one process that was used with plain necessary, a soft cloth dampened
of the following techniques: water. with a mild soap solution can
. For liquids: gently blot the If any of the soil remains, a be used. Your dealer has a GM
remaining soil with a paper commercial fabric cleaner or spot approved leather cleaner available
towel. Allow the soil to absorb lifter may be necessary. Test a small that provides superior cleaning
into the paper towel until no hidden area for colorfastness before performance when used regularly
more can be removed. using a commercial upholstery on finished automotive leathers.
. For solid dry soils: remove as cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally Allow the leather to dry naturally.
much as possible and then cleaned area gives any impression Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters
vacuum. that a ring formation may result, or spot removers, or shoe polish on
clean the entire surface. leather. Many commercial leather
To clean: cleaners and coatings that are
A paper towel can be used to blot sold to preserve and protect leather
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
excess moisture from the fabric or may permanently change the
cloth with water or club soda.
carpet after the cleaning process. appearance and feel of the leather
2. Remove excess moisture. and are not recommended.
Vehicle Care 10-115
Do not use silicone or wax-based to clean the interior because they Care of Safety Belts
products, or those containing can alter the appearance by
Keep belts clean and dry.
organic solvents to clean the increasing the gloss in a
interior because they can alter non-uniform manner.
the appearance by increasing the Some commercial products may
{ WARNING
gloss in a non-uniform manner. increase gloss on the instrument Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl and panel. The increase in gloss may It may severely weaken them.
other Plastic Surfaces cause annoying reflections in the In a crash, they might not be able
windshield and even make it difficult to provide adequate protection.
To remove dust, a soft cloth to see through the windshield under
dampened with water can be Clean safety belts only with mild
certain conditions.
used. If a more thorough cleaning soap and lukewarm water.
is necessary, a clean soft cloth Notice:: Air fresheners contain
dampened with a mild soap solution solvents that may cause damage
can be used to gently remove dust to plastics and painted surfaces.
and dirt. Never use spot lifters Follow the manufacturer’s
or removers on plastic surfaces. instructions when using air
Many commercial cleaners and fresheners in the vehicle. If air
coatings that are sold to preserve freshener comes in contact with
and protect soft plastic surfaces paint or a plastic surface, blot
may permanently change the immediately with a soft cloth.
appearance and feel of the interior Damage caused by using air
and are not recommended. Do not fresheners would not be covered
use silicone or wax-based products, by the vehicle warrant.
or those containing organic solvents
10-116 Vehicle Care
Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for the
If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need
is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
accelerator or brake pedal. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance This maintenance section applies
to vehicles with a gasoline engine.
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
For diesel engine vehicles, see the Please read the information under
General Information maintenance schedule section in Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 the Duramax Diesel Supplement. the vehicle in good condition, see
Notice: Maintenance your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 recommended fluids, and vehicles that:
Recommended Fluids, lubricants are necessary to . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts keep this vehicle in good
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and working condition. Damage
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 caused by failure to follow
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement scheduled maintenance might
on page 9‑25.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 not be covered by the vehicle
. Are driven on reasonable road
warranty.
Maintenance Records As the vehicle owner, you are
surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-12 limits.
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. . Are driven off-road in the
We recommend having your recommended manner.
dealer perform these services. See Off-Road Driving on
Proper vehicle maintenance helps page 9‑7.
to keep the vehicle in good working . Use the recommended fuel.
condition, improves fuel economy, See Recommended Fuel on
and reduces vehicle emissions for page 9‑84.
better air quality.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work can
listed in Recommended Fluids Maintenance
and Lubricants on page 11‑8 and
be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑11. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter.
have the required know-how and See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
An Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
have a qualified technician do performance of the vehicle, it is When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
the work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation SOON message displays in the
Service Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed. Driver Information Center (DIC),
Tires should be rotated every service is required for the vehicle
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire as soon as possible, within the next
At your dealer, you can be Rotation on page 10‑73. 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
certain that you will receive the the best conditions, the engine oil
highest level of service available. life system might not indicate the
Your dealer has specially trained need for vehicle service for more
service technicians, uses genuine than a year. The engine oil and filter
replacement parts, as well as, must be changed at least once a
up‐to‐date tools and equipment year and the oil life system must
to ensure fast and accurate be reset. Your dealer has trained
diagnostics. service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is reset

. Windshield washer fluid level . Fluids visual leak check
accidentally, service the vehicle check. See Washer Fluid on (or every 12 months, whichever
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since page 10‑29. occurs first). A leak in any
the last service. Reset the oil life . Windshield wiper blade system must be repaired and
system whenever the oil is changed. inspection for wear, cracking, the fluid level checked.
See Engine Oil Life System on or contamination and windshield . Engine air cleaner filter
page 10‑11. and wiper blade cleaning, inspection. See Engine Air
if contaminated. See Exterior Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑19.
Every Engine Oil Change
Care on page 10‑108. Worn . Brake system inspection
. Change engine oil and or damaged wiper blade (or every 12 months, whichever
filter. Reset oil life system. replacement. See Wiper Blade occurs first).
See Engine Oil on page 10‑7 Replacement on page 10‑41.
and Engine Oil Life System on . For vehicles with Allison
. Tire inflation pressures Transmission® only: At the first
page 10‑11. An Emission Control
check. See Tire Pressure on engine oil change only, replace
Service.
page 10‑66. external transmission filter.
. Engine coolant level check. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire . Steering and suspension
See Engine Coolant on
Inspection on page 10‑73. inspection. Visual inspection
page 10‑22.
. Rotate tires if necessary. for damaged, loose, or missing
. Engine cooling system
See Tire Rotation on parts or signs of wear.
inspection. Visual inspection
page 10‑73.
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.

. Lubricate the front suspension, lubrication. See Recommended
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
steering linkage, and parking Fluids and Lubricants on shields inspection for loose or
brake cable guides. Control arm page 11‑8. More frequent damaged components.
ball joints on 2500/3500 series lubrication may be required . Vehicles with diesel engine
vehicles require lubrication but when the vehicle is exposed or GVWR above 4 536 kg
should not be lubricated unless to a corrosive environment. (10,000 lbs) only: Shields
their temperature is −12°C Applying silicone grease on inspection for damage or
(10°F) or higher, or they could weatherstrips with a clean cloth looseness. Adjust or replace
be damaged. Control arm ball makes them last longer, seal as required. This is a Noise
joints on 1500 series vehicles better, and not stick or squeak. Emission Control Service.
are maintenance‐free. Vehicles Applicable to vehicles sold in the
used under severe commercial
. Restraint system component
check. See Safety System United States and recommended
operating conditions require for vehicles sold in Canada.
lubrication on a regular basis Check on page 3‑27.
every 5 000 km/3,000 miles. . Fuel system inspection for
. Body hinges and latches, key damage or leaks.
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and tailgate hinges,
linkage, and handle pivot points
Additional Required Services Once a Month

. See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑40.
At the First 160 km/100 Miles,
. Tire inflation pressures
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and check. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑66. Mechanism Check on
10 000 km/6,000 Miles
page 10‑40.
. For vehicles with dual . Tire wear inspection. See Tire
wheels: Check dual wheel Inspection on page 10‑73.
. Accelerator pedal check for
nut torque. For proper .
damage, high effort, or binding.
Sunroof track and seal Replace if needed.
torque, see Capacities and inspection, if equipped.
Specifications on page 12‑2. See Sunroof (Extended Cab) on
. Underbody flushing service.
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles page 2‑21 or Sunroof (Crew . Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
Cab) on page 2‑22. Support Gas Strut Service:
. Rotate tires. Tires should Visually inspect gas strut,
be rotated every 12 000 km/ Once a Year
if equipped, for signs of wear,
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation . See Starter Switch Check on cracks, or other damage. Check
on page 10‑73. page 10‑39. the hold open ability of the gas
At Each Fuel Stop . See Automatic Transmission strut. Contact your dealer if
Shift Lock Control Function service is required.
. Engine oil level check.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑7. Check on page 10‑40.
. Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑22.
. Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑29.
First Engine Oil Change After First Engine Oil Change After
. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles case fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly
. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer . Engine air cleaner filter driven when frequently towing
case fluid change (extreme duty replacement. See Engine Air a trailer, or used for taxi, police,
service) for vehicles mainly Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑19. or delivery service. Check
driven off‐road in four‐wheel . Automatic transmission fluid vent hose at transfer case for
drive. Vehicles used for farming, change (severe service) for kinks and proper installation.
mining, forestry, Department of vehicles with Gross Vehicle Check to be sure vent hose is
Natural Resources (DNR), and Weight Rating (GVWR) over unobstructed, clear, and free of
snow plowing occupations meet 3 901 kg (8,600 lbs) or mainly debris. During any maintenance,
this definition. Check vent hose driven in heavy city traffic in hot if a power washer is used to
at transfer case for kinks and weather, in hilly or mountainous clean mud and dirt from the
proper installation. Check to be terrain, when frequently towing underbody, care should be taken
sure vent hose is unobstructed, a trailer, or used for taxi, to not directly spray the transfer
clear, and free of debris. During police, or delivery service. case output seals. High pressure
any maintenance, if a power See Automatic Transmission water can overcome the seals
washer is used to clean mud Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on and contaminate the transfer
and dirt from the underbody, page 10‑13 or Automatic case fluid. Contaminated fluid
care should be taken to not Transmission Fluid (6-Speed will decrease the life of the
directly spray the transfer case Transmission) on page 10‑16. transfer case and should be
output seals. High pressure replaced.
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.

. Evaporative control system First Engine Oil Change After and contaminate the transfer
inspection. Check all fuel and Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles case fluid. Contaminated fluid
vapor lines and hoses for proper will decrease the life of the
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
. Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service). transfer case and should be
Check that the purge valve, replaced.
if the vehicle has one, works See Automatic Transmission
properly. Replace as needed. Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on . Spark plug replacement and
An Emission Control Service. page 10‑13 or Automatic spark plug wires inspection.
The U.S. Environmental Transmission Fluid (6-Speed An Emission Control Service.
Protection Agency or the Transmission) on page 10‑16.
First Engine Oil Change After
California Air Resources Board . Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
has determined that the failure case fluid change (normal
to perform this maintenance service). Check vent hose at
. Engine cooling system drain,
item will not nullify the emission transfer case for kinks and flush, and refill (or every five
warranty or limit recall liability proper installation. Check to be years, whichever occurs first).
prior to the completion of sure vent hose is unobstructed, See Engine Coolant on
the vehicle's useful life. clear, and free of debris. During page 10‑22. An Emission
We, however, urge that all any maintenance, if a power Control Service.
recommended maintenance washer is used to clean mud . Engine drive belts inspection
services be performed at the and dirt from the underbody, for fraying, excessive cracks,
indicated intervals and the care should be taken to not or obvious damage (or every
maintenance be recorded. directly spray the transfer case 10 years, whichever occurs
output seals. High pressure first). Replace, if needed.
water can overcome the seals
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an
Allison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑7.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑22.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Floor Shift Linkage
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle (1500 Series) ‐ SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671,
Four‐Wheel Drive in Canada 89021672).
Front Axle (1500, 2500 HD, and SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,
3500 HD Series) in Canada 89021678).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,
Rear Axle
Transfer Case (Four‐Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or
One-Piece Propshaft Spline Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879,
(Two-Wheel Drive with 4‐Speed in Canada 10953511).
Auto. Trans.)
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Rear Driveline Center Spline
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Hinges
Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate
Hinge and Linkage, Folding Seats,
and Fuel Door Hinge
Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Latch Bolt, and Linkage in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287,
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C
Oil Filter
4.3L V6 25010792 PF47
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 12568387 41-101
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 12621258 41-110
Wiper Blades – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-6 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑8 for more information.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
4.3L V6 1500 Series 15.6 L 16.5 qt
4.8L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt
5.3L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt
6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 15.5 L 16.4 qt
6.2L V8 1500 Series 15.9 L 16.8 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box 98.4 L 26.0 gal
1500 Series Long Box 128.7 L 34.0 gal
2500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
3500 Series Chassis Cab 240.4 L 63.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped) 151.4 L 40.0 gal
12-4 Technical Data
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
Transmission Fluid - Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 4.7 L 5.0 qt
6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E 6.0 L 6.3 qt
6-Speed Transmission Allison 7.0 L 7.4 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6 (LU3) X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in)
4.8L V8 (L20) A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 0 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Iron Block) (LMG)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 3 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Aluminum Block) (LC9)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (LC8) B Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96) G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.2L V8 FlexFuel
2 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Aluminum Block) (L9H)
12-6 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the Duramax diesel supplement
information.
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-12 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Your satisfaction and goodwill
Procedure Reporting Safety Defects are important to the dealer and
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction to GMC. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by the dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Reimbursement Program Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 with a member of dealership
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 can be quickly resolved at that
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18 level. If the matter has already
Roadside Assistance Radio Frequency been reviewed with the sales,
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19 service, or parts manager, contact
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency the owner of the dealership or the
Appointments Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 general manager.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting GMC, remember 40 days. If you do not agree with
member of dealership management, that your concern will likely be the decision given in your case,
it appears your concern cannot resolved at a dealer's facility. you may reject it and proceed with
be resolved by the dealership That is why we suggest following any other venue for relief available
without further help, in the U.S., Step One first. to you.
call 1-800-462-8782. In Canada, STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto
call General Motors of Canada Both General Motors and the dealer Line Program using the toll-free
Customer Communication at are committed to making sure telephone number or write them
1-800-263-3777 (English) or you are completely satisfied with at the following address:
1-800-263-7854 (French). the new vehicle. However, if you BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the continue to remain unsatisfied after Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give following the procedure outlined in Bureaus, Inc.
your inquiry prompt attention. Have Steps One and Two, you can file 4200 Wilson Boulevard
the following information available with the Better Business Bureau Suite 800
to give the Customer Assistance (BBB) Auto Line® Program to Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: enforce your rights.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available out-of-court program administered
from the vehicle registration or by the Council of Better Business This program is available in
title, or the plate at the top left of Bureaus to settle automotive all 50 states and the District of
the instrument panel and visible disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
be required to resort to this informal
. Vehicle delivery date and dispute resolution program prior to limitations and/or discontinue
present mileage. filling out a court action, use of the its participation in this program.
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you eligibility in the Canadian Motor
do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or
procedure outlined in Steps One call the General Motors Customer
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre,
Limited wants you to be aware 1-800-263-3777 (English),
of its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
by an impartial third party arbiter, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
and may include an informal hearing See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
designed so that the entire dispute The inquiry should be accompanied
settlement process, from the time by the Vehicle Identification
you file your complaint to the final Number (VIN).
decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in
most jurisdictions because it is
informal, quick, and free of charge.
Customer Assistance Make sure that they have all

. Phone number
Procedure necessary information. They are . Model year
interested in your continual .
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are satisfaction. Brand
very important to your dealer and . Vehicle Identification
General Motors. STEP TWO
Number (VIN)
Normally, any problem with the If you are not satisfied, please . Mileage
transaction, sale, or usage of contact the general manager or the
the vehicle must be handled by dealership owner to ask for their . Delivery date
your dealer sales or service help. If they are not able to resolve . Description of the problem
departments. However, we your case, ask them to contact the
recognize that despite the good right people at General Motors for
. Dealership name
intentions of all parties involved, support, if needed. . Dealership address
sometimes a misunderstanding
STEP THREE See Customer Assistance Offices
may occur.
If your case is not resolved in a (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5
If you have a problem that has not or Customer Assistance Offices
reasonable amount of time by
been satisfactorily handled through (Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
your dealer, please call the
the normal means, we suggest the information.
General Motors Customer
following steps:
Assistance Center (CAC) and
STEP ONE provide the following information:
Explain your case to the dealer . Name
service agent, service manager, . Address
dealer sales agent, or sales
manager, depending on your case.
Customer Assistance Canada Mexico, Central America and

Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries
Customer Communication Centre, (Except Puerto Rico and
GMC encourages customers to call U.S. Virgin Islands)
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
the toll-free number for assistance.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico,
However, if a customer wishes to
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 S. de R.L. de C.V.
write or e-mail GMC, the letter
www.gmc.ca Customer Assistance Center
should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
United States 1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada
GMC Customer Assistance Center 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
P.O. Box 33172 Telephone Devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0801
Detroit, MI 48232-5172 Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801
1-800-268-6800
www.GMC.com
All Overseas Locations Customer Assistance
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)
1-800-462-8583 (For Text Please contact the local Offices (Mexico)
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) General Motors Business Unit. To contact the Customer Assistance
Roadside Assistance: Center (CAC), use the phone
1-800-462-8782 numbers listed in this section.
From Puerto Rico: Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
1-800-496-9992 (English) 20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 08:00 to 15:00 hours.
From U.S. Virgin Islands: All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
1-800-496-9994 Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: [email protected].

. GMC dealer locator for service
Mexico Customer Assistance for nationwide.
From Mexico City Text Telephone (TTY) . Exclusive privileges and offers.
5329-0812 Users (U.S. and Canada) . Recall notices for your specific
From Other Mexico Locations To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle.
hard of hearing, or speech impaired
01-800-466-0812 and who use Text Telephones
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment Services Earnings summaries.
United States and Canada
available at its Customer Assistance Other Helpful Links
1-866-466-8191 Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: GMC — www.gmc.com
Costa Rica
1-800-462-8583. TTY users in GMC Merchandise —
00-800-052-1005 Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. www.gmccollection.com
Guatemala Help Center — www.gmc.com/
Online Owner Center helpcenter
1-800-999-5252
GMC Owner Center (U.S.) . FAQ (Frequently Asked
Panama www.gmcownercenter.com Questions)
00-800-052-0001 Information and services . Contact Us
Dominican Republic customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
1-888-751-5301 place.
El Salvador . Digital owner manual, warranty
800-6273 information, and more.
. Storage for online service and
Honduras maintenance records.
800-0122-6101

. My Driveway: Access quick
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
links to parts and service
GM Mobility
My GM Canada is a estimates, check trade-in Reimbursement Program
password-protected section of values, or schedule a service (U.S. and Canada)
www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the
information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your
personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile.
tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your
Here are a few of the valuable profile and use tools and forms
tools and services you will have with greater ease.
access to:
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
. My Showroom: Find and save section within www.gm.ca. This program is available to
information on vehicles and qualified applicants for cost
current offers in your area. reimbursement of eligible
. My Dealers: Save details such aftermarket adaptive equipment
as address and phone number required for the vehicle, such as
for each of your preferred GM hand controls or a wheelchair/
dealers. scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also Calling for Assistance Coverage

has a Mobility Program. Call
When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
have the following information 5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),
for details. TTY users call
ready: whichever comes first.
1-800-263-3830.
. Your name, home address, and In the U.S., anyone driving the
Roadside Assistance home telephone number vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
Program (U.S. and . Telephone number of your
permission from the owner is not
Canada) location
covered.
. Location of the vehicle
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, Roadside Assistance is not a part of
call 1‐800‐462‐8782; (Text . Model, year, color, and license the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Telephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). plate number of the vehicle GMC and General Motors of
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, . Odometer reading, Vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to
call 1-800-268-6800. Identification Number (VIN), make any changes or discontinue
and delivery date of the vehicle the Roadside Assistance program
Service is available 24 hours a day, at any time without notification.
365 days a year. . Description of the problem
GMC and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right
to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Services Provided properly inflated. It is the owner's Services Not Included in

responsibility for the repair or Roadside Assistance
. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
replacement of the tire if it is not
Delivery of enough fuel for the . Impound towing caused by
covered by the warranty.
vehicle to get to the nearest violation of any laws.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
service station.
jump start a dead battery.
. Legal fines.
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed
. Mounting, dismounting,
unlock the vehicle if you are
maps of North America when or changing of snow tires,
locked out. A remote unlock
requested either with the chains, or other traction devices.
may be available if you have
OnStar®. For security reasons, most direct route or the most . Towing or services for vehicles
the driver must present scenic route. Additional travel driven on a non-public road or
identification before this information is also available. highway.
service is given. Allow three weeks for delivery.
Services Specific to
. Emergency Tow From a Public . Trip Interruption Benefits Canadian‐Purchased Vehicles
Road or Highway: Tow to the and Assistance: If your
nearest GMC dealer for warranty trip is interrupted due . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
service, or if the vehicle was in to a warranty failure, is approximately $5 Canadian.
a crash and cannot be driven. incidental expenses may Diesel fuel delivery may be
Assistance is also given when be reimbursed during the restricted. Propane and other
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, 5 years/(160 000 km) fuels are not provided through
mud, or snow. 100,000 miles Powertrain this service.
. warranty period. Items . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
Flat Tire Change: Service to
considered are hotel, meals, registration is required.
change a flat tire with the spare
and rental car.
tire. The spare tire, if equipped, . Trip Routing Service: Limit of
must be in good condition and six requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
250 kilometres from where Program (Mexico) Appointments
your trip was started to Roadside Assistance is available (U.S. and Canada)
qualify. General Motors of 24 hours a day, 365 days of
Canada Limited requires When the vehicle requires warranty
the year. service, contact the dealer and
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy For detailed information about request an appointment. By
of the repair orders. Once Roadside Assistance, please see scheduling a service appointment
authorization has been received, the brochure provided with your and advising the service consultant
the Roadside Assistance advisor new vehicle or visit our website of your transportation needs, the
will help to make arrangements at: www.gmc.com.mx. Navigate dealer can help minimize your
and explain how to receive the site and click on “Asistencia inconvenience.
payment. en el Camino.” E-mail If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
correspondence should be sent into the service department
. Alternative Service: If to: [email protected].
assistance cannot be provided immediately, keep driving it until
right away, the Roadside To contact Roadside Assistance by it can be scheduled for service,
Assistance advisor may phone, use the following numbers: unless, of course, the problem is
give permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call the
Mexico dealership, let them know this, and
emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to 01-800-466-0801 ask for instructions.
$100, after sending the original United States If the dealer requests you to bring
receipt to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8902 urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for Canada day as possible to allow for the
parts and labor for repairs not same day-repair.
covered by the warranty are 1-800-268-6800
the owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally
Canada) be completed while you wait. If the vehicle requires overnight
However, if you are unable warranty repairs, and public
To enhance your ownership to wait, GM helps to minimize transportation is used instead
experience, we and our participating inconvenience by providing several of the dealer's shuttle service,
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy transportation options. Depending the expense must be supported
Transportation, a customer support on the circumstances, the dealer by original receipts and can only
program for vehicles with the can offer one of the following: be up to the maximum amount
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty allowed by GM for shuttle service.
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service In addition, for U.S. customers,
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred should you arrange transportation
hybrid‐specific warranties in means of offering Courtesy through a friend or relative, limited
both the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable
Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your fuel expenses may be available.
options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption Claim amounts should reflect
reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes actual costs and be supported by
warranty repairs are required. one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service original receipts. See the dealer for
within reasonable time and distance information regarding the allowance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of the dealer's area. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
part of the New Vehicle Limited or other transportation costs.
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

The dealer may arrange to provide Information (U.S. and Canada)
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle If the vehicle is involved in a
service, may not be available at collision and it is damaged, have
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact the
for an overnight warranty repair. the damage repaired by a qualified
dealer for specific information technician using the proper
Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
Transportation arrangements parts. Poorly performed collision
receipts. This requires that you sign will be administered by appropriate
and complete a rental agreement repairs diminish the vehicle resale
dealer personnel. value, and safety performance can
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the be compromised in subsequent
Requirements vary and may include right to unilaterally modify, collisions.
minimum age requirements, change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and Collision Parts
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel to resolve all questions of claim Genuine GM Collision parts are new
usage charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and parts made with the same materials
responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its and construction methods as the
fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion. parts with which the vehicle was
usage beyond the completion of originally built. Genuine GM
the repair. Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
It may not be possible to provide a appearance, durability, and safety
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment As a result, these parts may fit Insuring The Vehicle
parts may also be used for repair. poorly, exhibit premature durability/
Protect your investment in the
These parts are typically removed corrosion problems, and may not
GM vehicle with comprehensive
from vehicles that were total losses perform properly in subsequent
and collision insurance coverage.
in prior crashes. In most cases, collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
There are significant differences
the parts being recycled are from covered by the GM New Vehicle
in the quality of coverage afforded
undamaged sections of the vehicle. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
by various insurance policy terms.
A recycled original equipment GM failure related to such parts is not
Many insurance policies provide
part may be an acceptable choice covered by that warranty.
reduced protection to the GM
to maintain the vehicle's originally
Repair Facility vehicle by limiting compensation
designed appearance and safety
for damage repairs by using
performance; however, the history of GM also recommends that you aftermarket collision parts. Some
these parts is not known. Such parts choose a collision repair facility that insurance companies will not
are not covered by the GM New meets your needs before you ever specify aftermarket collision parts.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any need collision repairs. The dealer When purchasing insurance, we
related failures are not covered by may have a collision repair center recommend that you ensure that
that warranty. with GM-trained technicians and the vehicle will be repaired with
Aftermarket collision parts are state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be GM original equipment collision
also available. These are made by able to recommend a collision parts. If such insurance coverage
companies other than GM and may repair center that has GM-trained is not available from your current
not have been tested for the vehicle. technicians and comparable insurance carrier, consider switching
equipment. to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed
there. Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered
matters have been taken care of.
number. by the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program Will You See After an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 Inflates? on page 3‑35. be obligated to have the vehicle
or Roadside Assistance Program repaired with Genuine GM parts,
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
a repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices information about the vehicle. For Credit Card Orders Only
as long as the cost stays within The Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Or write to:
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Booklet. P.O. Box 07130
Service Manuals Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Manuals have the $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Prices are subject to change
diagnosis and repair information shipping fees. without notice and without incurring
on the engines, transmission, axle, obligation. Allow ample time for
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner delivery.
steering, body, etc. Manual only.
All listed prices are quoted in
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins U.S. funds. Make checks payable
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and in U.S. funds.
Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada immediately, and notify
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to General Motors of Canada Limited.
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
a crash or could cause injury or write to: write to:
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 2780 Sheffield Road
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Transport Canada) in a situation like
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
this, please notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-GMC-8782 hitting a road obstacle, data that
information about the vehicle’s
(1-800-462-8782), or write: will assist in understanding how
performance and how it is driven.
GMC Customer Assistance Center For example, the vehicle uses a vehicle's systems performed.
P.O. Box 33172 computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record data
Detroit, MI 48232-5172 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 time, typically 30 seconds or less.
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
(French), or write: to record such data as:
if so equipped, to provide antilock
General Motors of Canada Limited braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
Customer Communication Centre, vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 data to help the dealer technician
1908 Colonel Sam Drive service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, . How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better law enforcement, that have the OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances special equipment, can read the
in which crashes and injuries occur. information if they have access to If the vehicle is equipped with
the vehicle or the EDR. an active OnStar system, that
Important: EDR data is recorded system may also record data in
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial GM will not access this data or crash or near crash‐like situations.
crash situation occurs; no data is share it with others except: with the The OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal consent of the vehicle owner or, provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal if the vehicle is leased, with the collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, consent of the lessee; in response in the OnStar glove box kit,
and crash location) is recorded. to an official request by police or at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such as similar government office; as part www.onstar.ca (Canada), or
law enforcement, could combine of GM's defense of litigation through
by pressing the Q button and
the EDR data with the type of the discovery process; or, as
personally identifying data required by law. Data that GM speaking to an advisor.
routinely acquired during a collects or receives may also be
crash investigation. used for GM research needs or may Navigation System
To read data recorded by an EDR, be made available to others for If the vehicle has a navigation
special equipment is required, and research purposes, where a need is system, use of the system may
access to the vehicle or the EDR is shown and the data is not tied to a result in the storage of destinations,
needed. In addition to the vehicle specific vehicle or vehicle owner. addresses, telephone numbers, and
manufacturer, other parties, such as other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) Statement
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
connection with conveniences rules and with Industry Canada
such as key fobs for remote door Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
locking/unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
personal information or link with interference.
any other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any
of these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2 NOTES
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake

What Will You See After System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-44
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-31 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
Add-On Electrical
Airbags Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Adding Equipment to the Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Adding a Snow Plow or
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46 Assistance Program,
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Adjustable Throttle and
On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-23 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Adjustments
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-19
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Airbag
Alarm System Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Antenna Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
How Does an Airbag
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Anti-Theft Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-46
Passenger Sensing
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13, 10-16
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-48 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
What Makes an Airbag
Shift Lock Control
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
i-2 INDEX
Auxiliary Brakes (cont.) C

Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
California
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Perchlorate Materials
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Center High-Mounted
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Capacities and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Voltage and Charging Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Carbon Monoxide
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-41 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-48
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Brake Pickup-Box Identification
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Pedal and Adjustable and Fender Marker
Cautions, Danger, and
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-27 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68 Stoplamps, and
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69 Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
INDEX i-3
Center High-Mounted Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Cleaning Courtesy Transportation
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Charging Climate Control Systems . . . 8-1, 8-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Check Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Ignition Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Text Telephone (TTY)
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-40 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Child Restraints Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12 Customer Information
Infants and Young Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Service Publications
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Lower Anchors and Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Customer Satisfaction
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-57 Coolant Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-66, 3-69, 3-78 Engine Temperature
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
i-4 INDEX
D Driving E
Characteristics and
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12 E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-91
Danger, Warnings, and Electrical Equipment,
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-17 Electrical System
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Daytime Running Engine Compartment
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-20
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-23
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuses and Circuit
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Instrument Panel Fuse
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Door Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Engine
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Driving for Better Fuel
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Check and Service Engine
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Dual Automatic Climate
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Driver Information Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Dual Tire
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Coolant Temperature
DVD
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Rear Seat Entertainment
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
INDEX i-5
Engine (cont.) F Fog Lamps

Cooling System Messages . . .5-44 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fan
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-34, 9-54
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-29
Features
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Overheated Protection Front Fog Lamps
Filter
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Front Seats
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-45 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-86
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
Engine Oil E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-87
Fluid
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Filling a Portable Fuel
Automatic
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90
Transmission . . . . . . . 10-13, 10-16
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-88
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-86
Four-Wheel Drive
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-17 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-85
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-31
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-3
i-6 INDEX
Fuel (cont.) Gauges H

Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Engine Coolant
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Requirements, California . . . . .9-85 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Fuel Economy Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-97 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuses Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Daytime Running
Engine Compartment Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Warning Lights and
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuses and Circuit Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 General Information
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Instrument Panel Fuse Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-90
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Heater
G Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Heating and Air
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4
Gasoline Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
INDEX i-7
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Infants and Young Children, L

High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-67 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-58
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-20 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Lamps
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-70 Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Roof
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
How to Wear Safety Belts
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-4
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 J Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
I Exterior Lamps Off
Idle System K Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-46 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Keyless Entry Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-25
Ignition Transmission Lock Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Pick-Up Box Identification
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 and Fender Marker . . . . . . . . 10-45
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
i-8 INDEX
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Lights (cont.) M

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Maintenance
LATCH System High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Replacing Parts After a Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Maintenance Schedule
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-19
Recommended Fluids and
Latch, Lower Anchors and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-30
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Lighting Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-25
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Locks
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Lights Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Messages
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Antilock Brake System Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-48
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Battery Voltage and
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-27 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-31
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Lower Anchors and
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Tethers for Children
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-44
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 (LATCH SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
INDEX i-9
Messages (cont.) N Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-49

Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Navigation
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Vehicle Data Recording
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Operation, Infotainment
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Object Detection System . . . . .5-46 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-47 Outlets
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-38
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Overheated Engine
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 O Protection
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Object Detection System Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Mirrors
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
P
Automatic Dimming Park
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Oil
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Parking
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Engine Oil Pressure
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Brake and P (Park)
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-40
Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-43
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
i-10 INDEX
Passenger Airbag Status Pregnancy, Using Safety Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-40 Privacy System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Perchlorate Materials Radio Frequency Rear Seat Entertainment
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Personalization Program Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-48
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11
Phone Proposition 65 Warning, Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-78
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Pickup Conversion to Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129 R Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Pickup-Box Identification Radio Frequency Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
and Fender Marker Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19 Recommended Fluids and
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Power Radios Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Records
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 Recreational Vehicle
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-103
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-40 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Reimbursement Program,
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
INDEX i-11
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Ride Control Systems Safety Defects Reporting
Replacement Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Roads General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Replacement Parts Roadside Assistance Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Roof Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-48 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-22 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Replacing LATCH System Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-6 Seats
Replacing Safety Belt Running the Vehicle While Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
System Parts After a Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Reporting Safety Defects S Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11
Restraints How to Wear Safety Belts Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Securing Child
Retained Accessory Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-66, 3-69, 3-78
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Security
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-28 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-26
i-12 INDEX
Service Signals, Turn and Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps

Accessories and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125 Storage Areas
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Specifications and Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-12 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Maintenance, General StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-30 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Publications Ordering Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21, 2-22
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Switches
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Starting the Vehicle Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Shift Lock Control Function Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 System
Check, Automatic Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Shifting Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
INDEX i-13
T Tires (cont.) Towing (cont.)

Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-95
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Trailer Sway
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-68 Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-124
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Trailer
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Terminology and Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . 9-124
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Uniform Tire Quality Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Wheel Alignment and Tire Transmission
Tires
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-82 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-13, 10-16
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
When It Is Time for New Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Transportation Program,
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Towing Truck-Camper Loading
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-91 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-112 Turn and Lane-Change
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-69
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-90 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . 10-103 Turn Signal
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
i-14 INDEX
U Vehicle Care Wheels

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Alignment and Tire
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-76
Vehicle Identification Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Uniform Tire Quality
Service Parts Identification Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-61
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 When It Is Time for New
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-56
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
V W Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Warning Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Vehicle Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Windshield
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Identification Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-41
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-51
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103

2011 GMC Sierra Owner PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 GMC Sierra Owner PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 GMC Sierra Owner PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart . : Fuel Gauge

In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E. Instrument Cluster on (Out of View). See Malfunction U. StabiliTrak® System on

V. Power Outlets on page 5‑10.

Instrument Panel (Premium Version)

Initial Drive Remote Keyless Press Q to lock all doors.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Door Locks

On vehicles with a power sliding

Seat Adjustment Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

To adjust the power lumbar support,

To adjust a power seatback,

Heated Seats Head Restraint Safety Belts

Sensing System for The passenger airbag status Mirror Adjustment

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑15 or Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

Throttle and Brake Pedal Interior Lighting Dome Lamp Override

Reading Lamps Exterior Lighting For vehicles first sold in Canada,

Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning)

A. Fan Control E. Outside Air

Climate Control System (With Heater Only)

A. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

The Range Selection Mode switch,

This transfer case shift lever is on

Vehicle Features 4: Press to switch the display

Storing Radio Stations Setting the Clock Satellite Radio

Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls

Navigation System Driver Information 3 : Press to display the

V : Press to set or reset Rear Vision Ultrasonic Parking Assist

Power Outlets Universal Remote System Sunroof

Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar®

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks See your dealer if a replacement

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

Remote Keyless Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start):

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors The rear access door must be Tailgate

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows